#1

 

Mark 1:1  AN INTRODUCTION TO MARK

 

Introduction:

 

          The text verse reads,   “The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God.”  This message will not attempt an exposition of the text verse.  Rather it will make an introduction to the whole book and to Mark, the writer of the book. 

 

I.  The title of the book

 

          A.  The title of the book was not written by Mark and is not a part of the inspired Scriptures.  (It was added by translators, editors and printers of the different versions of the Bible. 

             B.  Therefore, different versions of the Bible give different titles to this book. 

                      1.  The King James version calls it “The Gospel According To Saint Mark.”

                      2.  The Revised Standard version and the New English version calls it “The Gospel according To Mark.”

                      3.  The Phillips version calls it simply “The Gospel of Mark.”

          B.  Most people generally refer to the book by the shorter title, calling it “The Gospel of Mark” or simply  “Mark’s Gospel.”

                       1. Yet most who use these shorter forms understand that it is not the gospel of Mark.

                      1.  That is, it is not a gospel which was originated and produced by Mark.  (The gospel did not originate with Mark.)

                      2.  It was only recorded by him. 

                      3.  Thus, “The Gospel According to Mark” is a more accurate way of describing the book.        

          C.  The word, saint, as added by the King James translators, is a result of Roman Catholic influence upon the translators.  The translators were members of the Church of  England, which had split off from the Roman Catholic church.

                      1.  Never-the-less, it is an accurate description of Mark. 

                      2.  The word, saint, as used in Scripture refers to one who is separated from the world by being dedicated to the service of God.         

                      3.  Therefore, it rightly describes every saved person who is dedicated to God.

 

II.  The name of the writer,

 

          A.  The writer’s name which is most familiar to Christians today is “Mark,” but this was only a surname and was not the name given to him at birth.

          B.  His real name was “John,”  Acts 12:12.  (A Hebrew name.)

          C.  But most of his ministry was among Romans and, therefore, he took the name “Mark” which is a Roman name.

 

          D.  In Scripture he is sometimes called “John,’ sometimes “Mark,” sometimes “Marcus” and sometimes “John Mark.”

 

III.  Mark’s family background

 

          A.  His father is not named in Scripture, but he was a Jew.  (This is indicated by the Hebrew name given to him at birth.)

          B.  His mother was also Jewish as indicated by her Jewish name “Mary,” Acts 12:12.

          C.  He was a nephew to Barnabas, Col. 4:10. 

 

IV.  Mark not an apostle

 

          A.  He was not an apostle.  (Not one of the 12 nor a special apostle like Paul)

          B.  He was not an eye-witness to the life and ministry of Jesus.

          C.  Being in the home of a godly Christian woman he probably did witness the last days of Jesus at Jerusalem.  (The conflict between Jesus and the Jewish leaders, part of the trial and crucifixion of Jesus)           

          D.  It is not certain whether or not he saw Jesus after His resurrection.  (It depends on when he got saved.  Jesus appeared only to the saved and never to the unsaved.)

 

V.  Saved under the ministry of the Apostle Peter

 

          A.  There is strong indication in Scripture that Mark was saved under the ministry of the Apostle Peter. 

          B.  In the realm of possibility, it could have been before the crucifixion and resurrection of Jesus.

          C.  In all probability it was on the Day of Pentecost when Peter preached and about 3000 people were saved.

          D.  There was a strong bond between Mark and the Apostle Peter through the years.

                      1.  He traveled with Peter on a missionary trip. 

                      2.  He was said to have worked closely with Peter in Rome. 

 

VI.  One mark against him  (One mark against Mark)

 

          A.  Almost everything the Scriptures say about him was good; everything but one.

          B.  When Paul and Barnabas started out on their first missionary journey they took Mark with them; very soon Mark left them and returned back home, Acts 13:13.

                      1.  Barnabas wanted to take him with them on their second missionary journey, but Paul refuse.

                      2.  The dissension grew so strong between Paul and Barnabas about the matter that they went their separate ways.

          C.  In later years Mark proved to be a useful servant to the Lord.

                      1.  He went on a missionary trip with the Apostle Peter, I Peter 5:13.

                      2.  He also later became useful to Paul,

                      3.  While Paul was in prison at Rome he wrote to Timothy and asked him to bring Mark to Rome with him, II. Tim. 4:11.

                      4.  Mark did go to Rome and stayed there for the most of his ministry. 

                      5.  In the later years he is said to have gone to Alexandria , Egypt where he lived out his life and died. 

 

VII.  His qualifications to write the book

 

          A.  Although he was not an eyewitness to the greater part of the ministry of Jesus, yet he was well qualified to write about the life and ministry of Jesus. 

          B.  For one thing, he was very familiar with the facts. 

                      1.  He had all of the apostles in his home for an extended period of time.

                      2.  He had an especially close association with the Apostle Peter for many years.

                      3.  One historian says that  the Apostle Peter was with him when he wrote the book.

          C.  The thing that really qualified him was  that he wrote by inspiration of the Holy Spirit of God.    

 

VIII.  A comparison of his writing to that of Matthew

 

          A.  Matthew was a Jew and his ministry was largely to the Jews. 

                      1.  He wrote to convince the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah.

                      2.  He showed that Jesus had the family lineage that the Messiah must have.

                      3.  He quoted Old Testament scriptures about the Messiah to show that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Christ.

          B.  Mark also was a Jews, but his ministry was largely among the Gentiles.  (Among the Romans to be more specific)

                      1.  He said nothing about the birth of Jesus.

                      2.  He cited very few Old Testament Scriptures about the Messiah.

                      3.  What Mark did as to show miracle after miracle that Jesus did.

                      4.  By those miracles he showed beyond any reasonable shadow of doubt to any fair-minded person that Jesus is the Savior of sinful men.

                      5.  Matthew preached chiefly that Jesus is a Savior to the Jews, whereas             

                           Mark preached that Jesus is a Savior to all mankind.

 

Conclusion:

 

          This is a message that men today need to hear and believe.  The unsaved need to hear and believe so that they will be saved.  The saved need to hear and believe so that they will know more about the Lord and His will for their lives.  The saved person who will pattern his or her life after the life of Jesus as set forth in this book will be a better witness for Jesus. 

 

 

 

#2 

 

Mark 1:1  THE GOOD NEWS OF JESUS CHRIST, THE SON OF GOD

 

Introduction:

 

          The title of this book is not inspired, but verse 1 is.  It is an inspired caption.  It sets forth in a nutshell what the book is all about.  Mark wrote this book 30 or 40 years after Christ.  He had come to Rome with the facts about Jesus.  Soon the men with firsthand information about Jesus would all be dead.  Before they all died God moved upon Mark and others to put it in writing. 

 

I.  About the beginning of the gospel

 

          A.  Mark will tell in his book how the  New Testament era got started got started about 30 or 40 years before he wrote this book.

                      1.  Mark does not mean to imply that the plan of salvation had its origin at that point of time. 

                      2.  Rather he means that  the record of the ministry of Jesus begins at that point of time. 

          B.  While he will not record every detail of the life and ministry of Jesus, yet he will give a rather full account of it. 

II.  About the good news of Jesus

 

          A.  The word, gospel, means “good news” or “glad tidings.” 

                      1.  It was the kind of or word used to announce victory in time of war.

                      2.  It was a word which described only the very best of news. 

                      3.  It spoke of he kind of news that always brought joy and rejoicing.

          B.  This good news is about Jesus.

                      1.  The word, Jesus, is used as the name of a person, a man, a human being.

                      2.  Jesus is a human being.  (He had a human name and a human body.  He was human in every sense of the word.)

 

III.  About the Christ

 

          A.  The good news is that this man, Jesus, is the Christ.

          B.  The word, Christ, is not a name, but rather a special title given to a special man.

                      1.  The prophets of old had foretold the coming of the Christ. 

                      2.  The Romans, to whom Mark preached, knew little about the Old Testament prophecies about His coming.         

                      3.  But they could inquire of their Jewish friends who would gladly tell them about those prophecies.  

          C.  Mark says that Jesus is the Christ.

                      1.  Now even those Romans had heard about Jesus. 

                      2.  They may have heard that He was born in Bethlehem of Judah.

                      3.  But they almost surely had heard of the great miracles that He had done. 

 

 

 

#3 

 

Mark 1:2-5  JOHN THE BAPTIST, THE FIRST GOSPEL PREACHER

 

Introduction:

 

          In verse 1 Mark said that he would start at the beginning of the gospel.  In this text he tells of the first preacher of the gospel age, John The Baptist.  John was not the first man to ever present the gospel message.  In John 5:39 Jesus said that all of the Old Testament prophets testified of Him.  If they all testified of Him they all presented the gospel message.  But John was the first preacher to devote his ministry to the preaching of the gospel . 

 

I.  Prophecy in the Old Testament about John himself, V. 2

 

          A.  John’s life and ministry was no mere coincidence; the Old Testament prophets had foretold that there would be a forerunner who would prepare the way for the ministry of the Christ.

          B.  Mark identifies John the Baptist as being that forerunner whom the prophets had promised..

         

II.  A description of the ministry of John the Baptist, V. 3

 

          A.  Mark quotes John who quotes the Old Testament saying that the forerunner would be a voice crying in the wilderness. 

          B.  The particular wilderness in which John cried out was the Wilderness of Judea, just north of Jerusalem and on the west bank of the Jordan River.  

          C.  The word, cry, in this verse does not mean “weep.”

                      1.  John was not a weeping preacher. 

                      2.  John was a “good news” preacher. 

          D.  The word, cry, in this verse means “To cry aloud, to shout.”

                      1.  John was a shouting preacher. 

                      2.  He pretty well had to shout in order to preach to the large crowds which came to hear him. 

                      3.  John had no electronic speaker system; he did not need one; God gave him a built-n speaker system. 

                      4.  One writer described has said that John “Bellowed like a bull.”

 

III.  The purpose of John’s ministry, V. 2-3

 

          A.  In the olden days when an important person, such as a prince or king, would come to a city a crier would go before him to inform the people about his coming  and to get things ready for his arrival. 

                      1.  He would summons the people to come and hear the great one.

                      2.  He would enlist their aid in getting the way (the roadway)  repaired and ready for the great one.  (They would fill up the washes and, thus, make the roadway straight or level.  They would also remove the fallen rocks and trees from the roadbed.) 

                      3.  This is figurative language describing the work and ministry of John the Baptist as he prepared the way for the ministry of Jesus.

          B.  Literally John’s work could be summed up in 5 things:

                      1.  He announced that the ministry of the Christ, the Messiah,  was about to begin.

                      2.  He called upon the people to repent of their sins so get the hindrances out of their hearts which might cause them to be unreceptive to the Christ. 

                      3.  He would challenge them to trust in the coming Christ (Messiah).

                      4.  He would ask those who repented and trusted the Christ to be baptized. 

                      5.  He would urge those who were baptized to change their way of living and to live a godly life.

 

IV.  John’s baptism and his preaching of repentance, V. 4

 

          A.  Some interpret this verse to mean that John is saying that baptism brings repentance and salvation. 

                      1.  It does not mean that and John does not say that it means that.    

                      2.  The Greek word which here is translated “for” means “for” in the sense of “with reference to.” 

                      3.  It does not mean “for” in the sense of “in order to get.”

                      4.  In this verse it carries the idea of “because of.”

                      5.  John preached that if one would repent he would baptize him. 

                      6.  On one occasion John refused to baptize some and told them that if they would bring forth evidence that they had repented he would baptize them.  (If John had thought that baptism would produce repentance and remission of sins then he would have gladly baptized them.     

                      7.  He used the word “for” in the same sense that one says that he takes an aspirin for a headache.  (One does not take an aspirin in order to get a  headache.  He takes an aspirin because he has a headache.)

          B.  In other words, John preached that one who repents of his sin now has remission of his sin before baptism and is a proper candidate for baptism.

          C.  Yet John’s preaching of repentance was not a harsh condemning message.

                      1.  Rather it was a good news message. 

                      2.  He preached that the sinner could turn to God in repentance of sin and have his sins forgiven.

                      3.  He preached:  Repent and trust the Christ and the Christ will forgive your sins. 

                     

V.  An overwhelming response to John’s preaching, V. 5

 

          A.  At the first there must have been only a few people in his audience. 

          B.  But these began to tell others about John and soon vast numbers were coming out of the cities and villages to that wilderness area to hear John preach.

          C.  A great many of those who came to hear him repented of their sin, believed his message about the Christ and were baptized by him. 

 

VI.  John’s unusual clothing and unusual diet, V. 6

 

          A.  John did not dress in the unusual fashion nor eat the unusual diet just to attract attention.

                      1.  In the first place, it was not unusual at all for a common man to wear clothing made of camel’s hair.

                      2.  But it was unusual for one of John’s rank and stature to wear camel’s hair clothing.  (That would be about like the preacher of this day wearing overalls to the pulpit every  Sunday.)

          B.  John’s diet consisted of locusts and wild honey.  (These were readily available to him in the wilderness, but it did mean robbing the bee hives.)

          C.  It was nothing fancy, but the clothing was very protective in the wilderness and the food was very nourishing.   (And  probably tasty.  At least the honey was.)

 

VII.  The heart and core of John’s ministry, V. 7-8

 

          A.  John preached that one mightier than himself was coming, V. 7. 

          B.  John, himself, was a mighty man. 

                      1.  He must have been a mighty man physically.

                      2.  At least he had a mighty voice. 

                      3.  He was a mighty preacher.  (He spoke convincingly.)

                      4.  He had a mighty following.  (A huge following)

          C.  But John said that there would come one after him whose shoes’ latched he was  not worthy to unloose.

                      1.  It was the custom in that day that when one entered a home that a lowly servant, a slave,  would take his sandals off and wash his feet.

                      2.  John said that he was not worthy to be a lowly servant or slave who would remove the sandals from the feet of Jesus. 

          D.  John was mighty, but Jesus was and is mightier.

                      1.  Jesus is the Mighty One whose coming the crier would announce. (John was only the crier who announced His coming.)

                      2.  John could preach repentance of sin and, therefore, the forgiveness of sin, but Jesus, the Mightier One, can forgive sin.  (Jesus can save the soul and, therefore, save one from the penalty of his sin.)

                      3.  John could baptize with water, but Jesus could baptize with (or in) the Holy Spirit.  (And He did.  On Pentecost following His resurrection He baptized the church in the Holy Spirit.  He never baptized any single individual in the Holy Spirit, but He did baptize the church in the Holy Spirit.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          If John were here to preach to you today he would preach essentially the same  things that he preached back then:

          1.  He would preach that Jesus is the Christ, the Savior of men.

          2.  He would call on every person to repent of his sins.  (He would call on you personally to repent of your sins.)

          3.  He would urge you to trust Jesus Christ to be your Savior.

          4.  After you are saved he would urge you to be baptized. 

          5.  He would call upon all who are saved to live right. 

          Since John is not here, that is what I call upon you to do.  I call upon you to believe that Jesus is the Christ.  I call upon you to repent of your sin.  I call upon you to trust Jesus to forgive your sins and to save your soul.  I call upon you who do trust Jesus for salvation to present yourself to a New Testament church for baptism and church membership.  I call upon each one of you who is saved to live a godly life.   

           

 

#4 

 

Mark 1:9-11  BAPTISM, THE FIRST ACT IN THE PUBLIC MINISTRY  OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text Jesus is about 30 years old and it is time for Him to launch out into His career as a preacher.  He must leave His carpentry work behind and begin His ministry. 

 

I.  What should Jesus do to get started?

 

          A.  How should He go about starting His career as a preacher?

          B.  Should He seek out some very sick person and heal that person?

                      1.  Or should he find a blind person and give sight to the blind?

                      2.  Or should he find a lame man and make Him to walk?

                      3.  Or should He find a funeral in progress and restore life to the corpse?

                      4.  Surely He was able to do such miraculous things and any one of these things would  gain Him a lot of attention and attract a lot of followers.

 

          C.  Should He go into the synagogue and make a great speech?  (With His great  knowledge and wisdom He could surely attract some followers.)

          D.  Or should He seek out some of the leaders of the Pharisees and engage in debate with them?  (He would surely attract a lot of attention that way and would gain a following.)

 

II.  But what did He do?

 

          A.  He got up and left Nazareth.  (A prophet is not without honor except in his own country.)

          B.  He started walking down to Judea where John the Baptist was preaching and baptizing, V. 9.

          C.  Let us imagine that we stop Him and ask Him what He is doing.

                      1.  “Sir, what are you doing?” 

                      2.  His answer:  “I about to do the first act of my public ministry.”

                      3.  “Do you mean that by walking along this public road you are performing the first act of your public ministry?”

                      4.  Answer:  “Oh, no.  I am going to Judea to be baptized.”

                      5.  “But that is 60 miles away.  Could you not be baptized closer?”

                      6.  Answer:  “Yes, but John is the only person at this time who has authority from heaven to baptize.”  (In that day there was no New Testament church in existence anywhere and John was the only person in the whole world with authority from God to perform a baptism. Even in this day not just anyone and not just any organization has authority from God to perform a baptism.  Only a New Testament church can Scripturally baptize.)  

          D.  Jesus spent about 3 or 4 days walking to the place where John the Baptist was baptizing in the Jordan River to get baptized by one who had heaven’s authority to baptize.

 

III.  What happened when Jesus got to John?

 

          A.  Jesus came to John and asked John to baptize Him.   

          B.  There is one noticeable difference between Jesus and the others who came to John for baptism.

                      1.  Others came to John repenting of their sin.

                      2.  Jesus being baptized did not mean that He had repented of sin;  He had never committed any sin. 

          C.  Mark does not mention it, but at first John refused to baptize Jesus. 

                      1.  It was not because John thought there was some fault in Jesus. 

                      2.  To the contrary; John felt unworthy of baptizing Jesus.

                      3.  But after some persuasion from Jesus, John consented to baptize Him.

          D.  John led Jesus down the embankment and into the River Jordan.  (When he got Jesus out about waist deep in the water he baptized Him.  He put Jesus down into the water so that Jesus was completely covered by the water.  He immersed Jesus in water.)

          E.  Somebody might ask:  “How do you know that John immersed Him?  The Bible just says that John baptized Him and does not tell how he baptized Him.” 

                      1.  Oh, yes it does.  The Greek word that here is transliterated “ baptized” always means “to dip, plunge or immerse.” 

                      2.  Thus, the Bible says that John dipped, plunged or immersed Jesus in the River Jordan.

                      3.  Also, the Greek word which here is translated “in” means “into.”

          F.  After putting Jesus down under the surface of the water John raised Him up so that His upper body stood out of the water, V. 10. 

                      1.  Then is when it happened:  What looked somewhat like a dove came down out of the heavens and lit on Jesus.  (Yet it was not a dove.  Mark said that it was the Holy Spirit of God.  The Holy Spirit came down upon Jesus and by His presence sanctioned or endorsed the ministry of Jesus, V.10.)  .

                      2.  Another thing that happened:  A voice came from heaven saying that Jesus is the Son of God.  Thus, God the Father spoke from heaven and sanctioned the ministry of Jesus, V. 11

                      3.  Some have expressed doubt that anyone other than John saw the dove-like appearance of the Holy Spirit and heard the voice of God the Father proclaim that Jesus is His Son and that may be right.  We cannot be certain because the Bible does not say.  But even if nobody else saw and heard but John, yet the fact is that John saw and he heard God the Father proclaim Jesus to be His Son and he bore record that Jesus is the Son of God, John 1:34.

                      4. Thus, the baptism of Jesus was used of God to identify Jesus to Israel                                         and to the world that Jesus is the Son of God and that both the Holy                       Spirit and God the Father placed their stamp of approval upon His                      ministry.

 

IV.  How does one go about launching a career as a Christian?

 

          A.  Just as God the Father had it planned for Jesus to begin His career with the act of  baptism, even so it is the plan of Gold that the Christian should begin his Christian life in the same way.

          B.  Getting baptized did not make Jesus the Son of God;  He was already the Son of God before He was baptized.  (Baptism merely identified Him as the Son of God.)

          C.  Even so it is with the individual today. 

                      1.  Getting baptized is not what makes one a child of Gold, John 1:12; I John 5:1; Acts 16:31.  (One should trust Jesus for salvation and be a child of God before he presents himself to a church for baptism. 

                      2.  Yet baptism is important in living the Christian life.  (Getting baptized helps to identify one to others as a child of God.)

 

Conclusion:

 

                      There are three questions which we all face:

          1.  Are you saved?  Are you a child of God?  If not you can be.  You can become a child of God by repenting of your sin and trusting Jesus Christ for salvation.

          2.  If you are saved, have you been Scripturally baptized?  I would like to be baptized like Jesus was baptized.  Wouldn’t you?  (If you do not have Scriptural baptism you can get it.}

          3.  Are you living for the Lord as He would have you to live?  (If not you can start right now.)

 

 

 

#5 

 

Mark 1:12-13  JESUS TEMPTED OF SATAN

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had gone to the wilderness of Judea and had been baptized by John the Baptist in the River Jordan.  In this text He goes into another wilderness and is tempted by Satan. 

 

I.  An exposition of the text

 

          A.  Not the word “immediately” in V. 12. 

                      1.  “Immediately” or “straightway” is typical of the writing of Mark.

                      2.  They have become the trademark of Mark. 

                      3.  Note:  “Straightway” in V. 10; “immediately” in V. 12; “straightway” in V. 18, 20 and 21;  “immediately” in V. 28. 

          B.  The Spirit in V. 12 is the Holy Spirit. 

                      1.  The Holy Spirit had come upon Jesus at His baptism like a dove.

                      2.  From that point of time the Holy Spirit would abide on Jesus to lead and empower Him .  {Although Jesus is Deity God He is also man and as a man He does not rely upon His own Deity power and knowledge, but to depend on God the Father to lead and empower Him through the presence of the Holy Spirit.)

          C.  Mark said that the Spirit “driveth” Jesus into the wilderness. 

                      1.  Mark used the word “driveth” whereas both Matthew and Luke used the word “lead.”

                      2.  Thus, Mark does not intend to say that the Holy Spirit forced Jesus to go to the wilderness against His will.

                      3.  Rather, there was such a strong pull leading Him to go into the wilderness that only by a direct  act of rebellion could He refuse to go.

                      4.  Jesus, of course, did not refuse.  (It was His most earnest desire to do the will of God the Father in all things and so He willing followed the leadership of the Holy Spirit and went into the wilderness in submission to the will of the Father.)

          D.  To what wilderness did He go?  (Mark does not say and neither do the other gospel writers.  (But it was not likely so barren that it had no vegetation or animals.) 

          E.  There Jesus was tempted for 40 days, V. 13. 

                      1.  Although not mentioned by Mark, He had no food during that 40 day period.  (This is in contrast to John the Baptist who had a good supply of food in the wilderness where he was.)

                      2.  Also not mentioned by Mark --- there were three special temptations which came at the close of the 40 days: 

                                  a.  To turn stones into bread, which He was perfectly capable of doing.  (Or to bring down manna from heaven which He was also capable of doing.)     

                                  b.  To jump off the pinnacle of the temple at Jerusalem, which would certainly impress all who saw and gain a huge following.

                                  c.  To bow down to Satan who promised to give Him the kingdoms of the world.  (Satan offered to make Him ruler of the kingdoms of the world without Him having to suffer on the cross.  He could bypass the cross.)

          F.  Mark does tell us that wild beasts were present, V. 13   (They may have stalked        all around Jesus in a threatening way, but apparently they did not attack Him..)

          G..  Mark said that the angels of God ministered to Him there, V. 13.

                      1.  The angels of God must have protected Him and prevented the animals from attacking Him. 

                      2.  They did not give Him food during the 40 days, but they did once 40 days ended and the temptations by Satan were over. 

 

II.  A comparison with the temptation of Adam

 

          A.  Satan, in the body of a serpent, attacked Adam.

                      1.  The serpent did not attack Adam by sinking his fangs into Adam, but by the power of temptation. 

                      2.  By means of temptation Satan sank the venom of sin into Adam. 

                      3.  Through Adam he sank the venom of sin into all of us.

          B.  Then in due time God sent the Second Adam (Christ) into the world.

                      1.  In our text He sent Him into the wilderness.

                      2.  There in the wilderness for forty days that Old Serpent, the Devil, tempted Him.

                      3.  At the end of the 40 days that Old Serpent tempted The Second Adam with three special temptations.

                      4.  Jesus was the victor;  He did not yield to the temptation; He did not sin. 

                      5.  At His weakest, He was able to overcome Satan at his mightiest. 

                      6.  If Jesus had failed all mankind would burn in the fires of hell. 

                      7.  Bit since Jesus was the victor, all mankind has an opportunity to be saved.

                      8.  Because Jesus was the victor the saved person has One who is able to help when he is tempted. 

 

Conclusion:

 

1.  Jesus had made provision for all to be saved, but you will have to make the decision to   

     trust in Him to save your soul. 

2.  Jesus has made it possible for the saved to overcome sin and to live a godly life, but

     only you can make the decision that you will seek help from Jesus and life a godly life.   

 

 

 

#6

 

Mark 1:14-15  JESUS, THE GREATEST GOSPEL PREACHER

 

Introduction:

 

          John the Baptist was the first gospel preacher and he was a great preacher.  Yet John said that there would come one after him who would be greater than him.  That one is Jesus.  Jesus was not only a  greater preacher than John.  Jesus is the greatest of all preachers.

 

I.  Events that had already transpired, V. 14

 

          A.  Jesus had already gone into the wilderness of Judea and had already been baptized by John the Baptist.

          B.  He had already gone into some wilderness to be tempted by Satan. 

          C.  He had already engaged in a brief ministry in Judea, but Mark does not mention that.

          D.  He had already returned to Nazareth, but Mark does not mention that either.

          E.  He had already performed His first miracle at Cana of Galilee, but neither does Mark mention that.

 

II.  The imprisonment of John the Baptist, V. 14

 

          A.  Mark does mention the arrest and imprisonment of John.

                      1.  Herod the Tetrarch of Galilee had stolen his brother’s wife and John had denounced this as adultery.

                      2.  Even though John as not in Galilee, Herod had him arrested and imprisoned. 

          B.  Herod’s motive for arresting John was retaliation against John for calling him what he knew that he was --- an adulterer.

          C.  Satan’s motive was to stop the preaching of the gospel of Jesus Christ. 

                      1.  From the very beginning of the gospel age Satan was opposed to the gospel. 

                      2.  He does not want Jesus to be praised. 

                      3.  He does not want God the Father to be honored by the preaching of Jesus.

                      4.  He does not want the unsaved to hear the gospel and be saved. 

          D.  When the Devil succeeded in stopping the preaching of John he must have been well pleased with himself.

 

III.  The rising of an even greater preacher, V. 14

         

          A.  Whatever victory Satan had in stopping the preaching of John was short lived because Jesus started His preaching.

          B.  The Devil stopped a great preacher, but an even greater preacher took his place.  (The very Son of God)         

          C.  So it is today:  The Devil tries to stop the preaching of the gospel, but the preaching of the gospel goes on.

                      1.  The Devil may get a preacher fired. 

                      2.  He may cause gossip and completely ruin the ministry of a good preacher. 

                      3.  He may break up the home of a good preacher and virtually shut down his ministry. 

                      4.  He may tempt a good preacher to do wrong and, thus,  ruin his own ministry. 

                      5.  He may manage to set a good preacher on the shelf so that he has little or no opportunity to preach.

          D.  But he cannot stop the preaching of the gospel because for every preacher who stops two or three take his place   (And sometimes, the new preacher turns out to be an even greater preacher than the former one.)

          E.  Satan may even close the doors of a whole nation to the public preaching of the gospel, but when he does the gospel is preached privately and is often even more effective. 

          F.  Right today there is a whole network of organizations at work in the world trying to stop the preaching of the gospel and its related truths, but he will never be able to stop it.

 

IV.  The gospel of the kingdom of God, V. 14-15

 

          A.  The gospel of the kingdom of God means  --- for one thing --- that a King would be coming from God to rule over man.  (He would be a righteous King. He would be a Redeemer, a Savior.)

          B.  John the Baptist preached that the kingdom was near and that the King would follow his own ministry.

          C.  Jesus preached that the time for the arrival of the kingdom was at hand and that the King had already come.  (He “...is at hand...” Hence, He is present, V. 15.)

          D.  The very clear implication was that Jesus was saying that He, Himself, is that promised King.  (And He is!)

 

V.  A little more about the Kingdom of God

 

          A.  One day soon Jesus will return to earth and set up His throne on earth to rule for 1000 years.   

          B.  Those who are saved will rule and reign with Jesus,  Rev. 20:4.

          C.  Those who are saved will never enter into the fires of hell, Rev. 20:6. 

          D.  The good news is that you can join up now to be a part of that kingdom. 

                      1.  But you do not join by living good and doing right. 

                      2.  You do not join by keeping the Mosaic Law, Gal. 3:11.

                      3.  You do not join by joining a church or by being baptized. 

                      4.  You can join by repenting of your sins and believing the gospel, V. 15

                            (Trust Jesus Christ to save your soul.)

                     

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Would you like to be a part of God’s kingdom?

          2.  Are you aware that you are an unworthy sinner in the sight of God?

          3.  Are you aware that Jesus can save you from your sin and make you worthy in God’s sight?

          4.  Would you call on Jesus right now and ask Him to save your soul?

          5.  If you are already saved, are you willing to live your life in service to your King?

         

 

 

#7

 

Mark 1:16-20  JESUS CALLING FOR FISHERS OF MEN

 

Introduction:

 

          Satan had been successful in silencing John the Baptist, but a greater preacher than John came on the scene --- the greatest, Jesus.  In this text Jesus calls four men to assist Him. 

 

I.  Jesus walking along the seashore

 

          A.  Jesus is seen walking by the Sea of Galilee, V. 16a

                      1.  This sea is called by 4 different names in Scripture.  (The Sea of                                        Chennireth, in the Old Testament; the Lake of Gennesareth, Luke 5:1;                           The Sea of Tibereas, John 6:1 & John 21:1; The Sea of Galilee, the                    most familiar name)

                      2.  Mark does not give the location, but other gospel writers identify the                      city of Capernaum as the place. 

          B.  Jesus was not out for a stroll for pleasure, relaxation or exercise.  (Not out to             enjoy the beauty of the scenery nor to entertain Himself by watching the                             fishermen)

          C.  He knew where He was going, who He would see and what He would do.                       (There were four young fishermen whom He would see.)

 

II.  The four young fishermen

 

          A.  These fishermen had earlier gone down to Judea to hear John the Baptist                             preach.

                      1.  They had heard John preach about repentance and faith in the coming                            Christ.

                      2.  They had believed John, repented of their sin,  trusted in the Christ as

                           Savior and had been baptized by John in the River Jordan, Acts                                        1:21-22.

                      3.  They must have repeatedly gone back to hear John preach about the                         Christ. 

                      4.  All of this was before they personally met Jesus and before they knew                              that He is the Christ.

          B.  On one of those trips back to Judea to hear John at least Andrew and Peter met             Jesus..

                      1.  Andrew heard John identify Jesus as the Christ, John 1:35-37.

                      2.  Andrew then went and got his brother, Simon Peter, brought him to                        Jesus and identified Jesus to Peter as the Christ, John 1:40-42:. 

                      3.  So by the time involved in this text both Peter and Andrew knew that                     Jesus is the Christ. 

          C.  If James and John had ever personally met Jesus there is no mention of it in                      Scripture. 

                      1.  But, like Peter and Andrew, under the ministry of John the Baptist they                     had repented of their sin, trusted in the Christ and had been baptized.                         Acts 1:21-22. 

                      2.  Yet even if they had never seen Jesus, by this time they already knew                               that Jesus is the Christ.

                      3.  They were partners in the fishing business with Peter and Andrew and                     surely Peter and Andrew would have told them that Jesus is the                             Christ. 

          D.  These four young men were busy in their trade as fishermen when Jesus came       walking along the seashore where they were working.  (They apparently had                             not known that Jesus was anywhere nearby.)

 

III.  The call issued by Jesus

 

          A.  He came first to Peter and Andrew, V. 16b. 

                      1.  They were not fishing just for the sport of it; they were fishing for their                     livelihood.

                      2.  They were not using rods and reels, nor hook and line, but nets.  (They                              could catch a lot more fish that way.)

          B.  Jesus called for them to follow Him and become fishers of men, V. 17.

                      1.  This was a call to church membership.  (They were to be followers of                        Jesus, members of His flock)

                      2.  It was also a call to preach the gospel. 

          C.  Immediately they left their nets and followed Jesus, V. 18.

                      1.  One is made to wonder if they even drug their nets out of the water.                             (Verse 18 says that they had cast the nets out into the water.)

                      2.  If they did pull them out of  the water they must have dropped them and                     left them right there on  the seashore and followed Jesus.

          D.  Jesus then called James and John, V. 19. 

                      1.  It appears that they were using the same boat which Peter and Andrew                           were using. 

                      2.  However, whereas Peter and Andrew had been out of the boat casting                            their nets when Jesus approached them, James and John were in the                                  boat mending their nets when Jesus approached them. 

                      3.  Jesus, likewise, called for James and John to leave their nets,                                      follow Him and become fishers of men. 

          E.  Like Peter and Andrew, they immediately left their nets and followed Jesus,                              V. 20.  (They, too, became members of the flock of Jesus and fishers of men.)

          F.  Mark was careful to tell us that they did not leave their father in a jam; he had          hired servants to help him, V. 20b.  

 

IV.  Some things to observe

 

          A.  Jesus, at this point has a church. 

                      1.  The Greek word which is translated “church” in Scripture means “A                       called out assembly.”

                      2.  Jesus at this point had a called out assembly.  (He had Peter and                                        Andrew, James and John)

                      3.  They were believers in Jesus Christ.  (They were already saved. under                              the preaching of John the Baptist)

                      4.  They were already baptized.  (Baptized by John the Baptist)

                      5.  They agreed to follow Jesus and do the work which He assigned.

                      6.  Therefore, He had a called-out assembly of Scripturally baptized                           believers who were covenanted together to carry out the work of the                      Lord.

          B.  Jesus not only had a church, but He had four preachers, four fishers of men. 

                      1.  Since Jesus Christ did attempt to do the work of the church alone                            then it would be extremely unwise for anyone else to attempt to do it all                       alone.

                      2.  It should come as no surprise that pastors and other church leaders                                        must call on others to help. 

          C.  The Lord does call men to preach.

                      1.  Preaching is not a profession which a man may choose; it is a calling                             from God.. 

                      2.  The Lord calls certain men to preach and all whom He calls should                             surrender to that call.

                      3.  One who is not called of God to preach should stay out of the ministry. 

          D.  Yet there are two things which Jesus called upon those four preachers to do                         which He calls upon every Christian should do.

                      1.  “Follow me:”  Every Christian should follow Jesus.  (Follow Him in                             baptism and church membership; follow Him in godly living;  follow His                         teachings.)

                      2.  Become fishers of men:  Every Christian should become a fisher of men.                               (If we fail to fish for fish the fish are no worse off, but if we fail to fish                        for men, they will spend eternity in hell.) 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  I call upon each of you who is saved to follow Jesus.

          2.  I call upon each of you who is saved to fish for men. 

          3.  I call each one of you who is saved and who is in need of baptism and church                                         membership to come. 

          4.  I call upon each one of you who is saved and baptized and in need of a church                 home to come and unite with this church.

          5.  I call upon each one of you who is unsaved to repent of your sins and to trust in                             Jesus Christ to save your soul.

 

 

 

#8

 

Mark 1:21-28  JESUS, A MAN WITH HEAVEN’S AUTHORITY

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text we saw Jesus walk by the Sea of Galilee and call four fishermen to become fishers of men.  In this text we see Him go into the synagogue and demonstrate His authority as a teacher and His authority over demon spirits. 

 

I.  Jesus demonstrating His authority as a teacher of God’s word, V. 21-22

 

          A.  Jesus took His new disciples and entered the synagogue, V. 21.

                      1.  The synagogue was the house of worship much like church services                            today.     (They had singing of hymns, prayers, the reading of God’s                          word as recorded in the Old Testament and an explanation of God’s                    word which had been read.)

                      2.  Any adult Israelite male could discuss the Scriptures. 

                      3.  Jesus had attended such services all of His life and would continue to do                   so in the course of His ministry. 

                      4.  He set a worthy example for Christians to follow in their church                                        attendance. 

          B.  For His first time in the synagogue services Jesus arose to offer an explanation           of Scripture.

                      1.  This was His first time to teach publicly from the Scriptures. 

                      2.  Mark does not tell us what Scripture was read nor what He said.

          C.  What Mark does tell us is that the people were astonished, V. 22. 

                      1.  Mark does not say that they were astonished at His great oratory                            ability, although He could have astounded them with His ability if He                            had chosen to do so.

                      2.  They were not astonished that He had risen to speak for they were                        accustomed to various men rising to speak.   

                      3.  They were astonished at the authority with which He spoke.  (He spoke                             clearly, simply, in easily understood statements and what He said was so                     obviously right!)                     

                      4.  Yet what He taught them was in sharp contrast to what the scribes and                     Pharisees had taught.  (The scribes had long been accepted as the voice                         of authority when speaking about the word of God or about any                                             religious matter.)

                      5.  But Jesus spoke with such great authority that the people of the                                        congregation were spellbound with amazement. 

 

II.  Jesus demonstrating His authority over demon spirits, V. 23-28

 

          A.  The teaching of Jesus was not well received by all. 

                      1.  One man in the congregation cried out against it, V. 23-24. 

                      2.  This man was possessed by an unclean spirit, a demon spirit. 

                      3.  The voice was the voice of the man, but the words were of the demon                            spirit which dwelt within the man.

                      4.  The attitude of the demon was:  “Let us alone!”  (That is the attitude                             that the Devil would like all men to have.  He wants to carry on his evil                            work without interference from anyone.)

                      5.  Note the pronoun “us.”  (There was more than one demon in the man.)

                      6.  They feared Jesus.  (They feared that He would cast them out of the                              man and send them into the place of torment.)

          B.  Jesus rebuked the spirit and ordered him along with the others to come out of                  the man,  V. 25.

                      1.  Demon spirits have no business bothering and afflicting man.  (Man is                           God’s creation.)

                      2.  Neither does Satan, himself, have any business bothering and afflicting                          any man without special permission from God.  (Man is God’s                                         creation.)

                      3.  They do afflict men, of course, but they have no inherent right to do so. 

          C.  The unclean spirit did as much damage as he could before leaving the man,

                V. 26;. 

                      1.  He threw the man into some kind of convulsion before he left. 

                      2.  So it is with Satan, himself.  (He knows that he has but a short time on                            earth and so he does as much damage as he can while he is here.)

          D.  The people now had a second reason to be astonished. 

                      1.  They were already astonished at the authority with which Jesus had                        taught the word of God. 

                      2.  They were now astonished that He exercised authority over demon                     spirits, V. 27-28. 

 

III.  The thing that excites me

 

          A.  It is not just His authority to teach and His authority to command demons that         excites me.

          B.  It is His ability and authority to speak to the lost sinner and say:  “Trust me and         I will save your soul.  Trust me and I will keep you out of the fires of hell.                             Trust me and I will take you to heaven.”

                      1.  Now that astounds me and excites me!

                      2.  I was one of the sinners who were headed for hell;  I did trust Him and                    He saved me!

                      3.  I would like for every sinner in this world to hear and believe the good                               news:  Jesus saves!

                      4.  When I preach I have no desire to rip people up one side and down the                       other because of their sin.  I want them all to know that Jesus loves                    them in spite of their sin and that He will save them from their sin if                             they will call on Him and trust Him.      

 

Conclusion:

 

          When Jesus called for the demon spirit to come out of the man that demon had no choice.  He had to come out.  Today you have a choice.  I am going to call upon every unsaved person to trust Jesus and be saved, but if you are going to be saved you must choose to place your faith in Jesus and trust Him to save you. 

          I am also going to call upon every saved person to serve the Lord, but if you are going to serve Him as you should, you must make the choice to do so. 

 

 

#9

 

Mark 1:29-34  BRINGING LOVED ONES AND FRIENDS TO JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text we see the people of Capernaum bringing their loved ones and friends to Jesus Christ. 

 

I.  The impact which Jesus made on Capernaum in last the previous text

 

          A.  Jesus and His four disciples (Peter and Andrew,  James and John) had gone                   into the worship services at the local synagogue. 

          B.  There Jesus had astounded the people by His teaching of the word of God.

                      1.  It had not been by His skill in delivery of the message that had              astounded them, but by the content of His message and by the authority                   with which He spoke.

                      2.  Maybe today we put too much emphasis upon a preacher’s delivery and                     not enough emphasis on the content of his message. 

          C.  Furthermore, Jesus had astonished the people by casting the demon spirit out               of a man.

 

II.  An even greater impact made by the healing of Simon Peter’s mother-in-law

 

          A.  After the service at the synagogue Simon Peter and Andrew invite Jesus, along          with James and John to their home, V. 29.

          B.  Jesus is informed that Simon Peter’s mother-in-law is sick of a fever, V. 30. 

                      1.  Now some folks are going to be surprised to learn that Simon Peter                   had a mother-in-law. 

                      2.  Do you suppose that Jesus was unaware that she was sick?  (Certainly                         not.  He already knew, but they did not know that He already knew.)

          C.  By telling Jesus they set a good example for us all. 

                      1.  When we have sickness in our family, we should tell Jesus.

                      2.  You will never find Jesus to be uncaring about any problem which you                     bring to Him.  (The hymn writer has said, “Tell it to Jesus.  Tell it to                           Jesus.  He is a Friend that’s well known.  There’s no other such a friend                          or brother.”

          D.  Jesus took Simon Peter’s mother-in-law by the hand and healed her, V. 31.

                      1.  The healing was instantaneous.

                      2.  The healing was complete.  (She arose and served a  meal to Jesus and                    His disciples.  One cannot demonstrate gratitude to Jesus without being                    kind and generous to His disciples.) 

 

III.  The dilemma of the people of Capernaum

 

          A.  This news spread quickly throughout Capernaum. 

          B.  They were already astounded by the teaching of Jesus and by Him casting the           demon spirit out of a man at the synagogue service.

          C.  Now they learn about the healing of Simon Peter’s mother-in-law. 

          D.  They, too, had family members and friends who were sick.

          E.  The problem was that carrying their sick ones to Jesus would require a lot of                        physical word and they were forbidden to work on the sabbath day.

 

IV.  The solution of the problem

 

          A.  The Jews counted dusk as the closing of one day and the beginning of another.  

          B.  So they simply waited for the evening to come and then they headed for Simon                  Peter’s house bringing their afflicted loved ones, V. 32. 

                      1.  Picture the scene.  (One with an arm of the sick person around his                             shoulder helping to carry his weight, one carrying a sick one in his arms,                              one sick person limping along with the assistance of a friend or relative,                       another being carried on a bed, etc.)

                      2.  It was like the poster:  “He ain’t heavy Lord.  He’s my brother.”

          C.  Jesus healed them all.  (He cast the demons out of those who were demon                             possessed and healed the sick of their afflictions, V. 33-34.

 

V.  The picture today

 

          A.  Get the picture of a city filled with people and surrounded by country roads                                and homes. 

          B.  Picture your loved ones and your friends living in these homes. 

          C.  Picture those people being afflicted.

                      1.  But not afflicted with the flu, pneumonia, fever, cancer or any dread                            disease. 

                      2.  These are afflicted with sin that can cause them to suffer great agony in                          the fires of hell.  (Where they will suffer forever unless they get spiritual                      healing.)

          C.  But if we can just somehow get them to Jesus they will be saved.

                      1.  Now I am not saying that if you get them to church they will be saved                              ----, but they might!

                      2.  But I am saying that if you can get them to trust Jesus to be their Savior                             then they will be saved, Acts 16:31; Rom. 10:13. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Some of you have loved ones and friends who right now are hell-bound.  I am        asking you to care enough to bring them to Jesus.  (Of at least --- to try!)

          2.  Someone here may be hell-bound, yourself.  I am asking you to care enough                            about your own soul to come to Jesus Christ for salvation.  Cooperate with                            those who are trying to bring you to Jesus.

          3.  Someone here may already be saved but is  in need of a church home.  You                    have loved ones and friends who are interested in your spiritual well-being and                 would like you to place your membership in this church where you can get                       spiritual help.  Will you come?

 

 

 

#10

 

Mark 1:35-39  CARRYING THE GOSPEL TO THE NEXT TOWNS

 

Introduction:

 

          Back in verse 15 it was said that Jesus went into Galilee preaching the gospel.  At Capernaum He went into the synagogue He astonished the people with His teaching.  We can be confident that the gospel was a big part of what He taught.  At the home of Simon Peter Jesus healed many people.  We can be sure that He also presented the gospel there.  In our text today we hear Him say that He must move on to other towns and preach in those towns.  We can be sure that He preached the gospel in those towns.   

 

I.  The early departure from the home of Simon and Andrew

 

          A.  On the evening before it was not until dusk dark that the home of Simon and                            Andrew was swamped with people bringing their sick for Jesus to heal.

                      1.  It must have been late that night before all the people finally went home. 

                      2.  One might expect  that they would all sleep late the next morning. 

          B.  But not Jesus;  He was up and gone before anyone else arose, V. 35. 

                      1.  One might get the impression from Mark that He left about 3:00 or 4:00                    o’clock in the morning.  ( Mark said, “...a great while before day...”)

                      2.  By comparing this with Luke we learn that He left at about the first                            crack of dawn.  Daylight was near, but it  was  long before full daylight.

                      3.  Surely Jesus could have turned over and gone back to sleep, but He                      didn’t. 

          C.  Why?  Why didn’t He?  Why didn’t He at least stay in the house?  Why did He                 slip off all alone?

                      1.  The answer is:  He went out and departed into a solitary place to pray.

                      2.  He went out where He could spend time alone with God the Father.

          D.  But why couldn’t He have just quietly prayed in the house?

                      1.  He could have.  (I have done so numerous times.)

                      2.  He could have, but He didn’t. 

                      3.  One reason was because He did not want any interruption to His prayer.

                      4.  Also, He wanted to set an example for us to follow in our own prayer                             life. 

          E.  We, too, need to spend time alone with God in prayer. 

                      1.  We need to do this daily.

                      2.  We can pray with others around and we should.  (At church, at home,                              anywhere, even in a big crowd.  But we still need some time alone in                     prayer to God.) 

                      3.  Perhaps we can do this after all others are in bed asleep.  (Perhaps to                        rise early would be a good time to do it.  Or, perhaps after the others                             have left for the day.) 

          F.  A word of caution:  Do not get involved in transcendental meditation. 

                      1.  Many have been persuaded to practice yoga and transcendental                                         meditation. 

                      2.  The object of transcendental meditation is to let the mind be free from                               self-control and to come completely under the control of the                   spirit world.

                      3.  This is dangerous business.  (The spirit that will control you will be a                          satanic demon spirit.)

                      4.  This is not at all what Jesus was doing.  (He was in full control of His                      faculties and was talking with God the Heavenly Father.  That is what                   we need to do and to let Him have control in our lives.)

 

II.  The disciples following after Jesus

 

          A.  Someone apparently heard Jesus leave and he and other disciples followed                          Him, V. 36. 

          B.  When they find Him they urge Him to return to the city saying that the people                 had already begun to arrive looking for Him, V. 37.  (No doubt they brought                     more sick people to be healed). 

          C.  Luke says that these followed the disciples who followed Jesus.  (They                                         followed --- slower, I am sure --- and that when they arrived where Jesus was,             Jesus healed them.

 

III.  Jesus declines their request to return into the city

 

          A.  Jesus informs the disciples that He will not at this time go back into                                  Capernaum, but will, instead, go on to other towns, V. 38.

          B.  For one thing, He knew that the people would come on out where He could                               see them and heal their sick without having to return into the city.   

          C.  But the main reason is was that Jesus wanted to teach the disciples that His                       main purpose for being in the world was not to heal the sick,  but to save the           lost.

                      1.  He did not leave heaven and come to earth to heal the sick, I Tim. 1:15;                               Luke 19:10.

                      2.  He had already preached the gospel at Capernaum and would later                            return to preach there again.

                      3.  But for now He wanted to carry the gospel to other towns and villages. 

                      4.  This was His purpose for coming into the world.  (He did heal, but                            healing was His purpose in coming.)

          D.  According to Luke the crowd did come from the city and Jesus did heal them       and preach to them. 

          E.  Mark just says that they moved on and preached in synagogues throughout                            Galilee, V. 39.  (We can be sure that He preached the gospel.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  There is not an unsaved person in all the world that Jesus does not care about.                 He wants all to hear the gospel and be saved.

          2.  If you are unsaved He wants you to be saved.

          3.  If you are saved, He wants you to help Him to carry the gospel to the unsaved. 

          4.  Jesus has assigned each local church the responsibility of trying to send the                      gospel message to all the world.  As a church, He wants us to spread the gospel            to all the world.  As members of a local church that is our own responsibility.           It is our mission for as long as we live.

 

                     

 

#11

 

Mark 1:40-45  JESUS HEALING THE WORLD’S MOST DREAD DISEASE

 

Introduction: 

 

          Before reading our text, let me ask, “What is the world’s most dread disease?”

 

I.  The dread disease of aids

 

          A.  Heart disease is the #1 killer in the United States, but it is not the most                                         dreaded disease. 

          B.  Until recent years cancer was the most dreaded disease in the U. S.  (Although             it was never the #1 killer.)

          C.  Without question, aids has become the disease that most people dread today.                    (and with good reason.)        

                      1.  Many of us can remember when the first case was discovered in the

                           U. S.

                      2.  Today it has reached epidemic proportions. 

                      3.  It is feared that it will become the #1 killer in the world.

                      4.  At first in America it was confined to male homosexuals. 

                      5.  Through prostitutes, dope addicts and other means it has spread to male                             and female heterosexuals --- even to children.   

                      6.  Some experts predict that eventually there will be no way to safely                              protect yourself from it.

                      7.  Some say that it can threaten entire nations. 

 

II.  Leprosy, in some respects, worse than aids

 

          A.  The man in this text who came to Jesus did not have aids; he was a leper, V. 40

          B.  With aids the victim will die relatively quick (a few years), but a leper could                               live as long as 50 years..

                      1.  Some would say, “That is good; he will live much longer than with                            aids.”

                      2.  But no! That is not good.  (The longer the leper lives, the more intense                            his suffering becomes.

          C.  Leprosy first shows up with spots around the nose and eyes. 

                      1.  The spots may be red, white or black and may resemble pimples. 

                      2.  They grow larger and more numerous until they cover the body.

          D.  The nostrils swell shut and sometimes a part of the flesh of the nose falls off. 

          E.  Joints of the fingers and toes separate.  (The flesh around the joint rots, the                      digits of the finger or toes fall off, and the open sore never heals.) 

          F.  The pain becomes excruciating. 

          G.  There was in that time no medical cure.  (Even today it is very difficult to cure                 medically.)

 

III.  Seeing the man come to Jesus, V. 40

 

          A.  Jesus and His apostles were still on the tour of Galilee which began in our                             previous text.  (There was now a greater number of disciples.)

                      1.  Jesus has already delivered His famous “Sermon On The Mount.”

                      2.  He has come down from the mount and is in a nearby city.

                      3.  He was there when the leper came to Him. 

          B.  A leper could not live within a city, but he could enter a city. 

                      1.  He must wear clothing which would identify him as a leper. 

                      2.  If anyone came near he must loudly cry, “Leper!  Leper!”   (How would                             that rule work today for carriers of the aids virus?”  Many people would                              object on the grounds that this rule is an invasion of privacy.  They                         would ignore the fact that it would be for the protection of other                       people.)         

          C.  I can envision the man coming to Jesus coming to Jesus crying, “Leper!                             Leper!”
                      1.  Everybody must have scattered with the exception of Jesus.

                      2.  The man fell to his knees before Jesus, but was very careful not to                            touch Jesus.

                     

IV.  Seeing the man made whole, V. 40-41

 

          A.  He said, “If thou wilt, thou canst make me clean, V. 40. 

                      1.  What faith!

                      2.  Nobody else in the world could heal him, not even the best doctor. 

                      3.  But he believed that Jesus could.

          B.  It was a faith well justified, V. 41.

                      1.  Jesus touched him and it was with great compassion. 

                      2.  Jesus said, “I will; be thou clean,” 

          C.  As the hand of Jesus moved forward the man was still full of leprosy, but the                             instant Jesus touched him, there was not one spot of leprosy, V. 42.  (He was              healed instantly,)

 

V. Seeing him after he was healed, V. 43-45

 

          A.  After the man was healed there was something that the Lord wanted him not to                  do.  (Jesus told him not to tell anybody, V. 43-44.)    

          B.  There was something the Lord wanted him to do.  (The Lord wanted him to go       to Jerusalem and make the sacrificial offering which the law required, V. 44b)

          C.  He disobeyed the Lord and messed up the Lord’s chances of ministering to                   others in that town, V. 45.

 

VI.  Taking another look at the man before he was healed

 

          A.  I want you to take another look at him before he was healed. 

                      1.  However, I do not want you to envision his face. 

                      2.  I want you to envision your face instead of his.

                      3.  Your face, however, is not filled with leprous sores.  

          B.  You are infected with something far worse than leprosy. 

                      1.  You are infected with sin.  (We all are.  We all are!)

                      2.  Sin, like leprosy, produces death, Rom. 3:23.

                      3.  The suffering caused by leprosy is before death and it ends there, but                      the suffering caused by sin continues after death  --- and gets far worse.                            (Death does not end the suffering; it greatly increases the suffering.)

                      4.  It never lets up.  (It never gets better.  It never ends.)

          C.  I want you to envision yourself in another scene.

                      1.  Envision yourself coming to Jesus and kneeling down before Him. 

                      2.  Envision yourself crying out to Him, “Sinner!  Sinner! I am a sinner!”

                      3.  Envision yourself saying to Jesus, “I know that you can make me whole.                             I know that you can save my soul.  I know that you can cleanse me                      from every sin.”

                      4.  Envision yourself asking Jesus to save you and to keep you out of hell,                     and imagine yourself trusting Him to do just that.

                      5.  Envision Him saying to you, “I will; be thou clean.”

 

Conclusion: 

 

          1.  Will you now bow your head and do it for real?

          2.  If you have trusted Jesus as your Savior, there is now something He wants                            you to do for Him.  He wants you to join a good Bible believing church and live                for Him.  (Will you do that, too?)

 

 

 

#12

 

Mark 2:1-12  JESUS, HAVING THE POWER TO FORGIVE SIN

 

Introduction:

 

          I am talking about having the power to wipe the slate clean so that before God in heaven one stands “Not guilty.”  Jesus had repeatedly demonstrated His power to heal the sick.  In this text He demonstrates His power to forgive sin. 

 

I.  The return to Capernaum, V. 1

 

          A.  Jesus and His apostles had left Capernaum and had gone through Galilee                             preaching the gospel.

          B.  They were on that tour when Jesus healed the man of leprosy.

          C.  Now they have returned to Capernaum. 

 

II.  The gathering of the people, V. 1-2

 

          A.  Before they had left Capernaum Jesus had caused quite a stir among the                             people.

                      1.  He had astonished the people with His teaching in the synagogue.

                      2.  Also, in the synagogue on the sabbath day He had cast the demon out                      of a man. 

                      3.  At the house of Simon Peter He had healed Simon Peter’s                                mother-in-law, who was sick of a fever. 

                      4.  In the evening He healed many sick folk and cast out more demon                            spirits. 

          B.  When Jesus and His disciples returned to Capernaum from their tour through                Galilee,  the news spread fast and a great crowd gathered at the house where               Jesus was.   

                      1.  Mark does not tell whose house Jesus was in. 

                      2.  Perhaps it was Simon Peter’s house, from which He had left to go on                              the tour.  (Perhaps it was some other house).

                      3.  Most homes in that day had one large room plus some smaller ones.  (                           Jesus would meet with people in the large room.)

                      4.  Suddenly there were so many people who came in that there was                            standing room only.

                       5.  The room was filled and people were packed in and around the                                                     doorway trying to see Jesus and to hear Him speak.   

                      6;.  There were so many that newcomers could not get near the door.

          C.  He preached the word unto them.

                      1.  If any sick were brought in up to this point of time , Mark does not                            mention it.

                      2.  What Jesus was doing was preaching the gospel to the people. 

                      3.  What Jesus was interested in was saving souls.  (He had come to seek                               and to save that which was lost.)

                     

III.  The bringing of the paralytic, V. 3

 

          A.  At this point some people brought a man to the house who was a paralytic.

          B.  Since the man was unable to walk they brought him on a bed.  ( A small pad or                  small mattress.  There were four men carrying the man --- one man at each                      corner of the bed.)

          C.  The men who carried him were convinced that if they could somehow get him          to Jesus then Jesus would him.

 

IV.  The problem of getting him in to Jesus,  V. 4

 

          A.  They could not get to the door to get him in because of the crowd.  (I’m sure         they tried, but couldn’t.)

          B.  So they went up to the roof.  (Stairs in that day were built on the outside of a         home and they just went up stairs carrying the man.)

          C.  Once they were up on the roof, they tore a big hole in the roof and let him                             down before Jesus. 

          D.  They were very determined.  (Would it not be good if people today were that              determined to get the unsaved to Jesus?  Would it not be good if we were that       determined to bring the unsaved to Jesus?)

 

V.  The pronouncement of forgiveness, V. 5

 

          A.  Jesus pronounced “Thy sins be forgive thee.” (Five of the sweetest words ever         spoken!)    

          B.  Apparently this man’s sins had caused his paralysis.  (Therefore, forgiving his            sins would open the way for the paralysis to be removed.)

          C.  Jesus pronounced his sins forgiven. 

                      1.  That means that all of his sins were forgiven.

                      2.  This means that before God in heaven he was no longer held guilty of                                    any sin. 

                      3.  It also meant that the way was now open for him to be made whole.

                     

VI.  The silent opposition, V. 6-7

 

          A.  There were certain scribes in the room who, in their thoughts, challenged the                             idea that Jesus forgave the man’s sins. 

                      1.  They raised the question, “Who can forgive sin, but God?”

                      2.  They thought, “He is not God and, therefore, He cannot forgive sin.”

          B.  This marks the beginning of the opposition to the ministry of Jesus.

                      1.  At this point the opposition was silent.  (There was not one word                   spoken against Him nor one deed done against Him.)

                      2.  But the opposition was very real. 

          C.  Ironically, the charge against Him in their minds was “Blasphemy.”

                      1.  This was the same charge that would later be brought against Him at                             His trial

                      2.  Blasphemy under the Mosiac law was punishable by death.

                      3.  Thus, in their minds, He was already considered to be worthy of                                                    death.  (They never changed their minds even after the miracle which                         followed.  They never changed their minds throughout His life on                        earth.)

VII.  The healing of the paralytic man, V. 8-12

 

          A.  Jesus revealed their thoughts and pointed out clearly that He does have the                             power to forgive sin, V. 8.

          B.  Then so that the people could know for sure that He does have the power to                          forgive sin He told the man to arise, take up his bed and walk,  V. 9.-11. 

          C.  The man was healed immediately at the word of Jesus. 

                      1.  This showed that the sins which had caused the paralysis were                                forgiven.

                      2.  It further showed that Jesus is the One who forgave his sins.

          D.  This means that He would have to shed His blood , Heb. 9:22.

                      1.  His blood would not be shed until later.

                      2.  But the man’s sins were already forgiven and that they were forgiven on                      the basis of His blood which would later be shed on the cross. 

          E.  This showed that Jesus is God. 

                      1.  God keeps His own records of a man’s sin.  (Man does not do that for                            God.)         

                      2.  Only God could forgive that man’s sins and wipe God’s records in                            heaven clean.

VIII.  The matter of your sins

 

          A.  You, too, are guilty of sin.  (We all are, Rom. 3:23.)

          B.  The chances are that your sins will never cause you to be paralyzed.  (They                               might, but probably won’t.)

          C.  But they can cause you immeasurable agony in the fires of hell.  (There you                      will suffer forever unless you receive forgiveness.)

          D.  Wouldn’t you like to have your sins forgiven?

                      1.  Wouldn’t you like to have your slate wiped clean?

                      2.  Wouldn’t you lie to stand before God without one sin against you?

          E.  You can, I John 1:7; Acts 16:31; Rom. 10:13.

 

Conclusion:

         

          Right here, right now, today you can get this matter settled with God by trusting His Son, Jesus Christ, to save you from your sins.                  

 

 

 

#13

 

Mark 2:13-17  JESUS, CALLING SINNERS TO REPENTANCE

 

Introduction:

 

          Our text gives the record of Matthew (Levi) being called to the ministry.  It is also a record of the banquet which Matthew hosted for Jesus.  Matthew, Mark and Luke all place these events after the Galilean tour. 

 

I.  Jesus, teaching by the seaside,  V. 13

 

          A.  Jesus had become very popular and the crowds were growing. 

          B.  The open spaces, such as the seaside could more easily accommodate the                       larger crowds.

          C.  Mark says that Jesus taught the people. 

                      1.  This does not necessarily mean that He did not heal anybody.

                      2.  It does mean that Mark considers the teaching of God’s word to be                       more important than healing. 

 

II.  Jesus, passing the office of Matthew, V. 14

 

          A.  Matthew :(Levi) was a Jew who held an office as a publican, a tax collector                             for the Roman government. 

          B.  Matthew’s office was at Capernaum on a road between two Roman districts.               (Custom was paid on all merchandise that passed from one district to the                          other.)

          C.  Matthew had already been to Judea to hear John the Baptist preach.  (He had               already been saved and baptized.)

          D.  Being at Capernaum where Jesus had already performed great miracles,  he                     surely had already heard about Jesus.

                      1.  He must have wondered if Jesus is the Messiah. 

                      2.  If Jesus was the Messiah, then that meant that He was also the Savior.                     (It mean that Jesus was his Savior.)

          E.  All of a sudden a great crowd of people approached.

                      1.  When the crowd got near he learned that Jesus is in the crowd.

                      2.  Jesus stopped right in front of his office and called for Matthew to leave                           his work as a publican and to follow Him.  (Much like the call of the                   fishermen)

          F.  Matthew immediately left his office and began to follow Jesus. 

 

III.  Jesus attending a feast at Matthew’s home, V. 15

 

          A.  Matthew then gave a great feast inviting a large number of his friends, V. 15.           (No doubt,  he intended to introduce them all to Jesus, hoping that they would           all get saved.)

          B.  The friends of Matthew were a group of undesirables, V. 15.  (Mark calls them       “publicans and sinners.”)

          C.  The result was that many of them did get saved and became followers of Jesus,               V. 15.

          D.  Another result was that Jesus received some sharp criticism from the scribes                             and Pharisees, V. 16.  (They were present and saw Jesus sit with the publicans,       but, were not seated with the publicans as Jesus was.  They had probably                       refused to sit with them.)

 

IV.  Jesus criticized by the scribes and Pharisees

 

          A.  Earlier these scribes and Pharisees had silently criticized Jesus; now they                     speak out against Him. 

          B.  They still do not face Him directly with their charges. 

          C.  Rather, the disciples catch the brunt of their attack. 

          D.  They clearly imply that something is wrong with Jesus or He would not sit                   with sinners. 

 

V.  Jesus’ answer to the scribes and Pharisees, V. 17

 

          A.  Jesus confronted the scribes and Pharisees openly, as He had done before.  (He          did not change their minds, but He publicly exposed them as being wrong.)

          B.  The heart and core of the matter is:  Why would Jesus eat with these men?  Did          He not know that they were outcasts?  Did He not know that they could not                          enter the temple at Jerusalem?  Did He not know that they could not worship             in the local synagogues?

                      1.  Why would He call Matthew to be His disciple, His follower, His                       associate, His companion, His spokesman?

                      2.  And why would He eat and fellowship with the other publicans and                            sinners?

          C.  The answer:

                      1.  The well do not need a doctor, but the sick do.

                      2.  Jesus had not come to call the righteous (the self-righteous) to                                                    repentance, but sinners.

                      3.  Technically, Jesus would have all men to come to repentance, but He                      knows that a man will not repent who thinks of himself as being                                                    already righteous in God’s sight.

                      4.  Only when a man realizes that he is a sinner will he repent. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          What about you?  Have you ever taken God’s name in vain?  Have you ever taken anything that did not belong to you?  Did you ever get drunk?  Did you ever tell a lie?  Did you ever commit adultery?  Did you ever think adultery?  Did you ever hate anybody?

          You may not have done all of these things, but you have done some of them.  You need to repent and trust in Jesus to save your soul?

          I, too, am a sinner, but I am a saved sinner.  I call upon you to repent and be saved.  Jesus is the Savior.  He knows that you are a sinner, but He loves you anyhow and wants to save your soul.  Call on Him now and trust Him to save your soul.             

 

 

 

#14

 

Mark 2:18-22  CHRISTIANITY, A WHOLE NEW SYSTEM OF WORSHIP

 

Introduction:

 

          The scribes and Pharisees were becoming increasingly critical of Jesus.  First, their critical attitude was silent.  Second, they voiced their criticism to His disciples, but not to Jesus.  In our text today, they voice it boldly to Jesus Himself. 

          Their chief problem was that they could not understand that Christianity is not under the Law of Moses.  Even the disciples of John had a problem with that.  Some do even today.

 

I.  A question put to Jesus, V. 18

 

          A.  It was the practice of the disciples of John and the Pharisees to fast. 

                      1.  Both Matthew and Luke say that they fast often. 

                      2.  That is the intend of the Old English in V. 18.  (It means that they                            habitually fasted.) 

          B.  Both the disciples of John and the Pharisees worshipped under the Old                                        Testament law system.

          C.  Fasting was requited by the Law of Moses, but only once each year.  (Not                             often as the Pharisees and the disciples of John practiced.)

          D.  The Jewish fathers added 5 more annual fasts to the one required by the law of             Moses.  (Yet even that would not be fasting often.) 

          E.  The Pharisees, however, fasted twice each week, once on the second day of                         the week and again on the fifth.  (That is often.)

          F.  The disciples of John also had come to fast often.  (Perhaps because John had              been imprisoned and slain.  The Scripture does not say that John, himself                   fasted often.)

          G.  Both groups came together to ask the question.  (In all probability, the                                         Pharisees were the ones who prompted the disciples of John to come with                        them to question Jesus.)

          H.  The question is:  “Why do your disciples not fast as we do?” 

 

II.  Consider the question from the Pharisees point of view

 

          A.  The Pharisees thought that the keeping of the law of Moses was necessary in                     order to get to heaven.

          B.  They thought that their traditions were just as binding as the law itself.  (They                   considered them a part of the law.)

          C.  Therefore, they considered it a great sin for the disciples of Jesus not to fast ---                 and fast often as they did.

          D.  Thus, in effect, they were asking:  “Why do you sin greatly by allowing your                             disciples not to fast?” 

                      1.  They were not so much interested in blaming the disciples of Jesus, but                      rather were anxious to find something to blame Jesus about. 

                      2.  They already considered Jesus to be a blasphemer because He clamed to                        forgive the sin of the paralytic man;  now they wanted to find                                             something else to use against Him.

                     

III.  Consider the question from the view of the disciples of John

 

          A.  They, like John the Baptist, had great respect for Jesus. 

          B.  Thus, they were not asking from a critical point of view.

          C.  They simply had an honest question about a matter of which they were                               puzzled. 

 

IV.  The answer given by Jesus, V. 19-20

 

          A.  Jesus used an illustration about the children of a bride chamber. 

                      1.  The children of a bride chamber would rejoice greatly at a wedding                          feast.

                      2.  There was no weeping nor mourning what-so-ever.  (It was not fitting                   for them to do so.)

          B.  Jesus said that it was likewise not fitting for His disciples to mourn while He          was still with them. 

                      1.  Fasting was associated with mourning.

                      2.  Thus, it was not fitting for them to fast or mourn while He was still with                    them. 

          C.  The time would come when He would no longer be with them and they would                  fast and mourn.  (He would be gone from them and, therefore, it would be                          fitting for them to mourn and fast.)

 

V.  The real issue, V. 21-22

 

          A.  The real issue was not fasting; the real issues were the Law of Moses, the                             customs of man and the word of the Lord.

                      1.  The Pharisees thought that the keeping of the Law of Moses was                             necessary in order to get to heaven. 

                      2.  Likewise, they thought that the customs and traditions of men were                   binding and must be followed.

          B.  The truth is that the keeping of the Law of Moses is not necessary for                                         salvation.

                      1.  It never was. 

                      2.  Men were saved by faith before the Law of Moses was ever given. 

                      3.  Men were saved by faith during the Law Age --- not by the keeping of                        the law..

                      4.  Men are saved by faith now --- not by the keeping of the law.

          C.  Furthermore, the customs and traditions of the fathers are not binding.

                      1.  The rule of faith and practice for the disciples of Christ during His life                            on earth was His word --- His teachings. 

                      2.  The rule of faith and practice for Christianity today is still the teachings                         of Christ as set forth in The New Testament. 

          D.  Christianity is not a remodeling of the Old Testament system of worship;  It is          a whole new system of worship with instructions originating from Christ          

                Himself and passed on to us through the writings of the New Testament.  

                      1.  Men do not put new cloth on an old garment to patch it up, V. 21.

                      2.  Neither did men in Christ’s day put new wine in the old brittle skin-                               bottles which would break under the pressure of gasses formed by                      fermentation, but in new skin-bottles which would expand and not break                             by the pressure, V.22.

 

Conclusion:

 

          !.  If you want to go to heaven, you must look to Christ and not to the Law of                           Moses.  Likewise, you must look to the traditions of men.

          2.  If you are saved, then you need to follow the system of worship which Jesus                  Christ, Himself established on earth, the New Testament church system of                         worship --- not the Old Testament law system of worship.  .

          3  Yet this does not mean that the Old Testament is to be discarded,  It is still very        profitable to the Christian today, II Tim. 3:16-17 

 

 

 

#15

 

Mark 2:23-28  ACCUSED OF BREAKING THE LAW OF THE SABBATH

 

Introduction:

 

          This is now the fourth encounter between Jesus and the Pharisees which Mark has recorded.  First they criticized Him only in their thoughts for Jesus claiming to have  power to forgive sin.  Secondly, they criticized Him to His disciples because He ate with publicans and sinners.  Thirdly they criticized Him to His face for not teaching His disciples to fast.  Now, fourth, they criticize Him for allowing His disciples to --- as they say --- break the law of the sabbath day. 

 

I.  What actually happened, V. 23

 

          A.  Jesus passed through the cornfields on the sabbath day.

                      1.  This was not the kind of corn that grows on a cob. 

                      2.  The Greek word which here is translated “corn” simply means “grain.”         

                      3.  The Jews commonly grew wheat, rye or barley, but not Indian corn. 

          B.  The disciples plucked some grain as they passed through the field.

                      1.  The “ears of corn” were what we would call “heads of grain.”

                      2.  Both Matthew and Luke say that they were hungry.

                      3.  So what they did was to pluck a few grains, rub their hands together so                      as to rub the husks off and eat the uncooked grains.

          C.  That is all they did, but the way the Pharisees reacted you would think they had          committed murder.

 

II.  The accusation by the Pharisees, V. 24

 

          A.  The Pharisees go to Jesus and express their stern disapproval.

          B.  They accuse the disciples of breaking the law of the sabbath.

                      1.  Yet they are not after the disciples.

                      2.  They are striking at Jesus through the disciples.

          C.  Question:  Did the disciples break the law of the sabbath as given by Moses?

                      1.  They did pluck grain on the sabbath.

                      2.  They did rub the husks off in their hands. 

          D.  Answer:

                      1.  The law of Moses does forbid harvesting a field on the sabbath.

                      2.  The law of Moses does also forbid gathering sticks on  the sabbath for                      the purpose of cooking..

                      3.  The law of Moses does also forbid doing manual labor on the sabbath. 

                      4.  Yet the disciples of Jesus did not break any of those commands. 

                                  a.  They did not harvest the field.

                                  b.  They did not gather sticks nor cook any food.

                                  c.  Surely rubbing their hands together should not be considered to                                          be manual labor.

 

III.  The Lord’s answer to the Pharisees, V. 25-28

          (The Lord gave a three-part answer to their accusation.)

 

          A.  The law was not as strict as the Pharisees made it out to be, V. 25-26. 

                      1.  Technically, Abiathar was not high priest at that time, but was here                    called by a title which he would later have.  (He was at that time                            already serving as priest in the temple along with his father who was                            high priest at the time.) 

                      2.  He gave David and his men shewbread to eat. 

                      3.  The law of Moses provided that after the shewbread had lain on the                             table in the temple for the required amount of time that it could be taken                          by the priests and eaten by the priests and their families. 

                      4.  The law of Moses did not specifically forbid the priests to pass this                      bread on to anyone other than their family members, but it was                              commonly interpreted to mean that nobody other than the priests and                     their families were to eat of this bread.   

                      5.  Yet Abiathar did not interpret the law to be so strict as to forbid him                     from giving this bread to hungry men who needed something to eat. 

                      6.  The point that Jesus was making was that neither should the Pharisees                         interpret it so strictly as to forbid His hungry disciples to pull and eat a                    few grains on the sabbath day.  

          B.  The sabbath was not set up to be a handicap to man, but to be a help to man,                  V. 27.                    

                      1.  I t was not even established under the law of Moses, but originated at                    the close of God’s 6 days of creative labor.

                      2.  God, Himself, rested (refrained from labor) on the 7th day and  set an                               example for man to follow. 

                      3.  Man was not created for the sabbath, but the sabbath was established                      for man.  (It was established to benefit man.)

                      4.  The sabbath day was later incorporated into the Law of Moses, but its                              original purpose did not change.  (It was never intended to hinder man,                     but was to help man.)

                      5.  Therefore, it was not intended to prevent hungry men from plucking a                       few grains of wheat or rye or barley and eating on the sabbath day.

          C.  The Son of Man is the Lord of the Sabbath, V. 28.

                      1.  The term, “Son of man” was used in reference to the Messiah, the                            Christ.

                      2.  Jesus here implies that He is the Messiah, the Christ and that, therefore,                        He is the Lord of the Sabbath.

                      3.  If His disciples had broken the law of the sabbath He would surely                              know it and He would judge them.  (The Pharisees had no business                          judging them.)

 

IV.  Some lessons for us

 

          A.  What is in this passage for us?  (There is more in the passage than just to show       that Jesus got the better end of the argument.)

          B.  It teaches u s that man today still needs a day of rest each week. 

                      1.  In Old Testament times people were to rest on the 7th day of the week                              in commemoration of the creative work of God.  (In addition to this, the                   Hebrew people were to rest on the 7th day in obedience to the Law of                          Moses.).

                      2.  New Testament Christians are to rest on the first day of the week in                           commemoration of the resurrection of Jesus which took place on the                    first day of the week. 

                      3.  It would also be of great benefit to all mankind if all people would                            observe this a day of rest each week.  (We would have healthier bodies,                            would be able to do more work,  would have less crime, would have                     less divorces, and would have longer happier lives.)

          C.  It teaches us that man needs a time each week to come together and worship                           God.          

                      1.  One can worship God when he is alone and should do so daily, but there                         is a distinct advantage in coming together to worship with others.  (And                       it should be done on a weekly basis.) 

                      2.  Anybody who fails to do so cheats himself and his family out of                                        blessings.

          D.  It teaches the Christian not to have such a critical attitude toward others.

                      1.  The Pharisees  set an example of what we should not be like. 

                      2.  When we start seeing something wrong in almost everybody else it is a                    sure sign that something is badly wrong with us.

          E.  It teaches the unsaved not to be so critical of Christ and Christians. 

                      1.  The critical attitude of the Pharisees toward Jesus and His disciples                            prevented them from every trusting Jesus and being saved.

                      2.  Today they are in the fires of hell.

                      3.  It is too late for them, but it is not too late for you.         

                      4.  At least it is not too late ---- yet!

 

 

 

#16

 

 Mark 3:1-5  MORE CONFLICT ABOUT THE SABBATH

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text Jesus heals a man on the Sabbath.  This brings on more conflict with the Pharisees.  Mark gives more attention to the conflict than he does the healing.  This is the 5th conflict between Jesus and the Pharisees:  #1 was about Jesus telling a man that his sins were forgiven.  #2 was because Jesus ate with publicans and sinners.  #3 was because Jesus had not taught His disciples to fast.  #4 was because the disciples plucked grain on the sabbath.  #5 is now because Jesus healed on the Sabbath day. 

 

I.  The place where the conflict occurred, V. 1a

 

          A.  Jesus went back to the synagogue at Capernaum which He customarily                                   attended.  (It had long been His practice to attend the worship services at the                         house of God on the Sabbath day.)

          B.  Luke says this was on the Sabbath following the conflict about the disciples                           pulling grain.

          C.  Jesus knew that the leaders of the opposition would be there, but He did not let                  that stop Him going. 

 

II.  The man used by the Pharisees to start the trouble, V. 1b

 

          A.  There was a man in the synagogue who had a withered hand. 

          B.  He would not deliberately cause any trouble for Jesus, but the Pharisees used         him to cause Jesus trouble. 

          C.  They used the presence of that man as a trap for Jesus. 

 

III.  The purpose of the Pharisees, V. 2

 

          A.  The Pharisees watched Jesus to see if He would heal the man on the Sabbath.              (They were virtually sure that He would and they were hoping that He would.)

          B.  They intended to accuse Him of breaking the Sabbath. 

                      1.  They were not interested in merely slandering His name. 

                      2.  The Law of Moses called for the sabbath breaker to be stoned.

                      3.  They intended to formally accuse Him and have Him stoned to death.

          C.  The question comes:  If Jesus were to heal the man, would that really be                             breaking the Sabbath?

                      1.  No.  The law of God did not forbid healing (doctoring) on the sabbath.

                      2.  God knew that people would get sick on the Sabbath and on the                                        sabbath would need to be healed or, at least, treated for their illness..

                      3.  But the Jewish fathers considered the treatment of a sick person on the                             Sabbath day to be breaking the Sabbath unless it was a matter of life or                            death. 

          D.  In the case of the man with the withered hand, it was not a case of life or death                   and they would consider healing him to be a blatant transgression of the law. 

 

IV.  Jesus healing the man with the withered hand, V. 3

 

          A.  Jesus called for the man with the withered hand to stand forth.

          B.  The Pharisees were delighted.  (They thought, “Jesus will heal him and we                             will press charges against Him and He will be killed!)

 

V.  The question Jesus asked the Pharisees, V. 4

 

          A.  Instead of healing the man Jesus directed a question to the Pharisees. 

          B.  Mark skipped over some things which Matthew mentioned:

                      1.  He skipped over the question which the Pharisees asked Jesus.  (Is it                    lawful to heal on the Sabbath?)

                      2.  He skipped over the Lord’s answer to that question.  (That the                               Pharisees, themselves, would get an ox out of the ditch on the Sabbath.)

          C.  He got right to the question that Jesus asked  the Pharisees.

                      1.  “Is it lawful to do good on the Sabbath or to kill a man on the                                                   Sabbath?”     

                      2.  They thought that it would be against the law for Jesus to do the man                           good on the Sabbath, but had no hesitancy whatsoever to try to kill                     Jesus on the Sabbath.

          D.  The question related to a favorite saying of the Pharisees. 

                      1.  They said that to fail to help a man was the same as hurting him. 

                      2.  If they said that it is lawful to do good to a man on the Sabbath, then                              they would be approving the act of healing on the Sabbath.

                      3.  They certainly could not say that it was lawful to kill on the Sabbath,                         although that is what they intended to do.. 

                      4.  Thus, they just remained silent.  (They refused to answer.)

 

VI.  The Lord’s anger and compassion toward the Pharisees, V. 5a

 

          A.  Jesus looked at the Pharisees in anger.

                      1.  He looked at them with a look that one might describe as being one that                     could burn a hole in a wall. 

                      2.  He was angry at them because of their sin. 

                      3.  I am glad I was not in that bunch. 

          B.  Yet Jesus was grieved because their hearts were not right with God.  (He                             wanted them to repent and get right with God.)

 

VII.  The healing of the man, V. 5b

 

          A.  Jesus then turned to the man with the withered hand and healed him.

          B.  Jesus would not let them hinder Him from helping this man who was in need. 

 

VIII.  Lessons we should learn

 

          A.  We should learn that the truth of God is not popular with the world. 

                      1.  It wasn’t then and it isn’t now.

                      2.  The truth about Jesus being the Son of God is not popular.  (That was                         the real issue with the Pharisees and it is the real issue today.)

                      3.  The truth about salvation by grace through faith is not popular .  (The                    world prefers to think that a man can work his way to heaven.)

                      4.  The truth about baptism is not popular. 

                      5.  If a man believes the truth, he must believe it because God has said it                              and he must believe it in spite of the fact that the world opposes it.

          B.  It is not going to be a pleasant thing for the unsaved to face the anger of God         in judgment, John 3:36

          C. The Pharisees did not stop Jesus from helping the man with the withered hand      and all the forces of hell cannot stop Him from saving one who repents and                            trusts Him for salvation. 

          D.  We need to learn to do good while we have opportunity.

                      1.  To fail to repent and trust Jesus when you have opportunity to do so is                         a sin. 

                      2.  After being saved, to fail to be baptized and join the church is a sin.

                      3.  To fail to help others in need is a sin. 

 

 

 

#17

 

Mark 3:6-12  GROWING OPPOSITION AND GROWING POPULARITY                    

         

Introduction:

 

          The Pharisees at Capernaum had made an attempt on the life of Jesus.  They sought to accuse Him of breaking the sabbath so that they could stone Him to death.  Their plan had failed.  This just stirred their hatred for Him all the more.

 

I.  The growing opposition to Jesus, V. 6

 

          A.  The Pharisees left the synagogue more determined than ever to kill Jesus,

                V. 6.

          B.  Ordinarily the Pharisees did not get along with the Herodians. 

                      1.  Not many Jews did. 

                      2.  Most Jews despised the Roman government which ruled over them.

                      3.  That is why they hated the publicans who collected taxes for the                                        Romans.  (At least that is one of the chief reasons.)

                      4.  But a minority group of Jews favored the family of Herod as rulers over                    them and sought to support their rule in every way they could.                               (Perhaps they thought that having proselyte Jews ruling over them was                     better than having idolaters; perhaps they just wanted favors from                    Herod.)

                      5.  These were called Herodians.  (Strictly a political group)

          C.  The Pharisees laid aside their differences with the Herodians and went to see                       them to seek their help against Jesus.

                      1.  Apparently they traveled from Capernaum to Tuberous to see them.                             (That is where Herod’s throne was located and where the Herodian                         headquarters was located.)

                      2.  They spoke frankly and told the Herodians that they wished their help in                             killing Jesus.  (That is, they wanted to kill Jesus without making trouble                            for themselves with the people or with the Roman authorities.)

          D.  The Herodians, for whatever their reasons, joined with the Pharisees to try and                 kill Jesus. 

                      1.  Apparently they continued to counsel with the Pharisees until the                           death of Jesus.

                      2.  The Bible records one other meeting between the Herodians and the                      Pharisees just shortly before the crucifixion.  (There may have been                   meetings which were not recorded.)

                      3.  They advised the Pharisees as to what legal procedures could  be taken

                           in order to avoid trouble with the Roman authorities.    

                      4.  Perhaps the Herodians saw Jesus as a threat to Herod’s throne.

          E.  This marks a turning point in the ministry of Jesus.  (He not only had the                             religious leaders against Him, but He now had the political leaders against                            Him, also.  The religious leaders and the political leaders joined together                            against Him.)

 

II.  The growing popularity of Jesus, V. 7-12

 

          A.  Jesus left the synagogue and went to the sea shore, V. 7.

                      1.  That is, He stopped going to the Capernaum synagogue and started                            going instead to the shores of the Sea of Galilee.         

                      2.  This would get Him somewhat away from the Pharisees.

                      3.  It would also get Him out into the open where He could speak to larger                              crowds.

          B.  The people soon began to flock to the sea shore to see and hear Him. 

                      1.  The crowds just kept coming to Galilee from all parts of the land, V.                       7-8. 

                      2.  Just as people had come to Judea from all parts to hear John the                                        Baptist, now they are coming to Galilee from all parts to hear Jesus. 

                           (From Idumea, from beyond Jordan and from Tyre & Sidon  --- the                    Gaza Strip)

          C.  The crowds just kept getting bigger and bigger.  (Jesus eventually had to have         a boat standing by at all times to make sure that He would not be crowded                             into the sea, V. 9.)

          D.  Jesus just kept preaching and kept healing and the people kept coming, V. 10. 

          E.  Jesus was recognized as being the Son of God by some demon possessed                       people who came, V. 11.  (It was actually the demons who recognized Him.)

          F.  Jesus forbid these people to tell anybody not to tell that He is the Son of God        and the demons had to obey, V. 12. 

                      1.  Today God wants His Son to be honored as the Son of God, but He                      does not want demon spirits to be the ones to spread the word. 

                      2.  That is our responsibility and that is our great privilege. 

 

III.  An observation

 

          A.  Jesus was not a helpless in the hands of the Pharisees.  (Jesus never had been                   helpless and He never will be.)

          B.  Those fellows could not stop Him until He got ready to be stopped. 

                      1.  They tried again and again to stop Him, but couldn’t. 

                      2.  They were not able to stone Him as they had planned to do.

                      3.  They turned the public eye on Him by trying to discredit Him. 

                      4.  He maneuvered them as a child would a toy.

                      5.  The Pharisees banded together with the Herodians against Him and He                            moves to the sea shore where bigger than ever crowds came.  .

                      6.  Demon spirits come along and He orders them around and they obey.                              (They have to obey.)

          C.  We do not worship a helpless Savior.

                      1.  A lot of people think that we do and they think that we are helpless,                            too.

                      2.  They think that because we are a small group, because we gain only a                              handful of followers, and because we raise only a few dollars that                      we are helpless, too.

                      3.  They think that because they have big crowds, have thousands of                            followers and raise millions of dollars that they are mighty.

                      4.  It may look as if our God is helpless, but He is not.  (He never has been                   helpless and He never will be.)

          D.  And those who trust in Him are not helpless either. 

                      1.  We would be helpless if we had to depend on our own strength.

                      2.  Our Lord is the Creator of Heaven and earth;  He is Almighty God; He                      is King of Kings;  He is Lord of Lords.

          E.  The only ones who are on the winning side are those who repent of their sin                        and trust in Him as their Savior.  (All others will wind up in the fires of hell.)

 

Conclusion: 

 

          If you have never trusted in Jesus, you should do so right now.  If you are saved but have never publicly professed Jesus as your Savior, you should do so now.  If you are saved and wish to join this church to serve Him, then we invite you do so now. 

 

 

 

#18

 

Mark 3:13-19  JESUS ORDAINING THE TWELVE

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus has stopped going to the synagogue at Capernaum and has started going to the sea shore instead.  The crowds are getting larger and larger.  In our text He leaves the crowds and ordains twelve apostles. 

 

I.  Jesus, going into a mountain, V. 13a

 

          A.  Jesus leaves the crowd and goes into a mountain.

                      1.  The Scriptures do not say which mountain He went to.

                      2.  It was not in Capernaum, but it was probably somewhat nearby. 

          B.  There were 3 good reasons for doing so. 

                      1.  He needed time in which to rest.

                      2.  He needed time alone with God the Father.  (Having become a man this                          need was especially great.)

                      3.  He wanted to ordain the twelve and, thus, strengthen the church. 

          C.  His example teaches a valuable lesson for us.

                      1.  We must get among the people to best serve God. 

                      2.  We must get away from the people at times and spend time alone with                    God.  (We all need time alone with God.)

                      3.  We all need some time away from the hustle and bustle for some rest.

 

II.  Jesus, calling men, V. 13b

 

          A.  Jesus had already been calling men to salvation.

                      1.  This He had been doing back on the sea shore.

                      2.  He calls all men to salvation.

                      3.  Not all trust in Him, but those who do get saved.

          B.  But in our text Jesus does not call all men.

                      1.  Mark say that He called “whom He would.”

                      2.  He called those who are saved, but not all of the saved. 

                      3.  He called those who are members of His church.  (Those who were His                      followers.)

          C.  These were called to a closer walk and a closer fellowship with Him and a                          closer  fellowship with the other members of His church.  (Jesus wanted those        who were saved to spend time with Him and time with one another.)

          D.  Those whom Jesus called came to Him.

                      1.  When Jesus calls to salvation the lost sinner can say “Yes” or
                           No.”

                      2.  When Jesus calls the saved to service, the individual can say, “Yes” or                         “No.”

                      3.  These set a good example for us to follow by saying, “Yes.”

 

III.  Jesus ordaining the twelve, V. 14

 

          A.  Out of the whole group of disciples Jesus selected twelve.  (These were men                         who had walked with Him since the earliest part of His ministry.)

          B.  These 12 He ordained as apostles. 

                      1.  Not all preachers would be apostles.  (The 70 were not apostles.)

                      2.  Thus, this was a very special office. 

          C.  These men were set as officers in the church, I Cor. 12:28.

                      1.  This means that the church did exist at that time.

                      2.  It means that the office was within the church. 

                      3.  These were officers of the church. 

                      4.  The office was intended for the early days of the church and does not                      exist today. 

 

IV.  Jesus giving special powers to the apostles, V. 15

 

          A.  He gave them the same kind of miraculous powers that He possessed.  (The                     power to work the same kind of miracles that He had already been doing.)           B.  He gave them power to heal sicknesses.

          C.  He gave them power to cast out demons.

                      1.  This is not the same thing as the power to heal sickness. 

                      2.  Sickness and demon possession is not the same thing. 

                      3.  Although often demons would afflict the person they possessed                                                    and when they were cast out the affliction was gone. 

          D.  These miraculous powers were intended to convince the people that these men         were from God and that Jesus, who gave them this power is the Christ                                        (Messiah) of God.                         

          E.  Matthew also says that He gave them power to raise the dead. 

                      1.  Some today claim to possess the same power as the apostles. 

                      2.  If so, let them stop funerals and raise the dead. 

 

V.  The list of the twelve who were ordained, V. 16-19a

 

          A.  The first man on the list is Simon, V. 16.

                      1.  “Simon” was a shortened form of the Hebrew word, “Simeon,” 

                           meaning “hearing.”

                      2.  Jesus surnamed him “Peter” which means “A rock or stone.” 

                      3.  The Greek word which was used refers to a small stone such as a pebble                            or maybe a stone as large as a building stone.

                      4.  It never referred to a large boulder stone such as might be used as a                     foundation for a building.

                      5.  In Matthew 16:18 the foundation for the church was not the Apostle                           Peter, but Jesus Christ Himself.

                      6.  The surname, Peter, was meant to be a complement to Simon. 

          B.  There will not be time enough in this message to speak separately about each        of the twelve on the list.

                      1.  I do call attention that some of these men were called other names by                        other gospel writers.

                      2.  For example, Matthew was also called “Levi.”

          C.  Note also that Judas Iscariot was one of the twelve apostles. 

                      1.  This is the Judas who betrayed Jesus for 30 pieces of silver.

                      2.  There is no doubt in my mind that Judas is in hell today. 

                      3.  But he is not in hell because he betrayed Jesus;  he is there because he                      failed to trust Jesus as his Savior, John 3:18.

                      4.  A man can be a church member, be baptized and be an officer of a                         church and yet be lost and go to hell.

 

VI.  Jesus, going back to Capernaum, V. 19b

 

          A.  This verse says that they went into a house.

          B.  If this verse was all there is to go on, one would think that the house was in the          mountain where the ordination took place.

          C.  By comparing it with the verses which follow one concludes that the house was          back in Capernaum..

                      1.  The purposes for this trip were concluded.  (The time for rest, time                            alone in prayer with God and the ordination of the twelve was ended.)

                      2.  It was now time to get back to Capernaum and get back to work.

 

VII.  Lessons which we learn

 

          A.  The greatest need of man is the salvation of the soul.

                      1.  No matter what else a man has, if he has never trusted Jesus he will go                             to hell.        

                      2.  There he will never have a moment’s peace of mind nor relief from pain.

                      3.  He will go where Judas and all other Christ rejecters go.

          B.  After one is saved he needs to be a member of a New Testament church.

                      1.  He finds a greater fellowship with Christ, Himself.

                      2.  He finds great blessings from fellowshipping with other Christians. 

                      3.  He finds greater opportunity for serving the Lord.   (The twelve would                   never have been ordained if they had not been in the church.)

                      4.  Yet one needs more than just to have his name on the church role; he                        needs to be active in church.

          C.  Some are called of God to special service.  (Some are called to preach.)

                      1.  God could get by without man’s service if He chose to do so.

                      2.  But He had chosen to give the saved the privilege of serving Him.

                      3.  Not all of the saved are called to preach, but all are called to serve.

 

Conclusion:

 

          Trust Jesus to be your Savior, get in a good Scriptural church and give yourself in service to the Lord.

 

 

 

#19

 

Mark 3:20-30  FRIENDS AND ENEMIES COMING TO JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          There has been a growing animosity toward Jesus by the Jewish leaders.  In contrast, there has been a growing attraction toward Him by the masses of common people.  In this text we see 3 special groups coming to Him.  Two groups are friends and one is the enemy. 

 

I.  The multitudes coming to Jesus, V. 20

 

          A.  Mark does not call them friends, but they were definitely friendly toward Jesus.

          B.  Before Jesus left to go up into the mountain to ordain the 12 they had come to              Jesus in large numbers.

          C.  Now that Jesus has returned to the city they also return.   

          D.  They come in greater numbers than ever.  (Jesus and the disciples had not time

          even to eat their meal.)

 

II.  Another group of friends coming to Jesus, V. 21

 

          A.  Mark calls them “friends.”

                      1.  Mark does not tell us who they were nor where they came from.

                      2.  However, Jesus had lived all of life in Nazareth and this is the place                   where He had friends.

                      3.  The Greek word indicates that they were “friends, neighbors, relatives.”

          B.  Mark says that they heard about what was taking place at Capernaum.  (About                 the large crowds, about some folks saying that Jesus is the Messiah, about the           miracles, about the trouble with the Pharisees)

          C.  These people did not seem pleased about what they heard. 

                      1.  They did not say,  “Jesus is doing great things.”

                      2.  They did not say, “Praise the Lord.  The Messiah is come.”

                      3.  Instead they said, “He is beside himself.”  (“He has lost his mind.  He is                   insane.”)                 

          D.  They never once considered that He might be the Messiah.  (To them Jesus                             was a friend, a neighbor, a relative --- nothing more.)

          E.  As friends, relatives, neighbors they decided to go and help him. 

                      1.  They would do what any friends, neighbors, relatives would do for one                     who had lost his mind.

                      2.  They would take him by force if necessary and confine him so that he                                   could recover.  (Or at least, where he would do no harm.)

          F.  So they departed from Nazareth and headed toward Capernaum for the                                purpose of laying hold on Jesus and confining Him somewhere.                     

 

III.  A group of enemies coming to Jesus, V. 22-30

 

          A.  Before the friends could arrive from Nazareth a group of enemies arrived                             from Jerusalem, V. 22.

                      1.  Mark calls them “scribes from Jerusalem.”

                      2.  They were official representatives of the Sanhedrin Council.

          B.  The Sanhedrin Council members were the chief Jewish leaders in the land. 

                      1.  In Moses’s day a group of 70 men had been appointed to assist him.

                      2.  But in time they became more than assistants; they became virtual                             rulers.

                      3.  Even under Roman rule, they had the final say in all religious matters                            and exerted a powerful voice of influence even in civil matters.

          C.  The Sanhedrin felt it their responsibility to investigate any sign that the                                   promised Messiah might be at hand. 

                      1.  Thus, when John the Baptist came preaching that the Messiah was at                             hand they investigated him. 

                      2.  They concluded that John was demon possessed and not of God. 

          D.  They had already investigated Jesus.

                      1.  On their first investigation they would observe, but not speak.  (When                            Jesus told the palsied man, “thy sins be forgiven they concluded, “He is                        a blasphemer,” but said nothing publicly.)

                      2.  Now they investigated by raising question, but their questions were                   slanted against Him.

                      3.  They had plotted to kill Him, but so far had not succeeded. 

          E.  So now they try to explain to the public how He can do miracles and cast out          demons even though He is not the Messiah.

                      1.  They cannot deny that He was doing miracles and casting out demons.

                      2.  As with John the Baptist, they claimed that He was possessed with an                       evil spirit and that He cast out demons by the power of Beelzebub, the                            prince of demons, V. 22. 

          F.  Jesus denied this and proved His point in 2 ways:

                      1.  Beelzebub is another name for Satan and if Satan cast out Satanic spirits                              he would be working against himself and he could not stand, V. 23-26.

                      2.  The power by which Jesus was casting out demons was more powerful                         than Satan and had, in fact, overcome Satan, V. 27.

          G.  Then Jesus accused those Jewish leaders of committing the unpardonable sin,            V. 28-30.

                      1.  The power by which Jesus did cast out demons was the Holy Spirit.

                      2.  The scribes said that He did it by Beelzebub, the Devil. 

                      3.  Thus, they called the Holy Spirit the Devil, Satan. 

                      4.  Jesus said that all manner of sins and blasphemy could be forgiven, but                      that this was one sin which could not be forgiven.

 

IV.  The people of our day

 

          A.  Some are like the multitude.  (They are somewhat attracted to Jesus and some       are waking up to the fact that He is the Messiah, the Son of God, the Savior.           B.  Some people today are like the friends of Jesus.

                      1.  They consider themselves to be friends to Christ and Christianity, but                           that is all they are..

                      2.  As good neighbors in the community they will help the church with their                    money, their time and their labors.

                      3.  But they never repent of their sins and never trust Jesus to be their                            Savior.

                      4.  To them Jesus is a good man, maybe even a prophet of God, but                            nothing more.

          C.  Some people today, like the members of the Sanhedrin are outright enemies of           Christ and Christianity.

                      1.  They reject the idea that Jesus is the Christ and the Savior of men. 

                      2.  They watch and they question, but never for the purpose of learning the                      truth.  (Only to find something to criticize)

                      3.  They work against Christianity any way they can. 

          D.  Some today are overly concerned that they might commit the unpardonable sin.

                      1.  All they would have to do to settle the whole question is to repent of                         their sin and trust Jesus to be their Savior.  (Once they have trusted                             Jesus all their sins are already pardoned.

                      2.  Unless one will trust Jesus none of their sins will be pardoned.  (They                              may be pardonable, but they will not be pardoned.)

                      3.  Unless one’s sins are pardoned, he will go to hell any way even though                             his sins are pardonable.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Come to Jesus now!  Believe the gospel message with your mind.

          2.  Come to Jesus now!  Trust Jesus with your heart.

          3.  Come to Jesus now!  Follow Jesus in your life.

          4.  Come to Jesus now!  Commit yourself to serve Jesus as your Lord and Master.

          5.  Come to Jesus now!  Come!  Come to Jesus now.  Be a real friend to Jesus.                              Be a true friend to Jesus.

          6.  Come to Jesus ----- now!

                         

 

 

#20

 

Mark 3:31-35  A SPECIAL CLOSENESS BETWEEN JESUS AND THOSE WHO DO THE WILL OF GOD

 

Introduction:

 

          Before reading out text, let me ask:  Would the real mother of Jesus stand up?  Would the real brothers of Jesus stand up?  Would the real sisters of Jesus stand up? 

          Some friends and relatives of Jesus had heard about what was going on at Capernaum and decided to go and take Him away from the crowds so that He could get some rest.  Before they arrived the scribes from Jerusalem came to claim that Jesus was possessed by Beelzebub (Satan).  In our text today the friends and relatives of Jesus arrive. 

         

I.  The arrival of the flesh and blood brothers of Jesus, V. 31-32

 

          A.  To be technical, these were the friends, neighbors and relatives spoken of back       in verse 21.  (Compare with V. 31.)

          B.  Mark in V. 31 mentions only the relatives because the friends and neighbors are          not important to the lesson which Jesus is about to teach.

                      1.  He mentions only the mother  and brothers of Jesus. 

                      2.  In case you are interested, Matthew gives the names of the brothers,                         Mt. 13:55.

                      3.  You might be surprised to learn that Mary had other children. 

          C.  They could not get near Jesus because of the great crowd. 

                      1.  They were without, but not without a house nor building, V. 31.

                      2.  Jesus was not within a house; He was beside the sea-shore. 

                      3.  They were without the crowd,  (That is, they were on the outskirts of                      the crowd while Jesus was at the center of the crowd.) 

          D.  They called for Jesus, V. 31-32.

                      .1.  They sent word to Jesu0s that they wanted to see Him and talk with                           Him. .

                      2,  They still intended, if possible, to get Him away from the crowd so that                              He could rest. 

 

II.  The lesson that Jesus taught, V. 33-35

 

          A.  Jesus directed a question to those who told Him about His mother and His                       brothers, V. 33.

          B.  He meant no disrespect toward His brothers nor His mother --- and certainly                          not toward His mother.

                      1.  The law of Moses commanded, “Honor thy father and thy mother.”

                      2.  Jesus kept every detail of the law.

                      3.  He never uttered one word of disrespect toward His mother.  (Don’t                 

                           you wish that could be said about you?)        

          C.  Jesus raised the question because He wanted to teach a lesson. 

          D.  Jesus looked about Him at His disciples and said, “Behold my mother and my          brethren,” V. 34.

          E.  He then explained that those who do the will of God are His brothers and                     sisters --- and His mother, V. 35

                      1.  This is true --- not physically --- , but spiritually. 

                      2.  Those who are saved are born a again spiritually and, thus, are His                             kinsmen spiritually.  (The are spiritually born into the family of God.)

                      3.  They are also adopted, Gal. 4:5.  (They are adopted physically into the                            family of God.)

                      4.  They are sons of God both spiritually and physically and, thus, are heirs                           of God. (Heirs of God and joint-heirs with Jesus Christ, Rom. :16-17.)

          F.  But there is more than kinship involved; there is feeling; there is emotion; there      is love..  (Jesus is saying, “I could not love them more if they were my own                    flesh and blood brothers, sisters and mothers.”)

 

III.  What this text means to us today

 

          A.  It means that there are people right here in this congregation whom Jesus                             could not love more if you were His own flesh and blood.  (He counts you as                   His mother, His sister, His brother.)

          B.  It means also that being saved is not the only thing that is important; doing the          will of God after you are saved is also important.  (Morally clean, godly)

          C.  It means that the study of God’s word is important.

                      1.  Since doing the will of God is important then it is important for us to                        study God’s word.

                      2.  It is through a study of the Bible that we may know God’s will.

                      3.  God’s word is right no matter what men may say to the contrary. 

          D.  It means that it is important for us to do the will of God as it is revealed in                            God’s word. 

          E.  It means that it is important that we dedicate our lives to the task of                                promoting the work of God.  (That is a part of His will for our lives.)

          F.  It means that after being saved we should hold membership in one of the Lord’s                churches.  (and support that church with our prayers, our presence, our labors            and our money.)    

          G.  It further means that those who are not saved need to be born again.  (You                   never have a spiritual kinship with the Lord until you are born again.  You will                never get into heaven without being born again.)

 

 

 

#21

 

Mark 4:1-20  THE PARABLE OF THE SOWER

 

Introduction:

 

          Mark records only 3 of the 7 Kingdom Parables which Matthew records.  The first is the Parable of the Sower.  After His encounter with the scribes from Jerusalem and with His mother, brother and friends from Nazareth Jesus began again to minister to the multitudes at the seashore, V. 1.  The crowds were exceptionally large, V. 1a.  He now began to teach exclusively in parables.  This started with His encounter with the scribes, Mark 3:23.  He taught doctrine, but it was in parables, V. 2.  He called for the people to harken to Him, V. 3a.  One may hear but will not understand unless he gives special attention. 

 

I.  The giving of the parable, V. 3-8

 

          A.  A sower went forth to sow, V. 3.             

                      1.  The implication is that he first plowed the ground.

                      2.  Then he went forth to sow the seed.  (Scatter the seed into the plowed                           ground.) 

          B.  Some of the seed fell by the wayside, V. 4.

                      1.  The wayside is the roadway. 

                      2.  The ground there was hard and packed.  (It was not in the plowed                           area.)

                      3.  The seed would not germinate there, but they would make a good meal                       for the birds.

          C.  Some seed fell on stony ground, V. 5-6

                      1.  Understand that as the farmer plowed the ground he would carry out                      the stones which would interfere with his plowing. 

                      2.  However, large boulders would lay beneath the surface and could not be                             carried out. 

                      3.  The soil on top of these boulders would offer be very shallow. 

                      4.  The soil ;would heat up quicker than deep soil and the seed would                            germinate quickly. 

                      5.  But plants in that soil could not take much heat and on the first real hot                          days they would die because the roots had no depth to them. 

          D.  Some seeds fell among thorns, V. 7.

                      1.  The thorn bushes might not have been there when the seed was planted,                           but the thorns soon come up and grow fast. 

                      2.  The thorns choked out the plants so that they became unfruitful.

          E.  Some of the seed fell on good ground, V. 8.

                      1.  These plants become productive.

                      2.  Some were more productive than others, but they were all good.

                      3.  This was what made the sower’s efforts worthwhile. 

          F.  Jesus then sounded out a warning to the people that they should hear and                     heed the parable. 

 

II.  The explanation of the parable, V. 10-20

 

          A.  The disciples asked Jesus the meaning of the parable, V. 10.

          B.  Jesus explained that the unsaved could not understand the great truths of God         pertaining to Christianity, V. 11. 

                      1.  One has to be saved in order to understand.

                      2.  The unsaved need to know only enough to know that they are sinners                            and how to be saved. 

                      3.  Christians need to know and understand Christian doctrine and need to                           be guided by it.         

          C.  The latter part of verse 12 contains a difficulty, V. 12.

                      1.  The King James version makes it sound as if God does not want the                      unsaved to be saved. 

                      2.  This is contrary to all Bible teachings. 

                      3.  It is contrary to verse 9.

                      4.  It is contrary to the real meaning of this verse. 

                      5.  Substitute one synonym and the meaning becomes clear.  :(Substitute                      “unless” for “lest.”)

          D.  Jesus asked the disciples how they would understand the other more difficult                             parables if they did not understand this simpler one, V. 13.  (Then He                                     proceeded to explain the parable.)

          E.  If you are truly saved your life will count more for God and for yourself if you         will dedicate yourself to Him. 

          F.  He explained the seed which fell by the wayside, V. 15.

                      1.  There are those who heard the word of God, but Satan stole the word                   away and they remain unsaved.  

                      2.  Satan always tries to interfere when God’s word in taught or preached.                        (The choice, however,  is up to the listener.)

          G.  He explained the seed which fell on stony ground, V. 16-17. 

                      1.  These make a quick profession of faith, but when persecution comes,                            they stop coming to church. 

                      2.  They sound like Christians and for a while behave like Christians, but                             they are not genuine Christians.

          H.  He explained the seed which fell among thorns, V. 18-19. 

                      1.  These may be saved and may produce fruit for a little while, but                              become unfruitful.

                      2.  They get too involved in making money and seeking the pleasures of the                              world.

          I.  He explained the seed which fell on good ground, V. 20. 

                      1.  These are saved and they bring forth fruitage to the Lord. 

                      2.  Some have more talents, more zeal, more opportunity or more                            dedication than others and, thus, are more fruitful. 

                      3.  But these are all good Christians.

                      4.  These make preaching and witnessing worthwhile.  (They keep the                      cause of Christ going.)

 

III.  The multitudes, an example of the parable

 

          A.  They all heard Jesus preach, but many never gave much consideration to His                       message.  (They; were interested only in His miracles.)

          B.  Some made professions of faith, but when they saw that Jesus had offended                             the Pharisees they turned back and followed Him no more.

          C.  Some served Him for awhile but  soon became more involved in riches and                              pleasure. (James wrote of them.)

          D.  Some became His dedicated followers and they spread Christianity to the far                              corners of the world.

 

IV.  The application of the parable to this service

 

          A.  I am the sower and I preach the word of God.

          B.  If you let Him do it, the Devil will distract you and cause you to disbelieve or,          at least, cause you to put off trusting Christ until some other time.

          C..  If you do trust Jesus, you should know that you will meet with persecution                       and should not be discouraged by it.

          D.  You will also have to make up your mind whether or not you will live for God. 

          E.  If you are truly saved your life will count more for God, for yourself and for                      your family if you will dedicate yourself to Christ.

 

 

 

#22

 

Mark 4:21-25  THE PARABLE OF THE CANDLE

 

Introduction:

 

          A parable is a story which illustrates a lesson.  The parable of The Sower was given before a multitude and then later explained to the disciples.  The Parable of The Candle was given only to the disciples.  Its lesson is primarily for disciples. 

 

I.  The giving of the parable, V. 21-22

 

          A.  Jesus gave the parable in the form of two questions followed by a statement of         observation. 

          B.  The two questions involve a candle (literally a lamp), V. 21.

                      1.  The first question is:  “Is a candle brought to be put under a bushel or                       under a bed?”

                      2.  The second question is:  “... and not to be set on a candlestick?”

          C.  The implied answer is that it is not to be put under a bushel nor bed, but it is to         be put on a candlestick.

          D.  The statement then made by Jesus is that all things will be brought to light, V.                22. 

                      1.  Just as a man brings in light to a dark room, even so God is going to                        bring light to all things.  (Emphasis:  “all things.”)

                      2.  The truths of God will be vindicated before an unbelieving world. 

                      3.  Error will be shown to be of the Devil.

                      4.  The hidden and most secret details of one’s life will be revealed. 

         

II.  The parable as it applies to the Old and New Testaments

 

          A.  The parable speaks of some things which have been hidden and kept secret. 

          B.  In the Old Testament a number of God’s truths were somewhat hidden. 

                      1.  For example:  The gospel, the preaching of the gospel to the Gentiles,                          the New Testament church system of worship and  the first and second                     comings of Christ.

                      2.  These things were set forth in the law by types and shadows.

                      3.  They were set forth in the writings of Old Testament prophets, but only                           vaguely in comparison to New Testament times.  . 

          C.  The coming of the New Testament era was like taking the light out from under           the bushel or bed and putting it on a candlestick.

                      1.  The New Testament era itself began with Jesus.  (His ministry, His                             miracles, His teachings)         

                      2.  It was done through the New Testament writings. 

                     

 

III.  The parable as it applies to the Christian’s opportunity to learn the things of 

        God, V. 23-24a

 

          A.  The parable teaches that New Testament Christians have a great opportunity                      to learn the truths of God. 

          B.  Jesus challenged the Christians to learn, V. 23. 

                      1.  This implies that some Christians will take advantage of the opportunity                     and some will not.                 

                      2.  Some do not read their Bibles at home, do not come regularly to hear it                             at church, do not listen when they do come, prefer to be entertained                      rather than taught the word of God.

                      3.  Some, thank God, come regularly and drink in every word. 

          C.  Jesus warns Christians to take heed what they hear, V. 24a.

                      1.  Those disciples were not to believe the Pharisees, but to believe Jesus.

                      2.  We are not to listen to false teachers, but to the word of God and to                        those who rightly divide the word of God.

 

IV.  The parable as it applies to the Christian’s responsibility to the truth of God,                                             V. 24b-25

 

          A.  He is responsible for accepting God’s word as the voice of authority. 

          B.  He is responsible for obeying God’s word in his own life.  (It is not to be                             hidden under a bushel of disobedience, ungodliness and sin, V. 24b.         

          C.  He is responsible for proclaiming it to others, V. 24b. 

                      1.  Not every Christian can preach or teach at church, but every Christian                        can tell some other Christina what he does know.   

                      2.  Christian parents can teach their children about God.  (Do not wait for                           the public school system to teach your children that God is the Creator                     of the world.)

                      3.  You can teach Bible doctrine to Christian friends.  (Once saved always                            saved, what Scriptural baptism is, what a New Testament church is, that                         Jesus is coming again --- and soon, etc.)

                      4.  Your lost friends need the gospel and your saved friends need Bible                   truth.

          D.  Jesus issued a special challenge and warning, V. 24c-25. 

                      1.  The challenge is that if you are faithful to the word of God which you                     do understand then God will help you to understand more.  (Be faithful                             to follow  and to proclaim what you do understand God’s word to                           teach..)

                      2.  The warning is that if you are not faithful to the understanding that God                    has already given you, then He will take away the understanding which                              you do have. 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  I recommend to you the Bible.  Hear it.  Believe it. Obey it.  Proclaim it.  Stand                  for it, Eph. 6:10-18.

          2.  To you who are in need of a church home, I recommend that you look not for                 the church which has the greater amount of activities for you and your family,         but look for a church which will teach you and your family the truths of God’s                word.  (It is more important that your children be taught Bible truth than that                       they be entertained.)

          3.  To you who are unsaved, I recommend Jesus Christ.  Talk to Him.                                        Acknowledge that you are a sinner.  Ask Him to save you.  Trust Him to do it. 

 

 

#23

 

Mark :26-29  THE PARABLE OF THE SEED, THE BLADE  & THE FRUIT

 

Introduction:

 

          If I were to mention the Parable of The Sower you would get a certain mental picture.  If I mention The Parable of The Candle you also get a certain mental picture.  But if I mention The Parable of The Seed, The Blade And The Fruit, it is not likely that you get a mental picture at all.  We are not as familiar with this parable as with others. 

          The parable presents the sowing of the seed, the growing of the plant and the harvesting of the fruit.  Jesus interpreted the parable privately to His disciples, V. 34. 

 

I.  The parable has an application to the spreading of the gospel, V. 26

 

          A.  When the emphasis is placed on the sowing of the seed it illustrates the                                         presentation of the gospel. 

          B.  The presentation of the gospel is just as necessary to the winning of souls as                             sowing the seed is to a harvest.  (The gospel is the power of God unto                                 salvation, Rom. 1:16.)

          C.  After the seed is sown it takes the power of God to produce a harvest. 

                      1,  The farmer can plow the ground and sow the seed, but he cannot make                              the seed sprout,  the plant grow nor the fruit mature.

                      2.  The Christian can present the gospel, but he cannot save a soul and                          neither can he make a man repent of his sin and trust Jesus to saved his                        soul.

                      3.  It is a mistake to high-pressure somebody into getting saved.  (You may                       get a profession of salvation, but not likely a convert.)

                      4.  Even the Lord does not force people to trust Jesus and get saved, but                     He can and does exert a much more powerful influence upon them than                   we are able to do.

          D.  Our task is to present the gospel message; let us do our task. 

          E.  Then let us leave the individual to trust Christ and we must leave the conviction                        and the conversion up to God. 

         

II.  The parable has an application to the growth of the individual Christian,

      V. 27-28

         

          A.  When the emphasis is placed on the growth of the plant, it illustrates the                             growth of the individual Christian. 

          B.  After the seed has sprouted into a plant, it takes time for the plant to grow                             and it t takes time for the fruit to mature. 

                      1.  It just does not happen overnight.

                      2.  Night after night and day after day goes by.

                      3.  Even after the fruit appears it takes time for it to mature. 

                      4.  Between the sowing of the seed and the reaping of the harvest the plant                   may endure the hot sunshine, the wind and the storm.  (But it is in the                   hot sunlight that energy for growth is obtained and it is in the storm that                     rain comes.)

          C.  Even so, after one is saved it takes time for him to mature as a Christian.

                      1.  He has a lot of growing to do.

                      2.  It takes time for him to learn what the Bible teaches.

                      3.  It takes time for him to learn to do the will of God. 

                      4.  He may have to takes some heat for awhile.

                      5.  He may have to endure the storms of life.

                      6.  But eventually he ought to mature and produce fruit for the Lord. 

         

III.  The parable has an application to the growth and development of Christianity 

        as a whole, V. 29

 

          A.  When the emphasis is placed on the harvest of the fruit, the parable illustrates              the growth and development of Christianity as a whole.         

          B.  Christianity had a very small beginning.

                      1.  It started with one man ---- Jesus.

                      2.  Jesus called out a few people who had been saved and baptized under                              the ministry of John the Baptist.

                      3.  Jesus organized the few people into a New Testament church.  (A New                   Testament church is a group of saved people who have Scriptural                        baptism and are committed to doing the work of the Lord under His                        authority and instructions.)

                      4.  Missionaries were sent to the Gentiles and soon churches sprung up in                   Asia, Africa, Turkey and Greece.  (Eventually they sprung up                               throughout the world.)

          C.  At some stage Christianity will reach its peak and the harvest will be reaped.

                      1.  Jesus will return and the redeemed will be caught up to meet the Lord in                            the air.        

                      2.  The catching up of the saved will be the reaping of the harvest.

                      3.  This church age will end and the millennial age will begin.

          D.  At what stage will Christianity reach its maternity and the harvest be reaped?

                      1.  Some say that we must first “Take the world for Christ.”

                      2.  Not so!  If so, the harvest would never come.

                      3.  Jesus said that it will be after the gospel is preached to all the world,                             Matt. 24:14.

                      4.  The growing season for a plant is for a limited time and the growing                             season for Christianity is just about over. 

                      5.  The harvest time is near at hand. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  What we as Christians need to do is get busy presenting the gospel to the                             unsaved while there is time. .

          2,  We also need to grow in grace and in the knowledge of the Lord Jesus Christ,                 II Peter 3:18.  (And help other s to grow.)

          3.  Those who are unsaved need to be saved while he has time and opportunity.                   (No matter long it might be before the harvest time arrives our own personal                        time is growing shorter with each passing day.  Even today could be our last.) 

         

 

 

#24

 

Mark 4:30-32  THE PARABLE OF HE MUSTARD SEED

 

Introduction:

 

          In 4 of the kingdom parables Jesus uses  “seed” to illustrate spiritual truth.  Mark records 3 of them:  The Parable of the Sower, The Parable of The Seed, The Blade and The Fruit, and the Parable of The Mustard Seed.  Matthew also records The Parable of the Wheat and The Tares. 

          Jesus introduces The Parable of The Mustard Seed with a question in V. 30.  He asks: What can we use to illustrate the work of Christianity in the world?  He then gives the answer in verses 31 & 32. 

 

I.  The growth of Christianity illustrated anew, V. 31

 

          A.  This had already been emphasized in The Parable of The Seed, The Blade and                  the Fruit;  it is now emphasized anew in the Parable of the Mustard Seed.

          B.  The mustard referred to in the parable is not the kind which we plant in our                       gardens here in East Texas.  (Rather, it was the kind that is planted to produce           the seed from which a paste is made like the kind we use on hot-dogs and                          hamburgers.)

          C.  The mustard seed is very small, V. 31. 

                      1.  In the text it is said to be the smallest of all seeds. 

                      2.  That is, it was the smallest of all the seed of herbs which were planted in                            gardens. 

          D.  Yet it grew to become the largest of all the herbs.  (In that part of the world                               they grow to a height of from 8 to 12 feet.)               

          E.  This phenomenal growth of the mustard seed illustrates the phenomenal                            growth of Christianity. 

                      1.  This kind of information would be of great encouragement to the                            Christians of that day.

                      2.  It is an encouragement even now when starting a new mission. 

                      3.  What started out with one man in one small part of the world has grown                             throughout the world.  (Christianity started with one man, the God-man                   Jesus,)

                      4.  The total number of Christians in the world is few compared with the                           total number of people in the world, but it is very large if the total                           number since the inception of Christianity is considered. 

                      5.  The gospel has now been preached in virtually every land and virtually                           every language.

 

II.  The pollution of Christianity illustrated, V. 32

 

          A.  In the parable the mustard plant puts forth great branches in which the fowls of                the air may lodge (literally: “roost”), V. 32.

          B.  In The Parable of The Sower the birds represent Satanic forces taking away the           word of God.  (The gospel message)

          C.  In this parable they represent Satanic forces coming into the ranks of                                        Christianity and polluting Christianity by their false doctrines. 

                      1.  A bird roost is a stinking place.

                      2.  Satan has not altogether stopped persecuting Christians --- and won’t..

                      3.  But he has learned that he can work more effectively against                             Christianity by infiltrating it. 

          D.  One does not have to go outside Christianity to find Satanic preachers                                 preaching Satanic doctrines, II Cor. 11:13-15.

                      1.  They pervert the gospel of Christ by teaching that it is necessary for the                      lost sinner to gain the salvation of his soul by his own good works, Eph.                    2:8-9; gal. 1:6-9.

                      2.  Some deny the inspiration of the Bible.

                      3.  Some deny the virgin birth of Jesus Christ.  (Hence, they deny His                      deity.)

                      4.  Some deny the resurrection of Jesus.

                      5.  Some even deny the existence of God.

                      6.  That is the Devil’s doctrine.

                      7.  Every kind of ungodly doctrine imaginable is being taught within the                     ranks of so-called “Christianity.”

 

III.  The problem today

 

          A.  One may say, “Christianity teaches so many contradicting things today.  So                        what am I to believe?”  (This does make it hard for the unsaved to know how                 to get saved..)

          B.  The answer is:

                      1.  Believe God.  (God is right and anybody who does not agree with God                         is wrong.)

                      2.  Believe the Bible.  (The Bible is God’s holy word.  Thus, the Bible is                        right.)

                      3.  Believe in the Christ.  (Trust Him to save your soul.  He is the very Son                         of the Living God.  He will save you and make sure that you go to                        heaven when you die.)

                      4.  Do not turn against Christianity because of the error that is within the                        ranks of Christianity.

                      5.  Find a church which preaches and teaches the Bible.  (One that is                        careful to rightly divide the word of God.  There are such churches still                    available.)

                      6.  After getting saved and after finding a good Bible believing, Bible                            preaching, Bible teaching church, get into the membership of that                            church and get work for the Lord.

                      7.  Commit your own life to the Lord to do His will daily.

                      8.  Be loyal to God’s truth.  If you are loyal to Christ you will also be loyal                    to Bible truth.  Likewise, if you are loyal to Bible truth you will be loyal                    to Christ.)

 

 

 

#25

 

Mark 4:33-41  THE CALMING OF THE STORM

 

Introduction:

 

          The last parable that we studied was The Parable of The Mustard Seed.  Our text today deals not with a parable, but a real event. 

 

I.  An exposition of our text, V. 33-41

 

          A.  Mark says that with many such parables Jesus spoke to the multitudes, V. 33.

                      1.  The multitudes could not understand all the spiritual lessons that Jesus                               was teaching through those parables. 

                      2.  But if they would only receive the it, they could understand enough to                        know how to be saved. 

                      3.  He gave them all they were able to hear, V. 33.  (Without being                                        offended and driven away by His message.)

          B.  Without a parable He spoke not unto them, V. 34.

                      1.  He had earlier taught without parables, but had turned exclusively to                   parables, because of the Pharisees and others who were prejudiced                          against Him. 

                      2.  This way those who were willing to accept Him could get the message                          and those who were not willing would hear, but would not get any                            ammunition which they could use against Him..  

                      3.  Later Jesus would explain the parables to His disciples. 

          C.  At the end of the day Jesus and the disciples started by boat to the other side of                  the Sea of Galilee, V. 35-36.

                      1.  It must have been on the first leg of the journey that He explained the                      parables to the disciples. 

                      2.  After that Jesus, being tired, went to sleep. 

          D.  A storm came suddenly upon them and the boat began to fill up with water, 

                V. 37.

          E.  The disciples, being afraid, awoke Jesus, V. 38.

          F.  Jesus spoke to the storm and calmed it, V. 39.

          G.  He then rebuked the disciples for their lack of faith, V. 40.

          H.  The disciples were filled with amazement at His power, V. 41.  (Now note the               3 questions in the text.)

 

II.  Carest thou not that we perish?”, V. 38

 

          A.  Note the question as the disciples directed it  to the Lord?

                      1.  There was an accusation in that question. 

                      2.  It accused Jesus of not caring if they should perish. 

                      3.  This rash accusation was voiced under the pressure of fear. 

          B.  Note the question as we today may ask it in time of trouble. 

                      1.  When the trouble is life threatening we may wonder if the Lord cares                    about us.

                      2.  The answer:  “Oh, yes, He cares!  I know He cares!” 

          C.  Note the question as it would have applied to us when we were unsaved.

                      1.  Were not in danger of perishing in a lake of water, but we were in                            danger of perishing in a lake of fire and brimstone.     

                      2.  We wondered if the Lord cared if we were to perish.

                      3.  The answer was:  “Oh, yes, He cared!”  (“No man ever cared for me                       like Jesus.”   He cared enough to give his own life that we might be                        saved.)

 

III.  “Why are ye so fearful;  how is it that ye have no faith?”, V. 40

 

          A.  Note the question as the Lord directed it to the disciples?

                      1.  They knew that He is the Son of God.

                      2.  Why were they afraid with Jesus in the boat?

                      3.  Why did they not trust Him to care for them?

                      4.  Why did they not trust God the Father to care for Jesus?  (Jesus was in                             the boat with them.)

          B.  Note the question as it might be directed to us.

                      1.  When the TV says that we are under a tornado warning and the wind                   starts blowing, the lightening starts flashing and the thunder starts                   booming why are we fearful and how is it that we have so little faith?

                      2.  When trouble of any kind comes and we can see no hope of survival                           why are we fearful and how is it that we have so little faith in Jesus?

 

IV.  “What manner of man is this?”, V. 41

 

          A.  What manner of man is this that even the wind and the waves obey Him?

          B.  Consider the question as the disciples directed it to one another?  (They were       no longer afraid of the power of the storm, but they were afraid (that is, they                     were awed) by the power of the Lord.)

          C.  I’ll tell you what manner of man He is:

                      1.  He is a man just as human as you or I, and yet He is just as much                   Almighty God as God the Father.

                      2.  He has always been God, but He has not always been man.         

                      3.  He is a man conceived in His mother’s womb by the Holy Spirit of God.

                      4.  He is the One who saw all men in danger of the fires of Hell and He left                             His throne in glory to come down to earth and die for man.

                      5.  He is the only man to ever live in human flesh without committing sin                       and yet He took upon Himself the sin of the world so that He could                              suffer on the cross for man so that man could be spared from hell.

                      6.  He is the One and only man who can save a lost sinner and keep him                     our of hell.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Trust Him to save your soul and keep you out of Hell.

          2.  Trust Him to help you with the trials and troubles of life. 

          3.  Commit you life to Him and seek to obey Him and live for Him. 

 

 

 

#26

 

Mark 5:1-20  WHAT JESUS CAN DO FOR A MAN IN THE CLUTCHES OF THE DEVIL

 

Introduction:

 

          In our last text we saw Jesus calm a storm.  In this one we see Him calm a wild man. 

 

I.  An encounter with a man in the clutches of the Devil, 1-14

 

          A.  Jesus and His disciples arrive on the eastern shore of the Sea of Galilee, V. 1.

          B.  No sooner had they left the ship than they encountered a wild man, V. 2.

                      1.  He was a man in the clutches of an unclean spirit.  (A demon and that                           demon had a lot of other demons with him.)

                      2.  He was a man who had once lived in the city, but who now lived in the                      tombs, V. 3.  (Man-made caves)

                      3.  He had often been chained, but was so strong that he would break the                        chains, V. 3-4.

                      4.  He lived naked in the tombs, screaming and cutting himself with stones,                            V. 5.

                      5.  He attacked everybody he saw near the tombs.

          C.  When this wild man saw Jesus and His disciples he began screaming and                             running down the hill toward them.  (I can just imagine the disciples all                                   stepping back behind Jesus.)

          D.  Much to the relief of the disciples he ran and bowed at the feet of Jesus, V.6.

          E.  The demon within the man cried out to Jesus, V. 7.

                      1.  The cry of the demon was in response to Jesus who had ordered the                      demon to come out of the man, V. 8.

                      2.  Jesus asked the demon his name, V. 9a.

                      3.  The demon’s name was Legion because of the Legion of other demons                           who were with him in the man, V. 9b.  (Legion: from 3000 to 6000)

                      4.  The demon requested that they not be sent away, V. 10.

                      5.  The demons all requested that they be permitted to enter a nearby herd                     of swine, V. 11-12.

          F.  Jesus gave the demons permission to enter the swine and the swine ran into the            sea and drowned, V. 13.

          G.  When the swine broke and ran into the sea, their keepers broke and ran into the                 city, V. 14a.

          H.  The people of the city (owners) came out to see what had happened, V. 14b.

 

II.  What Jesus did for the man, V. 15a

 

          A.  When the people of the city came to Jesus they found the man who had been                   possessed by the demons sitting at the feed of Jesus, V. 15.  (Not running and              screaming and attacking)

          B.  He was clothed, V. 15.

                      1.  These were no doubt clothes furnished by the disciples of Jesus.

                      2.  This was the first time in several years he had worn clothes. 

          C.  He was in his right mind, V. 15. 

 

III.  The reaction of the people of the city, V. 15b

 

          A.  They were astounded at the mighty power of the Lord, V. 15b

          B.  Never-the-less they asked Him to leave, V. 16-17.

                      1.  They were not concerned about the welfare of the man. 

                      2.  They were not concerned about what Jesus could do for them.

                      3.  They were concerned only about their financial loss.

          C.  Jesus left as they requested, V. 18a.

          D.  But there was one man who wanted to go with Jesus, V. 18b. 

          E.  Jesus, instead, sent him on a mission, V. 19-20. 

 

IV.  What Jesus can do for men who are in the clutches of the Devil

 

          A.  Jesus can set them free, John 8:36.

          B.  Jesus can clothe them in righteousness.

                      1.  He can cleanse a man of all his sins. 

                      2.  He can give to that man His own righteousness.

          C.  He can start a man thinking on the right track. 

          D.  Jesus can save him from the fires of hell and take him to heaven. 

 

Conclusion: 

 

          There may be someone here today in the clutches of the Devil.  Jesus can save your soul and set you free.  And He will if you will call on Him and trust Him to save you. 

          Those of us who are already saved ought to obey Him.  The winds and the waves had no choice.  The demons had no choice.  The man, after he was set free from the demons, had a choice and he chose to obey Jesus.  You have a choice.  What will you choose to do?

 

 

 

#27

 

Mark 5:18-20  WHAT GREAT THINGS THE LORD HAS DONE FOR ME

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus is talking to a man who had been wild.  He had been possessed a legion of demons and Jesus had cast them out.  The man had been a threat to himself and to others.  After Jesus cast out the demons he was seated, calm, clothed and in his right mind. 

          He wanted to go with Jesus wherever Jesus would go, but Jesus instructed him to go back to Decapolis instead and to tell the people there what great things Jesus had done for him.  He did as Jesus instructed. 

          In this text you see a modern day counterpart --- me.  I, too, was in the clutches of the Devil.  Let me tell you of some great things that the Lord has done for me.

 

I.  Jesus saved my soul

 

          A.  I was a 16 year old boy in Pensacola, Fla.

                      1.  I was in the clutches of the Devil and was on my way to hell. 

                      2.  I was afraid of dying because I knew that I would go to hell.

          B.  But one night at a little Missionary Baptist church I trusted Jesus Christ to be          my Savior and He saved my soul. 

                      1.  Nothing that anyone has ever done for me compares with this.

                      2.  It was (and still is) the best thing that has ever happened to me. 

                      3.  Yet this was just a beginning.  (He has done so much more for me since                    then.)          

         

II.  Jesus gave me a good wife

 

          A.  When I left Florida to come to Texas I told people that I was going to Texas to               get me a Texas Longhorn, but instead the Lord gave me a Texas Rose.   

          B.  Now getting a good wife does not compare with the salvation of my soul, but           getting a good wife has been (and still is) a great blessing to my life.

                      1.  I asked the Lord to pick out a good wife for me, and He did.

                      2.  He did a much better job for me than I could have done for myself. 

 

III.  Jesus has heard and answered many and many a prayer for me

 

          A..  And He still does. 

          B.  Some of the things I have asked for He has not given me yet, and maybe He                       never will.

                      1.  I do not expect the Lord to give me everything I ask for.  (I hope He                     doesn’t.)

                      2.  I know that He knows more about what is good for me than I do and I                   trust Him to know when to turn me down on something I have asked                              for.

          C.  But many of the things I have asked for I have received  and I thank God for                            them. 

 

IV.  Jesus has given me the privilege of pastoring a great church

 

          A.  It is not a big church nor a materially rich church.  (It is not even an elaborate              church building.)    

                      1.  Yet it is beautiful to me.

                      2.  And to me it is the best church in the world.  (I’ll leave it to God to                            determine which church is really the best.)

          B.  The way I feel about the church causes me to say, “Thank the Lord for the                             privilege of pastoring this church.”

 

Conclusion:

 

          I have told you some of the great things which Jesus has dome for me.  Now I want to tell you what great things Jesus can do for you. 

         

1.  He can save your soul.

2.  He can forgive your sin.  (All your sin)

3.  He can produce the new birth in your soul.

4.  He can raise your body from the grave.

5.  He can change your body into a new, glorified, immortal body. 

6.  He can see you safely through the judgment.

7.  He can make sure that you do not go to hell.           

8.  He can make sure that you go to heaven. 

          Will you call on Him now and trust Him now to save your soul?  Acts 16:31;  John 3:16; Rom. 10:13.  Will you who are already saved commit your life to Him? 

 

 

 

#28

 

Mark 5:21-24  A FATHER’S CONCERN FOR HIS CHILD

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had left Capernaum and gone over to the eastern side of the Sea of Galilee for a brief visit to the country of the Gadarines.  While there He cast a legion of demons out of a wild man.  The demons went into a herd of swine.  The swine ran into the sea and drowned.  Jesus was asked to leave that land and He did. 

 

I.  Jesus back at Capernaum, V. 21

 

          A.  Jesus made the trip back over the Sea of Galilee to Capernaum. 

          B.  A multitude of people soon gathered at the seashore where He ministered to                  them.

 

II.  The coming of one of the rulers of the synagogue, V. 22a

 

          A.  Usually each synagogue had two rulers.

                      1.  One would plan the service and make all arrangements.

                      2.  The other would officiate during the service.

          B.  He was from the synagogue at Capernaum. 

                      1.  This was the synagogue that Jesus had regularly attended in His earlier                             ministry at Capernaum.

                      2.  Jesus had frequently spoken at this synagogue. 

          C.  This was also the synagogue which had recently been visited by scribes from                     and elders from Jerusalem who were in opposition to Jesus.

          D.  It was there that they had waited to see if Jesus would heal the man with the                             withered hand.

          E.  The opposition to Jesus had become so great in that synagogue that Jesus had             made a break with the synagogue and on each sabbath day had started meeting                 altogether at the seashore instead of the synagogue.

          F.  Now here comes one of the rulers of that very same synagogue out to the                      seashore where Jesus was.  We might at first be tempted to ask:

                      1.  Why don’t they leave Him alone?

                      2.  They have already forced Him out of the synagogue; what more do they                   want? 

 

III.  The concern of this man for his child, V. 22b-23-24

 

          A.  The ruler of the synagogue fell at the feet of Jesus.  (If he is there to criticize,                 he is going about it in a strange way.)

          B.  He was not there to criticize, but to beg for help. 

                      1.  He had seen Jesus heal the man with the withered hand. 

                      2.  He knew of many others whom Jesus had healed. 

                      3.  Now one of his own family was deathly ill.

          C.  He pled for Jesus to go to his home and heal his little girl.  (As we see the                       expression on his face, hear the desperation in his voice, see the trembling of                      his hands, see the quivering of his lips, we know he is a desperate man.)

          D.  He knew that Jesus could heal:  The question was “Would He be willing to go            to his home and heal his little girl?”

                      1.  After all ---  as an official of the synagogue, he would represent the                            opposition.

                      2.  Without hesitation Jesus went with him to go to his home.

 

IV.  The need for concern on the part of parents today

 

          A.  Parents today have many reasons to be concerned about their children. 

                      1.  Liquor, dope, prostitution, gangs, aids, unwanted pregnancies and even                              Devil worship.

                      2.  Schools are infested with drugs pushers, fights, gangs and al manner of                        problems. 

          B.  Then there are the usual problems of teaching, discipline and growing into                     adulthood.  (At school, at home or wherever)

          C.  There is also a constant threat of illness, and accident. 

          D.  But the greatest danger of all is the danger of hell.

                      1.  Your child is not a little angel; he is a sinner. 

                      2.  Unless he or she comes under the influence of the gospel and gets                            saved, he will spend eternity in hell.

                      3.  He may not die young, but when he does die he will still be your child                    and your child will go to hell if he is not saved. 

          E.  What you, as a parent or grandparent, need to do is what Jarius did. 

                      1.  You need to fall at the feet of Jesus.

                      2.  You need to be just as concerned about the spiritual well-being of your                     child as Jairus was about the physical well-being of his. 

                      3.  You need to plead with Jesus for your child. 

 

 

 

#29

 

Mark 5:24-34  A WOMAN WHO REACHED OUT AND TOUCHED JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          A telephone company has popularized the expression, “Reach out and touch someone.”  The; woman in our text did.  She touched Jesus.  Jesus had started to the home of Jairus.  The crowd followed behind Him.  She joined in the crowd and reached out and touched Him. 

 

I.  Her need, V. 25-26

 

          A.  The faces in the crowd must have blended together and looked pretty much                    alike, but there was one woman who was different.  (There was one certain                        woman.)                         

          B.  This woman had a need of Jesus.

                      1.  She had  a disease, an issue of blood. 

                      2.  She had this disease for 12 long years. 

          C.  She had done what she could to get rid of this disease.

                      1.  She had been to the doctor.  (To doctor after doctor)

                      2.  She had spent all she had.

          D.  She had suffered much. 

                      1.  She had suffered from the disease itself. 

                      2.  She had suffered at the hands of the doctors.  (When they could not                      cure her they experimented.)

                      3.  He was no better, but worse. 

         

II.  Her opportunity, V. 27

 

          A.  She heard that Jesus was passing by. 

                      1.  When she heard this she was not in the crowd, but at a distance. 

                      2.  Because of the issue of blood it was against the Law of Moses for her                      to get in a crowd where she might be touched. 

          B.  She had a chance to be healed. 

                      1.  It was probably her one and only chance. 

                      2.  If she did not take advantage of this opportunity she would probably die                    soon.  (She was getting worse.)

          C.  If she was discovered in the crowd, she would be in big trouble;  if she didn’t,                 she would die.

          D.  With great effort she plunged into the crowd and touched the garment of                             Jesus.

                      1.  Luke says that she touched only the border of the garment. 

                      2.  This way He could not feel her touch through His garment. 

                      3.  This way she hoped to avoid being discovered. 

          III.  Her faith, V. 28

 

          A.  She believed that if she could but touch His garment that she would be healed. 

          B.  It was not that she had faith in His garment, but she had that much faith in                            Him. 

 

IV.  Her healing, V. 29

 

          A.  immediately she stopped bleeding. 

          B.  Immediately she felt strong and well.

                      1.  He was calling for her to acknowledge publicly that she had been                            healed. 

                      2.  Sis. Davis has an expression that she uses after she gets over a bad spell                      of asthma;  she says, “It feels good to feel good.”

 

V.  Her silence, V. 30-32

 

          A.  The Lord stopped, turned around and asked, “Who touched my clothes?”

                      1.  He was calling for her to acknowledge publicly that she had been                            healed.

                      2.  Just like He wants one who has been saved to acknowledge it publicly. 

          B.  The disciples responded saying that it could have been almost anybody who                     touched Him, V. 31.

                      1.  Others may have touched Him, but if so her touch was different.

                      2.  Her’s was a touch of faith.

          C.  Out of fear she remained silent.  (She was afraid that she would be punished.)

          D.  The eyes of Jesus began searching the faces of those near Him. 

                      1.  He must have deliberately avoided looking directly at her at first, V. 32.

                      2.  As His eyes drew closer to her she must have nearly panicked.

                      3.  When His eyes looked directly at her and stopped, her heart melted                             within her. 

 

VI.  Her fearful confession, V. 33

 

          A.  She was very much afraid to confess, much like one can be afraid to come                              down the aisle of a church. 

          B.  But she fell at His feet and confessed. 

 

VII.  Her comfort, V. 34

 

          A.  It was her faith in Jesus that made her whole. 

          B.  Jesus spoke words of comfort to her. 

          C.  For the first time in 12 years she was well.  (For the fist time in 12 years she                             felt good.)

          D  For the first time in 12 years she had peace. 

 

VIII.  The situation here today

 

          A.  Today Jesus faces this congregation.

                      1.  The faces tend to bled together and look somewhat alike. 

                      2.  But somewhere within this congregation there is a certain someone                         standing in need of Jesus. 

          B.  Its certain someone is not sick physically, but is sick spiritually.  (Sin sick)

          C.  You have tried to overcome the problem, but the problem is not better --- it is           worse. 

          D.  If you keep going the way things are now you will wind up in hell pretty soon. 

          E.  Today you have an opportunity to be saved. 

          F.  I am going to ask you to reach out and touch Jesus with a touch of faith.                        1.  I am asking you to trust Jesus to save your soul.

                      2.  I am also asking you to come forward to confess Jesus as your Savior. 

 

 

 

#30

 

Mark 5:35-43  THE RAISING OF THE DAUGHTER OF JAIRUS

 

Introduction:

 

          Jairus had asked Jesus to go to his home and heal his daughter.  They had started that direction when a woman with an issue of blood touched the border of Jesus’s garment and Jesus stopped to ask who touched Him.  I’m sure Jairus was not happy at this interference.  When Jesus told the woman to go in peace Jairus must have silently said, “Yes, go.  Please go.  Just go!”

 

I.  Disheartening news, V. 35

 

          A.  Certain ones came from the home of Jairus to meet them, V. 35.

                      1.  Even before they spoke Jairus must have read the bad news written in                        their faces.

                      2.  When they spoke they confirmed the worst of his fears.  (They said,                    “Thy daughter is dead.”)

                      3.  His heart must have sunk within him.

          B.  They further said, “Why trouble the Master any further?”

                      1.  They meant this in respect to Jesus, but in reality what they said cast                          doubts upon Jesus. 

                      2.  It was is if to say, “It is too late now.  Even Jesus cannot help your                            daughter now.”

                      3.  They knew the Lord had power to heal; they did not know that He had                     the power to raise the dead.

          C.  As disheartening as it was this must have made sense to Jairus.

                      1.  It was now confirmed that his daughter was dead.

                      2.  His world was caving in around him. 

                      3.  He had done his best to get Jesus there in time to heal her.

                      4.  But now it must have seemed too late. 

 

II.  A message of hope, V. 36

 

          A.  Jesus said to Jairus, “Be not afraid.”

                      1.  Be not afraid to return to your home.

                      2.  Be not afraid to take me with you.

                      3.  Be not afraid that it is too late. 

                      4.  Although she is dead, it is not too late. 

          B.  Jesus also said, ;”Only believe.”

                      1.  Believe what?

                      2.  Jesus was talking about raising his daughter from the dead and said,                    “Only believe.”  (Believe in me.)

          C.  At this point the faith of Jairus was put to the test.

                      1.  Yet Jesus was not only testing his faith; He was seeking to strengthen                        his faith.

                      2.  Up to this point Jairus had only believed that Jesus could heal the sick,                    but now he is asked to believe that Jesus can raise the dead.  (Believe in                       me.)

 

III.  The blessings of a close walk with Jesus, V. 37

 

          A.  At this time Jesus forbids any to go with Him except Peter, James and John.

                      1.  He forbids the multitude to go on with Him. 

                      2.  He also forbids most of His disciples to go on with Him and to witness                            the resurrection of this girl from the dead.

          B.  There were 2 other occasions when those same 3 apostles were given special                             privileges.  

                      1.  On the Mt. of Transfiguration

                      2.  In the Garden of Gethsemene

          C.  Jesus rewards those who are most devoted to Him with special privileges. 

 

IV.  The mourning crowd, V. 38-40

 

          A.  When Jesus arrived He found a great gathering of mourners, V. 38.

          B.  He asked, Why make ye this ado?”, V. 39a.

          C.  He said, “She is not dead, but sleepeth,” V. 39b.

          D.  He was pointing out that death does not end one’s life. 

                      1.  They thought this girls life was ended. 

                      2.  But just as there is an awakening after one’s nightly sleep even so there                           is an awakening after physical death.  (There is a resurrection.)

          E.  The people laughed Him to scorn, V. 40a.

 

V.  A marvelous resurrection, V. 40b-43

 

          A.  Jesus put everybody out except the mother and father plus Peter, James and                      John, V. 40b.

          B.  Then Jesus took these and entered the room where the corpse of the little girl                            lay, V. 40b.

          C.  Jesus commanded that she should arise, V. 41.

          D.  Immediately she got up and started walking around in the room, V. 42a.

                      1.  She was not only alive, but she was well.  (She could walk.)

                      2.  Mark tells that she was 12 years old, V. 42b. 

                      3.  That is, she was not a baby, but was old enough to walk. 

                      4.  And she would walk like any energetic 12 year old would walk.                             (Perhaps she skipped around the room as a 12 year old might do.)

          E.  They were all astonished, V. 42b.

          F.  Jesus instructed them all not to tell that He had raised the girl from the dead, V.             43a.

          G.  He commanded that she should be fed, V. 43b. 

                      1.  It was time that she resume her normal life.

                      2.  They were not to tell that He had raised her from the dead, but they                            themselves were to know that He had done so. 

 

VI.  Why did God have this put in the Bible?

 

          A.  Because it is true.

                      1.  Yes, of course, just as all the Bible is true.

                      2.  But there were many other events which were true that took place in                           the life and ministry that did not get put in the Bible.           

          B.  Because this story hits home as far as life today is concerned.

                      1.  When it is your loved one who is at the point of death, God wants you                       to know that all is not hopeless.  (God still hears and answers prayer                            and He can make your loved one well again.  It depends not so much on                          the doctor and medicine as it does on the Lord.)                                   

                      2.  When your loved one does not get well but dies God wants you to

                           know that if he is saved all is not hopeless.  (In fact “It is well.”)

                      3.  God wants you to know that if you are saved all is not hopeless for you                     even though you die. 

                      4.  Only when one dies unsaved is it hopeless.  (He will burn in Hell.)

         

Conclusion:

 

          I am here to preach to you that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the Living God, the Savior of men.  If you will trust Him He will save your soul.  “Be not afraid.  Only believe.”  Believe in Jesus. 

          If your unsaved loved one will trust in Jesus he, too, will be saved, Acts 16:30-31.

 

 

 

#31

 

Mark 6:1-6  AN ASTONISHING UNBELIEF

 

Introduction:

 

          In spite of the great popularity of Jesus there is a growing number of people who reject Him.  In our text Jesus visits His own hometown of Nazareth and there encounters an unbelief that is astonishing even to Him. 

 

I.  The unbelief He had already encountered at Capernaum, V. 1a

 

          A.  The Jewish leadership at Capernaum had already made up their minds that                        Jesus is not the Christ. 

                      1.  They had watched Jesus on the sabbath day to see if he would heal a                          man with a withered hand.

                      2.  They had intended to accuse Him of breaking the sabbath and have Him                        stoned to death if He did.

          B.  Jesus outwitted them by asking beforehand which is lawful on the sabbath ----          to do good or to do evil.

          C.  But He never returned to the Capernaum synagogues; instead He met with the                multitudes on the seashore.                  

          D.  There was one notable exception among the Jewish leaders at Capernaum and                that was Jairus who had come to Jesus asking Jesus to heal his little daughter. 

          E.  Never-the-less, the opposition at Capernaum was so great that Jesus now                            leaves Capernaum and goes elsewhere, V. 1a.

                      1.  Up to this point Capernaum had been His chief place of residence. 

                      2.  From this point onward He would return there for only brief visits. 

                      3.  Jesus had been rejected by the leadership of Capernaum even though                             He was still very popular with the masses of people.

 

II.  The unbelief He encountered at Nazareth, V. 1b-2

         

          A.  Jesus arrived on the scene at Nazareth, V. 1. 

                      1.  They might not have a place in their hearts for Him, but Jesus had a                         place in His heart for them and wanted them to be saved. 

                      2.  The disciples go with Him.  (It is the responsibility of the Lord’s                            disciples to remain true to His even when others turn against Him.)

          B.  On the sabbath day Jesus went to the synagogue at Nazareth, V. 2a. 

                      1.  As usual Jesus got an opportunity to speak, V. 2a. 

                      2.  The people were astonished at His great knowledge and wisdom,,

                           V. 2a.

          C.  Immediately they were filled with suspicion, V. 2. b. 

                      1.  They wondered where He got such knowledge and wisdom.

                      2.  They wondered where He got the power to lay hands on the sick and                     heal them. 

                      3.  They were inclined to believe the lie of the Pharisees that He did these                   things by the power of Beelzebub.

          D.  They refused to view Jesus from any way other than a from a human point of             view, V. 3.

                      1.  They remembered Him as a carpenter.

                      2.  They remembered Him as Mary’s son. 
                      3.  They knew His brothers and sisters. 

                      4.  It insulted their intelligence to suggest that He was anything other than                        a man; they were offended. 

 

lII.  Jesus’s answer to their objections, V. 4

 

          A.  Jesus pointed out that it was not uncommon for the Old Testament prophets to                      be unpopular in their own home town.

          B.  This did not mean that they were not from God and likewise His lack of                             popularity in Nazareth did not prove that He is not of God.

          C.  Even today a preacher is apt to be accepted less in his own home town,                                         among his own friends and neighbors and among his own kinfolk

 

IV.  A people Jesus could not help, V. 5

 

          A.  Jesus could not heal many people in Nazareth. 

                      1.  It was not that He lacked the power to do so.

                      2.  It was that only a few would come to Him to be healed. 

                      3.  The few who came He did heal.  (He never failed to heal any who                             came.)

          B.  A similar thing is true in salvation. 

                      1.  Jesus can save every lost sinner.

                      2.  But He will not save those who will not trust in Him.

                      3.  He does save all who trust in Him.

 

V.  The astonishing unbelief of those people, V. 6a

 

          A.  Jesus was not surprised at their unbelief, but He was astonished by it.  (They                               disbelieved in spite of an overwhelming evidence.)     

                      1.  The Old Testament scriptures clearly identified Him as the Messiah. 

                      2.  The miracles He had done at Capernaum identified Him as the Messiah. 

                      3.  The few miracles He did at Nazareth identified Him as the Messiah. 

                      4.  The great knowledge and wisdom He had displayed showed Him to be                        the Messiah.

                      5.  John the Baptist had identified Him as the Messiah.

          B.  In much the same way the unbelief of some today is astonishing. 

                      1.  They can read the gospel message from God’s Holy word and yet they                    reject it.

                      2.  They can witness the salvation of others and yet not get saved.

                      3.  They can come under the conviction by the Holy Spirit of God and yet                      not get saved. 

 

VI.  A tragic consequence and a solemn warning, V. 6b. 

 

          A.  It is tragic that the people of Nazareth missed such an opportunity.

                      1.  There were so many sick fold who needed to be healed. 

                      2.  There were so many unsaved who needed to be saved. 

                      3.  But when they rejected Jesus He turned from them and went on to seek                  others who would trust Him. 

          B.  So it is today:

                      1.  There are so many who need to be saved.

                      2.  Many have great opportunity to be saved now.

                      3.  If one rejects Jesus He will just go on to others.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Please do not pass up your opportunity to be saved.

          2.  If you are saved, please do not pass up your opportunity to serve Jesus. 

 

 

 

#32

 

Mark 6:7-13  THE FIRST PREACHING BY THE APOSTLES

 

Introduction:

 

          Perhaps you have heard some preacher preach his first sermon.  Wouldn’t you like to have been present to hear the apostles preach their first sermons.  By means of this text we can get at least a limited idea of what it was like when they went out and preached. 

 

I.  The sending out of the twelve, V. 7

 

          A.  Jesus had left Capernaum and gone to Nazareth:  He left Nazareth and was                      going through towns and villages.  (We do not know where He was at the time            that He sent the 12 out to preach.)

          B.  They had spent about 3 years with Him listening to Him preach and teach and          watching Him heal the sick. 

          C.  Jesus now calls the 12 together and send them out to preach to the villages and          cities of Israel. 

                      1.  This is not the call to be preachers, that had been done a long time ago                      back at Capernaum. 

                      2.  This was not to ordain them.  (That had been done back in chapter 3.)

                      3.  This was a time for instruction and orientation. 

          D.  He sent them forth two by two.

                      1.  This was in keeping with the law of Moses.  (2 or 3 witnesses were                            required to establish a thing.)

                      2.  This was also for the purpose of companionship.  (We all need Christian                          companionship.)

          E.  He gave them power to cast out demons.

                      1.  He never sends forth His servants powerless.

                      2.  We have no power to cast out demons today, but we do have the same                         Holy Spirit who helped them.

 

II.  The matter of provisions, V. 8-10

 

          A.  The apostles were not permitted to take any of their own money, V. 8.  (No                     doubt they had some funds on hand, but were not allowed to use their own                   funds.)

          B.  They were not allowed to take extra provisions,  V. 9.

          C.  It was not that the Lord was unconcerned about their needs. 

          D.  The disciples were to learn to trust the Lord to provide.. 

          E.  They were to learn to accept provisions as supplied by the people to whom                              they preached, V. 10.    

          F.  The people were to supply them with a place to live, with food on the table and          with clothes for their backs as needed. 

 

III.  A woe pronounced on those who would not receive them, V. 11

 

          A.  Jesus pronounced a woe on the person, the house, or the city or village which                   would not receive those apostles and their word.

                      1.  They were men of God with the message of God.  (To fail to receive                             them and their message was to reject God and His message.)

                      2.  It would be more tolerable for the people of Sodom and Gomorrah in                    judgment than for those who would reject the apostles and the gospel                             message which they preached. 

          B.  It is still dangerous for people to reject the preaching of the Word of God. 

                      1.  The unsaved who reject it will go into the fires of hell.

                      2.  The saved who reject it will not lose their salvation, but they are in                            trouble with God.  (The saved person who will not come to church                            should not be surprised if soon gets to the place that he cannot come to                        church.)

 

IV.  The first preaching done by the apostles, V. 12-13

 

          A.  They went and they preached, V. 12.

                      1.  Mark says nothing about how well they preached. 

                      2.  He says nothing about their delivery or their speaking ability. 

                      3.  They may or may not have done well. 

          B.  But they preached the word of God and that is what was important.  (It was a                               lot more important than whether or not they has a good delivery.)

                      1.  They preached repentance.  (The same message that John the Baptist                       preached and that Jesus preached.)       

                      2.  This is what men must do in order to be saved. 

                      3.  They, no doubt, preached that men should trust in the Christ. 

                      4.  They must have also explained that Jesus is the Christ.

          C.  There were great results from their ministry. 

                      1.  They cast out demon spirits.

                      2.  They healed the sick.

                      3.  But even more important, those who repented and trusted in the Christ                     got saved. 

 

 

 

#33

 

Mark  6:14-29  JOHN THE BAPTIST BEHEADED

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had sent the 12 apostles to preach.  They preached, they cast out demons and they healed the sick all in the name of Jesus.  The fame of Jesus increased all the more to the point that one of the servants of Herod brought news of Him to Herod, saying that Jesus is John the Baptist come back to life, V. 14.  Other servants said that He is Elijah come back to life again, V. 15a.  Still others disagreed, but they did acknowledge that Jesus is a prophet of God, 15b.  But they did not persuade Herod.  Herod continued to insist that Jesus was John the Baptist come back to life, V. 16. 

 

I.  Herod’s arrest of John because of Herodias, V. 17

 

          A.  Herod had earlier arrested John and put him in prison, V. 17.

          B.  He had done this to try and appease Herodias, his wife, V. 17.  (She would                              have much preferred that he kill John.) 

          C.  Herod had visited his brother Philip and had an affair with his brother’s wife,                   Herodias.

          D.  He divorced his wife, she divorced Philip and they married. 

          E.  John had denounced Herod publicly for this sin, V. 18.

          F.  Herodias was furious and prevailed upon Herod to arrest John. 

 

II.  Herod’s protection of John from Herodias, V. 19-20

 

          A.  Herodias hated John and would have killed John while he was in prison, but                       she was prevented from doing so, V. 19.

          B.  Herod feared to kill John, V. 20a.  (Matthew said that it was because John was              popular with the people and he was afraid that they would revolt if he were to           kill John.)

          C..  Mark says that he also feared what God would do to him if he killed John, V.                20a. 

          D.  Mark says that Herod, therefore, “observed him.” V. 20.

                      1.  Literally he “guarded” him or “protected” him. 

                      2.  That is, he was protecting John from Herodias. 

          E.  Actually, Herod respected John, V. 20b. 

                      1.  He visited John often in the prison. 

                      2.  He did many things to show John favors. 

                     

III.  The day of opportunity for Herodias, V. 21

 

          A.  Herodias persisted in her intentions to kill John and waited for her                                         opportunity. 

          B.  Eventually her opportunity came, V. 21.

                      1.  On his birthday Herod made a feast for his lords, V. 21.

                      2.  Herodias arranged for her daughter, Salome,  to entertain Herod and his                             lords by dancing for him.  (Salome was her daughter by Philip.)

          C.  Herodias knew Herod well.

                      1.  She knew that he would drink much wine at the party. 

                      2.  She knew that he had a weakness for a pretty female face and figure. 

                      3.  She knew that he would be generous to Salome. 

                      4.  She would coach Salome and get her to ask Herod for the death of John                              the Baptist.

 

IV.  The success of the plot, V. 22-29

 

          A.  Salome danced before Herod and his lords and she wowed them, V. 22.

          B.  Herod was so pleased that in is drunken condition, he made an overly                                         generous offer to her.           

                      1.  Even Herodias must have been surprised.

                      2.  She could ask anything up to half the kingdom, V. 22-23.

          C.  Salome asked her mother what to ask for and Herodias told her to ask for                               the head of John the Baptist, V. 24.

          D.  Salome did and her request was reluctantly granted, V. 25-28.

          E.  The disciples of John the Baptist gave John’s body a decent burial, V. 29

 

V.  Missing out on a great opportunity to get saved

 

          A.  This text started out by talking about Jesus so let us get back to Him.  (Several               people missed a great opportunity to get saved.) 

          B.  Herod did. 

                      1.  He mistook Jesus to be John the Baptist; he failed to recognize Him                    as the Christ, the Savior, V. 14.

                      2.  In the many visits that Herod had made to John while John was in                        prison, John must have witnessed to him about Jesus and urged him to                             repent and be saved. 

                      3.  He ruled in the district where most of the ministry of Jesus took place.                              (He could have so easily gone to see and hear Jesus personally and have                     seen the miracles that Jesus was performing..)

                      4.  Even after his servants came and talked to him about Jesus he could                              have gone to see and talked with Him in person.

                      5.  He had great opportunity to get saved, but Herod was influenced by his                       wife, Herodias, and he passed up his opportunity.

          C.  The members of Herod’s court did, V. 15.  (They mistook Jesus for Elijah                             come back to life or perhaps as one of the other Old Testament prophets, but       they failed to recognize Him as the Christ who could save their souls.)

          D.  Even Salome did.  (She had a pretty face and a gorgeous figure, but she, like                      her mother, had an ugly and ruthless heart.  In hell none of her beauty would                               be left.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  What about you?  How many opportunities to get saved have you passed up?

          2.  Do not pass up the one you have right now. 

          3.  If you are already saved you have an opportunity to unite with this church and          serve the Lord.  Do not pass up your opportunity to serve the Lord who saved          you..

          . 

 

 

#34

 

Mark 6:30  GIVING ACCOUNT TO THE LORD

 

Introduction:

 

          The apostles had been sent out to preach in the cities and villages of Israel.  He had apparently appointed a time when they would all meet together back at Capernaum.  It is this regathering which we see in our text. 

 

I.   The apostles giving account to Jesus

 

          A.  First of all, they must have expressed that they were overjoyed to see Jesus                   again.

                      1.  This was the first time in about 3 years that they had been away from                    Jesus for more than a few hours at a time.

                      2.  It must have been a joyous experience to see Him again. 

          B.  It must have also been good to see one another.

                      1.  It is true that they had experienced their disagreements and jealousies.

                      2.  But they also had a genuine love for one another.  

                      3.  They had learned to lay aside their petty differences and work together                          for Jesus.

          C.  They reported to Jesus all that they had done and what they thought. 

                      1.  They reported which cities and villages to which they ha been.

                      2.  They reported whether they were well received or rejected.

                      3.  They reported how they were provided for by the people. 

                      4.  They reported their preaching and their conversions. 

          D.  Jesus was not so much interested is “how” they had preached, but in “what”                          they had preached. 

          E.  One thing in which the apostles were interested was whether or not Jesus was          pleased with what they had done and what they had said. 

 

II.  The saved giving account to Jesus

 

          A.  Just as the 12 were sent out to preach to Israel, even so we who are saved have          been sent out to represent Him to the world.

                      1.  Each New Testament church has been sent out. 

                      2.  Each member of each church has been sent out. 

                      3.  Each saved person is to witness for Christ. 

          B.  God has appointed a time when we will be gathered to appear before Jesus and          give account to Him. 

                      1.  We will give account to Him for the way we have lived our lives.

                      2.  We will give account to Him for how well we have carried out the                             assignment of carrying the gospel to the world.

                      3.  We will give account to Him for what we have preached and taught. 

                      4.  We will give account to Jesus for every deed, every word and every                              thought. 

          C.  One thing we will be most interested in at that time is whether or not the Lord                is pleased with what we have done and said. 

          D.  We will wish then that we had pleased the Lord in all things.

 

III.  Giving account to Jesus on a daily basis

 

          A.  The apostles did not have to wait until The Judgment Seat of Christ to appear                 before Christ and give account to Him; but they appeared before Him and gave                   account to Him right then in their lifetime.  .

          B.  Even so we have the privilege of coming before Him and giving account to           Him on a daily basis.  (We can come before His presence daily in prayer and    review with Him the events of the day.)

          C.  Our primary concern should be whether or not He is pleased with what we                             have done and what we have said.  (If we become aware that He is not pleased         with what we have done or said then we should change our ways and seek to          please Him.)

          D.  The time will surely come when we will have no choice about coming before                              Him.

                      1.  We will come before Him as He sits on the Judgment Seat and we will                            come before Him and give account for every deed, every word and                           every thought. 

                      2.  At that time we will be concerned about whether or not we have                            pleased Him.   

                      3.  We ought to be concerned about it now and do something about it.  

 

IV.  The unsaved giving account before the Lord

 

          A.  The unsaved, too, will some day be called in before the Lord to give account to            Him.

          B.  They will give account to Him as He sits on The Great White Throne and                             judges all who are unsaved to determine the extent of their suffering.  . 

          C.  They, too, will give account for every deed, every word and every thought. 

          D.  They will give account of every opportunity they have had to hear the gospel                  message and to trust Jesus Christ for the salvation of their soul. 

          E.  They will wish then that they had repented of their sin and trusted Jesus to save         them and keep them out of hell. 

         

 

 

#35

 

Mark 6:31-32  THE GOSPEL MINISTRY, A BUSY LIFE

 

Introduction:

 

          The 12 had been on  a preaching tour.  In this text they are called aside to rest. 

 

I.  The importance of the work which the apostles were doing

 

          A.  It was the most important work in the world. 

          B.  The most vital need of every man, woman, boy and girl is to be saved. 

                      1.  It is far more important to stay out of hell than it is to have a good job,                     a good education, good meals or good clothes.

                      2.  It is more important than getting well when gravely sick.

          C.  The work of the ministry involves preaching the gospel to the unsaved,                                      teaching and training the saved, and teaching the saved to be dedicated to                          God’s will.

 

II.  The surprise move of Jesus

 

          A.  In view of the importance of the work the apostles had been doing, it comes as              a surprise that Jesus would say, “Break time!  Stop what you’re doing and take                   a break.”

          B.  It is especially surprising in view of the great opportunities upon their arrival                            back at Capernaum.

                      1.  The people were coming out in greater numbers than ever. 

                      2.  It would seem that Jesus would say, “This is your chance.  Get with it!

                           Do the work I have called you to do.”

          C.  But instead He said, “Come ---- into a desert place and rest awhile,” V. 31

                (Not a dry place, but a deserted place --- away from the multitudes) 

          D.  Understand that He was not calling on them to abandon the ministry, but only                to rest for a short while.

 

III.  Their need of rest

 

          A.  They had had a busy and tiring schedule on their preaching; tour.  (They had                      been busy from early morning until late in the evening day after day.)

          B.  Now that they had returned to Capernaum, they were busier than ever.

                      1.  They had no time even to eat. 

                      2.  I can identify with that because of my experience in Jacksonville, Texas.                             (Quite frequently my wife and I had to take turns answering the phone                        in order to eat our meals.)

          C.  If they were to remain in Capernaum, they would have that same hectic pace                      day after day.

 

IV.  The busy life of a god called preacher

 

          A.  The very nature of the ministry is to be involved with people.  (Without people                 we would have no ministry.)

          B.  Any number of jobs in the ministry could be full time.

                      1.  Preaching to the unsaved could easily be full time.  (There are always                            more to reach with the gospel.) 

                      2.  Studying the Bible could be full time.  (There is much about the Bible                   which we need to learn..)

                      3.  Studying other books related to the Bible or to our world could be full                              time.  (There is a world of information yet to be learned.)

                      4.  Visitation could be full time.  (Prospects,. the sick, the bereaved, new                    comers, absentees.  There is no end.)

                      5.  Counseling the troubled could be full time.  (There is a world of trouble                            around us.)

 

V.  The need for rest

 

          A.  If a preacher does not take time for rest and leisure the very work he is trying                   to accomplish will suffer.

                      1.  He cannot accomplish more by pushing on. 

                      2.  He can actually accomplish more by taking a break. 

          B.  If a preacher does not take a break his relationship with his family will suffer.

                      1.  He  needs to spend time with his children and grandchildren. 

                      2.  He needs to spend time with his wife.

          C.  If a preacher does not take time for rest and leisure his health will suffer.                              (When his health suffers his work for the Lord will suffer.)

 

VI.  Two important questions

 

          A.  Why did Jesus insist on the apostles taking time out for a rest?  And why did                           God take up valuable space in the Bible to record the incident? 

          B.  Because it is important that men who labor in the gospel ministry should                            understand that they can do a better job by taking some time out.

                      1.  They need to pace themselves. 

                      2.  There would be a lot less “burn-out” in the ministry.

          C.  Because it is also important that the people to whom these men preach should                  understand that their preacher needs some time off.

                      1.  He needs not only annual or semi-annual vacation time, but he needs a                         day of f weekly.  (The people should understand that on a certain day of                             the week they are to call for him only in case of an emergency.)  

                      2.  If the preacher will not take time off on his own initiative, then the                            people need to insist that he take some time off.  (It is in the best                            interest of both the preacher and the church that he do so.)

 

VII.  A great difficulty involved

 

          A.  It is difficult for a preacher to stay at home and take a break from his work. 

                      1.  It is hard form him to take a vacation or even a day off that way. 

                      2.  I speak from experience.  (Last year it was my choice not leave home at                           vacation time.  Instead I buried myself in my office trying to catch up on                             some of my work.  But when some of our people got in the hospital, I                     still made hospital calls and spent time on the phone ministering to the                         flock.  I may do that again.  But it really does not give the preacher and                              his family the break they need.)

          B.  But Jesus showed us how to find rest.

                      1.  He called upon the apostles to get completely away and to go some                   place where they could be alone.

                      2.  That is really the best way for anybody to get a rest.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  It is good to know that when I am away, we have capable people who will be                             carrying on the work for Jesus.

          2.  If you are saved and would be interested in joining this church and going to                        work for the Lord, we would welcome your help.  We; need all the help we can               get. 

          3.  If you are a member here and you have not been helping in the work of this                      church, then shame on you.  The Lord’s work is still the most important work               in the world. 

          4.  If you are unsaved, then first let me say to you what I said in the beginning.  It            is far more important for you to be saved than anything else in the world. 

 

 

 

#36

 

Mark 6:33-34  SHEEP WITHOUT A SHEPHERD

 

Introduction:

 

          The apostles had been on an exhausting preaching tour.  When they returned to Capernaum the pace was no better.  They had no time even to eat their meals.  Jesus called upon them to go with Him apart and rest.  He needed to rest as badly as they did.  Thus, they boarded a boat to go to the other side of the lake. 

 

I.  The people seen by Jesus as sheep without a shepherd

 

          A.  The people saw Jesus and His disciples get on a boat and they saw the boat                     depart, V. 33a.

                      1.  They know Him --- that is, they recognized Him. 

                      2.  There was almost no way for such a well known figure and popular                            figure to do anything unobserved. 

                      3.  The only way they could have left unobserved would be for Jesus to                            work a miracle. 

          B.  The people ran around the shore of the lake in the direction the boat was                             going, V. 33b.

                      1.  Some ran fast enough and apparently the boat was moving slow enough                            that they beat the boat to the other side of the lake. 

                      2.  The others came also, but at a slower pace.  (Most of the people arrived                            after Jesus and His disciples were on shore.)

                      3.  As they ran along the shore, they attracted the attention of the people                            who lived there and many of them also came, V. 33b.

          C.  A multitude of about 5,000 people gathered not counting the women and                      children.  (Perhaps a total of about 10 or 15 thousand people.) 

          D.  Jesus was faced with a decision. 

                      1.  If He let the multitude stay, His plans for a rest for Himself and for His                            disciples would be shot. 

                      2.  If He sent them away he would not be able to minister to them and meet                   their needs.  (Only if they stayed could He minister to them.)

          E.  Jesus was moved with compassion toward them and so He let them stay,

               V. 34.

                      1.  Jesus gladly sacrificed His time of rest to minister to the people.         

                      2.  He also sacrificed the time of rest for His apostles. 

                      3.  So far as I can determine, not one apostle complained. 

                      4.  God’s preachers usually are glad to give their time, if only they can lead                    one person to salvation or help one person through a difficult time.  (If                       he is worth his salt that will be his attitude.)

          F.  Jesus saw the people as sheep without a shepherd, V. 34a.   

                      1.  Most of the scribes, the Pharisees, the priests, the rabbis would have                    said otherwise.  (They would have said, “We are their shepherds.”)

                      2.  Most of the people would also have said otherwise. 

                      3.  But as far as Jesus was concerned they had no shepherd.  (The leaders                            they had were actually a detriment to the people.  It was the blind                          leading the blind.)

          G.  Jesus began to teach the people many things, V. 34b..

                      1.  Matthew says only that He healed the sick. 

                      2.  Mark says only that He taught them. 

                      3.  Luke mentions both and says that He taught them about the kingdom of                      God. 

                      4.  He set Himself forth to them as the Shepherd whom they needed.  (He                     would teach them the spiritual truths that they needed if they would                             only receive them..)

 

II.  All who are unsaved are as sheep without a shepherd

 

          A.  Sheep without a shepherd are lost sheep.

                      1.  Some animals have an instinctive sense of direction.  (They know north                   from south; they can find their way home from great distances.)

                      2.  But a sheep without a shepherd is lost.

                      3.  A man, woman, boy or girl without Jesus Christ is lost.

          B.  A sheep without a shepherd is in danger.

                      1.  He is in danger of starving to death.  (He cannot find the green                                          pastures.)

                      2.  He is in danger of being attacked by viscous animals. 

                      3.  A man, woman, boy or girl without Jesus Christ is in danger of going to                           hell.

          C.  The people of Israel were following false shepherds and many people today are             following false shepherds.  (The gospel which they preach cannot save.)

          D.  The Shepherd which people need is Jesus Christ. 

                      1.  He is called in the Bible “The Good Shepherd.”

                      2.  He is the only one who can saved. 

                      3.  All who trust in Him are saved, John 3:18; ; John 10:27-28.

                      4.  They, too, are sheep, but they are sheep who have a Shepherd, Psalm                              23:1.

 

 

 

#37

 

Mark 6:35-44  THE MIRACULOUS FEEDING OF THE MULTITUDE

 

Introduction:

 

          There were actually two occasions in which Jesus fed a multitude miraculously.  This is the first and most spectacular of the two. 

 

I.  The day far spent, V. 35a

 

          A.  This day had begun for Jesus and the disciples back at Capernaum.

                      1.  They had been so busy that they had not time for their noon meal.

                      2.  They left by boat to cross over the Sea of Galilee to an isolated spot                     where they might rest.

                      3.  They may have eaten their noon meal on the boat. 

          B.  Once they arrived, they found that some of the people had beat them there.                         1.  These had run around the shoreline.

                      2.  Others, who followed, would soon arrive making a huge multitude. 

          C.  Jesus began immediately to minister to the people.

                      1.  He healed the sick. 

                      2.  He taught the people about the kingdom of God.

          D.  In this text, it is late in the day and the masses of people were far from                                         home.

 

II.  The disciples’ concern for the people, V. 35b-36

 

          A.  They suggested to Jesus that He send the multitude away that they might get                             food. 

          B.  They must have expected that He would follow their suggestion. 

          C.  They surely must not have expected His response. 

 

III.  The Lord’s instructions to the disciples, V. 37-38

 

          A.  The Lord surprised the disciples by saying, “You feed them,”

          B.  The disciples ask, “Shall we buy 200 pennyworth?”

                      1.  The penny (Roman coin) was a day’s wage.

                      2.  This was a considerable sum and it is probable that this was the                                        disciples’ way of saying, “We don’t have that much money.”

                      3.  They could have asked, “Where are we going to buy that much food                    and how are we going to get that much food out here?”

          C.  Jesus said, “How many loaves have you?  Go and see,” V. 38. 

          D.  When they knew they say, “Five loaves and two fishes.”  (John suggest that                             this was the lunch of a little lad.)

 

IV.  The miracle, V. 39-44

 

          A.  Jesus commanded that the multitude be seated in groups of hundreds and                      fifties, V. 39-40.

                      1.  If the crowd was milling about it would have been difficult to make sure                    that all would get fed.

                      2.  By having them seated in groups nobody would be missed when the                            food was distributed.

          B.  Jesus blessed and broke the five loaves and two fishes and gave them to the                            disciples to distribute to the people, V. 41.

                      1.  Each of the disciples customarily carried a small basket which could be                          used as a plate;.

                      2.  Jesus just kept breaking off bread and fish into the baskets and the                             apostles would distribute to the people.

                      3.  Probably 6 carried fish and 6 carried bread.

          C.  They were all filled, V. 42.

          D.  The 12 baskets were still full when all had been fed.  (Imagine them asking,                             “Does anybody want any more?”)

          E.  There were about 5,000 men, V. 44.

                      1.  The Greek word which here is translated “men” means adult males. 

                      2.  Matthew says that there were 5,000 men beside the women and                                                    children.

                      3.  The multitude must have numbered from 10 to 15 thousand. 

 

V.  The reaction of people to this Bible account

 

          A.  Those who have trouble believing that the Bible is God’s word and that Jesus             is the Son of God also have trouble believing the accuracy of this account.

                      1.  Many outright deny the accuracy of it. 

                      2.  Others try to explain it away. 

          B.  But those who believe the Bible to be inspired of God have no trouble                                         believing it to be true. 

          C.  Those who believe that Jesus is the Son of God have no trouble believing it.

 

VI.  What Jesus does today

 

          A.  He does not feed a multitude with only 5 loaves and 2 fishes, but He feeds                   multiplied millions from dirt. 

          B.  He takes hell bound sinners,  saves their souls and sends them on their way to                heaven. 

          C.  He takes Christian men, women, boys and girls who have little or no ability                             and blesses their lives and uses them mightily for the good of people and to the             glory of God. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  I am going to ask you to believe this Bible record.

          2.  I am going to ask you to believe that Jesus is the very Son of God.

          3.  I am going to ask you to trust Jesus Christ to save your soul.

          4.  I am going to ask you to give yourself to the Lord to be used in His service. 

 

 

#38

 

Mark 6:45-46  JESUS. ALONE WITH GOD IN PRAYER

 

Introduction:

 

          It was late when the disciples asked Jesus to send the multitude away.  It was later still when they finished eating.  John says that after they finished eating the multitude wanted to take Jesus by force and crown Him to be their king.  Jesus declined.  They were willing to let Him rule their nation, but not their lives.  They were ready for Him to deliver them from Rome, but not ready for Him to deliver them from sin.  He came not to sit upon a throne, but to hang on a cross. 

 

I.  Jesus sending the disciples away, V. 45

 

          A.  Having stoutly rejected the offer to be king, He sent the disciples away.  (The         first step in quelling the crowd’s intention to make Him king.) 

          B.  He instructed them to get in the boat and Mark says, go to Bethsaida.

          C.  Jon says that He told them to go to Capernaum.

          D.  Apparently Jesus intended for them to wait for Him at Bethsaida and then they         would go on to Bethsaida. 

 

II.  Jesus sending the multitude away, V. 46a

 

          A.  It was not a simple task to send a multitude of from 10 to 15 thousand people                 away.

          B.  Jesus could not just get on the loudspeaker and tell all of them at once to go                        home.

          C.  He must first speak to those closer to Him and persuade them to leave. 

          D.  Then He must speak to others and persuade them to leave.

          E.  And so on until all were gone. 

 

III.  Jesus, Himself, going away  ---   up into a mountain, V. 46b

 

          A.  Jesus went up into a mountain to pray, V. 46b.

          B.  This leads to a question:  Can you pray better in a mountain?  (Do you really                   get closer to God by going higher?)

          C.  The answer is:  No.  The mountain itself gave Him no assistance in His prayer. 

                      1.  The mountain did give Him solitude. 

                      2.  He was already alone down by the seashore when the disciples and the                            multitude left.

                      3.  But by going up into the mountain He made sure that His prayer would                             not be disturbed by someone returning.

 

IV.  What this teaches us about our own lives

 

          A.  It teaches that we need to spend time in prayer.

                      1.  If  Jesus Christ, the very Son of God needed to pray, then how                                                    much more we need to pray?

                      2.  If He who is All Wise needed to pray, then how much more do we who                           are so unwise need to pray?

                      3.  If He who is Almighty needed to pray, then how much more do we who                           are so weak need to pray?

                      4.  We need the wisdom, the guidance and the strength that only God can                           give.  . 

          B.  It teaches us that prayer is one of the most effective tool which we have of                             helping ourselves and our family.

                      1.  We need to work, but all our effort is to no avail without God. 

                      2.  We need knowledge and education, but prayer is more beneficial than                    the best of education.

                      3.  We need doctors and medicine, but prayer is far more beneficial than                    the best of doctors. 

                      4.  We need money and other material things, but prayer is worth more                   than all the money and all other material things in the world.

          C.  It teaches us that we need private prayer. 

                      1.  We who are Christians need to meet in public worship and join together                          in public prayer.

                      2.  We, as Christian families, need to have family prayer in our home;  we                       need to get together and pray.

                      3.  But we also need to get completely alone and spend time alone in                            prayer to God.

                      4.  It is when we are alone that we can best pour out our heart to God in                        prayer.  (Our thoughts are not interrupted by others.)

          D.  It teaches us that if we are going to spend time alone with God in prayer that          we must do as Jesus did. 

                      1.  Jesus did not just happen to find Himself alone with God;   He planned                           it that way.  

                      2.  He sent the disciples away and He sent the multitude away. 

                      3.  We live in a hustle and bustle world and we are not likely to just                                        accidentally find ourselves alone with God --- at least not often.

                      4.  Yet the more hurried our life is, the more we need to plan to be alone                   with God in prayer.

                      5.  We need to plan some time every day when we can be alone with God                    in prayer.  (No people, no TV, no radio, just you and God alone                            together.)

                     

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Answer this without raising your hands:  How many of you who are Christians            will start today and do something about your prayer life?  How many of you                    will start spending some time alone with God every day?

          2.  Also answer without raising your hands:  How many of you are unsaved?  Now      please do not wait until you are alone to get saved.  If you wait until some                            other time, the Devil will try to interfere and keep you from ever getting saved.                  The Bible teaches that NOW  is the best time to get saved.  It just may be the                         only time in which you can get saved.  Will you pray and ask God to help                      you to trust Jesus to be your Savior?  Will you ask Jesus to save you and keep             you out of hell and take you to heaven?  Will you do that right now?

 

 

 

#39

 

Mark 6:47-52  JESUS WALKING ON WATER

 

Introduction:

 

          How many of you have seen a spider walking on water?  How many of you have seen a man walk on water?  In our text Jesus did just that.

 

I.  The occasion, V. 47

 

          A.  Jesus and His disciples had crossed to the eastern side of the Sea of Galilee.

          B.  While there Jesus miraculously fed a multitude  of people. 

          C.  After feeding the multitude He instructed His disciples to get back in the boat        and go to Bethsaida and wait for Him.             

          D.  The disciples tried to obey. 

                      1.  They did get back in the boat and they did try to go to Bethsaida. 

                      2.  However, they got caught in a storm which prevented them from                    reaching Bethsaida.

 

II.  Jesus going to the disciples, V. 48a

 

          A.  After Jesus had sent the multitude away, He went into a mountain to spend                           some time alone with God in prayer.

          B.  After He concluded His prayer He set out to go and meet the disciples. 

                      1.  If they had been able to meet Him at Bethsaida, He would have been                   able to walk along the shoreline to meet them.

                      2.  However, they were caught in the storm out in the midst of the sea.                     (Probably about 4 or 5 miles out.)

                      3.  Mark says that Jesus could see them toiling to row the boat to safety.                             (He could see through the night and through the storm.).

                      4.  Since He could not walk on the land to meet them, He walked across                             the water to meet them at the boat which they were in. 

          C.  This is a feat that would ordinarily be impossible for a man to do. 

                      1.  It would have been impossible under any circumstances and especially                        during a storm.

                      2.  But with God all things are possible and Jesus is God. 

                      3.  It was no problem at all for Jesus.

 

III.  The arrival of Jesus and the reaction of the disciples, V. 48b-50a

 

          A.  When Jesus arrived He pretended to walk right past the boat, V. 48b. 

          B.  The disciples all saw Jesus and recognized Him, but thought He was an                                         apparition, a spirit, V. 49.

                      1.  They had never seen anyone walking on water.

                      2.  They had never even heard of anyone walk on water. 

          C.  They were frightened, V. 50.

                      1.  They were already frightened because of the storm.

                      2.  They were even more frightened of the spirit world. 

 

IV.  The comforting words of Jesus, V. 50

 

          A.  Jesus first gave a positive command:  “Be of good cheer.”

                      1.  The Lord does not want His people to live in constant fear, in constant                          dread or in worry.

                      2.  So Jesus said, in effect:  “Have faith!  Cheer up!”

          B.  Then Jesus gave the basis for having good cheer:  “It is I.”

                      1.  What they were seeing was not an apparition, but was really Jesus.

                      2.  The basis of all comfort is the Lord. 

                                  a.  If He were not real there would be no comfort. 

                                  b.  If He were not the Son of God then there would be no basis for                                      comfort.  (There would be no salvation, no hope.)

          C.  Jesus then gave a negative command:  “fear not.”         

                      1.  Thus, “Stop being afraid.  Calm down.  Stop worrying.” 

                      2.  “You just put everything in my hands and trust me to take care of it.”

 

V.  A surprising omission by Mark

 

          A.  Matthew tells about the apostle Peter also walking on water. 

                      1.  Peter said to Jesus, “If it is really you, bid me to come to you on the                            water.”

                      2.  Jesus said, “Come” and out of the boat Peter went. 

          B.  What makes it seem strange that Mark omitted this is that Peter and Mark were       such good friends.

                      1.  It would seem that Mark would have wanted to “put feather in the cap”                    of his very good friend, Simon Peter,  by recording that his friend did                      such a spectacular feat.

                      2.  But for whatever his reason, Mark made no mention of it. 

 

VI.  The amazement of the disciples, V. 51-52

 

          A.  Jesus then went up into the boat and the wind immediately calmed, V. 51a. 

          B.  The disciples were amazed, V. 51b.

                      1.  They could not dream that such a thing was possible. 

                      2.  They saw it with their own eyes and still had trouble believing it. 

          C.  Mark say that the reason they had trouble believing it was because of the                             hardness of their hearts, V. 52.

                      1.  Not hardness in the sense of rebellion.

                      2.  Rather hardness in the sense of being slow to learn.

                      3.  The Lord has just miraculously fed the multitude. 

                      4.  They should have understood that One who could do such a thing could                       also walk on water, calm the storm  ----- or do anything else that He                      chooses to do.

 

VII.  Key lessons for us

 

          A.  Jesus is Deity in human flesh. 

                      1.  He is the Second Person of the Trinity, the Son of God.

                      2.  He is Almighty and there is nothing impossible for Him.

                      3.  He is the One who created the whole world. 

          B.  Jesus not only has the power to work miracles, but He also has the power to                        save souls.  

                      1.  The purpose of His coming into the world was not to work miracles,                         but to save souls. 

                      2.  He died on the cross that He might successfully save the souls of those                   who trust in Him.

                      3.  He has the power to cleanse from sin, to raise the dead and to carry one                        into the portals of glory.

          C.  He, likewise, has the power to keep one saved. 

          D.  Jesus is able to help with the problems of this life. 

                      1.  Being saved does not keep one from getting caught in the storms.

                      2.  Being a good Christian does not keep one from getting caught in the                      storms of life.

                      3.  Yet we need to learn that when we are caught we should trust in Jesus                   to take care of us in our problems.

 

Conclusion:

 

          Trust Him to be your Savior.  Trust Him to be your help in your times of trouble.  Obey Him as your Lord.  Serve Him as your Master. 

 

 

 

#40

 

Mark 6:53-56            BRINGING OUR FRIENDS AND LOVED ONES TO JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          Gennesaret was a rich agricultural area south of Capernaum.  In our text today we see Jesus and His disciples enter into this district and we see the reception He received.  From this we learn something about the kind of reception we should give Him. 

 

I.  His entrance into the district, V. 53

 

          A.  Mark says that Jesus and His disciples “passed over” the sea.

                      1.  That is, they passed over to the western side of the sea. 

                      2.  Earlier they had left Capernaum and went to the eastern side. 

                      3.  It was on the eastern shore that Jesus fed the multitude. 

                      4.  The disciples had started back to Bethsaida to wait for Jesus when they                    were caught in a storm and driven out to sea.

                      5.  Jesus walked on the water to the boat and calmed the storm. 

          B.  John had earlier indicated that after Jesus would rejoin them, they would go                        toward Capernaum. 

                      1.  They did, but not directly to Capernaum. 

                      2.  Instead they landed in Gennesaret, which was just south of Capernaum. 

                      3.  This area contained no large city, but had a few small cities or towns                              and many small villages.

          C.  When they arrived, they pulled the boat in close to land and went ashore. 

 

II.  Jesus recognized by the people, V. 54

 

          A.  One so popular as Jesus could hardly go unrecognized.  (That is, He was                             popular among the common people.)

                      1.  Jesus had been through this area before and some of the people had                     seen Him. 

                      2.  Some had seen Him at Capernaum, which was nearby. 

                      3.  Some had seen Him some other place.

          B.  They knew Him primarily as the great healer.  (It could be said that they knew                   Him as The Great Physician.)

                      1.  Some had seen people whom He had healed. 

                      2.  Some had actually witnessed as He healed someone.

                      3.  Some had been healed by Him. 

                      4.  All had at least heard of the healing which He had done. 

          C.  Yet not all knew Him to be The Son of God.

                      1.  Some had been saved and would know Him to be the Son of God. 

                      2.  But most of them were unsaved and did not know Him as the Son of                        God.                      

          D.  Some of you actually know Jesus better than they did. 

                      1.  They Knew Jesus by sight, but did not know Him by faith as their                    Savior.

                      2.  You would not know Him by sight, but you who know Him by faith                    know Him to be the Son of God and you know Him as your Savior.

 

III.  The gathering of the people to Jesus, V. 55-56a

 

          A.  The news of Jesus being in the area spread quickly.

          B.  The people immediately stopped whatever they were doing and began to                             gather in the streets of the villages to see Jesus.

                      1.  Whatever else they were doing, however, important it may have been,                              could wait.

                      2.  This was their grand opportunity and they came.

          C.  Not only did they come, but they brought their sick. 

                      1.  Those who could walk, they let them walk, but they walked with them                   and encouraged them to come. 

                      2.  Those who were halt they assisted. 

                      3.  Those who were lame or too sick to walk, they carried on beds. 

                      4.  Those who were blind, they led. 

                      5.  Top priority was given to bringing their sick friends and loved ones to                        Jesus so that they could be healed. 

 

IV.  The healing of the sick, V. 56b

 

          A.  They besought Jesus that they might touch but the hem (border) of His                                         garment.

          B.  As many as touched were made whole.  (Not because of the garment, but                             because of their faith in Jesus.)

         

V. Our grand opportunity today

 

          A.  Today Jesus is present among us. 

                      1.  He is not present bodily and physically as He was with them.

                      2.  Rather, He is present with us in the Spirit. 

          B.  Some of us are already acquainted with Jesus. 

                      1.  We got to know Him on a previous occasion.

                      2.  We called upon Him for mercy and asked Him to save our souls.

                      3.  In loving mercy, He saved us by His grace.

                      4.  It is now our blessed privilege to go out and get our friends, neighbors                        and loved ones and seek to bring them to Jesus.

                      5.  However important other things might be this is far more important. 

                                  a.  We ought to be just as concerned about our friends and loved                                          ones as they were about theirs. 

                                  b.  We ought to be much more concerned about the eternal soul of                                          our loved ones as they were about the physical body of their                                loved ones.

          C.  Some who are present here may not yet be acquainted with Jesus and this is                             your grand opportunity to get to know Jesus in His saving grace.

                      1.  Your need is far greater than those who were sick in body.

                      2.  Being saved is far more important than being healed. 

                      3.  In fact it is more important than anything else in this world.

 

Conclusion: 

         

          1.  On that occasion Jesus healed all who came to Him for healing.

          2.  Today He will save all who will come to Him for salvation.   

         

 

 

#41

 

Mark 7:1-13  THE WORD OF GOD OR THE TRADITION OF MEN

 

Introduction:

 

          The scribes and Pharisees make a deliberate attempt to discredit Jesus. 

 

I.  The Jew’s rejection of the word of God in preference for the traditions of men,

     V. 1-13

 

          A.  The scribes and Pharisees of Capernaum had already been in conflict with Jesus            and now members of the Sanhedrin become disturbed about Him and come to              observe Him, V. 1.  (They come, not to endorse Him nor to learn from Him,                            but to find some way to discredit Him with the masses of people.)

          B.  Right off the bat they find something to criticize ---- His disciples, V. 2.  (Many             critics of the Lord are not brave enough to criticize the Lord personally and so             they criticize His disciples instead.)

                      1.  They had observed His disciples eat food without first ceremonially                            washing their hands. 

                      2.  Their concern was not cleanliness, but religion.

          C.  Mark explains to us Gentiles the religious customs of the Jews, V. 3-4. 

                      1.  All Jews, as a matter of religion, washed their hands in a religious                            ceremony before eating food, V. 3.

                      2.  There was no such command in the Law of Moses, nor in the writings                           of the prophets, but this had become a matter of custom.         

                      3.  When they returned from the market or any public place they washed                            their hands, V. 4.

                      4.  Likewise, they washed pots, pans, etc., V. 4.

          D.  The Pharisees question Jesus about the disciples and, in doing so, charge them       with wrong doing, V. 5.

                      1.  They first charged them generally with not following the traditions of                         the fathers. 

                      2.  Then they charged them specifically with failure to wash their hands. 

                      3.  By raising this question, they were threatening to exclude both Jesus                   and His disciples from entering the Temple and the synagogues. 

          E.  Jesus responded by bringing a charge against them, V. 6. 

                      1.  He said that Isaiah had well described them.

                      2.  He said that they were hypocrites. 

                      3.  He said that their worship was in vain, V. 7.

                      4.  He said that the reason God did not accept their worship is because they                   taught for doctrines the commandments of men. 

                      5.  They lay aside Gold’s word and substitute the teachings of men, V. 8.                                (They do not like what they hear from God’s word, but they hear what                                          they like from the teachings of men, V. 9.)

          F.  Example:

                      1.  God commanded that one should honor his father and mother, v. 10.                      (Speak to them and about them in words of honor; obey them in                        childhood; help them, support them and care for them in their old age.) 

                      2.  The Jews had substituted the practice of “Corban,” V. 11. (The goods                             or money that might have been used for parents were supposedly                                  dedicated to God instead and would not be given to support the                                      parents.  The word “Corban” means “It is a gift.”  It was a superficial                            thing.  The good were not actually given to God, but symbolically                            dedicated to Him.  Thereby, the people symbolically dedicated it to                            God, but actually kept it for themselves.) 

                      3..By this practice the Jews allowed men to disobey a direct command                           from God. V. 12

 

II.  Questions which we face today

 

          A.  Would you have given money to those Pharisees to make them rich? 

                      1.  Today the modern Pharisees have produced a movie designed to                     discredit Jesus.

                      2.  Would you take money and give it to them and help make them                                         millionaires for discrediting Jesus?  (That is what you when you buy a                            ticket to see their movie.)

          B.  Which do we choose to believe, the word of God or what mother and dad has                       said?

          C.  Which is more authentic, that which is written in the Bible or that which is                         written by Dr. So-and-so?

          D.  Which is more important, what the Bible teaches or that which Baptists                             practice?               

                      1.  Baptists practice is great if it is in harmony with what God’s word says. 

                      2.  When Baptist practice or the practice of any other religious group                            differs with God’s Word it is no better than the practice of the                              Pharisees..

          E.  Which is more important, what the Bible teaches or the way we have always                            done it?

          F.  What determines right and wrong --- the word of God or what is acceptable in       modern times?

                      1.  Our moral standards should be set by the Bible, not by the TV or                       Hollywood?

                      2.  But I am afraid that the TV and movies have a lot more influence on the                             lives of many Christians than the Bible does.

 

III.  The real determining factor

         

          A.  God is supreme.  (God is All Knowing, All Wise and Almighty.)

          B.  What God says is right whether men agree or disagree.

          C.  Anybody who worships God must be willing to accept His authority in order                               for their worship to be acceptable to Him. 

                      1.  Thus, we ought to accept Bible teachings whether we understand them                   or not. 

                      2.  We ought to study the Bible and try to understand it.

                      3.  We ought to try to put the Bible teachings into practice in our life. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Some men teach that salvation is by works.  The Bible teaches that salvation is by faith.  Which do you believe? 

          Are you saved?  Are you trying to live your life by the teachings of the Bible?  Do you seek to let the Bible be your Guidebook?. 

         

 

 

#42

 

Mark 7:14-23  THE REAL PROBLEM OF OUR SINS

 

Introduction:

 

          The scribes and Pharisees had accused the disciples of sinning by not washing their hands before eating.  Jesus said that they had not broken the law of God, but only the traditions of men.  In our text He gives an explanation of the root cause of the sins of man. 

 

I.  His explanation to the multitude, V. 14-16

 

          A.  The multitude was not around when the scribes and Pharisees made their                            accusation against the disciples.

                      1.  Neither were they around when Jesus answered the Pharisees. 

                      2.  However, Jesus now summons the multitude, V. 14. 

                      3.  These are the people He has the best opportunity of helping. 

                      4.  He called for them to not only to hear, but to understand , V. 14. 

          B.  His explanation was brief. 

                      1.  It is not that which goes into a man which defiles him spiritually,

                           V. 15a..  (Not by eating with unwashed hands)

                      2.  It is that which comes out of a man which defiles him spiritually,

                          V. 15b.

                      3.  This was not in keeping with the thinking of the Pharisees. 

                      4.  Neither was it in keeping with the thinking of the multitude. 

                      5.  I was not even in the thinking of the disciples. 

          C.  Jesus asked them to give consideration to what He said, V. 16.

                      1.  He did not expect them to believe it right off.

                      2.  He did want them to think about it and give it consideration. 

 

II.  A fuller explanation to the disciples, V. 17-23

 

          A.  The disciples had not understood the meaning of what Jesus had said.

                      1.  After they were in private, they asked the meaning, V. 17. 

                      2.  By this they acknowledged that they did not understand. 

                      3.  According to Matthew it was Mark’s good friend, Peter, who asked. 

                      4.  However, all of the disciples wanted to know. 

          B.  The Lord was a little put out with the disciples, V. 18a.

                      1.  It was to be expected that the Pharisees and the multitude would not                      know.

                      2.  But these disciples had walked with Jesus and should have known. 

                      3.  The Lord expects more out of His people than from others. 

          C.  Jesus wanted the disciples to know and gave a fuller explanation to them. 

                      1.  He explained why that which goes into the body does not defile the man                           spiritually, V. 18b.

                                  a.  Because it enters only into the body, but not into the spirit,

                                      V. 19.

                                  b.  Therefore, it defiles only the body, but not the spirit. 

                      2.  He explains why it is that which comes out of a man that defiles him                            spiritually, V. 20.  (He spoke of that which does come from the heart                   and, thus, defiles a man’s spirit, V. 21.)

          D.  Jesus gives a long list of examples, V. 21-22. 

                      1.  Evil thoughts --- first in the heart and then in the mouth

                      2.  Adultery and fornication --- first in the heart and then in the act

                      3.  Murder --- first in the heart as bitterness and hatred

                      4.  Theft --- first in the heart

                      5.  Covetousness --- first in the heart

                      6.  Wickedness --- all manner of wickedness first in the heart

                      7.  Deceit --- first in the heart and then comes out of the mouth as lies                 8.  Lasciviousness --- unrestricted lust first in the heart

                      9.  An evil eye --- one that loves to see evil acts,  first in the heart

                    10.  Blasphemy --- harsh words spoken against sacred things, first in the                      heart.          

                    11.  Pride --- one of the sins God hates the most, first in the heart

                    12.  Foolishness --- senseless things, things which serve no good purpose,                         first in the heart         

          E.  The root of the problem is in the heart, V. 23.

 

III.  Some legitimate questions that deserve answers

 

          A.  What about the original sin of man:  Was not that which he ate? 

                 Answer:   Eating the fruit was a sin, but the fruit did not defile the spirit.  It                              defiled only the body.  The sin which defiled the spirit was first in the heart                             and then in the deed. 

          B.  What about the eating of unclean animals forbidden by the Mosiac Law?  Was         not the eating of those animals a sin?

                  Answer:  Yes, for the Jews, who were under the law,  it was a sin to eat those              forbidden animals.  But the flesh of those animals did not defile the spirit.  It                          defiled only the body.  The sin which caused the disobedience was already in                    the heart and that was what defiled the spirit.                        

          C.  What about the use of alcohol and drugs?  Is that not a sin? 

                Answer:  Yes, it is a sin and it can be very damaging in lots of ways.  But it is           not the alcohol or drug that defiles the spirit.  It is the sin which is already in                         the heart which causes one to use alcohol and drugs, that defiles the spirit.                          The spirit is already defiled before one uses the alcohol or drugs. 

          D.  Since all commit sin first in the heart, is it not just as well to go ahead and do            the act of sin?

                Answer:  No, not at all.  God requires us to restrain the sinful desire and                             refrain from doing the deed.  To actually do the deed is doubly sinful.  It is to       sin in the heart and also sin in the deed.  To sin only in the heart hurts only                         oneself if he refrains from doing the deed.  But if he does the deed others are              hurt also.  For example:  The deeds of theft, adultery, murder and even suicide             hurt others.  It is to sin doubly.

          E.  We have heard about the problem.  What is the solution to the problem?

                Answer:  Jesus!!!!!!!  One need to repent of sin and trust in Jesus. 

                      1.  Jesus is the answer for the lost sinner.  (When one gets saved he gets a                              new spirit which is free from sin and will always be free from sin.)

                      2.  Jesus is the answer for the saved sinner.  (When the saved sinner has a                   desire to sin within his flesh nature, Jesus can help him to suppress that                   sinful desire and help to refrain from doing the sinful deed.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  A warning:  If we are not careful we will excuse our sin and not repent of the                      sin.

          2.  God calls upon us to repent of our sin and to turn to Him. 

          3.  The thing a man has to fear most is his own sinfulness. 

 

 

 

#43 

 

Mark 7:24-30  CRUMBS FROM THE MASTER’S TABLE

 

Introduction:

 

          At Capernaum Jesus encountered sharp criticism from the scribes and Pharisees from Jerusalem.  In our text He leaves Capernaum and is visited by a Syrophenician woman, a Gentile. 

 

I.  Jesus in the borders of Tyre and Sidon, V. 24

 

          A.  Tyre and Sidon were cities on the Mediterranean coast North West of                                         Capernaum.         

                      1.  The names of the two cities represent the whole area.  (Like “The                   Dallas- Fort Worth area.”)

                      2.  I may have made an error in preaching through the book of                                                    Matthew.   (I think I said that Jesus went out of the nation of Israel                         briefly.  I have come to believe that He was in the border of  Tyre and                           Sidon, but still within Galilee.  Like going to the Mexican border, but                            still being on the Texas side.)

          B.  Several reasons may account for Him leaving Capernaum and going there:

                      1.  He may have wanted to get away from Herod who had beheaded John                    the Baptist.

                      2.  He may have wanted to get some rest for Himself and His disciples. 

                      3.  He may have wanted to get away from the scribes and Pharisees to                            avoid more conflict at this time.

          C.  Thus He entered a house and “would have no man know it,”  V. 24. 

                      1.  It is worthy of note that He had a friend even there who would open up                          his home and take Him in. 

                      2.  But Jesus was too well known for His presence to be kept secret. 

                      3.  A Syrophenician woman, among others, heard that He was there. 

 

II.  The coming of the Syrophenician woman, V. 25-26

 

          A.  The woman who came had a daughter who was possessed by a demon spirit,                               V. 25. 

                      1.  She was physically afflicted in some way by the demon.

                      2.  She came to Jesus for help. 

          B.  She would probably never come to Jesus had it not for the trouble she faced.                  (Trouble either drives one away from the Lord or draws him to the Lord.)

          C.  She cried out to Jesus for help for her daughter, V. 26. 

                      1.  She did not realize at this time that He could save her and her daughter                          from hell. 

                      2.  She knew only that He could save her daughter from the demon. 

                      3.  She fell at His feet and cried out for help.

         

III.  The Lord’s delay in granting her request, V. 27

 

          A.  Jesus responded by delaying, V. 27.

                      1.  Matthew says that He was totally silent at first.

                      2.  When she persisted, He responded as though He would not grant her                      request.  (“Not meet to take the children’s bread and give it to dogs.”

          B.  Note the illustration He used. 

                      1.  The children represented the Jews.

                      2.  The bread represented covenant blessings

                      3.  The dogs represented Gentiles. 

          C.  Thus, He pointed out:

                      1.  That the covenant had not been made with the Gentiles;  it had been                   made with Jews. 

                      2.  It would not be fitting, at least at this time, to take covenant blessings                         and give them to Gentiles.

                      3.  Matthew says that He told her that He had come only to the lost sheep                              of the house of Israel.  (That is, at this time.)

          D.  But the main reason that He delayed was so that she would display her great                               faith before He would grant her request.  (He did intend to grant her request.)

 

IV.  The great faith of the woman, V. 28

 

          A.  The woman acknowledged that it was not fitting to take the bread of the                             children and cast it to dogs.

          B.  By this she was acknowledging that she was unworthy of making such a                             request. 

                      1.  She was not demanding her rights. 

                      2.  She was begging for mercy.

 

V.  Her faith revealed, V. 29-30

 

          A.  Jesus told her that she could now go home to her daughter and that her                             request had been granted, V. 29a.

          B.  He told her that the demon was already gone out of the girl, V. 29b. 

          C.  When she got home she found that it was as He had said, V. 30. 

          D.  We are not told whether or not she and her daughter ever placed their faith in             Jesus to be their Savior, but if they ever did that faith was rewarded also.                              (Personally, I think they did.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  You who are unsaved do not deserve to go to heaven as you are probably                          aware, but you can cry out for mercy. 

          2.  You who are saved probably stand in need of some special help from God and              you, too, are probably aware that you cannot ask for that help on the basis of           deserving it.  You can make your request only on the basis of the mercy of                          God. 

          3.  What I recommend to you is that you humble yourself at the feet of Jesus and         that you cry out to Him for mercy. 

          4.  We ought to be just as much concerned about the souls of our family as that                     woman was about the physical well being of her daughter. 

 

 

 

#44

 

Mark 7:31-37  JESUS MAKING THE DEAF TO HEAR AND THE DUMB TO SPEAK

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Jesus was in the border of Tyre and Sidon and there He cast a demon out of the daughter of a Syrophenician woman.  In this text He departs from that

area. 

 

I.  The departure from Tyre and Sydon, V. 31

 

          A.  He returned to the Sea of Galilee. 

                      1.  But He did not go to the west side where Capernaum was located. 

                      2.  Instead He went around the north end into Decapolis.

          B.  The word, Dacapolis, is from “deca” which means “ten” and from “polis”                             which means “city.”

                      1.  Hence, Decapolis was a ten city area. 

                      2.  It was located on the North East side of the Sea of Galilee. 

          C.  This area was about half Jewish and half Gentile.

                      1.  It is significant that Jesus did not leave the territory of the Jews. 

                      2.  It is also significant that He is making more contact with Gentiles than                    He had done earlier in His ministry.

 

II.  A better reception this time in Decapolis, V. 32

 

          A.  Jesus had been to Decapolis before. 

                      1.  On His earlier trip He had cast a legion of demons out of a wild man.                    (The demons had gone into a herd of swine, the swine drowned and                      the people had asked Him to leave.)

                      2.  The man gout o f whom the demons were cast asked to go with Jesus,                              but was instructed by Jesus to stay in Decapolis.           

                      3.  He went throughout Decapolis and told all who would listen what great                       things Jesus had done for him. 

          B.  So this time when Jesus arrived in Decapolis the people flocked to Him.  (The         man had done a great job of public relations for Jesus.

 

III.  The healing of the deaf and dumb man, V. 32-35

 

          A.  The people brought a man to Jesus who was deaf and dumb, V. 32. 

                      1.  Matthew does not mention this man specifically, but says that they                    brought a lot of afflicted people including the deaf and dumb.

                      2.  It appears that he was totally deaf.  (As we would say, He probably                         couldn’t hear it thunder.)

          B.  Jesus carried him aside from the multitude, V. 33a.

                      1.  Some suggest that this was because He did not wish to do miracles in                       the presence of Gentiles.  (Not a likely explanation)

                      2.  Whatever His reason, I am sure there was a good one.

          C.  Jesus put His fingers into the man’s ears and wet His finger with spit and                             touched the man’s tongue, V. 33.

                      1.  This was not necessary to touch in order to heal. 

                      2.  He usually touched the afflicted person because this made it perfectly                          clear to all that He did the healing..    

          D.  Jesus looked up into the heaven and sighed, V. 34.

                      1.  Looking up into heaven indicates that He prayed to God the Father.

                      2.  The sigh indicates His deep concern for the man.

                      3.  It must be a terrible thing to live in total silence and not be able to talk                     with people around you.

                      4.  It is a great blessing to be able to hear, to speak, to see and to walk.                              (A blessing we take for granted and seldom say, “Thank you, Lord.”)

          E.  Jesus said, “Eph-pha-tha” meaning “Be opened” and immediately the man                    could hear and speak, V. 34-35.  (His silence was broken by the words “Be                      opened.”)

 

IV.  The charge which Jesus gave the people, V. 36-37

 

          A.  Jesus charged the people not to tell anybody, V. 36a.

                      1.  This was exactly the opposite to what He had told the man out of                        whom He had cast the demons.

                      2.  Jesus knew that if the scribes and Pharisees should hear, they would be                         all the more infuriated at Him. 

          B.  But the people paid little attention to that charge, V. 36b.

          C.  The people were astonished beyond measure at the miracle, V. 37

 

V.  Envisioning that scene again

 

          A.  Envision this man as He stood before Jesus.

                      1.  He did not know what Jesus was doing when Jesus put His fingers in his                    ears and touched his tongue, but he knew that it had something to do                           with his ears and tongue. 

                      2.  He saw Jesus lift His eyes toward heaven in prayer and he knew that                     Jesus was praying for his ears and his tongue.

                      3.  He saw Jesus sigh and he knew that Jesus had compassion on him. 

          B.  Now envision yourself as you stand before God today. 

                      1.  How many times has Jesus prayed for you?

                      2.  How much love and compassion does Jesus have for you?

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Will you trust Jesus to save your soul?

          2.  Will you trust Jesus to lead you and guide you through life?

          3.  Will you commit your life to Jesus to serve Him?

 

 

 

#45

 

Mark 8:1-9  THE SECOND MIRACULOUS FEEDING

 

Introduction:

 

          Mark records two miraculous feeding of a multitude.  So does Matthew.  Some Bible critics say that this is a mistake --- that there was but one feeding.  They say that Mark was not there and did not know.  Where do these critics get off?  Matthew was there.  Beside that --- the Holy Spirit was there and He inspired the writing of the Bible.  One thing for sure --- the critics were not there.  How do they know more than the men who wrote the Bible? 

 

I.  The occasion, V. 1-3

 

          A.  This was in the save general time as the healing of the deaf and dumb man and          apparently in the same area.  (“In those days ----.”  Thus, it was in the                                         Decapolis area.)

          B.  A multitude of people gathered to see and hear Jesus, V. 1.

                      1.  They probably came to have their sick healed. 

                      2.  They stayed to watch and to hear Jesus preach and teach.

          C.  They had not come prepared to stay.

                      1.  But they got so enthralled in what they were seeing and hearing that                     they stayed on until it was too late to go home.. 

                      2.  So they stayed through the night, probably intending to go home the                      next morning. 

                      3.  But they stayed through that night also and into the third day, V. 2. 

          D.  Jesus said that by this time it would be dangerous to send them away without                 first giving them food, V. 3. 

          E.  These people found something more important than food. 

 

II.  The compassion of Jesus for these people, V. 2

 

          A.  Jesus had already demonstrated His compassion by healing their sick and                            afflicted. 

          B.  He expressed His compassion for them to the disciples concerning their great       need for food.

          C.  He would later demonstrate His compassion for their souls by going to the                             cross for them.

 

III.  The problem presented to the disciples, V. 2-4

 

          A.  Jesus called the disciples together to see what they would suggest doing about          the problem, V. 2-3.

          B.  Ironically, the disciples simply did not know what to suggest, V. 4.

                      1.  They had seen Jesus miraculously feed a multitude on a previous                            occasion. 

                      2.  But not one disciple suggested that He do it again. 

                      3.  Why? I do not know. 

          C.  The disciples did point out the impossibility of buying sufficient food, V. 4

 

IV.  Jesus with the answer to the problem, V. 5-9

 

          A.  Jesus inquired how many loaves of bread the disciples had, V. 5.

                      1.  They had seven loaves and a few small fish..

                      2.  This was five more loaves of bread than they had on the previous                          occasion and the crowd was smaller.

                      3.  They should  have known that this was sufficient for Jesus to use.

          B.  Jesus commanded the multitude to sit, V. 6a.

          C.  Jesus took the 7 loaves and the few fish and gave thanks to God. 

                      1.  What a mighty lesson for us.  (We ought to be thankful to God for what                   we have no mater how little it might be.)

                      2.  We are more inclined to complain than to give thanks.

                      3.  We should be grateful;  we could have nothing at all. 

          D.  Jesus broke the bread and the fishes and miraculously multiplied them into                             enough food to feed the whole multitude.

 

V.  The work Jesus assigned to the disciples,  V. 6

 

          A.  The first task the disciples had was to share what little they had with the                             multitude. 

                      1.  They had 7 loaves and a few little fish to be divided between 13 men                     --- Jesus and His 12 apostles.  (That would not give much to any one                            of them.)

                      2.  But Jesus called upon them to share with everybody.  (That whole                              multitude)

                      3.  They did and they seemed perfectly willing to do so.

          B.  When Jesus multiplied the bread and fishes, He gave it to the disciples to                             distribute to the people. 

                      1.  He could have lined the people up and had them to march by Him and                     given the food directly to the people. 

                      2.  But Jesus wanted the disciples to have the responsibility of feeding the                      people to teach us a lesson.

          C.  The lesson that He teaches concerning our material possessions is that what we               have comes from God and we should be willing to share.

                      1.  We should be willing to share with people in need. 

                      2.  We should be willing to use what we have in the work of God. 

          D.  The lesson that He teaches us concerning spiritual matters.

                      1.  It was a considerable chore to  feed that many people.        

                      2.  It is a considerable chore to carry the gospel to the world. 

 

VI.  More than enough,  V. 8-9

 

          A.  To be technical, this miracle was not as miraculous as the first miraculous                             feeding.                    

                      1.  On the first occasion He fed 5,000 men plus women and children with                    only 5 loaves of bread and 2 fish and they had 12 baskets full left over. 

                      2.  This time He fed a smaller crowd (4,000 and presumably plus women                             and children) with a larger supply (7 loaves and a few fish and they had                          only 7 baskets full left over.)

          B.  But if we dwell on the inferiority of this miracle in comparison to the other we           will miss the whole point. 

                      1.  The point is that everybody was filled and there was an abundance left                             over.

                      2.  The point is that when it comes to saving grace, the Lord has enough to                        save everybody and has plenty left over.

 

VII.  The key lessons in this Biblical record

 

          A.  As those people were in great need, so is the whole human race in need before                 God. 

                      1.  Those people needed food. 

                      2.  Each and every man, woman, boy and girl needs to be saved.

          B.  They were in danger of perishing along the roadside; each man and woman                             without Christ is in danger of perishing in the fire of hell. 

          C.  As Jesus was the answer for their need, even so Jesus is the answer for the                       need of every lost sinner.

          D.  As those people thrilled to see and hear Jesus so we ought to thrill to hear the           word of God today. 

          E.  As those disciples took up the work of feed the multitude, so we should carry       the gospel message to the multitudes who are lost.

          F.  As Jesus had compassion on those people so He has compassion on those                   people of that day even so He has compassion on lost souls today.

          G.  As those people needed food without delay, even so unsaved people need to be            saved without delay.

Conclusion:

         

          1.  Are you lost?  Jesus loves you and can save you.  Will you trust Him to save                    your soul?  Are you ready to ask Jesus now to save your soul?

          2.  Are you saved?  Will you give yourself to be used by the Master?

 

 

 

#46 

 

 

 

Mark 8:10-13  HARD TO CONVINCE

 

Introduction:

 

          On the eastern side of the Sea of Galilee Jesus healed many who were sick  and afflicted.  This included the deaf and dumb man.  Also, He miraculously fed a multitude of people.  (A second such miraculous feeding)  In our text today He goes to the western side of the Sea of Galilee, but not to Capernaum.    He turns southward to Dalmanutha,  (Near Magdala)                              

          As soon as they landed a group of Pharisees came to Him tempting Him.  They wanted Him to show them a sign from heaven that He is the Christ.  Mark said that Jesus told them that He would show them no sign.  Matthew said that He would show them no sign at that time.  Later He would show them the sign of Jonah. 

          In order that we might better see the prejudice that those Pharisees had for Jesus , I would like for you to play with me a game of supposition.  Just suppose that Jesus had said, “Ok.  What would it take to convince you?”

 

I.  Feeding a multitude with a few loaves and fishes

 

          A.  Suppose Jesus had said, “If I miraculously feed a multitude of people, will                       that convince you?  I have already done that.  I have already done that twice.                Would you like me to do it again?”

          B.  They would answer something like this:   “No.  We have heard about those                   miracles, but that did not convince us.  Moses fed the people of Israel with                       manna from heaven.  Show us a sign from heaven.”

         

II.  Causing the deaf to hear and the dumb to speak

 

          A.  Suppose Jesus would have asked, “The prophets of old said that the Christ                              would cause the deaf to hear and the dumb to speak.  If I do that would that                       convince you?”

          B.  They would answer:  “No.  “We have heard of you doing that already, but we          are not convinced.  You will have to come up with something else to convince             us.  Show us a sign from heaven and we will be convinced.”

 

III.  Causing the blind to see

 

          A.  Suppose that Jesus would ask, “But if I caused the blind to see that should                             convince you.  The prophets gave this as a sign which would identify the                       Christ.  So that would convince you --- wouldn’t it?”

          B.  The Pharisees would say:  “No!  No! No! Not at all.  We have heard of the                             blind that you have healed.  In fact we, ourselves, have seen you give sight to               one or two who wee blind.  But we want you to know that did not convince us             then that you are the Christ and it does not convince us now.  You will have            to come up with something better than that to convince us.  Show us a sign                         from heaven.” 

 

IV.  The calming of a storm

 

          A.  Let us suppose that Jesus would say, “What if I were to calm a mighty storm?                 What if I made the winds to stop and calm the waves?  Would that convince                     you that I am the Christ?”

          B.  The Pharisees would say, “No! That is not what we are asking.  We are asking                  for you to show us a sign from heaven.”

 

V.  The raising of the dead

 

          A.  Let us suppose that Jesus were to say, “Go!  Get me a dead body.  I will raise         that body back to life again.  Will that convince you that I am the Christ?”

          B.  The Pharisees answer would be:  “No.  That still will not convince us.  You                             have got to show us a sign from heaven before we will be convinced.  Show us      a sign from heaven.”

          C.  Jesus would say, “But I have already showed you a sign from heaven.”

                      1.  “I caused the sun to stand still in Joshua’s day.”

                      2.  “I caused a star to appear at my birth and lead the wise men to the place                     where I lay.”

                      3.  “I created the heavens and put the sun, the moon, and the stars in their                    places.”

          D.  Jesus would say, “I will not show you a sign.  Not now.  After I have been in                the grave for 3 days and 3 nights I will show you a sign.  I will come out of the            grave and that will be your sign.”  (And He did!  But even that did not convince              them.  They simply would not be convinced.)

          E.  We almost reach the conclusion that they could never be convinced,.  But                            that is not the case.  The time will come when they will be convinced, Rom. 14:11. 

 

Conclusion: 

 

          Do not you wait until you stand before Him in judgment to be convinced!

 

 

#47

 

Mark 8:13-21  JESUS WARNS ABOUT HERETICAL DOCTRINES

 

Introduction:

 

          While on the eastern side of the Sea of Galilee Jesus miraculously fed a multitude.  Upon crossing to the western side He had an encounter with the Pharisees and others.  Whereupon He and His disciples immediately set out to return to the eastern side of the sea, V. 13.  . 

 

I.  A misunderstanding by the disciples, V. 14-16

 

          A.  The disciples soon discovered that they had neglected to get a new supply of                          food at Dalmanutha, V. 14.

                      1.  In Decapolis they had only 7 loaves and a few fishes.

                      2.  Jesus had used that in feeding the multitude, but they had 7 baskets full                      left over.

                      3.  Now that had been used up to the point that they had no more than 1                         loaf in the boat, V. 14.

          B.  Jesus warned them of the leaven of the Pharisees and of Herod, V. 15.  (Also                  of the Sadducees.  See Matthew.)  

          C.  The disciples thought He gave this warning because they were low on their                     bread supply, V. 16.  (They thought He was warning them not to buy bread                        from the Pharisees or from the Herod, his family or his followers,)

 

II.  The real meaning of the warning, V. 17-21

 

          A.  Jesus rebuked them for thinking He was talking about literal bread, V. 17-21.

                (Having only one loaf was no problem for Jesus.  He could easily feed their                     small group with only one loaf.)

          B.  Jesus was warning about the false teaching of those groups.  (The Pharisees,                        the Sadducees and Herodans)

                      1.  Leaven is yeast which causes dough to rise.  (A little leaven leavens the                      whole lump.)

                      2.  Jesus used the word symbolically to represent the false teachings of                     those people.

                      3.  Thus, He warned the disciples not to believe their doctrine. 

          C.  The Pharisees had added the traditions of the fathers to the law. 

                      1.  They taught that one must keep the law plus their traditions in order to                          go to heaven.  (Also, they rejected Jesus as the Christ.)

                      2.  Thus, they taught that salvation is by works. 

                      3.  This is not what the Bible teaches, Eph.. 2:8-9; Titus 3:8. 

          D.  The Sadducees refused to believe anything which they could not either see with                  their eyes or reason out with they minds. 

                      1.  For that  reason they refused to believe in the resurrection of Jesus and                        they refused to believe that angels exist.

                      2.  Thus, they rejected the Scriptures as the final authority. 

          E.  The family of Herod joined the Jewish religion, but they showed no signs of                        believing it.

                      1.  They were descendants of Esau, (EOM) and, thus, came from an                            idolatrous and immoral background.

                      2.  Upon being appointed to power in Israel by Roman Caesar they joined                             the Jewish religion for political reasons. 

                      3.  But they never changed from their immoral and ungodly manner. 

                      4.  Thus, they believed that religion is to used to benefit one politically,                            financially and socially. and that is all. 

          F.  Jesus warned the disciples against all 3 groups. 

                      1.  Beware of a religion that teaches that salvation is by the works of man                    rather than  by the grace of God.

                      2.  Beware of a religion that either discredits of ignores the Bible as the                            final authority for its belief. 

                      3.  Beware of a religions that is motivated out of selfishness rather than by                            a love and devotion to “God. 

                      4.  Beware of a religion that does not seek to change the lives of men and                     turn them from their sin and immorality. 

 

III.  Evidence of the leaven at work today

 

          A.  Virtually every  religion in the world today has been leavened by the teachings                          of the Pharisees, the Sadducees and Herod. 

          B.  Almost every religion which still believes in heaven teaches that a man is saved                   by his own works of righteousness

                      1.  The leaven of the Pharisees has leavened virtually the whole lump of                           Christian religions. 

                      2.  I am sad to say that this includes most of the Christian religions.

          C.  Most of the world’s religions base their teaching on something other than the           Bible.        

                      1.  Even many of the Christian religions deny the inspiration of the Bible. 

                      2.  I am sad to say that this includes some who call themselves “Baptists.”

                      3.  I am glad to say that it does not include Missionary Baptists. 

          D.  A growing number of people do not join a church for the purpose of giving                             their lives in service to God, but they join to benefit themselves politically,                         financially or socially. 

          E.  An ever growing number of people continue to live ungodly lives after they join               up with a religious organization. 

                      1.  It is sad to say that some religious groups never even attempt to lead                            their people to a higher moral or spiritual plain.

                      2.  Some, in fact, teach that there is no moral standard.     

                      3.  They say there is no sin.

         

V.  A warning for you and me

 

          A.  The warning which Jesus gave to those disciples still sounds out a warning to                 us today.

          B.  Beware of joining a church thinking that you can work your way to heaven by            your own works of righteousness. 

                      1.  That never has worked for anybody else and it won’t work for us.

                      2.  What we need to do is to trust Jesus Christ to save us.

          C.  Beware of believing anything that is contradictory to the teachings of the word       of God. 

                      1.  Everything we believe should be based on “Thus saith the Lord.”

                      2.  We should never be guilty of saying, “I know what the Bible says, but                         here is what I believe ......”  (And express a belief in something the                              Bible does not teach)believe something that the Bible does not teach.)

          D.  Beware of thinking that you can live your life just any way you please and get           by with it.

                      1.  Pleasing yourself is not all that counts. 

                      2.  Pleasing God is what really counts.  (That is what it is all about.)

                      3.  God expects you to get your life right with Him.

                      4.  If you do not do so God will deal with you. 

                      5.  You cannot guzzle the booze, pop the pills, shoot the dope, smoke the                        pot, commit adultery, lie, cheat, steal or even gossip and get by with it. 

          E.  Beware of what you teach.  (As a church & as an individual)

          F.  Beware when joining a church that you do not join just any kind of church.

                      1.  Many people seek a church that will give the greatest amount of                                                    prestige, business contacts and entertainment.. 

                      2.  What we ought to look for is a church that seeks to be true to God and                     His word..

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Are you saved?

          2.  If not, do you want to be saved?

          3.  If you are saved, are you trying to live for God?

          4.  Are you concerned about pleasing God?

          5.  Are you in need of a church home?

 

 

 

#48

 

Mark 8:22-26  THE TWO STAGES IN HEALING THE BLIND MAN

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had spoken to the disciples about having eyes but not being able to see, V. 18.  As saved people they had spiritual eyes, but had not been able to see that He was not talking about the literal bread of the Pharisees.  He was talking about their false teaching.  In this text Jesus encounters another man who has eyes, but who cannot see.  He is blind. 

 

I.  The setting for the occasion,  V. 22

 

          A.  Jesus and His disciples come by boat to Bethsaida. 

                      1.  It is said that there were two towns named Bethsaida. 

                      2.  One was on the western shore of the sea of Galilee and the other on the                      north-eastern side.

                      3.  It is generally believed that this one was on the eastern side. 

          B.  The people brought a blind man to Jesus and asked Him to lay His hands upon       him. 

                      1.  Obviously they wanted Jesus to heal the man.

                      2.  Not that he was the only afflicted person whom they brought to Jesus,                              but he is the only one Mark mentioned. 

 

II.  The healing of the blind man,  V. 23-26

 

          A. Jesus led the blind man out of town before healing him, V. 23.

                      1.  This is now the second time that Jesus did such a thing.  Why?

                      2.  The Pharisees were out to get Him --- to discredit him before the people                            and to kill Him. 

                      3.  He wanted to avoid another confrontation with them at this time. 

          B.  Jesus spit on his eyes and put His hands on the man., V. 23.

                      1.  According to V. 25 He put His hands on the man’s eyes.       

                      2.  We may have trouble with the idea of Jesus spitting on the man’s eyes,                   but I’m convinced that the man had no objection.

                      3.  Some suggest that Jesus spit because of some kind of healing power in                         spit, but that man’s healing was not a natural healing; it was a                                          supernatural healing. 

          C.  Jesus asked the man if he could see anything and he answered that he could see             men as trees walking, V.24. 

                      1.  He could see, but not clearly. 

                      2.  He had seen before; he knew what men looked like and he knew what                   trees looked like. 

                      3.  He was not far out of town; he could see the people. 

          D.  Jesus again put His hands on the man’s eyes and asked again what he could                             see, V. 25.

                      1.  This time the man could see clearly.

                      2.  That man must have been very happy. 

          E.  Jesus then instructed the man not to go back into town, but to go home and                            that he was to tell no man how he was able to see, V. 26.

 

III.  Reasons for the two stages in the healing

 

          A.  Jesus healed the man in two distinct stages.  Why?

                      1.  It is not because Jesus lacked the power to do it in one stage.

                      2.  It was because Jesus deliberately chose to do it in stages.  But why?

          B.  For one thing, Jesus did it for the benefit of the man. 

                      1.  After that first stage of the healing, he knew of a certainty that Jesus                   could heal. 

                      2.  This must have increased his faith to look to Jesus to complete the job                      of restoring his sight. 

          C.  For another thing, it was for the benefit of the disciples. 

                      1.  This man was an object lesson to show them that their own spiritual                            eyesight was not what it ought to be.

                      2.  After the first stage of the healing the man could see, but not clearly. 

                      3.  That is exactly what had happened to them concerning the leaven of the                      Pharisees.

                      4.  They were not seeing any better spiritually than this man was                                        physically. 

                      5.  Even though they were saved and had spiritual eyesight, they needed                            their vision greatly improved. 

          D.  Jesus healed the man in two stages also for our benefit. 

                      1.  He wanted to illustrate that an unsaved man is spiritually blind and                            cannot see.  (Cannot understand)   

                      2.  When one gets saved he is no longer spiritually blind.  (He can see, but                      not clearly.  There are still many things which he needs to understand.)

                      3.  Even though one has been saved for a long time, there are still many                   things which he cannot see clearly. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  The first thing a man needs is to get saved.  Until he is saved he is spiritually                            blind. 

          2.  After one is saved and begins to understand God’s will for his life, he should                             put those things into practice in his life.           

          3.  We should prayerfully listen to God’s word and study God’s word to seek to                            understand more about God’s word and God’s will. 

          4.  Then as we learn more we should seek to put those things also into practice in           our lives. 

 

 

 

#49

 

Mark 8:27-30  WHO JESUS REALLY IS

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had rebuked His disciples for being slow to understand spiritual

things.  Then in our previous text He gave an illustration of their slowness by healing a blind man in two stages.  In the first stage the man was able to see, but not clearly.  He was able to see men as trees walking about.  This illustrates how the apostles were seeing certain spiritual truths.  But there is one truth which all saved people should see clearly.  We should be clear on who Jesus is. 

          In our text Jesus directs two questions to His disciples. 

 

I.  The first question, V. 27-28

 

          A.  Mark says that Jesus and His disciples went into the towns of Caesarea                                        Philippi.   

                      1.  The region of Caesarea Philippi lay in the northern-most part of Israel.                             (It was not far from Damascus in Syria.)

                      2.  The whole region of Caesarea Philippi lay around a large city by the                             name of Caesarea.

                      3.  Matthew says that they went on into the city, but according to Mark                              they had not yet reached the city when Jesus questioned His disciples.

                      4.  Mark says that they were by the way (the roadway) while still traveling                          through the small towns. 

          B.  Jesus directed a question to His disciples:  “Whom do men say that I am?”

               V. 27.

                      1.  Jesus was not asking for information; He was asking to strengthen the                      faith of His disciples on the vital question of who He (Jesus) really is.

                      2.  He was soon to be crucified, their faith would be tested and He did not                       want them to be uncertain about His identity.  (He did not want them to                   see His identity as though they  were seeing men walking as trees.)

                      3.  He wanted them to be absolutely certain that He is the Christ.

          C.  The disciples answered that the people were not all in agreement as to who He           is, V. 28.

                      1.  Some said that He is John the Baptist come back to life.  (Herod                            thought this and apparently many others did also.)

                      2.  Some thought that He is Elias or Elijah.  (That is, they thought He is the                      fulfillment of Malachi. 4:5 and that Jesus, therefore,  is only the                              forerunner of the Christ.)

                      3.  Matthew recorded that some thought He is Jeremiah. 

                      4.  Others thought He was one of the prophets come back to life, but                            without specifying which prophet. 

          D.  All of this was very complimentary. 

                      1.  They were very much impressed by His miracles.

                      2.  They were very much impressed by His preaching and  teaching.

                      3.  They all agreed that He is a great personage and a great prophet of                            God. (That is, the common people thought this.)

          E.  But this is not enough. 

                      1.  A man can die and go to hell believing that Jesus is a great person.

                      2.  John the Baptist was a great person, but He was never sent to be the                      Savior of sinful men.

                      3.  Elijah was a great prophet of God, but he was never sent to be the                             Savior of men. 

                      4.  Jeremiah was a great prophet, but he was never sent to be the Savior of                         men.           

                      5.  Jesus is the only one ever sent to be the Savior of men, but a lost man                    must first believe that Jesus is the Christ,  the Savior of men, before he

                           can be saved.

          F.  But even this limited view of Jesus was not in keeping with the view held by the          Pharisees and Sadducees. 

                      1.  They would not even recognize Him as a prophet of God. 

                      2.  They thought that He was a demon possessed man doing miracles by                      the power of the Devil. 

 

II.  The second question, V. 29-30

 

          A.  Jesus asked the disciples, “But whom say ye that I am?”

          B.  Peter answered for them all, “Thou art the Christ.”

          C.  Matthew says that Peter said, “Thou are the Christ, the Son of the living God.”

          D.  Peter speaks in keeping with the whole Bible. 

                      1.  Both the Old and New Testament Scriptures teach that Jesus is the                     Christ, the Savior of men. 

                      2.  Jesus was sent to the world to save lost sinners who otherwise would                             die and spend eternity in the fires of hell. 

                      3.  Jesus was sent so that every lost sinner would have an opportunity to be                         saved. 

                      4.  If an unsaved person will repent of his sin and trust in Jesus Christ to                            save his soul then Jesus will save him and keep him out of hell. 

                      5.  The blood of Jesus will cleans him from every sin so that he will stand                   before God in judgment without one sin charged against him to send                    him to hell.

                      6.  The believer in Christ is saved from every sin.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  You who see me standing before you are looking at a sinner.  There is not a                            chance in the world that I could stay out of hell without Jesus Christ as my                              Savior.

          2.  I am looking at sinners.  There is not a chance in the world that you can stay                           out of hell unless you have Jesus Christ as your Savior. 

          3.  The question today is not “Whom do others say that Jesus is?,” but “Whom do          you believe that Jesus is?”

          4.  Do you believe that He is the Christ of God and that He is able to save your                    soul and keep you out of hell?”

          5.  The next question is, “Have you trusted Jesus to save your soul?”

          6.  If not then what in the world are you waiting for?  Do it now.  Trust Jesus                             now to be your Savior.  Without waiting any longer trust Him right now and be         saved!

 

 

 

#50 

 

Mark 8:31-33  JESUS TRYING TO TEACH HIS DISCIPLES ABOUT HIS DEATH AND RESURRECTION

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus tried to prepare His disciples for His death by raising questions about who He really is.  He is the Christ, the Son of God.  In our text today He continues to try to prepare them for His death. 

 

I.  What the disciples expected to happen

 

          A.  They had been taught all of their lives to believe that the Christ would deliver                  the nation from Roman rule and would bring the nation to great prosperity. 

          B.  Therefore, now that they were thoroughly convinced that Jesus is the Christ,                              that is what they expected of Him. 

                      1.  They began to bicker among themselves who would be the greatest in                       the kingdom when Jesus would rule. 

                      2.  The mother of James and John asked that her sons sit at His right                            hand and His left hand. 

          C.  The disciples had already seen the greatness of His power demonstrated. 

                      1.  They had seen Him walk on water, calm the storms, heal the sick and                     feed the multitudes with a few loaves and fishes.            

                      2.  Thus, with His power, they expected Him to drive out the Romans, feed                              and cloth the poor, heal all the sick and make the whole nation to be                       fabulously wealthy. 

 

II.  The attempt of Jesus to correct their thinking, V. 31-32a

 

          A.  He “began to t4eadh them” that He must suffer. 

                      1.  At the first, He did not mention that He would die, but only that He                      would suffer.

                      2.  Even this would be hard for them to accept because it was just not what                   they had expected of the Christ.

                      3.  He told them that He must suffer many things. 

                      4.  Even though it was not in harmony with what they had expected it was                     what Isaiah has predicted, Isa. 53:3-7. 

          B.  Jesus continued:  He would be rejected by the elders. 

                      1.  To them it must have been unthinkable that the religious leaders of                        their nation would reject their new king. 

                      2.  But this was just what Isaiah had predicted, Isa. 53:3. 

          C.  Jesus still continued:  He would be killed. 

                      1.  This certainly was not what they had expected. 

                      2.  But this was what God the Father had planned before the foundation of                   the world, Rev. 13:8. 

                      3.  It was the very reason He had come to the world. 

                      4.  It was what Isaiah had prophecies, Isa. 53:7-8. 

                      5.  Jesus wanted them to know in advance so they would be somewhat                       prepared when it  happened. 

          D.  Jesus then gave some good news:  After 3 days He would rise from the grave. 

                      1.  He never wanted His disciples to be in despair.

                      2.  As the hymn says:  “Death can’t keep Him in the grave.”

                      3.  But the disciples were so shaken by the news of His suffering and death                              that the good news never really registered. 

          E.  Jesus spoke this news openly, V. 32a. 

                      1.  He did not speak it privately to 2 or 3, but to them all.

                      2.  He did not speak it in a parable where the meaning would be somewhat                       hidden, but in plain words. 

 

III.  The rebuke which Peter gave Jesus, V. 32b

 

          A.  The Apostle Peter rebuked Jesus.  (According to Matthew he said, “Not so,                           Lord.  This shall not be unto thee.”)

          B.  Peter had a history of talking when he should have been listening. 

          C.  We should seek to look for his motive. 

                      1.  Peter loved Jesus and just could not bear to think of anyone laying a                           hand on Jesus to do Him harm. 

                      2.  He was willing to take up the sword for Jesus and --- if necessary --- to                     lay down his life trying to protect Him. 

                      3.  I can love that man; can’t you?

          D.  But Peter was wrong. 

                      1.  No man has the right to correct Jesus on anything that Jesus has said. 

                      2.  Whenever Jesus speaks and whatever Jesus says, man should listen ----                     and believe!.

 

IV.  The rebuke which Jesus gave Peter, V. 33

 

          A.  Jesus turned and looked at all of the disciples and rebuked the Apostle Peter. 

                      1.  Does there seem o be something unusual about that? 

                      2.  Does it not seem that He would have looked at Peter?

                      3.  He would have if His rebuke had been intended only for Peter.  (The                    other shared Peter’s views and so the rebuke was for them all.)

          B.  Jesus called Peter “Satan.”

                      1.  Not that He thought Peter to be filled with Satan, but only that Peter’s                           thoughts were like those of Satan. 

                      2.  To be specific:  Peter was --- in effect --- tempting Jesus to avoid going                     to the cross and giving Himself as a sacrifice for sin. 

                      3.  It was a temptation to which Jesus would not yield.  (He said to Peter,                              “Get thee behind me, Satan.”)

          C.  Jesus said that Peter (and the others) were thinking from the human point of                         view and not from God’s point of view, V. 33b. 

                      1.  Peter was looking for Jesus to deliver Israel from bondage to the                           Romans; God was looking for Jesus to deliver the world from bondage                         to sin. 

                      2.  Peter wanted Jesus to give the nation of Israel better times for a little                     while;  God wanted Jesus to give every believer better times forever.

                      3.  Peter wanted Jesus to avoid suffering;  God wanted Jesus to suffer so                          that every man could avoid the sufferings of hell-fire. 

                      4.  Peter wanted Jesus to avoid death;  God wanted Jesus to die so                                                    that others could live. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          We do not need to get prepared for the death of Jesus, but we do need to get prepared for our own death. 

 

         

                     

#51

 

Mark 8:34-38  TAKING ADVANTAGE OF THE OPPORTUNITY TO FOLLOW JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus asked His disciples, “Whom do men say that I am?”  He followed that with, “But whom do ye say that I am?”  Peter answered, “Thou art the Christ.”  This would mean that Jesus would one day sit on the throne and rule the nation.  (Peter might not have thought of it at that time, but He will some day rule the whole world.) 

          Suppose He had asked, “Who will follow me and accept a position in my kingdom?”  In effect that is what He did ask.  Only He did not say it that way.  He said, “I must suffer and be killed.  Who will follow me and suffer for me n my cause?” 

          In addition to having His disciples present Jesus called the multitude to hear what He had to say, V. 34a.  Therefore, what He had to say has an application both to the saved and to the unsaved.  

 

I.  The choice, V. 34

 

          A.  The Lord gives man a choice.

          B.  He can choose to follow Jesus or he can choose not to follow Jesus.

          C.  The Lord is Supreme and did not have to give man a choice.  (He could have         said, “You follow me.”)

          D.  But He gave man a choice and each man must make his choice.  

 

II.  The requirement, V. 34

 

          A.  If one would follow Jesus, there are some things he is required to do. 

          B.  He is required to deny himself. 

                      1.  He cannot decide where he will go, but he must follow Jesus where                            Jesus leads. 

                      2.  He has to give up the idea of doing his own thing. 

                      3.  No man can follow Jesus who is determined to have his own way. 

          C.  He is required to take up his cross. 

                      1.  Jesus is not asking us to do what He Himself would not do.  (He would                             soon take up His cross for us and seek to carry it up Golgotha’s steep                         hill.)

                      2.  If you are going to follow Jesus you are going to have a heavy cross to                        bear up a steep hill..

                      3.  If you would live the Christian life, you will have to suffer and you will                           have to work. 

                      4.  The Christian life is not all fun and games.  (It is suffering for Jesus.  It                        is working for Jesus.  It is self sacrifice.)

          D.  It is required that you follow Jesus.

                      1.  We are to follow Him in truth. 

                      2.  We are to follow Him in righteousness. 

                     

III.  The consequences, V. 35

 

          A.  If one chooses to save his life by not following Jesus he will be the loser.

                      1.  As this applies to the saved person, it means that he will lose a great                   deal by not following Jesus..

                                  a.  He will not lose his salvation because he kept saved by the                                        power of God, I Pet. 1:5.

                                  b.  He may lose his family, his health, his wealth, and his pleasure. 

                                  c.  He will lose what counts most in this life. 

                                  d.  He will lose rewards which he could have laid up for the next                                       life, but didn’t. 

                      2.  As this applies to the unsaved, he will lose his opportunity to stay out of                       hell and go to heaven. 

                                  a.  He will lose all his possessions at death. 

                                  b.  He will lose all comforts and all pleasures at his death. 

                                  c.  He will burn in a lake of fire and brimstone forever. 

          B.  On the other hand if one chooses to lose his life by following Jesus, he will be             the gainer.

                      1.  As this applies to the saved, he will gain the greatest joy and                                        contentment this world affords --- even in this life.  (He does not have                              to wait until he gets to heaven before his Christianity pays off. It pays                     here in this life.) 

                      2.  As it applies to the unsaved, he is the gainer because he gets saved.           

                                  a.  He gets saved when He places his faith in the Lord Jesus to save                                        his soul. (Salvation is not gained by one’s works.  It is gained by                                 the grace of God through faith in Jesus Christ, Eph. 2:8-9.)

                                  b.  He does not actually get saved because he chooses to follow                                         Jesus Christ. 

                                  c.  Rather he chooses to follow Jesus because he has already trusted                                        Jesus Christ and is already saved. 

                                  d.  Yet by trusting Jesus and then choosing to follow Jesus he finds                                a greater joy in this life than he could have ever known any other                               way.  . 

         

IV.  The questions, V. 36-37

 

          A.  What shall it profit a man if he gain the whole world and lose his own soul?

                      1.  If he gains the whole world he would still have no profit because he                       would leave it all behind and go to hell.  (He would be left with                                                    nothing.of value.)                     

                      2.  He is passing up the opportunity to have wealth he could have forever                            for a wealth he can keep for only a brief period of time.  

                      3.  He is passing up heaven for hell. 

          B.  For the person who is saved we might need to word the question differently                             because he cannot lose his soul.  (He is kept saved by the same power that                       saved him.)

                      1.  We might word the question this way:  “What would it profit a saved                              man if he gain that which he cannot keep for that which he cannot                        lose?” 

                                  a.  If he could gain the whole world he could not keep it.  (Like                               the unsaved, he will leave all his earthly treasures behind                                                    when he dies.) 

                                  b.  If one is saved but has not chosen to follow Jesus, he will get                                  into heaven as if by the skin of his teeth.  (He will have little or                                   no rewards in the next life.)

                      2.  At the hour of his death, if he could, he would give anything for another                           chance to live for Jesus.  (In one of the churches which I pastored, there                           was a young man who attended services with his relatives.  He said that                            he was saved, but for some reason would not follow Jesus in baptism                     and dedicate his life to Jesus.  When on his death bed he said that if he                     could he would --- if necessary --- crawl down  the aisle of the church on                        his hands and knees in order to get baptized and follow  Jesus.)

 

V.  The time to decide, V. 38

 

          A.  It one fails to choose to follow Jesus in this life, he will not get the most                            desirable reception before God in the next life.

          B.  One cannot afford to wait until the Lord returns to this earth to decide to                             follow Him.

          C.  He cannot even afford to wait until he dies. 

          D.  He needs to choose now in this life. 

          E.  If he does not choose Jesus he will forever regret it. 

          F.  If he does choose to follow Jesus he will never regret it. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          The choice that you will be happy with in the hereafter is the choice that you need to make now.  . 

 

 

 

#52

 

Mark 9:1-10  THE TRANSFIGURATION OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had begun to try to prepare His disciples for the time of His death.  He told them that He must suffer and that He must be killed.  He then called upon each of them to take up his cross and follow.  He informed them that if a man would seek to save his life he would lose it and that if any would lose his life for Christ’s sake he would find it.  Only in suffering for Christ can one receive life’s greater rewards. 

          In our text today Jesus continues to try to prepare the disciples for His death.  He does this by being transfigured before three of them. 

 

I.  The announcement concerning the transfiguration, V. 1

 

          A.  Jesus announced that some of them would not die until they had seen the                             kingdom of God come in power, V. 1.                      

                      1.  Matthew records it, “until they had seen the Son of man coming in his                   kingdom,”  Mt. 16:28.  

                      2.  The idea is:  “Until they have seen the Messiah King, who is the Son of                             Man, coming in His kingdom.”

          B.  Some try to apply this to the second coming of Jesus. 

                      1.  The problem with that is all of the apostles have died. 

                      2.  So it does not apply to the millennial kingdom. 

          C.  What then is He saying?  He is saying that some of the apostles would not taste         of death until they had witnessed His transfiguration and a great display of His           power and glory. 

                      1.  Not all of the apostles were to witness this glory. 

                      2.  He does not tell at this time who will see it and who will not. 

                      3.  Neither does He say that any of them will die before this event.  . 

 

II.  The time of the transfiguration, V. 2-3

 

          A.  They did not have long to wait:  After 6 days Jesus called Peter, James and                             John up into a mountain and was transfigured before them, V. 2.

                      1.  The question is:  Why just these three?  Why not the others? 

                      2.  It is easy to see why He did not want to be transfigured before Judas                              Iscariot, but we cannot say with certainty about the others.

                      3.  Whatever the reason may have been, Jesus was seeking to strengthen                       these three and they, in turn, were to strengthen the others at the time                       of His arrest and crucifixion.

          B.  The word “transfigured” means that His figure or appearance changed before                 them.          

                      1.  Matthew says that His face did shine as the brightness of the sun. 

                      2.  The glory of the Holy God dwelling in His flesh did shine right through                           His flesh. 

          C.  Even His clothes did shine.

                      1.  They were shining white --- whiter than any fuller could make them,

                           V. 3.

                      2.  The bright Light which did shine through the flesh did also shine                            through the clothes. 

                      3.  This was a great display of His power and glory.

 

III.  the appearance of Elijah and Moses with Jesus, V. 4

 

          A.  There appeared with Jesus two Old Testament characters talking with Him,

               V. 4. 

                      1.  This, too, was a great display of His power and glory. 

                      2.  Can you imagine being able to call before you just whoever you will                      at any time you will from all the ages past?

          B.  Elijah was representative of all the Old Testament prophets of God.  (The Old                     Testament prophets had prophesied of the coming of Jesus.)

          C.  Moses was representative of the Law.  (The Law pictured the shedding of the           blood of Jesus and the cleansing power of His shed blood.).

          D.  What a joy it must have been for the disciples  to be there seeing Jesus talking                  with Moses and Elijah!

 

IV.  The reaction of the apostles, especially of the apostle Peter, V. 5-10

 

          A.  It was a joyous occasion for all three of the apostles. 

          B.  The Apostle Peter got  somewhat beside himself. 

                      1.  He interrupted the conversation between Jesus , Moses and Elijah.                             (Can you imagine that?)

                      2.  He said, “Master, it is good for us to be here,” V. 5. 

                      3,  He said, “Let us make 3 tabernacles: one for you, one for Moses and                     one for Elijah,” V. 5. 

                      4.  He put Jesus, Moses and Elijah on somewhat the same level.  (Was he                       intending to suggest that Moses and Elijah be worshipped?)

                      5.  Mark explained by saying that Peter did not know what he was talking                      about;  he was just excited and somewhat frightened, V. 6.

          C.  God the Father’s  correction was swift. 

                      1.  Immediately God the Father spoke out of a cloud and said of Jesus,                              “This is my beloved Son: hear him, ” V. 7.

                      2.  It was as if to say, “You do not need to exalt Moses not Elijah, but you                     do need to hear Jesus and exalt Him.  Exalt Jesus and Jesus alone.  He                       is my beloved Son.” 

                      3.  Brethren, so do we all. 

          D.  With that, Moses and Elijah disappeared and Jesus reverted back to His                       former appearance.

          E.  As they came down from the mountain, Jesus instructed them to tell no one                     about what they had seen and heard until He was risen from the grave, V. 9-10.

 

V.  Lessons for us today

 

          A.  We didn’t see the transfiguration, which was a preview of the power and glory               of the second coming, but the real thing is yet ahead. 

                      1.  That same Jesus, whom Peter, James and John saw on that mountain                         will appear in the clouds.

                      2.  His flesh will shine as the brightness of the sun. 

                      3.  His brightness will light up the sky.

                      4.  It will not be just Peter, James and John to see Him, but when He                            comes on down to the earth every eye shall see Him.

                      5.  It will not be just Moses and Elijah who will appear with Him, but all of                   the redeemed of all the ages will be with Him.

          B.  The brightness of His appearance will once again cause men to be afraid.  (The                unsaved will cry out for the rocks of the mountains to fall on them and hide                               them from Jesus.)

          C.  But it will be a glorious time for all who are saved.

                      1.  In the words of the apostle Peter, we will be able to say, “Master, it is                   good for us to be here.”

                      2.  Even now we can say, “Amen!  Praise the Lord!  Hallelujah!” 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Are you saved?

          2.  If you are saved, are you living for the Lord?

 

 

 

#53

 

Mark 9:11-13   THE COMING OF ELIJAH BEFORE THE COMING OF CHRIST

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text the disciples raise a question about the coming of Elijah before the coming of the Messiah. 

 

I.  The circumstances under which the question was raised, V. 11

 

          A.  Jesus had set about to prepare His disciples for His arrest, His trial and His                       crucifixion. 

                      1.  He first sought to settle their minds that He really is the Christ.

                      2.  He informed them that He would suffer and die at the hands of the                            Jewish leaders. 

                      3.  He transfigured Himself before 3 of them:  Peter, James and John.

          B.  It was the transfiguration that brought the question about Elijah to their minds. 

                      1.  They had always been taught by the Pharisees that Elijah would come                               back to life before the coming of the Christ, the Messiah.

                      2.  This was based on a prophecy by Malachi, Mal. 4:5-6. 

                      3.  Elijah’s brief appearance with Jesus at the transfiguration brought the                            question to the minds of Peter, James and John.

                      4.  To them there appeared to be a contradiction;  Elijah must come first,                    but as far as they knew Elijah had not come. 

          C.  Since neither of them had an answer to the question, they asked Jesus, V. 11.

 

II.  The answer to their question, V. 12a

 

          A.  Jesus said that it is true that Malachi had prophesied that Elijah would come                               first, V. 12a. 

          B.  He said that the purpose of Elijah’s coming was to “restore all things.”

                      1.  The meaning of the word “restore” as used here is “to set in order.”

                      2.  Thus, the purpose of the coming of Elijah was to set all things in order                              for the coming of the Messiah, the Christ.

         

III.  Jesus changing the subject, V. 12b

 

          A.  Then Jesus suddenly changed the subject away from Elijah and focused their                     attention to Himself, V. 12b.

                      1.  Jesus had already told His disciples that He would suffer and die at the                              hands of  the Jewish leaders, but He knew that He had not gotten the                              message through to them.                    

                      2.  So He tells them again.  

          B.  Even though He is the Messiah, the Christ, the King, yet  He would not at this          time go to Jerusalem and be crowned King.  (The only crown He would wear         on this trip to Jerusalem would be a crown of thorns which would be beaten                        into His brow.)         

          C. He calls to attention that the Old Testament Scriptures say that He must suffer                 and be rejected.

                      1.  This is not some strange new announcement;  this was what the                                        Scripture had taught down through the years.  . 

                      2. They should have  already known this because they already knew the                                    Scriptures.  (They just did not know their meaning.)  

                      3.  But since the Scriptures say it, that should settle the matter. 

                      4.  Isaiah 53 says that the Messiah would be beaten with stripes, that He                      would be despised,  rejected and  cut off from the land of the living.                              (He would suffer and die.)

 

IV.  Back to the question about Elijah, V. 13

 

          A.  Jesus said that Elijah had indeed come, V. 13a.  (He had already come.)

          B.  Matthew says that the disciples understood that He is talking about John the                      Baptist.

                      1.  Elijah was not brought back to life as the Pharisees had expected. 

                      2.  Instead the fulfillment of the prophecy was the coming of John the                            Baptist, whose ministry was like the ministry of Elijah.  (They both                            preached in the wilderness, both at locusts and wild honey, both wore                      camel hair garments, both preached repentance, etc.)

          C.  Jesus said that John was mistreated. 

                      1.  He was mistreated even as the prophets had predicted that he would be                         mistreated.  (He was imprisoned and put to death.)

                      2.  The forerunner of the Christ was mistreated even as the Christ would be                          mistreated.  (The forerunner had already been put to death and Jesus                            was trying to impress upon them that He, too, would soon be put to                    death.)     

          D.  Elijah had come, just Malachi had said, V. 13b.

 

V.  Questions about Elijah still raised today 

 

          A.  There should be no doubt that the prophecy about Elijah made by Malachi                            speaks about John the Baptist;  Jesus Himself made that clear.  

          B.  However, the questions being raised today are not about the first coming of                        Jesus;  rather, they are about His second coming of Christ.

                      1.  Is there a double application to the prophecy?

                      2.  Is Elijah to come back to earth to be one of the Two Witnesses spoken                            of in Revelation? 

                      3.  Or, is there yet to be another whose ministry is like that of Elijah who                    will be one of the Two Witnesses?

          C.  While I do have some ideas about the answer to these questions, let me confess                to you that I do not know for sure and I do not know of anybody else other                       than God who does know for sure. 

          D.  Yet there are some things that I do know: 

                      1.  I know that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God.

                      2.  I know  that Jesus died on the cross and that He arose from the grave. 

                      3.  I know that all have sinned and come short of the righteousness                                        required to go to heaven.

                      4.  I know that if Jesus Christ had not had mercy on me, I would - be                      doomed to hell.

                      5.  I know that my only hope of staying out of hell is Jesus. 

                      6.  I know that I called on Jesus and trusted Him to save my soul and I                         know that He saved me.

                      7.  I know that I love Jesus Christ and want to serve Him. 

                      8.  I know that I fail Him in many ways, but I still love Him and want to                        serve Him.

                      9.  I know that even though I have failed Him He will never fail me. 

                    10.  I know that He can save you, too. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          If you are saved and you want to serve Jesus and you stand in need of a church home, then we invite you to choose this church. 

          If you are not saved, you are in grave danger.  You are in danger of going to hell.  I am asking you to put your destiny in the hands of Jesus and trust in Him to have mercy on you and make sure that you go to heaven.           

                     

 

 

#54

 

Mark 9:14-27  ASKING JESUS FOR A GREATER FAITH

 

Introduction:

 

          In the previous text Jesus had carried 3 of His apostles up in a mountain where He was transfigured before them.  Moses and Elijah had also appeared there with Jesus.  This had caused the 3 apostles to wonder why Elijah had not appeared prior to the coming of the Christ.  They had understood a prophecy in the book of Malachi to say that Elijah must come back before the coming of the Christ.  Jesus informed them that Elijah, in effect, had come back.  He went on to explain that Elijah did not personally come back, but, rather, John the Baptist had come in the spirit and power of Elijah. 

          In this text Jesus, along with Peter, James and John, come down the mountain to the place on the lower level of the mountain side where the other disciples were waiting for them,  A great multitude of people were also there with the disciples waiting for Him to come down from the mountain. 

          In that great crowd of people we are going to see one may who had a small amount of faith in Jesus cry out to Jesus for a greater faith. 

 

I.  A question put to the scribes by Jesus, V. 14-16

 

          A.  When Jesus along with Peter, James and John arrived they saw the great                             multitude of people which had gathered around the 9 apostles and whatever                               other disciples were there waiting for Jesus to return, V. 14a..   (This should                               be no surprise.  At this phase of His ministry the presence of Jesus always                             attracted great crowds.  In His absence the crowds had gathered around His                       disciples awaiting His return.)

          B.  Within that great crowd of people there was a group of scribes who were                   questioning the apostles, V. 14b. 

                      1.  The scribes were not asking for information:  They were asking trick                    questions hoping to get something that they could use against Jesus.                              (They were giving the disciples the third degree.) 

                      2.  The presence of the scribes there in Caesarea Philippi is an indication of                    their strong animosity against Jesus.  (He was on the move traveling                             through Caesarea Philippi and yet they managed to find Him for the                           purpose of accusing Him of wrong doing.) 

                      3.  Since He was absent when they arrived, they just set in to question His                    disciples. 

          C.  The masses of people, on the other hand, ran to welcome Jesus warmly, V. 15. 

                      1.  Mark says that they were amazed at seeing Him,

                      2.  This means that they were excited to see Him. 

          D.  Jesus fired a question at the scribes:  “What question ye with them?” V. 16. 

                      1.  The look on His face and the tone of His voice put them to silence. 

                      2.  They had come all the way from Jerusalem seeking a confrontation                   with Him, but now that they had it, they did not know what to do with                           it.. 

                      3.  While the scribes stood silent a man from the crowd spoke up to explain                             to Jesus had been going on.  . 

 

II.  The answer by the man, V. 17-18

 

          A.  The man explained that he had come to bring his son that Jesus might cast a                 

                demon out of Him, V. 17. 

                      1.  The demon had caused his son to be dumb.  (Also deaf according to V.                   25)

                      2.  The demon would afflict his son with some kind of seizure which was                     somewhat like epilepsy, V. 18.  (It is my understanding that epilepsy is                       usually produced by physical causes, but this man’s condition was                              caused by a demon spirit.)

                      3.  In the absence of Jesus, he had asked the disciples to cast the demon out                       of his son. 

          B.  The disciples had tried to cast the demon out, but without success, V. 18.

                      1.  First one and then another had tried, but couldn’t.

                      2.  The disciples were humiliated and bewildered. 

                      3.  It was then that the scribes took advantage of their embarrassment and                     started firing questions at them, humiliating them all the more.

 

III.  A rebuke from Jesus for their lack of faith, V. 19

 

          A.  Indirectly at least this was a rebuke to the father for his lack of faith. 

          B.  It was most certainly a rebuke to the scribes for being so critical of Him and                             His disciples. 

          C.  It was a rebuke to the crowd for their lack of faith. 

          D.  It was also a rebuke to His disciples for their lack of faith.

          E.  I’m quite sure that we should see this as a rebuke to each of us for our own             `              lack of faith. 

          F.  He called for the man’s son to be brought to Him.  

 

IV.  The father’s request of Jesus, V. 20-22

 

          A.  When the son was brought to Jesus the demon threw that son into another                            seizure, V. 20.

          B.  Jesus asked how long the son had been afflicted this way, V. 21.

                      1.  The answer was “as a child.”  (That is, not from birth, but from early                              childhood.)

                      2.  He once could hear and speak;  he once was a Norman child.

          C.  The father recalled that the boy had often been caused to fall in the fire or                             into water, V. 22. 

                      1.  He probably was badly scared by the fire.

                      2.  He could have burned to death in the fire or drowned in the water if                

                           someone had not been nearby to rescued him. 

          D.  The father concluded that the demon had tried to destroy the child, V. 22.

                      1.  Demons always try to destroy. 

                      2.  They are like Satan and Satan always tries to destroy. 

          E.  The father asked Jesus for help, V. 22.

                      1.  His faith was very small:  “If thou canst do anything....”

                      2.  But he did have at least some faith:  “...have compassion on us and                            help us.”

 

V.  The response of Jesus to the father and the father’s new response, V. 23-27

 

          A.  Jesus said in effect, “If you can believe, I will help.”

                      1.  The problem was never the Lord’s inability to help. 

                      2.  The problem was the man’s inability to believe. 

          B.  Immediately that man’s faith took one giant leap forward. 

                      1.  With tears the father cried out, “I believe.”  V. 24

                      2.  He also asked Jesus to strengthen his faith even more, “...help thou mine                    unbelief,” V. 24.

          C.  Jesus then cast the demon out of the son, V. 25-27. 

 

VI.  The need of people today       

 

          A. There are a  lot of people today who are in a lot worse condition than that                            man’s son.. 
                      1.  He was deaf and dumb, he had seizures, he cast into the water and he

                           was cast into the fire. 

                      2.  But a lot of people today can hear and talk and laugh and have full                            control of their bodies but they are in a lot worse than being deaf and                    dumb and afflicted with seizures.    .

                      3.  They are lost in sin and are in danger of being cast into the fires of hell. 

          B.  There are a lot of lost people with a little bit of faith whose faith needs to be                        increased so that they can be saved.  . 

                      1.  They have enough faith to know that I am telling the truth when I say                      that Jesus is the Christ and that Jesus can save their soul.  .    . 

                      2.  But up to now they have never asked Jesus to save their souls and keep                   them out of the fires of hell...

                      3.  There might be some of you who are lost who would acknowledge that                     you need to be saved. 

          C.  There are even people who are saved whose faith needs to be increased. 

                      1.  They need their faith strengthen in order to meet the problems in their                    life.

                      2,  I do not know of any saved person who does not need a greater faith in                             Jesus.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you are lost, you should call on Jesus and ask Him to save you.  (Do it right        now.)

          2.  If you are saved ask the Jesus to increase your faith.

                      a.  The apostles needed their faith increased so that they would be able to                            cast demons out of people who were afflicted.  

                      b.  You may need your faith increased so that you will be better able to                            face the trials of life and deal with them in a way that will please the                            Lord. 

                      c.  It may be that you need to have your faith increased so that you can cast                          some of your ways that you know you ought not to have.  (You have                         tried to put them out, but so far you have not been able to put them                          out.) 

                      d.  It may be that you need to have a greater faith so that you can do a                            greater work for the Lord than you have been able to do. 

          3.  Maybe someone needs your faith increased so that you will be able to walk the          aisle of this church and present yourself for membership.  (You may be                                        convinced that you ought to do it, but so far your faith is not been strong                           enough to come.)

 

 

 

#55 

 

Mark 9:28-29  TALKING WITH JESUS ABOUT THE PROBLEM

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text 9 of the apostles come to Jesus to discuss a problem.

 

I.  The humiliation of the apostles

 

          A.  Jesus had carried 3 of His apostles up into a mountain. 

          B.  When they came down from the mountain He found the other 9 apostles                             surrounded by a great crowd of people and the scribes were firing questions                             at them. 

          C.  The disciples had attempted to cast a demon out of a young man and had                             failed. 

                      1.  The apostles were humiliated at their failure. 

                      2.  Their embarrassment was made even worse when the scribes started                            firing questions at them. 

          D.  When Jesus came He cast the demon out of the boy.

                      1.  It was a victory for Jesus:  He had succeeded where they had failed.

                      2.  It was a victory also for the boy’s father.  (He had brought his boy to                        the disciples and they had failed to cast out the demon, but Jesus did not                            fail.)

                      3.  It was an even greater victory for the boy. 

          E.  It was a time of rejoicing even for the disciples. 

          F.  But there was one thing that still bothered them greatly --- their own failure!

                      1.  Throughout the day they had said nothing about their problem. 

                      2.  They showed no outward signs of their inward turmoil.

 

II.  Coming to Jesus with their problem, V. 28

 

          A.  When the evening was come and the crowds were gone, Jesus and the                             apostles went into a house, V. 28a. 

                      1.  Mark does not tell us whose house or even what town or village it was                              in. 

                      2.  But apparently somebody had opened up his home to Jesus and His                                                    apostles. 

                      3.  It must have been a large house to accommodate all of them. 

          B.  When the 9 apostles were alone with Jesus, they came to Him with the burden                 on their hearts:  They asked, “Why could not we cast him out?” V. 28b.                            (“Why did we fail?  Where did we go wrong?”)       

 

III.  A mighty lesson for us

 

          A.  There are going to be some times of defeat in our own lives.

                      1.  Wouldn’t it be nice if everything we attempt to do would go right and                     we would never suffer failure and defeat?

                      2.  But it will never be that way as long as we live in sinful bodies. 

                      3.  Life is full of failures and defeats.  :(Our failures --- our defeats)

          B.  We need to learn to come to Jesus and ask the question:  “Why did I fail?                     Where did I go wrong?”

          C.  If we learn from our failures, then even our failure can be a stepping stone to                           greater success. 

          D.  But we must first come to Jesus and ask:

                      1.  “Lord, what did I do that should not have done?”

                      2.  And, Lord, what did I fail to do that I should have done?”

          E.  Then with the help of the Lord we need to change our ways and correct our                       lives.

                      1.  The thing that we ought not to have done, let us stop doing that thing. 

                      2.  The thing we ought to have done but didn’t, we ought to start doing.                            

IV.  The matters of failure and prayer, V. 29

 

          A.  In the case of the apostles, they had neglected prayer and fasting, V. 29. 

                      1.  Not that they had not been praying at all; they surely must have prayed                            about something.  (They had earlier asked Jesus to “Teach us to pray”                          so surely they were not totally neglecting to pray.) 

                      2.  Yet in effect Jesus said, “If you had been praying as you ought, you                            would have had no problem casting out the demon.”

                      3.  Also, “If you will start praying now as you ought, the next time you will                           be able to cast out the demon.”

          B.  There is prayer and then there is prayer!

                      1.  It is possible to bow your head and go through the motions of prayer                             without ever really praying. 

                      2.  What we need to do is to get in earnest with God. 

                      3.  We need to recognize that God is supreme. 

                      4.  Therefore, let us not go to God and start barking out orders as to what                   we want Him to do for us. 

                      5.  Rather, let us ask God what His orders are for us. 

                      6.  Let us then humble ourselves before God and surrender to do His will. 

          C.  Where does fasting fit into the picture?

                      1.  Fasting is doing without food for a period of time. 

                      2.  You cannot do without food all of the time because your life depends                                                  on it. 

                      3.  But if you are concerned enough about finding the will of God in your                    life and the help of God for your life then food can wait and you will                      pray.

          D.  The same principle applies in matters other than food.

                      1.  What takes top priority in your life?  (Is it ball games?  Money?                                                     Good times?  Etc.?)

                      2.  No matter what our natural appetites or desires may crave, there is                            nothing as important as getting right with God, finding His will and                     getting His help.

 

V.  A question

 

          A.  Why did Jesus wait until after the apostles failed and them tell them that they                      were not praying as they should?

                      1.  Why did He not tell them beforehand?

                      2.  Because they were like we are:  It would have gone in one ear and out                       the other. 

          B.  Only after they had failed were they ready to listen and yield. 

          C.  And that is why He lets us run into a few brick walls  --- so that we will be                        ready to listen and to submit ourselves to His will. 

 

Conclusion: 

 

          Listen!  God loves you!  God can help you!  The greatest problems you have are your own sins and your eternal destiny.  If you are going to receive the help of God you must come to Him with the problem.  You must put your faith and trust in Him and you must yield to His will. 

 

 

 

#56

 

Mark 9:30-32            PREPARATION FOR DEATH

 

Introduction:

 

          In our last several texts Jesus has been trying to prepare His disciples for death --- His death.  In our text today He continues to try to prepare them for His death. 

 

I.  Departure from Caesarea Philippi, V. 30

 

          A.  Jesus and His disciples have been in Caesarea Philippi --- the northernmost part            Canaan.

                      1.  It was while they were there that Jesus had revealed for the first                                                    time that He would be betrayed, mistreated and killed. 

                      2.  It was there that He had revealed that He would be raised from the dead                   after the third day.

          B.  Now they have left Caesarea Philippi and returned to Galilee, V. 30. 

                      1.  Mark says that they were passing through Galilee.

                      2.  We are told by the language scholars that the Greek says that they were                        passing through on the side roads. 

                      3.  That is, they were not using the main roads, but were using the lesser                              traveled roads that ran through grain fields. 

          C.  The purpose for this was that Jesus did not want the masses of people to know                   that they were back in Galilee. 

                      1.  It was not that He was disinterested in the masses of people. 

                      2.  Rather, it was just that He wanted to be alone with His disciples so that                            He could help them get prepared for His death.  . 

          D.  Here He is.  He is the one about to be crucified, but who is He most concerned            about:?  (He is concerned about His disciples that they might be prepared for                   His death.)

 

II.  Teaching the disciples about His death, V. 31

 

          A.  He had already told them beforehand, but He patiently tells them again.  

          B.  He tells them again that He will be “delivered.”

                      1.  That is --- that  He would be betrayed.

                      2.  Matthew’s account uses the word “betrayed.”

                      3.  Only a friend, a trusted person, can betray another. 

                      4.  This means that a disciple would betray Him, although He does not                          reveal at this time that it will be one of the 12.

          C.  He would be betrayed into the hands of an enemy. 

                      1.  There is a special play on words here. 

                      2.  A wicked man would betray the sinless man into the hands of sinful                              men.          

                      3.  The innocent Man would then die for sinful men so that they could be                          saved from their sin  (Without the shedding of blood there would be                            no remission of sin.)

          D.  He tells them again that He would be killed. 

          E.  He also tells them again about His resurrection. 

                      1.   He wanted them to know about His death so that they would not be                              caught off guard. 

                      2.  He wanted them to know about His resurrection so that they would not                       be in despair.

                      3.  “Don’t give up.  After three days I will arise.”

                      4.  If they really believe that He is the Christ, the Son of God, they should                             have no problem believing that He would arise from the grave.                                         (Especially not Peter, James and John, who had witnessed His                                      transfiguration.)

 

III.  The disciples’ failure to understand,  V. 32

 

          A.  Did they understand about the betayal?  --- about His death?   --- about His                       resurrection?

                      1.  No!

                      2.  They did not want Him to suffer and be killed. 

                      3.  They wanted Him to go to Jerusalem, drive out the Romans  and rule.

          C.  We learn something about human nature right here. 

                      1.  It is possible to hear something and have every reason to understand                      and believe and yet fail to understand and believe simply because it is                    not what we want to hear. 

          D.  They did not understand why it was necessary for Jesus to die. 

          E.  But they did, at least, need to understand that He would die. 

                      1.  They needed to understand because it was going to happen whether                           they understood or not.  (They were going to have to face it.)

                       2.  But it would be a lot easier on them if they would understand. 

         

IV.  Some things that we need to understand today

 

          A.  We need to understand that we have sinned and come short of God’s standard               of perfection.  (By our own deeds --- by our own conduct --- we do not qualify                   for heaven.)  

          B.  We need to understand that we, too, are going to die. 

          C.  We need to understand that Jesus has already died for us in order that we                       might be saved.      

          D.  We need to understand that we will face Judgment whether we are saved or                        not. 

          E.  We need to understand that the only way that we can be prepared for our own        death is by trusting Jesus to save us from our sins!

 

Conclusion:

 

          Are you prepared to die?  Are you prepared for the Judgment?  It is coming whether you are prepared or not.  If you are not prepared, you should get prepared now.   

 

 

 

#57

 

:Mark 9:3-37  HOW TO ACHIEVE TRUE GREATNESS

 

Introduction:

 

          Several of our recent texts were devoted to our Lord’s efforts to prepare His disciples for his death.  This text show His efforts to correct a problem among the disciples --- the problem of trying to exalt self.  This is not a godlike trait, but was more like Lucifer, who had tried to exalt himself above God.  . 

 

I.  The disciples, guilty of trying to exalt themselves, V. 33-34

 

          A.  The disciples had been disputing s they walked along the road, V. 33.  (It had          been a rather sharp dispute.)

          B.  They dad gotten out of earshot of Jesus to have their dispute. 

                      1.  Apparently they were well aware that He would not approve. 

                      2.  But not meeting His approval did not stop them from having their say. 

                      3.  It should have, but it didn’t.

                      4.  When a Christian knows that saying or doing a certain thing will not                            meet the Lord’s approval that should stop him from doing or saying it.                     Shouldn’t it?

                      5.  But we all know from experience that it does not always stop one. 

          C.  Their secrecy did not work;  the Lord asked them point blank what they had                      disputed about, V. 33.

                      1.  He knows everything we do or say. 

                      2.  He knows every thought and motive of the heart. 

                      3.  He will call every one to give account to Him,

          D.  The disciples avoided answering His question because they were ashamed,

                V. 34. 

 

II.  The terrible results of exalting self, V. 35

 

          A.  Jesus sat down and called the disciples to Himself, V. 35. 

          B.  He warned them that if any man tried to exalt himself that man would be                             brought down low, V. 35.

                      1.  One’s efforts to exalt himself just guarantees that he will be brought                           down.  (Lowered, debased)

                      2.  God resists the proud and when God resists God wins. 

                      3.  Striving for top position gets only a lower position. 

          C.  God knows the secret ambitions of the heart and the secret maneuvering that                      one may use to try to exalt himself. 

          D.  It these apostles should continue as they were going there would not be one                             great man among them. 

 

III.  The secret to achieving true greatness, V. 36-37

 

          A.  Jesus calls a little child before the apostles, V. 36.

          B.  Matthew says that Jesus first said that one must humble himself as the little                     child to be in the kingdom of God.  (That remark was aimed at Judas who                  needed to be saved.)          

          C.  Mark says that Jesus then took the little child in His arms, V. 36b.

          D.  He said that if one receives such little children in the name of Jesus he receives               Jesus, V. 37.

                      1.  He was not talking about how to be saved, but about how one is to                             serve Jesus after Hs is saved. 

                      2.  One does not serve the Lord by exalting himself, but by humbling                            himself to serve the lowliest child.            

                      3.  Receive the little child means to serve the child’s needs.  (As any mother                            knows, that can be dirty work.)                      

          E.  But receiving the little child and serving him is counted by Jesus as serving                            Jesus. 

          F.  Also, one who serves Jesus serves God the Father. 

          G.  The same principle applies in serving adults.  (Jesus set the example by washing                the feet of the disciples in the position of a servant.)

          H.  When a Christian so humbles himself to serve that is when God approves                           and God will exalt him. 

                      1.  That is, if you serve because you know that this is what will please the                        Lord. 

                      2.  But if one will not serve others he is not serving God.

 

IV.  A few suggestions

 

          A.  The way to be saved is to humble yourself before God, repent of your sins                          and trust Jesus to save your soul. 

          B.  The way to serve the Lord after you are saved is to humble yourself and to                             serve even in the lowliest of service. 

                      1.  Perhaps there are children in your neighborhood that you could receive                   and pick up and bring to church. 

                      2.  Perhaps there are people who are sick that you could help. 

                      3.  Perhaps there are those out of work that you could help.

                      4.  Perhaps there are some elderly that you could help;.  (They probably                         don’t need your money, but they could use someone to carry them to                   the grocery store, the drug store or doctor.)

                      5.  There are ways to serve in the church without being elected to a                                        position.

          C.  Do not look for recognition:  just look for an opportunity to serve. 

 

 

 

#58

 

Mark 9:38-40  A QUESTION RAISED BY JOHN

 

Introduction:

 

          ;Jesus had set a little child before the disciples to use in teaching them a lesson.  He said, “Whosoever receives one such child in my name receives me.”  The idea is to receive and help anyone in need of help.  This raised a question in the mind of John. 

 

I.  The question in the mind of John, V. 38

 

          A.  John answered or responded to what Jesus had said about receiving a little                             child, V. 38.

                      1.  It brought to mind an incident when he and other disciples had not                      received another brother very well.      

                      2.  The brother was casting out demon spirits in the name of Jesus. 

                      3.  He was not a fake merely pretending to cast out demons. 

                      4.  He was not a sorcerer practicing magical means of exorcism.

                      5.  He was evidently a believer in Jesus Christ to whom God had given                   power to cast out demons. 

          B.  John and other apostles stopped this man from casting out demons. 

          C.  The reason which John gave for doing so was not a good one, V. 38b.

                      1.  It was not that t the man was doing anybody any harm.  (He was                            helping them.)

                      2.  The man was casting out demon spirits in the name of Jesus. 

                      3.  It was not that he was failing to help. 
                      4.  John said that it was “because he followeth not us.”  (He had never                              joined the group of disciples which made up the church.)

          D.  John now wondered if they ad done the right thing.

 

II.  The answer that Jesus gave, V. 39-40

 

          A.  Jesus said, “Forbid him not.”  This means:

                      1.  You were wrong to forbid him in the first place.

                      2.  If you see him again do not forbid him any more. 

                      3.  If you can get word to him, inform him that you made a mistake and                     that you no longer forbid him to cast out demons.

                      4.  If you see anybody else doing the same thing forbid him not. 

          B.  Jesus then informed John the reason for this thinking. 

                      1.  This man would not be able to lightly speak evil against Jesus as the                      Pharisees had been doing, V. 39b. 

                      2.  Any man who is not against Christ is for Him, V. 40.

                      3.  The very miracle which he had done was for Jesus.

                      4.  Even though he had never joined the church, yet he was helping the                      cause of Christ.

                      5.  The apostles need not feel threatened by the man;  the man would help                    them.

 

III.  Questions of our own

 

          A.  What about those who never join a church, can they be saved? 

                      1.  Yes. God requires repentance and faith, but He does not require                                                     church membership, Luke 13::3; John 3:18. 

                      2.  The man that John spoke about was saved.  (God would never have                            given him the power to cast out demons if he had not been saved.)

          B.  What about church membership?  If it is not necessary  for salvation, is it                   important to join a church?

                      1.  Yes. If God had His way every saved person would join a scriptural                                        New Testament church.

                      2.  Christ never would have organized a church if the church were                            unimportant. 

                      3.  God is even concerned that the church one joins should be true to New                   Testament teachings and practices.  (Not all churches are in these                            modern times.)

                      4.  God does not want any saved person to hold membership in a heretical                          church. 

          C.  What about those who are saved, but do hold membership in a church that has                deviated from Bible truth? 

                      1.  Their heretical church membership is not going to affect their salvation. 

                      2.  It did not prevent them from getting saved and it will not cause them to                           lose their salvation.

                      3.  God would want them to get out of the heretical church and get into a                         Biblically sound church, but beyond preaching and teaching the truth to                            them there is not much we can do to get them in the right kind of                            church.      

          D.  What about those who claim to be able today to cast out demon spirits and do                 other miracles in the name of Jesus?

                      1.  We should not assume that just because they claim to work a miracle in                        the name of Jesus that they are actually working by the power and                      authority of Jesus. 

                      2.  The apostles and some other early Christians truly had a spiritual gift                      from God which enabled them to do miracles by the power of God. 

                      3.  But the miraculous gifts ended when the writing of the Bible was                            completed, I Cor. 13: 8-10, 13. 

                      4.  One who claims to do miracles today is either uninformed about what                   the Bible teaches or is deliberately trying to deceive people. 

                      5.  Somebody is going to be in for a rude awakening in the judgment, Mt.                     7:22-23.

          E.  What about people who claim to be Christians, but who are outright deceivers

                trying to delude people and get rich off of people’s sickness and diseases?

                      1.  We can warn people and pray for them that they will wake up to the                            truth, but that is all we can do.

                      2.  It is not our place to wage war on heretical teachers. 

                      3.  It is not our place to judge whether they are saved or unsaved. 

                      4.  It is our place to live right before God and to teach the truth of God.

                      5.  It will be God’s place to root up the tares when the harvest time                                                    comes. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          We are not responsible for what others outside the church preach and teach and practice.  We are responsible for what we preach, teach and practice.                                                                    

Questions each one of us needs to ask:

 

          1.  Am I saved?

          2.  Do I have Scriptural baptism?

          3.  Am I a member of a Scriptural New Testament church?

          4.  Am I living the way that Christ wants me to live?

                                                                                                                                         

 

 

#59

 

Mark 9:41-42  HOW CHRISTIANS SHOULD BE TREATED

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous test the apostle John confessed to Jesus that he and the other apostles had seen a man who was not a member of the church casting out demons and that they had forbid him to do that any more.  Jesus said that they should not have forbid the man to cast the demons out and He gave two reasons why:  #1, Because no man who could do such a miracle in the name of Jesus could lightly speak evil against the Lord.  #2, Because he who is not against Jesus is for Jesus. 

          In this text He enlarges on the thought of how Christians ought to be treated in this world. 

 

I.  An exposition of verse 41  (Dealing kindly with a Christian)

 

          A.  Note:  “...because ye belong to Christ.”                     

                      1.  One who believes in Christ is royal property; he belongs to Christ.

                      2.  He is bought with a price, I Cor. 6:20; I Pet. 1:18-19. 

          B.  When someone deals with a Christian he is dealing with the royal property of                      Christ. 

          C.  When one deals kindly with the Christian, Jesus counts that as dealing kindly                               with Him, V. 37. 

          D.  Even the least kindness to the Christian is rewarded, V. 41.

                      1.  Many a kindness will be much greater than giving a mere cup of water. 

                      2.  The greater kindness  will bring greater rewards.

          E.  The motive for kindness is what is important to Jesus.

                      1.  The motive should be because the Christian belongs to Christ.

                      2.  Jonathan befriended David for this reason. 

                      3.  many a kindness have been shown to this preacher and his wife because                          of this.

                      4.  I have seen many other Christians befriended because of this. 

 

II.  An exposition of V. 42  (Dealing unkindly with a Christian)

 

          A.  Jesus issues a strong warning to those who would do harm to a Christian. 

          B.  He says that if you offend “one of these little ones it would be better to have a                 millstone tied about the neck and cast into the sea.”

                      1.  The word, offend, is not used here in the sense of “displease.”

                      2.  We often use the word that way. 

                      3.  But the Lord will not punish anyone for displeasing a Christian. 

                      4.  The word is used here to mean “harm” or “hurt.”

          C.  Notice how Jesus feels toward Christians.

                      1.  He calls them “these little ones.that believe in me.”

                      2.  He speaks not of their size. 

                      3.  It is a term of endearment such as a parent of grandparent would use of                        the children or grandchildren.  . 

                      4.  It is a term which expresses love.

          D.  It is a dangerous business to do harm to one whom Christ loves.

                      1.  It would be better to tangle with an angry parent or grandparent whom                             you had angered by mistreatment of the child.

                      2.  It would be better to have a millstone about the neck and be cast into                          the sea. 

                      3.  There are some things worse than death. 

                      4.  God does not always prevent someone from doing harm to a Christian.

                      5.  But the Lord says in effect:  “You had better not lay a hand on him or                             you will have to deal with Me!”

                      6.  The unsaved do not know that harm they do to themselves when they                       harm a Christian.  (“Vengeance is mine, saith the Lord.”)

                      6.  Even we who are saved should take care how we treat our fellow

                           Christians.

 

Conclusions:

 

          1.  If by chance we, like John, can recall dealing unkindly with a Christian, then let                us do as John did and confess it to the Lord.

          2.  If you are not a Christian, the way to become one is to repent of your sin and                     to trust in Jesus Christ for salvation.

          3.  You can do that right now right where you are. 

 

 

 

#60

 

Mark 9:43-48  WHERE THE WORM DIETH NOT AND THE FIRE IS NOT QUENCHED

 

Introduction:

 

          Did you ever try to describe something to somebody who had never seen what you are trying to describe?  That is what Jesus was doing in this text.  He was talking about hell to people who had never seen hell.  So He used some places with which they were familiar in order to try to help them to understand what hell is like.  He had it recorded in the Bible in order to help us to understand what hell is like.  In this text Jesus calls hell a place where the worm dieth not and where the fire is not quenched. 

 

I.  The first place in the Bible where that expression is used

 

          A.  The first place in the Bible where the expression “where the worm dieth not                             and the fire is not quenched” is used is Isaiah 66:24. 

          B.  In that passage the prophet speaks about the Armageddon War. 

                      1.  In the Armageddon the armies of the Gentiles will be gathered against                            the nation of Israel for the purpose of destroying Israel.  (Those armies                             will be led by the Anti-Christ.) 

                      2.  The real Christ is going to return to earth and destroy the armies of the                      Anti-Christ.

          C.  There will be so many dead bodies that workers will spend many months piling       up the dead bodies and burning them in fire.

          D.  During all those many months worms in those bodies will not all die out and                      the fires will not all be quenched until the last of those dead bodies are gone. 

          E.  In our text Jesus uses that same expression to try to picture to us the horror of            hell.

 

II.  The place of Gehenna or the Valley of Hinnon

         

          A.  The word in the text that is translated “hell” is the Greek word, “Gehenna.” 

                      1.  This word is the equivalent of the Hebrew word, “Hinnon,” which refers                     to the Valley of Hinnon.

                      2.  The Valley of Hinnon is a deep valley which runs southwest of the city                     of Jerusalem.

          B.  In olden times the Jews built in that valley a temple to the god, Molech

                 and burnt their children in sacrifice to Molech. 

          C.  So heinous was their practice that when Josiah came to the throne, he                                         destroyed the   Temple of Molech and converted the valley into a garbage                     dump where dead bodies of animals and all manner of other refuse would be                          heaped up and burned. 

                      1.  Worms fed upon the rotting refuse and worked constantly in it. 

                      2.  The fires burned continually in an effort to burn it up. 

                      3.  Thus, at any time of the night or day as the piles of refuse increased,                       worms could be found working in the bodies and the fires burning. 

 

III.  The picture which Jesus gave of Hell

 

          A.  In our text Jesus used these scenes to picture what Hell is like. 

                      1.  The constant working of the worms and the constant burning of the                            fires picture the place that we call hell. 

                      2.  The horrible scene at the close of Armageddon pictures the horror of                        hell. 

                      3.  The horrors of Gehenna pictures the horrors of hell. 

                      4.  The constant working of the worms pictures the never ending agony of                        those who are cast into hell.  (There will no rest nor relief.)

                      5.  The never ending fires picture the never ending suffering in the fires of                            hell.

          B.  According to some folk Hell is not going to be so bad. 

                      1.  According to them, those who go there will burn up instantly. 

                      2.  According to them the suffering will be over instantly.

          C.  But according to Jesus those who will go there will never get any relief. 

                      1.  They will burn forever and never completely burn up. 

                      2.  They will suffer in the fires of hell and their suffering will be forever.. 

 

IV.  Three warnings issued by Jesus

 

          A.  “If thy hand offend thee cut it off,” etc., V. 43-44. 

                      1.  The hand, as used here, represents the part of the human body which is                           most prominently used to commit sin. (It may steal, strike someone or                     even kill, put the liquor bottle to the mouth, etc.)

                      2.  It is not the only part of the body which is used in sin, but it is used                            most prominently.

                      3.  Jesus said, in effect, “If your hand is what is causing you to go to hell,                     cut it off.”

                      4.  As bad as it would be to go through life with only one hand it would be                       even worse to go to hell.                     

                      5.  In hell the suffering is a whole lot worse and a lot longer. 

          B.  “and if thy foot offend thee cut it off,” etc., V. 45-46. 

                      1.  The foot is represented here as the part of the human body most                                        prominently used in carrying one to the places of sin and into the deed                          of sin.   

                      2.  Anyone knows that it would be difficult to go through life with only one                          foot. 

                      3.  So Jesus says that if your foot is causing you to go to hell cut if off.” 

          C.  “And if thine eye offend thee, pluck it out,” etc., V. 47-48. 

                      1.  The eye is represented here as the part of the human body which sees                    sin and causes one to long to commit the act of sin. 

                      2.  It would continually be a great handicap to have to go through life with                    only one eye or with no eye at all.

                      3.  But even that would not be as bad as going to hell. 

                      4.  So Jesus said, in effect, if you eye is what is causing you to go to hell,                     pluck it out.

 

Conclusion:

 

          Jesus does not really want you to cut off your hand nor your foot nor to pluck out your eye.  But neither does Jesus want you to go to hell.  What He really wants you to do is to repent of your sin and to ask Jesus to save you.  He wants you to trust Him to save your soul and keep out of hell.  If you will ask Him to save you and trust Him to save you He will save you. 

 

         

 

#61 

 

Mark 9:49-50  SALTED WITH FIRE

 

Introduction:

 

          In our test Jesus used 2 common items as symbols: salt and fire.  He used these two items to teach some spiritual lessons.  In order for us to understand the lessons we must first understand the symbols.

 

I.  The separate use of the symbols, V. 49a

 

          A.  In everyday life salt is used with food in two ways:

                      1.  It is used to give flavor to food to make it taste good. 

                      2.  It is also used to preserve food and make it long lasting.  (Before the                     days of deepfreezers it was quite common for meats to be preserved by                       adding salting it down.  Salt pork is still found in many meat markets.  It                        is still used as a preservative in the making of pickles.)

          B.  Thus, salt as a symbol can mean one of two things:

                      1.  It can symbolize making something to be pleasant or acceptable. 

                      2.  Or it can symbolize making something to be preserved or long lasting. 

          C.  Fire, as a symbol, means either judgment or purification.

                      1.  Its ability to burn, consume or destroy symbolizes judgment or                                   punishment. 

                      2.  Its ability to burn the dross or impurities out of metal symbolizes                                        purification. 

                      3.  Thus, fire can symbolize judgment in the fires of hell, which a place of                        literal burning fire.

                      4.  Fire can also symbolize judgment in the sense of chastisement. 

                      5.  It can symbolize self-discipline, which can include repentance.  (Thus, it                          can include sacrificing pleasure.)

 

II.  The use of the two symbols when combined, V. 49a

 

          A.  Jesus combined the two symbols together and said that everyone shall be                             salted with fire, V. 49. 

                      1.  Everyone is included because everyone has sinned.  (Everyone is a                      sinner because he has inherited the sin nature of  Adam and because he                      has committed sinful deeds.)

                      2.  Therefore, everyone shall be salted with fire. 

          B.  But everyone has a choice as to how he will be slatted with the fire.

                      1.  He can choose to be salted with the fire of repentance.  (If he chooses                          the fire of repentance will also trust in Jesus Christ to be his Savior                   and  he is purified.  (His soul is saved and made acceptable to God.)

                      2.  Or, he can choose not to repent, in which case he will be salted with the                      fires of judgment in hell.

          C.  Every saved person has an additional choice. 

                      1.  He can choose the fires of self-discipline.  (That is, he can choose to                        forego pleasures of sin and, thus, purify his life.)

                      2.  Or, he can choose the ways of sin and be salted with the fires of                                        chastisement, which will teach him the hard way to clean up his life. 

                      3.  Every saved person has to be salted with the fire of chastisement from                    time to time because we all continue to commit some sin even after we                      are saved. 

         

III.  The use of salt with every sacrifice, lV. 49b

 

          A.  Under Old Testament law every sacrifice was salted with salt, V. 49b; Lev.                             2:1-3.

          B.  This symbolized that the sacrifice was tasty (or acceptable) to God and that the          person who presented the sacrifice to God was also acceptable, providing ---       of course --- that his heart was right with God.  . 

                      1.  The blood of the animal could not take away his sin.

                      2.  But it pictured the blood of Jesus which could take away his sin. 

                      3.  It is acceptable to God because of the blood of Jesus and not because of                      the blood of the sacrificial animal. 

          C.  The salting of the sacrifice also symbolized that there is now an everlasting                             covenant between the believer who made the sacrifice and his God. 

                      1.  Because he,  in faith, has made the sacrifice and because God is pleased                           with the sacrifice he will be acceptable to God and will have the                                  blessings of God --- the everlasting blessings of God. 

                      2.  Because God has accepted him and will bless him he pledges that he will                       be everlastingly loyal to “God. 

          D.  Jesus points out that this Old Testament symbolism has a New Testament                        application. 

                      1.  One who repents of his sin and trusts Jesus as his Savior is made                            acceptable to God, everlastingly so. 

                      2.  Because he is accepted by the Lord and blessed by Him, the individual                         then he us to be loyal to the Lord --- everlastingly so. 

 

IV.  The symbolism of salt losing its saltiness, V. 50a

 

          A.  Jesus said that salt is good. 

                      1.  It is good to make food taste better. 

                      2.  It is good to preserve food and make it last longer.  (Keep longer                            without spoiling)

          B.  But Jesus also points out that salt which has lost its saltiness is not good. 

                      1.  It will not make food taste any better. 

                      2.  It will not preserve food.

                      3.  The kind of salt which we are accustom to will not lose its saltiness.                         (It is sodium chloride.)

                      4.  The kind of salt which they used in Palestine came from the salt cliffs of                            the Dead Sea and could lose its saltiness because it contained other                           elements.  (If the sodium chloride was dissolved away what was left                      looked like salt, but was not have the characteristics of salt.)

          C.  The symbolism here refers to a professed Christian who has lost his zeal for                      Christ. 

                      1.  He has lost his Christlike behavior and has turned back to the ways of                        ungodliness. 

                      2.  If he is genuinely saved, he has not lost his salvation.  (That is                              everlasting.)

                      3.  But he is no good to the Lord. 

                      4.  He must now be salted with the fire of chastisement for the purpose of                      correction.

 

V.  A special admonition and a special symbol, V. 50b

 

          A.  Jesus admonished:  “Have salt in yourselves and be at peace one with another.”

          B.  This involves a special symbolism for salt. 

                      1.  It relates to two or more people being at peace with  one another sitting                              down to eat a meal together. 

                      2.  Eating together was often called, “taking salt together.”

                      3.  Thus, taking salt together became symbolic of living at peace with one      

                            another. 

          C.  Thus, what Jesus was saying is that Christians are to seek to live peaceably                         with those about them. 

                      1.  We are to live peaceably with our fellow Christians.

                      2.  We are to seek to live peaceably with non-Christians.  ( Paul said, “As                          much as is possible live peaceably with all men.”)

                      3.  The Christian who chooses not to do so will be salted with the fire of                        chastisement. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Everybody will be salted with fire one way or another. 

          1.  You who are saved can choose the fire of godliness and peace or you will have         the fire of chastisement. 

          2.  You who are unsaved can choose the fires of repentance or the fires of hell. 

 

 

 

#62

 

Mark 10::1-12  JESUS QUESTIONED ABOUT DIVORCE

 

Introduction:

 

          In this text Jesus is asked about divorce.  This gave Jesus opportunity to explain God’s will on this important question. 

 

I.  The occasion for the question, V. 1-2

 

          A.  Jesus had started south from Galilee toward Judea, V. 1.

                      1.  Jerusalem was His destiny.

                      2.  Samaria lay directly between Galilee and Judea.

                      3.  Jesus had been well received in Samaria on earlier visits. 

                      4.  Luke says that Jesus started through Samaria on this trip, but was not                           well received.  (Due to the Pharisee influence)

                      5.  So, according to Luke, Jesus crossed over to the eastern side of Jordan                            and continued toward Judea through Perea. 

                      6.  Most Jews took this route anyway, but for a different reason.  (The                    Jews hated the Samaritans.)

          B.  Mark does not mention trouble with the Samaritans, but does say that Jesus                  crossed over to the eastern side of the Jordan. 

          C.  Large crowds followed Jesus in Perea, V. 1.  (As before)

                      1.  Jesus taught the people as He traveled. 

                      2.  Luke says that He healed many and that many believed on Him.

          D.  It was here that the Pharisees asked Him about divorce, V. 2. 

                      1.  The Pharisees were out of their territory.

                      2.  But this shows their persistence in trying to cause trouble for Jesus. 

          E.  They did not ask for information.

                      1.  They wanted to turn the people against Jesus.

                      2.  They also wanted Him to say something that they could use against                           Him before Herod, who had beheaded John The Baptist because of what                          John had said about divorce. 

 

II.  The question which the Pharisees asked, V. 2

 

          A.  Mark says that they asked, “Is it lawful for a man to put away his wife?”

          B.  The Jews believed that it was lawful for a man to divorce his wife, but they                    disagreed on the grounds for divorce.

                      1.  The conservatives said:  Only on the grounds of adultery. 

                      2.  The liberals said:  For many, many reasons

          C.  They were not prepared to believe anything Jesus might say on the                                         subject, but asked only to use whatever His answer might be against Him.

         

III.  Jesus questioning them in return, V. 3-4

 

          A.  Jesus asked, “What did Moses say?, V. 3. 

          B.  They answered that Moses allowed a man to divorce his wife, V. 4. 

                      1.  The law of Moses made no provision for a woman to divorce her                            husband, but it did allow a man to divorce his wife. 

                      2.  Yet not for just any reason, but only for adultery or fornication. 

 

IV.  The reason God had Moses to allow divorce, V. 5

 

          A.  God did not instruct Moses to allow divorce because He approved it, but                             because of the hardness of man’s heart, V. 5. 

                      1.  God knew that in a case of a wife committing fornication or adultery                            that a man would find it hard to forgive and his heart would be                                                   hardened against her. 

                      2.  Thus, God allowed divorce because of the hardness of man’s heart. 

          B.  But God’s allowing divorce should never be mistaken for God approving                         divorce. 

 

V.  God’s will on the question as shown in the beginning, V. 6-8

          A.  In the beginning God set the precedent by creating one woman for the one                      man, V. 6. 

                      1.  God took one rib and created one wife for Adam. 

                      2.  He could just as easily have taken two ribs and created two wives for                     Adam.  (Or created two wives from the one rib)

                      3.  God intended that this precedent be followed. 

          B.  Furthermore, in the beginning God had said that the two should become one,       V.  7-8. 

                      1.  A man was to leave his father and mother and cleave to his one wife,                   V. 7.  (This instruction was directed to Adam’s descendants.  Adam had                       no father or mother.  It was a precedent which all men were to follow.)

                      2.  The two of them were to be one flesh, V. 8.  (Not the three or four of                        them were to be one flesh, but two.)

 

VI.  What Jesus added on the subject, V. 9-12

 

          A.  Jesus said that what God has joined together no man should put asunder,

               V. 9. 

                      1.  This means that there should be no divorce for any reason. 

                      2.  In the first place neither the husband nor the wife should be unfaithful                          --- ever.

                      3.  But if one does it is the will of God that the guilty party should repent                             and change and that the offended companion should forgive.  (In that                           case the marriage would be salvaged.)

                      4.  God will allow divorce under certain conditions, but God never actually                           approves of divorce under any circumstances. 

          B.  In response to a further inquiry by His disciples, Jesus explained about divorce                and remarriage, v. 10-12.

                      1.  If a man divorces his wife and marries another, except the divorce be on                              the grounds of adultery, the man commits adultery.  (Not by the                                        divorce, but by the remarriage), V. 11. 

                                  a.  Mark makes not mention of the adultery. 

                                  b.  But Matthew does, Mt. 19:9. 

                      2.  The same thing is true concerning a wife, V. 12. 

 

VII.  Some important observations

 

          A.  Just because one may have Biblical grounds for a divorce and remarriage does               not mean that one should do so. 

                      1.  God will tolerate it, but will not approve it. 

                      2,  We should be more concerned with what God approves than what God                        will tolerate.

                      3.  It is best to first try reconciliation and turn to divorce only as a last                     resort. 

          B.  Joust because one is divorced, that does not mean that God will cut himself off            from the divorced person.  (God still loves that divorced person.)

          C.  Just because one has divorced that does not mean that he should cut himself off            from church or Christian worship services. 

          D.  Just because one has divorced that does not mean that Christians should cut                       themselves off from that person.  (That person needs the help of fellow                                          Christians.)

          E.  Just because one’s child gets a divorce that does not mean the parents should                 cut themselves off from that child.

          F.  Just because one’s parents get a divorce that does not mean that their child                            should cut himself off from that parent. 

          G.  Just because we continue to fellowship a divorcee that does not mean that we                 approve of divorce.

          H.  Just because we cannot approve divorce, that does not mean that we condemn   

                one who is divorced. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you are married and not divorced, be aware that it could happen to you; build            your marriage on Biblical principles. 

          2.  If you are divorced, then by the help of God, pick up the pieces and make a life        for yourself and for God. 

          3.  If you are already divorced and remarried, then build this marriage on Biblical                principles. 

          4.  A good place to start is by making sure that you are saved.  (Get this most                  important matter settles with God and then go to Him for help with whatever                         problems you may face.)     

         

         

 

#63

 

Mark 10: 13-16  LITTLE CHILDREN BROUGHT TO JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          In our last text Jesus and the Pharisees were discussing divorce.  They were still involved in this discussion when a group of people with little children interrupted.  They pushed their way in to Jesus and asked Jesus to lay His hands on the children.  This totally interrupted the conversation with the Pharisees. 

 

I.  The bringing of the children, V. 13a

 

          A.  Mark says, “They” brought the children, but does not tell us who “they” were. 

          B.  It is to be presumed that they were parents and grandparents  to the children. 

          C.  Mark says that they brought them to Jesus that Jesus might touch them.                              (Matthew says they brought them that Jesus might lay hands on them and pray  

                for them. )    

                      1.  It was a custom among the Jews to bring their children to the Jewish                             rabbi for the rabbi to lay his hand on the children and pray for them.                             (These people looked on Jesus as a rabbi.  He was frequently called that                         although there is no mention that these people called Him that..)

                      2.  Some had believed on Jesus as more than a rabbi; some believed on Him                            as the Messiah and wanted their children to see the Messiah and to be                       blessed by Him.  (Probably some of the very people may have brought                         their children for that purpose  --- to be blessed by the Messiah.) 

 

II.  The disciples rebuking those who brought the children to Jesus, V. 13b

 

          A.  No sooner did the interruption get underway until the disciples began to                             interrupt those who were interrupting Jesus and His discussion with the                            Pharisees.

          B.  It Jesus had not interrupted the disciples, pretty soon there would not have                            been a child left; they would have all been compelled by the disciples to leave. 

 

III.  The rebuke of the disciples by Jesus, V. 14a

 

          A.  Jesus was much displeased with the disciples.

          B.  Jesus said, “Suffer little children to come unto me and forbid them not.”

          C.  This expresses the attitude of Jesus toward children in that day and His attitude                 toward children today.  (The attitude of Jesus was and is: “Do not do anything          to hinder the children from coming to me.”)

 

IV.  Jesus using the children to teach the adults about the makeup of God’s            

       kingdom, V. 14b           

 

          A.  Jesus said, “Of such is the kingdom of God.” 

          B.  Did He mean that only little children can get into the kingdom of God?”;  does                   He mean  that only children can go to heaven?  (No!  The disciples were in the         kingdom and they were adults)       

          C.  Then what did He mean? 

                      1.  He meant that all who are in God’s kingdom have become as little                     children in their relationship to God. 

                      2.  This is a completely new relationship to God. 

                      3.  This statement of Jesus is somewhat akin to the statement that Jesus                             made to Nicodemus when He said, “Ye must be born again.”

 

V.  Jesus using the children to teach the adults how to get into God’s kingdom,

      V. 15

          A.  Jesus said, “Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God as a little child                             shall not enter therein.”

          B.  A child sees himself as unable to provide for himself and he depends on                                  adults to provide for him.  Even so we must see ourselves as unable to save                             ourselves and look to the Lord to save us. 

          C.  A child sees that he cannot protect himself and he looks to the adults to protect             him.  Even so one must see himself as unable to protect himself from the Devil                  and look to the Lord to protect him. 

          D.  A child depends on the adults to forgive him no matter what he has done.                               Even so one must look to the Lord to forgive him of his sins.  

          E.  A child looks to the adults to take him where he wants to go.  Even so one                     must look to the Lord to take him to heaven. 

 

VI.  Jesus demonstrating His love for children, V. 16

 

          A.  Jesus took each child up into His arms.            

          B.  He lay His hands on each one, blessing him. 

          C.  He prayed on behalf of each child. 

          D.  This would bring blessings for years to come. 

          E.  A favorite hymn says:  “Jesus loves the little children.”  (This text says the                            same thing.  Action speaks louder than words.  His actions said, “I love these                        little ones.”)

 

VII.  What we can learn from this event

 

          A.  Parents, what a message for you!

                      1.  Parents, do not hinder your children from coming to the Lord by                            neglecting to bring them to church.

                      2.  Do not hinder them by neglecting to teach them about Jesus.  (Bring                             them up in the nurture and admonition of the Lord.”

                      3.  Do not hinder them by failing to set the right example before them.                             (You trust the Lord as your Savior.  You live a godly life.  you                                        faithfully serve the Lord.  You be the right kind of example for them                         to follow.). 

          B.  Listen, church members, what a message this is for you!

                      1.  Do not hinder the children from coming to the Lord by failing to                        provide a good  Sunday School , a good Training Course and a good                  Vacation Bible School for them.

                      2.  Do not hinder the children in other parts of the world from coming to                        Jesus by failing to generously support missionaries to carry the gospel                       to them.  .

 

Conclusion:

 

          Jesus loves not only the little children; Jesus loves you.  But He wants you to become like a little child by depending on Him.  He wants you to depend on Him the way a little child depends on adults.  He wants you to trust Him the way a little child trusts adults. 

          If you want to be in God’s kingdom and go to heaven when you die, then you look to Jesus to save your soul and take you to heaven.  Trust Him!  Trust Him and He will save you. 

          If you are already saved then you do your very best to bring others to Jesus that they, too, may be saved.  Bring little children to the Lord.  Bring adults to the Lord if you can.  But the little children are a lot easier to bring if you will reach out to them. 

 

 

 

#64

 

Mark  10:17-24 THE MAN WHO ASKED, “WHAT MUST I DO TO INHERIT ETERNAL LIFE”

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had been asked about divorce by the Pharisees, but their question was not sincere.  In this text a man comes to Jesus with a question about heaven and he is very sincere.  He was a rich man and he had everything that money could buy for him in that day.  But he wanted something better.  He wanted to be in the Kingdom of God and go to heaven when he would die.  He most certainly did not want to leave this world and go into a place of everlasting torment. 

          In this text Jesus has resumed His journey toward Jerusalem.  He and His disciples have already left the town where they had encountered the Pharisees and where had brought to Him the little children that He might bless them.  They are out on the roadway heading toward Jerusalem when this  man from town comes running after them, V. 17. 

 

I.  The man’s approach to Jesus, V. 17a

 

          A.  He was very anxious to see Jesus and ask Him the question. 

          B.  He really wanted to know the answer because he wanted to go to heaven. 

          C.  He was very respectful to Jesus.

                      1.  He kneeled respectfully before Jesus.  (This went beyond the usual                            respect given to a Jewish religious leader. 

                      2.  He addressed Jesus respectfully:  He called Jesus “Good Master.”

          D.  He recognized the moral goodness of Jesus.

                      1.  This was more than the Pharisees had done;  they had been know to                        bad-mouth Jesus. (Some of the Pharisees had said that Jesus had a devil.                               Some of them said that He is a devil.)

                      2.  He just did not know how good Jesus really is; Jesus never committed                       one sin in His entire lifetime.

         

II.  His question to Jesus, V. 17b

 

          A.  He asked, “What must I do to inherit eternal life?”

                      1.  By this question he admitted that he did not qualify for heaven. 

                      2.  By this question he admitted that he did not know how to qualify. 

          B.  Also by his question he revealed that he had one huge misconception about                    what he must do to quality:  He thought that God would require some special                 good work or good deed on his part.

                      1.  He thought that perhaps there would be some high moral standard that                     he must live up  to.

                      2.  Perhaps there would be some act of generosity that he must do.  (He                     could give generously to the temple and also to the poor and apparently                       would be willing to do so.  He could do so without depriving himself                          because he was very rich.)

          C.  He indicated at that point that he fully intended to attempt to do whatever God         would require of him to do.

         

III.  The first response of Jesus to the question, V. 18

 

          A.  Instead of answering immediately, Jesus responded with a question:  “Why                            callest thou me good?  there is none good but one, that is God.”

          B.  Note that Jesus does not say, “I am not good.”

          C.  Rather, Jesus pointed out that only God is good.  . 

                      1.  So why do you call me  good?. 

                      2.  If you recognize me as being good, then you ought to recognize me as                              being God.  Therefore, the reason that He is good is that He is God. 

                      3.  Jesus wanted the man to see Him as more than just a teacher; He                            wanted him to see Him as God.

                      4.  He wanted Him to see that He is the promised Emmanuel, the one who                    is “God with us.”

                      5.  He wanted the man to see that He is the promised Savior, the promised                         Redeemer. 

          D.  Jesus also wanted the man to see himself as not being good. 

                      1.  The man’s biggest problem was that he thought of himself as being                   good. 

                      2.  He thought that all he had to do was to be a little better and he would                             be good enough to get into heaven.     

                      3.  But what Jesus wanted him to do was to see that he was not good. 

                      4.  If he would recognize that only God is good then he would see that he,                            himself, was not good.  (He needed to see himself as a guilty sinner.

 

IV.  The second response of Jesus to the question, V. 19

 

          A.  Jesus called his attention to the law of Moses.

                      1.  Before Jesus could get this man to trust Him for salvation He first had                     to show the man that he could not be saved by keeping the law of                            Moses.

                      2.  Therefore, Jesus Himself brought up the law and quoted some of the                            laws to the man.

          B.  Note the laws which Jesus cited to that man:

                      1.  “Do not commit adultery.” 

                      2.  “Do not kill.”

                      3.  “Do not steal.”

                      4.  “Do not bear false witness.”

                      5.  “Defraud not.”

                      6.  “Honor thy father and mother.”

          C.  Note that Jesus did not name all of the Ten Commandments. 

                      1.  The commandments which He did name dealt with one’s relationship                      with his fellow man.

                      2.  Jesus did not name the first four of the Ten Commandments.  (The first                     four  commandments have to do with one’s relationship with God.)

          D.  Note also that one of the commandments which Jesus did name is not listed in           the Ten Commandments. 

                      1.   It is encompassed in the over-all teaching of the Mosiac Law, but it is                        not specifically in the Ten Commandments.

                        2.  But the Ten Commandments does not say, “Defraud not.”  (The closest                       thing to that is one which says, “Thou shalt not bear false witness...”

          D.  So what this implies that there are commandments in the law of Moses which                   are not listed in the Ten Commandments.  (If one is going to try to get into                             heaven by keeping the law then he must keep all of them and not just the ones            listed in the Ten Commandments.) . 

 

V.  The man’s response concerning the law of Moses, V. 20

 

          A.  He said that he had kept all of the commandments of the law which Jesus had         named to him and that he had kept them from his youth up.

          B.  How could he say such a thing?

                      1.  Perhaps he had never committed the very  act of adultery, but if he                       would be honest he must admit that he committed adultery in his heart.                              (He had wanted to do the deed.)                       

                      2.  Perhaps he had never actually killed anybody, but there must have been                       times when he was angry enough to kill. 

                      3.   Perhaps he had never actually stolen, but there must have been the time                            that he coveted something which belonged to somebody else (And the                              Ten Commandments does say, “Thou shalt not covet.”)

                      4.  As far saying that he had never told a lie---- now don’t tell me that!                              (That was just one more lie.)

                      5.  And don’t tell me that he had always honored his father and                                             mother!  (What child has not sassed his parent and what child has not                    stubbornly refused to do what he was told until he was forced to obey?)

          C.  Instead of claiming that he had kept those commandments that man should                              have cried out, “Oh, Lord!  Have mercy on me.!  I have broken thy laws!  I am                  a sinner!”

                      1.  Paul said in the Book of Galatians that the law was never given to save                    anybody.

                      2.  He said that the law was given as a schoolmaster to lead the sinner to                       Christ that Christ might forgive him of his sins. 

          D.  What that man was trying to do was to get into the Kingdom of God without                 acknowledging that he is an unworthy sinner.

                      1.  He was trying to get there without repenting of his sin. 

                      2.  He was trying to get there without trusting in the Promised Redeemer. 

                      3.  He was trying to get into heaven by his own works of righteousness. 

 

VI.  The answer which  Jesus gave to the question, V. 21

 

          A.  Note that Jesus loved the man and wanted to save him. 

          B.  Then He gave the man the answer to his question.

          C.  Jesus told him that if he would sell everything he had and give it to the poor he                would have treasure in heaven.  (This is the same as telling him that he would                   go to heaven.)

                      1.  It is at this point that we need to be especially careful. 

                      2.  We need to understand that Jesus is not telling him something that is                         contradictory to Ephesians 2:8-9 nor Titus 3:5. 

                      3.  He is simply telling him to vet rid of that which is keeping him from                            trusting Jesus.  (He was depending on the good deeds that he could do                         with all that wealth.  He needed to get rid of his riches so that he could                           no longer depend on them and depend on Jesus to save his soul and get                    him into the Kingdom of God.                        

          D.  After selling all he had and giving it all to the poor he was to come and follow                             Jesus.

                      1.  First he needed to recognize that he was a sinner and repent of his sin                          and trust Jesus to save his soul.

                      2.  Then after getting saved he was to come and follow Jesus.  (That is                            what every believer ought to do)

                      3.  He would not be following Jesus in order to get saved;  he would be                         following Jesus because he is saved. 

          E.  In response to the laws that Jesus cited, the man had falsely claimed that he had          kept those laws from his early youth, so now Jesus puts the man to the test.

                      1.  There is a law that Jesus did not quote which says, “Thou shalt not                             covet.”

                      2.  Even though Jesus did not quote that law to this man, the man knew full                         well that this was one of the Ten Commandments.

                      3.  Now the man must answer whether or not he is guilty of breaking this                    law forbidding him to covet.  (He will answer with words.  If Jesus had                     asked him whether or not he had kept this law, he, no doubt, would                   have said that he had kept it form his youth.  But he could not lie about                    it this time.  His action would tell the truth that he has a covetous heart                             coveting after great wealth.)    

 

VII.  The man’s tragic mistake, V. 22-24

 

          A.  The man went away sad because he had much riches, V. 22. 

          B.  If Jesus had asked him to give a huge sum of money to the temple or a huge                            sum of money to the poor he probably would have gladly done so, because he                would still have plenty left for himself.  (Even if Jesus had asked him to give                        huge sums of money to both the temple and to the poor he would have done it.               He still would had plenty for himself.)

          C.  The real reason he would not give up his riches and turn to Jesus is because                           he was trusting in his riches rather than Jesus, V. 23-244; John 3:18. 

                      1.  If he had trusted Jesus he would have known that Jesus would see to it                         that his needs in this world would be supplied.

                      2.  He would have known that Jesus would see that he would inherit far                       greater riches in the next world than he would ever see in this world.  . 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  You, too, may wonder if you can go to heaven by keeping the law.  Let me tell           you that you cannot, Gal. 3:11; Titus 3:5; Eph. 2:8-9. 

          2.  You may wonder if you can do enough good works that it will get you to                             heaven.   Let me tell you that you cannot.

          3.  You may also wonder if it is necessary for you to give away all your                                         possessions in order to be saved.  Only if you are trusting in you possessions to       help get you into heaven, Acts 16:31; Rom. 109:13. 

 

 

 

#65

 

Mark 10:19-27  RICHES, A HINDRANCE TO SALVATION

 

Introduction:

 

          How would you feel if someone should present you with 10 million dollars?  It just might not be a good thing.  Riches are a hindrance to salvation. 

          In our previous message we saw a man run to Jesus and ask, “What must I do to inherit eternal life?”  We saw him walk sadly away without being saved.  It was because of his riches that he did not get saved.  . 

          We will continue to study about that man today. 

 

I.  The Lord’s answer to the rich man’s question, V. 19-21

 

          A.  Jesus first pointed the man to the law of Moses. 

                      1.  He did this, not to indicate that one can be saved by keeping the law,                           but rather to point out the man’s guilt of sin. 

                      2  The law was not given to save, but to point out the impossibility of                            being saved by our works and our need of the mercy of God. 

          B.  Then Jesus instructed the man to sell all of his property and give all of his                             money to the poor.  (Jesus did this to point out the covetous heart of the man.              He had not kept the law as he claimed.)

          C.  Jesus further instructed the man to follow Him. 

                      1.  This was, in essence, asking the man to first believe in Him as the

                           Messiah  (All of the true followers of Jesus had believed in Him as the                      Messiah before they began to follow Him..)

                      2.  He assured the man that he would have riches in heaven if he would do                       this.  (Jesus presented the gospel to him.)

 

II.  The rich man’s reaction to the gospel message, V. 22

 

          A.  He became sad at what he heard Jesus say, V. 22.

                      1.  The gospel is good news; it does no make people sad who believe it.  (It                   makes them glad.  It did me and it does for all who believe it.)

                      2.  But if one does not believe the gospel, then there is good reason to be                    sad. 

          B.  He went away grieved, V. 22. 

                      1.  He went away from Jesus --- the one person in all the world who could                       give Him eternal life!

                      2.  He went away because he did not like what he heard.  (Some people                            do that today.  They cone to church, hear the gospel and do not like                       what they hear.  They think that when they come to church they are                           supposed to hear what they want to hear and if they do not hear what                        they like they go away and won’t come back.)

                      3.  He went away down the broad road that leads to destruction. 

                      4.  He chose the riches which he could not keep but just a little while and                        turned down the riches that are eternal. 

 

III.  The statements of Jesus about the rich, V. 23-25

 

          A.  Jesus told His disciples that it is hard for a rich man to get saved, V. 23.

          B.  He did not say that it is impossible --- just difficult. 

                      1.  Zaccheus was rich and he got saved. 

                      2.  Joseph of Arimathaea was rich and he got saved. 

                      3.  Nicodemus was rich and he got saved. 

          C..  But most rich people who are saved got saved before they got rich. 

                      1.  If they hadn’t, they probably would have never got saved. 

                      2.  They would probably spend eternity in hell. 

                      3.  It is a blessing to be born poor.

          D.  It is not that God has made it hard for the rich to get saved; rather it is their                     own attitude toward their riches that makes it hard for them to get saved. 

                      1.  They get accustomed to trusting in their riches to get what they need                    and want rather than trusting God. 

                      2.  They somehow want to trust their riches rather than Jesus Christ,                                 V. 24.  . 

                      3.  If they could use a portion of their riches to do good deeds which                              would get then into heaven they would do it. 

                      4.  But the gospel requires that one trust Jesus in order to get saved. 

          E.  It is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle than for a rich man to                get saved, V. 25. 

 

IV.  The question which the disciples asked about salvation, V. 26-27

 

          A.  The disciples became confused and asked , “Who then can be saved?” V. 26.           (In effect, they said, “It does not sound to us as if anybody has a chance in the           world to be saved.)

          B.  Jesus said, “With men it is impossible,” V. 27. 

                      1.  It is impossible for you to keep the law of Moses because of the                                        depraved nature you inherited from Adam.

                      2.  It is impossible for you to stay out of hell by your own efforts or your                           own merit. 

                      3.  It is impossible for you to get to heaven by your own efforts, your own                    righteousness or your own intelligence.                    

          C.  But Jesus also said that it is not impossible with God. 

                      1.  You were born depraved, but with God it is possible for you to be born                             again. 

                      2.  You are guilty as sin, but with God it is possible for you to be cleansed                          from all sin.           

                      3.  It is possible because God sent Jesus to die for our sins. 

                      4.  It is possible only through faith in Jesus Christ the Son of God.

                      5.  But know this --- that if you will not believe in Jesus Christ and trust                    Him to be your Savior then it is impossible for you to get saved, John                    14:6; 3:18.  

 

V.  An illustration

 

          A.  When preaching through Matthew, I used this illustration; let me use it again. 

          B.  A trapper used glass jugs to trap live monkeys. 

                      1.  He would put nuts and other goodies in the jug. 

                      2.  The monkey could put his empty hand into the jug, but he could not pull                            his full hand out of the jug. 

                      3.  He could turn loose at any time and be free, but he would not;  he was                     trapped. 

          C.  A lot of people who need to be saved are so busy trying to get a little bit more       of this world’s goods that they are passing up the opportunity to be saved. 

          D.  Don’t you do that!  Turn loose of anything and everything that hinders you                             from trusting Jesus Christ to be your Savior.

 

Conclusion: 

 

          Call upon Jesus today.  Ask Him to save you and keep you out of hell.  Ask Him to make sure that you go to heaven when you die. Trust Him to do just that.  Do it now.  Tomorrow may be too late. 

 

 

#66

 

Mark 10:28-31  GAINING A LOT MORE THAN YOU GIVE UP

 

Introduction:

 

          A rich man asked Jesus, “Good Master, what must I do to inherit eternal life?”  Jesus pointed him first to the Law of Moses.  Then when the man claimed that he had kept the law of Moses, Jesus told him to sell all he had and give it all away.  This showed that the man had not kept the law of Moses.  He was guilty of covetousness.  Jesus said that if he would give his riches away and follow Him, he would have treasure in heaven.  This brought a question to the mind of the apostle Peter which he asked after the man left. 

 

I.  The question which the Apostle Peter asked, V. 28

 

          A.  In Mark’s account it appears as a statement, but in Matthew’s account it                             appears as a question, Mt. 19:27. 

          B.  To paraphrase the question is:  “We have left all and followed you, now what       are we going to get out of it?”  (They had followed Jesus for three years.)

          C.  What Peter was talking about is that he and the other apostles had given up a              great deal to follow Jesus.                        

                      1.  He said, “We have forsaken all.”

                      2.  They had given up their trade, their means of income, their livelihood. 

                      3.  Peter and Andrew, James and John had given up the profitable fishing                             industry. 

                      4.  Matthew had given up the lucrative tax collecting business. 

          D.  They had given up their close relationship with families. 

                      1.  They could no longer spend a lot of time with any of them.  (Not                             mother not dad nor sisters nor brothers --- not any of them.)

                      2.  They had already been serving for three years whereas the rich man                     would have been just starting if he had become a follower..

 

II.  The experience of the apostles somewhat like the experience of every Christian

 

          A.  The Lord has not called for us to sell all and give lit all away. 

          B.  Nor has He called for all Christians to leave their trade, their means of                                     livelihood. 

                      1.  He has called on a few of us to do so. 

                      2.  Those who are in full time pastoral work and a few others have been                   called upon to leave their secular work so that they can devote full time                    to the work that God has called them to do.

          C.  Yet He has called on all Christians to forsake their old way of life --- that is,                           they are to forsake the ways of sin. 

                      1.  Some of us before we were saved had foul tongues.  (We are called                              upon to forsake that way of life.)

                      2.  Some who are now Christians lived immoral lives before they were                   saved.  (They are called on to forsake that way.)   

                      3.  Some were dishonest, some were drunkards,  some were mean and                     hateful,  some wee liars, but all are called on to forsake that way of                            life, Eph. 5:1-4. 

         

III.  The answer to the question that Peter asked, V. 29-30

 

          A.  No man has given up anything for Jesus, but what he will receive a hundred                           fold, V. 29-30. 

                      1. Technically a hundred fold is a 100 percent increase. 

                      2.  Jesus is not speaking not speaking technically; He does not mean that it                              will be exactly 100 times what was give up;  He just means that the                             gain would be exceedingly greater than the loss.   

          B.  He will receive that gain now in this life time, V. 30.  (He will not have to wait

                  until he gets to heaven.)

          C.  Let me cite you to the apostles, themselves, as examples. 

                      1.  They left their jobs, their means of livelihood, but wherever they                             traveled, they were provided for.  (It was as though they had homes in                          every city of village that they visited.  homes.  Everywhere they went                              a home was opened up to them.)

                      2.  They left their mothers and dads, but hundreds of elderly people                                                    became as mothers and dads to them.

                      4.  They left their brothers and sisters, but hundreds became closer than a                              brother or sister to them. 

                      5.  They left their friends, but they found many new friends. 

                      6.  They apparently did not gain 100 fold in money or property, but their                    needs were supplied and they gained in wealth that was worth more                            than silver or gold. 

          D.  Let me cite you to myself as an example.

                      1.  I left Pensacola, Florida and came to Texas not knowing a soul. 

                      2.  By the world’s standards I have never made big money. 

                      3.  Yet I have many friends closer than a brother and my every need is                            supplied. 

                      4.  I could go to Dallas, Houston, Tyler, Longview, California, New                   Mexico, etc. and homes would be opened to me. 

                      5.  When my dad died a van was supplied to me to carry his body back to                        Alabama to be buried.  (It didn’t cost me a dime.)

                      6.  Whatever I have given up for Christ, I have regained a hundredfold.

          E.  Even what pleasures a Christian gives for Christ, he regains a hundredfold. 

                      1.  Some folk think that if they were to live a Christian life they would                            never have any fun any more. 

                      2.  They think that the only thing that is fun is that which sinful. 

                      3.  But I heard one young man say that he did not really know what fun is                   all about until he got saved. 

                      4.  One big difference is that a Christian’s fun does not land him in jail; it                            doesn’t  get his throat cut, nor destroy his mind and body. 

                      5.  Not all pleasure which we give up are the wild oats that we could have                    been sowing; sometimes we give up a fishing trip, going to a ball                            game, going golfing or going on a picnic and we do it just because                            serving Christ is more important.  (Serving Christ is more important                        than anything!)

         

IV.  One thing which Jesus said that is puzzling, V. 30a

 

          A.  Jesus said that you will get all the good things that He has promised  ---- along      with persecutions, V. 30a.

          B.  Now, getting persecutions does not sound inviting.  (Nobody likes to be                                        persecuted.)

          C.  But if you do forsake all to follow Jesus you will be persecuted and Jesus does           not try to hide it from you.  (He wants you to know that anybody who                                 faithfully serves Him will be persecuted.)

          D.  But oddly enough getting persecutions is not all bad.

                      1.  Moses was born a Hebrew, but he was brought up as a son of the                              Pharaoh’s daughter.

                      2.  He could have continued as the son of the Pharaoh’s daughter and

                           become the next Pharaoh to rule the nation of Egypt. 

                      3.  But Moses chose to suffer persecution along with his fellow Hebrews. 

                      4.  He counted what he gained as greater riches than what gave up, Heb.                  11:-24-26.. 

 

V. And heaven, V. 30b

 

          A.  All the riches and pleasures we have talked about so far are the riches and                             pleasures of this life, and yet there are the riches and the pleasures heaven still           to come, V. 30b. 

          B.  Someone has said, “All this and heaven, too!”

          C.  Yes, by being a Christian and sacrificially serving Christ you will get a hundred               times more  out of this life than you could being an unbeliever and devoting                           your time and energies to seeking wealth and pleasure.   

                      1. Even that makes it worthwhile to be saved and to give your life in                  service to Christ. 

                      2.  But then the greater riches and the greater pleasures of heaven are still                            ahead.  (We’re talking now about wealth and pleasure than can stagger                          your imagination.  We’re talking about being heirs of God and joint                              heirs with Jesus Christ.  We’re talking about God never ceasing to pour                       out His great goodness upon us throughout all eternity,  Eph. 2:7.

 

          VI.  The time element, V. 31

 

          A.  Even getting a late start would not be a great disadvantage. 

          B.  One thing is sure:   It is better late than never.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Thank you, Lord, for saving my soul.

          2.  And thank you, Lord, for being willing to save lost sinners who are here today.

          3.  Thank  you, Lord for the privilege of serving you.

          4.  Thank you, Lord, for this church and for the privilege of being a member here. 

 

         

         

#67

 

Mark 10:32-34  A  JOURNEY TOWARD DEATH

 

Introduction:

 

          As a child Jesus had journeyed with Joseph, Mary, relatives and neighbors to Jerusalem to observe the Passover, Luke 2:42.  There the Passover lamb would be killed.  This was now the 3rd such journey that Jesus made with His disciples.  It would be His last.  He was journeying toward death ---His death.  This time He would be the real Passover Lamb which would be slain on the Passover day.  All of the Passover lambs which had ever been slain were only types or pictures of this event when He would be crucified on the cross at Mt. Calvary.   

 

I.  The continuation of the journey, V. 32

 

          A.  The word “way” in this verse means “roadway or highway.” 

          B.  “They” refers to the disciples.  (The entire group of disciples who                                        were accompanying Him to Jerusalem, not to just the 12 apostles only)

          C.  They were literally in the road walking at this time. 

          D.  They were headed for Jerusalem.  (The term “up to Jerusalem” speaks not of a                 northerly direction, but rather of the incline upward as they made their                                    journey toward Jerusalem.)

          E.  Jesus went before them and the people lagged behind Him as they walked.   

                      1.  This was unusual because they usually crowded around Him even                    as they walked.       

                      2.  Therefore, usually some went before Him, some on either side of Him                    and some immediately behind Him.  (Crowded all around Him)

                      3.  But this time they were all considerably behind Him. 

                      4.  Jesus was all alone well out in front. 

 

II.  The amazement of the people, V. 32

 

          A.  The disciples were all amazed. 

                      1.  They were not amazed that everybody was behind Jesus.

                      2.  They were amazed at Jesus. 

          B.  He had already told them twice that after they got to Jerusalem He would be                        put to death. 

          C.  They had already had trouble with the scribes and Pharisees.

                      1.  It got so bad in the synagogue back at Capernaum that Jesus had quit                           going there on the Sabbath day.   

                      2.  They had caused so much trouble for Jesus as He and the disciples                          were passing  through Samaria  that Jesus had crossed over to the                      eastern side of the Jordan  River into Perea to continue their journey on                           toward Jerusalem. 

                      3.  Some of the Pharisees had even followed Him into Perea and had tried                    to cause trouble for Him there by quizzing Him about divorce.  (This                            was a controversial subject even back then and they were confident that                              He would say something they could use against Him..)

                      4.  The closer they got to Jerusalem, the more obvious it was that trouble                            lay ahead. 

          D.  Yet Jesus just kept walking full speed ahead. 

                      1.  It almost as though He were anxious to get there. 

                      2.  However, the expression on His face and the tone of His voice must                            have shown that He dreaded it.    

                      3.  Yet He forged ahead, leading the way just as if He were looking                            forward to it.

                      4.  And they were amazed that He pressed onward;  they would thought                            that He would turn back --- or at least move on more cautiously..

 

III.  The fear of the disciples, V. 32

 

          A.  The disciples following after Jesus were afraid.

                      1.  That is the reason they were dragging behind. 

                      2.  They did not want to keep up with Him; at this point they didn’t to go;                               they wanted Him to turn back.  .

                      3.  The threat of danger and death was in the air and they were afraid.

          B.  Yet they followed along behind.  Why?

                      1.  Perhaps they hoped that nothing drastic would happen. 

                      2.  Perhaps they hoped that He would use His miraculous powers to                            deliver Himself --- and them.

                      3.  But one thing is sure:  They loved Jesus dearly and they followed Him                    in spite of their fear!

                      4.  They followed in spite of the risk to themselves! 

 

IV.  Special instructions for the twelve, V. 32-34

 

          A.  Jesus took the twelve apostles aside and talked to them, V.  32. 

          B. .He went into detail as to what would happen in Jerusalem, V. 33.    

                      1.  He had told them twice already that He would be killed;  He tells them                   again  ---  and in greater detail. 

                      2.  They were indeed headed into danger. 

                      3.  But the danger would not be as great for them at this time as for                            Himself. 

          C.  The Jewish leaders would deliver Him into the hands of Gentiles, V. 33. (This,             alone was something that would be dreadful to them.)  

                      1.  The Jewish leaders, the Sanhedrin Council, would condemn him to                             death.  (That is, they would pronounce Him guilty and worthy of                             death.)              

                      3.  The Jewish leaders would then deliver Him into the hands of the Roman                      governor almost demand that He sentence Jesus to death. 

          D.  He informed them that the Gentiles would yield to their demands;  they would           abuse Him --- and kill Him,  V. 34a.

          E.  Jesus told the twelve these things because He wanted them to know in advance              and be prepared to comfort and strengthen the other disciples when it                                        happened. 

 

V.  Victory ahead, V. 34b

 

          A.  On (or after) the third day following His death He would arise. 

          B.  In spite of the fact that suffering and death awaited Him, yet victory awaited                           Him.

          C.  This was the point that He wanted to get across to the twelve.   

                      1.  The Jewish leaders would not have the victory over Him!

                      2.  The Roman government and Roman soldiers would not have the victory                            over Him! 

                      3.  The grave would not have the victory over Him!

                      4.  The Devil would not have the victory over Him! 

                      5.  God would have the victory and Jesus would have the victory! 

                      6.  He was not going to Jerusalem to lose the battle;   He was going to                           Jerusalem to win the victory!

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  As Jesus made His journey, He was making a journey toward death --- His                      death. 

          2.  So are we with every step we take --- and with every breath we breath --- and                 with every tick of the clock! 

          3.  What we need to do is to be prepared!   We need to be saved!  We need to be            born again!  We need to be cleansed of our sin --- to be , forgiven of every sin! 

          4.  If the Death Angel were to come for you today would he find you prepared?                             Are you saved?  If not then be saved today.  Be saved now! 

          5.  If your are saved --- are you living for Jesus?  Are you dedicated to following             Him like those disciples were?  If not then start today.  Start  now ---- right

               now.. 

 

#68

 

Mark 10:35-45  RISING TO THE TOP

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus and His disciples are on their way to Jerusalem.  The disciples dropped behind Jesus because they were afraid.  Jesus called the 12 apostles aside and sought to reassure them.  Two of them got too much reassurance.  They came to Jesus asking for top positions in His kingdom. 

 

I.  The ambitions of James and John, V. 35-37

 

          A.  Mark says that James and John came to Jesus asking for a special favor, V. 35. 

                (Matthew says that their mother came with them and actually did the talking                             for them.  She was probably the one who prompted them to ask)  

          B.  When  Jesus inquired what they wanted, they asked to occupy positions at His           right hand and at His  left hand in the kingdom reign, V. 36-37. 

                      1.  If Jesus was going to rise on the third day then they expected Him to                           very quickly set up His throne, drive out the Romans and begin His rule                          over the nation of Israel.

                      2.  These two brothers wanted the two top positions under Jesus in the                   new government. 

                      3.  This was a selfish request.  (We  want higher positions than anybody                          else.)

                      4.  It was an egotistical request.  (We deserve the higher positions.)

                     

II  The response of Jesus to their request, V. 38-40

 

          A.  Jesus said, “Ye know not what ye ask,” V. 38a. 

                      1.  They did know that they were asking for the top positions. 

                      2.  The did not know that the kingdom would not be set up for hundreds of                     years.  (They were expecting it immediately.)

                      3.  They did not know that those positions could not be had just for the                      asking.  (They must be earned.)

          B.  Jesus asked them a couple of questions about their qualifications for such                            positions, V. 38b.

                      1.  He asked if they could drink of the cup that He would drink of and be                            baptized with the baptism that He would be baptized with. 

                      2.  He was speaking figuratively about the suffering He would endure.                           (Could they drink of that cup of suffering and be immersed in pain as                     He would be?)

                      3.  They did not know the suffering required to qualify for those positions.   

          C.  They said that they could, V. 39.  (They said that they were able and willing.)

          D.  Jesus said that they would drink of the cup and be baptized, V. 39.

                      1.  He could have pointed out that they were afraid to walk up front with                    Him and that did not show that they were willing to suffer for Him.

                      2.  He could have said that they would run when He would be arrested and                    that would not show their willingness to suffer for Him.

                      3.  He did not say those things;   Rather, He looked beyond His                                        crucifixion and resurrection. 

                      4.  He knew that James would be the first Christian martyr and that John                    would be exiled on the Isle of Patmos where he would suffer much for                         Jesus.. 

          E.  Yet He would not promise to grant their request, V. 40. 

                      1.  He had submitted Himself to the Father and it would be the Father who                     would decide who would get the top positions. 

                      2.  He knew that the Father would not grant the top positions merely on                       the basis of who asks first, but on the basis of who earns them. 

 

III.  The reaction of the other 10 apostles, V. 41

 

          A.  The news spread quickly to the other 10 apostles and they became very angry.                  (I suspect that they would have voted to take away the apostleship of James                     and John if they could.)

          B.  Our first inclination is to say that they had a right to be angry because James                            and John were wrong. (At least that was my first reaction.)

          C.  But what does their anger reveal about these men?

                      1.  It reveals that they, too, wanted the top positions.  (Otherwise, why                    would they be angry?)

                      2.  They were just as selfish and egotistical as James and John. 

                      3.  They were just angry that James and John had beat them to the punch in                          asking for the top positions. 

 

IV.  Lessons from the Gentile governments  V. 42-43

 

          A.  Jesus taught them a couple of lessons by calling their attention to the Gentile                            governments, V. 42.

          B.  The first lesson is that what they were requesting was what might be expected              from a Gentile ruler, but God is not like the Caesar.  (The Caesar would pass           up more qualified people and give governmental positions to his favorites.                    God is not like that.)

          C.  The second is that God did not want His church government to be patterned                         after the Gentile government, V. 43. 

                      1.  There were to be no big rulers and no little rulers in the church                            government.  (No big “Is and little you.)           

                      2.  They were to be brethren on the same level ---  all with a vote ---all                        with an equal vote.

                      3.  It is true that some men would have greater responsibilities and,                                                     therefore, greater influence than others because of the confidence                         which they had earned.

                      4.  It is also true that there would be different positions of leadership with                    different responsibilities.  (There would be instructions about those                            positions at the time they would be needed.)

                      5.  But those positions would be positions of leadership and not positions                         of dictatorial power and authority.  (Somewhat like the positions                         occupied by judges in Israel during the time of the judges and somewhat                             like the position of the Old Testament prophets.  Neither the judge nor                       the prophet had dictatorial authority.  They led by instructing the people                           to obey the word of the Lord..)

         

V.  How to go up the ladder in the Lord’s work, V. 44--45

 

          A.  Jesus said, “.., but whosoever of you will be the chiefest, shall be servant of                             all.”  V. 44

          B.  The principle is this:  If one would have a place of trust and leadership in a                     New Testament church then he must earn it. 

                      1.  The way he must earn it is by serving God and the people. 

                      2.  If he serves faithfully, he will gain the respect and confidence of others                             and they will follow him.

          C.  How does this principle relate to elected offices such as pastor, deacon,                             teacher, etc.?

                      1.  It must be acknowledged that the office itself helps to give one                              leadership. 

                      2.  But even in those offices one’s leadership must be earned and                              maintained by the service that he renders.

                      3.  If one does not earn the respect and confidence of  the people, he will                      soon discover that he does not have that leadership even though he may                            still hold the office. 

          D.  Jesus said, “the chiefest shall be servant of all,”  V. 44.

                      1.  He is not servant because he is the chiefest. 

                      2.  He is the chiefest because he is servant. 

                      3.  The chiefest is not one who sits back and relaxes while others do the                      work, but he is one who gets busy doing the work and says to                                                     others, “Come and help me.”  (He is one of the busiest people.)

                      4.  He is not there to get others to serve him, but he is there to serve. 

          E.  Jesus pointed to Himself as an example, V. 45. 

                      1.  Though He is Lord of all with absolute authority, yet He came not to                            be served.

                      2.  Rather, Jesus came to serve others. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1,  It us not as important to be the greatest in the kingdom as it is to be in the                            kingdom.  Are you saved?  If not, then repent of your sin, trust Jesus to save                  your soul and get in the kingdom.

          2.  It is not as important to be in one of the highest positions in the Lord’s work as           it is to render the best of service that you can render.  Be willing to serve in                            whatever way that you can whether it be great or small.  Then seek to do your               best.  That is all anyone can do.  .     

          4.  Never feel like you are doing more than your part.  The more that you do for                             others and the higher your rating will be with the Lord.  .

 

         

         

#69

 

Mark 10:46-52  BLIND BARTIMAEUS MADE TO SEE

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text James and John ask a favor of Jesus which He refused to grant.  In this text Bartimaeus asks a legitimate favor and Jesus granted his request without hesitation. 

 

I.  His encounter with Bartimaeus, V. 46

 

          A.  Jesus and His disciples come to Jericho.

                      1.  They are still on their way to Jerusalem from Galilee. 

                      2.  They had earlier crossed over to the eastern side of the Jordan River. 

                      3.  They have now crossed back to the western side.  (Jericho is on the                      western side.)                   

          B.  Jericho is the city where Joshua and his army fought their first battle in the                             conquest of Canaan.

          C.  It was located about 20 miles northwest of Jerusalem. 

          D.  Mark does not tell us anything about their stay in Jericho, but he does tell us                        about what happened when Jesus went out of Jericho and started on His way           toward Jerusalem.

                      1.  Just outside the gate of the city there sat a blind man begging.

                      2.. He was blind Bartimaeus. 

                      3.  Matthew says there were actually two blind men there begging, I we                            can be sure that Matthew was right.

                      4.  But Mark mentions only Bartimaeus. 

 

II.  The cry of Bartimaeus to Jesus, V. 47

 

          A.  Bartimaeus had already heard about Jesus healing the sick, causing the lame to                 walk, raising the dead making the blind to see in other places.  (It was making          the blind to see that had impressed him most.)

          B.  He must have wished many times that he could go to Galilee or to some place           where Jesus was and get Jesus to heal him.   

          C.  He probably never dreamed that Jesus would come his way, but suddenly he                        learned that Jesus was right out in front of him.  (He could hardly believe it.)

          D.  He began to cry out to Jesus calling Jesus the “Son of David” and asking Jesus        have mercy on him. 

          E.  This raises the question about how Jesus would react to being called the Son of                             David. 

                      1.  This was a term which could simply mean “a descendant of David,” but                     it was most commonly used to speak of the Messiah.  (Almost surely                             that is the sense in which Bartimaeus was addressing Him.) 

                      2.  Jesus, prior to this time, had been called the Messiah only a very few                     times.

                      3.  John the Baptist and a few others had called Him that.

                      4.  In most cases Jesus had instructed that those who recognized Him                            as the Messiah should tell no man.  (The reason was because Jesus did                          not want to stir up the opposition too much at that time because it was                             not yet time for Him to be crucified  Now this man was telling                                   everybody present that Jesus is the Messiah, the Christ.) 

                      5.  Would Jesus ignore this man so as not to identify Himself to the crowd                             that He is the Christ?  Or would He acknowledge that He is the Messiah                        by answering this man? 

                      6.  Answer:  There was not reason now to it keep that He is the Messiah.                         (He was on His way to Jerusalem to be crucified and it was now time to                          openly acknowledge openly that He does claim to be the Messiah..  So                    when Bartimaeus called Him the Son of David, He acknowledged that                             He is.) 

 

III.  Efforts to silence Bartimaeus, V. 48

 

          A.  Many people tried to silence Bartimaeus.

                      1.  Not that they objected to him calling Jesus the Messiah. 

                      2.  And not that they believed Bartimaeus to be right. 

                      3.  They just felt that a beggar should not bother a great person like                     they knew Jesus to be.  

                      4.  It seems that when somebody wants to turn to Jesus the Devil always                            finds some way to try to stop him.

          B.  But this man was not  easily silenced. 

                      1.  The more they tried to interfere the louder he got.  (“Thou son of

                           David, have mercy on me!”)

                      2.  He never dreamed that he would have this kind of opportunity to be                       healed and he was not about to keep quiet.  (He was not about to pass                   up this opportunity to get his eyesight.)

 

IV.  Jesus calling for Bartimaeus, V. 49-50

 

          A.  Jesus stopped and called for Bartimaeus. 

                      1.  He commanded the people who had been trying to stop Bartimaeus                      from crying out  and told them to bring Bartimaeus to Him. 

                      2.  Suddenly these people changed their tune and encouraged Bartimaeus                      to come to Jesus, V. 49.

          B.  And did he ever!

                      1.  Bartimaeus jumped up and threw off his robe so that he would not get                      tangled up in and fall. 

                      2.  In his undergarments he went stumbling off in the direction of the voice                   of Jesus. 

 

V.  The request of Bartimaeus, V. 51

 

          A.  Jesus asked Bartimaeus what he wanted

          B.  Bartimaeus asked that he might receive his sight. 

                      1.  He had come out for the purpose of getting money. 

                      2.  But he realized that there was something far more important than                            money. 

                      3.  He asked that he might receive his sight. 

 

VI.  The faith that made him whole, V. 52

 

          A.  It was not that he deserved to be made whole.

          B.  It was not that he earned the right to be made whole.

          C.  It was not that by his own efforts he was made whole. 

          D.  It was by Jesus who made him whole. 

          E.  But it was his faith in Jesus which gained him the privilege of being made                            whole. 

          F.  He was made whole immediately.  (So it is when one trusts Jesus for salvation;           he is made immediately made whole spiritually.)

 

VII.  Following Jesus, V. 52

 

          A.  Right then and there Bartimaeus started following Jesus. 

          B.  The Bible does not give any further account of him, but I suspect that he went                all the way to Jerusalem with Jesus and was there when Jesus was crucified.                          (If so, he actually saw Jesus crucified with his own eyes.).

          C.  When one gets saved he should follow the example of Bartimaeus. 

                      1.  He should start right then following Jesus.

                      2.  He should follow Jesus in baptism.

                      3.  He should follow Jesus in right living. 

                      4.  He should follow Jesus in Bible truth.

                      5.  The time to start is immediately.

 

Conclusion:

         

          If you were blind and Jesus were present here in this service would you call out to

Him like Bartimaeus did and ask Him to have mercy on you and give you your sight?  Let me tell you that it is a lot worse to be unsaved and be on the road to hell than it is to be physically blind.   From your heart you can silently call out to Him and ask Him to have mercy on you and save your soul.  When you call on Him even though you do it silently Jesus will hear you. We won’t hear you, but that won’t matter.  Jesus will hear you and Jesus will save your soul.   

 

 

 

#70

 

Mark 11:1-10  JESUS PROCLAIMED AS KING

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text a blind man at Jericho proclaimed that Jesus is King.  Technically he did not use the word, king.  He used the words “son of David.”  But in that day this term was commonly  used to speak of the Messiah.  Yet to proclaim Him as Messiah is the equivalent of proclaiming Him to be King because the Messiah was to rule as a king. 

          In our text today Jesus is again proclaimed to be the king, yet not just by one man but by a great multitude.  This must have come as a surprise to His disciples because He had repeatedly told them that He was going to Jerusalem to be put to death.   

 

I.  Coming near to Jerusalem, V. 1a

 

          A.  Marks says that they came near to Jerusalem to Bethphage and Bethany.

                      1.  Even at Jericho they had been fairly near to Jerusalem.  (About 20                            miles)

                      2.  At Bethphage and Bethany they were only about two miles from                    Jerusalem. 

          B.  Mark does not mention that on the previous day at Bethany Jesus had raised                              Lazarus from the dead.  

                      1.  Bethany was a small village, but huge crowds had gathered there to                                       attend the Passover at Jerusalem.     

                      2.  The great crowds had been electrified by the news that Jesus had                            raised Lazarus from the dead. 

          C.  They had virtually all reached the same conclusion that blind Bartimaeus had                              reached --- that Jesus is the promised Messiah, the Messiah King who would           deliver Israel from Roman rule.  . 

 

II.  Two disciples sent on a mission, V. 1b-6

 

          A..  Jesus, Himself, took the initiative to have Himself proclaimed as King. 

          B.  He sent two disciples into the adjoining village to get a colt on which He                             would ride into Jerusalem, V. 1b-2. 

                      1.  Since they had spent the night at Bethany, it would appear that he sent                     them to Bethphage. 

                      2.  Mark says that they would find a colt (a donkey colt) tied and that they                          should untie it and bring it to Him.  (Matthew says that they would find                            also its mother which they should also bring.)

                      3.  Jesus said that the owners may first object , but would consent once      

                           they learn that Jesus wants to use it.

          C.  It all worked out just exactly as Jesus had said that it would, V. 5-6.

                      1.  He knew where the colt would be and what the reaction of the owners                            would be. 

                      2.  They set a worthy example for us to follow.  (We should all be willing                          for Jesus to use anything which we have.  It all belongs to Him                                 anyway.)

 

III.  Jesus riding on the colt, V. 7

 

          A.  What Jesus is about to do is to ride into Jerusalem on the donkey colt.  (By                      doing so He would be proclaiming Himself to be the Messiah.  He would be                   proclaiming Himself to be Messiah King, Zech. 9:9.)

          B.  His disciples had no royal tapestry with which to adorn the colt so they used                         their own robes, V. 7.

          C.  It was not only prophesied that the Messiah would ride into Jerusalem on a                         donkey colt, but it was fitting for Him to do so as Messiah-King.  (A king in                        olden days would ride on a horse into battle.  He would ride a white horse                          when he came into a city for a victory celebration.  But he would ride on a                    donkey when entering a city on a mission of peace.  Jesus was on a mission of            peace) 

          D.  Verse 2 said that the colt had never been ridden by man. 

                      1.  Usually such a colt would buck when he feels a man on his back for the                    first time.

                      2.  But this one was as gentle as a lamb. 

 

IV.  Jesus proclaimed as Messiah by the crowd, V. 8-10

 

          A.  It seems that the disciples were the first to shout His praises proclaiming Him         to be the Messiah as He rides toward Jerusalem. 

          B.  The crowds quickly join in, V. 8. 

          C.  They shout “Hosanna” which means, “Save us, we pray!”

                      1.  They were not asking for soul-salvation.

                      2,   They were asking to be delivered from the Gentiles who ruled over                             them. 

          D.  They asked God to bless the kingdom of David and the new Davidic King,

               V. 10. 

         

V.  Jesus proclaimed as King, but not crowned as King

 

          A.  Jesus was proclaimed by that great crowd to be their King. 

          B.  But they never followed through to crown Him as King. 

          C.  The same crowd that proclaimed Him as king would demand His crucifixion.      

                (At least they would be a part of the crowd which would.)       

          D.  He could have been crowned if that had been His purpose, but that was not His                 purpose at that time. 

                      1.  He came not to be crowned as king, but to be crucified. 

                      2.  He came to be crowned, but not as king.  (He would be crowned with a                              crown of thorns.)

                      3.  If He had been crowned s king , we would have no Savior.

          E.  And yet He was --- and is --- King!

                      1.  He is the King of Kings and the Lord of Lords!

                      2.  He will return, He will then be crowned as King and He will rule.  (He                     will rule Israel and He will rule the world!)

                      3.  But even now He is King of a spiritual kingdom! 

                      4.  It is up to each individual to crown Him as King and ruler of his own                            life. 

                      5.  But first one needs to repent of his sin and trust Jesus to be his Savior. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Are you saved?  If not then trust Him now to save your soul.  Do it right now.  If you are already saved, then let Him rule your life.  Let Him be King of your life.  Follow the Lord in baptism.  Be a member of one of the Lord’s churches.  Worship Him and serve Him in one of His New Testament churches.

 

 

 

 

#71

 

Mark 11:11-21  LESSONS FROM A FIG TREE

 

Introduction: 

 

          In our previous text Jesus was proclaimed as king by a huge crowd of people, but He was not crowned as king.  There was no official action taken to make Him king.  But that did not mean that He had no authority.  His authority was not given to Him by men.  It was given to Him by God the Father in heaven. 

          In our text today we see Him use that authority.  He displayed His authority in the religious world by the things He did in the temple and He displayed His authority in the realm of nature by the curse that He placed on a fig tree.  He used a fig tree to teach His disciples a lesson.  . 

 

I.  An encounter with a fig tree that had no figs,  V. 11-13

 

          A.  Mark says that upon entering the city of Jerusalem Jesus entered the temple                             and that He looked around on all things, V. 11a.

                      1.  That is, He closely examined the things that were located in the temple                       courtyard. 

                      2.  He also closely observed all the things that were taking place there.  . 

          B.  When the evening came Jesus took His twelve apostles and left the temple to                          return to Bethany where they would spend the night, V. 11b. 

                      1.  Apparently they stayed in the home of some of His disciples who lived                    at Bethany.. 

                      2.  They probably stayed in the home of Lazarus and his sisters.  (This was                     the Lazarus whom He had raised from the dead just a few days earlier.)  

          C.  It was the next morning as they were returning to Jerusalem that they                                  encountered the fig tree, V. 12. 

                      1.  They apparently had left Bethany very early because Mark said that                            Jesus was hungry. 

                      2.  They had left the home of their hosts before breakfast. 

                      3.  If they had waited, I am quite sure that His hosts would have fed them                   breakfast, but Jesus was anxious to arrive early at the temple. 

          D.  As they walked along they could see a fig tree ahead that from all appearances         could furnish breakfast for them because its branches were filled with leaves,                      V. 13a. 

                      1.  In that part of the world it was common for figs to appear on the tree                     before the leaves appeared.  . 

                      2.  By the time the leaves were in full growth the figs would be mature and                       many of them would be ripe. 

                      3.  So, by all appearances, a tasty breakfast awaited them at the fig tree. 

          E.     There is a puzzle concerning the latter part of this verse; there Mark says that                 the time of figs had not yet come, V. 13b.

                      1.  Some seem to think that Mark meant that the tree had put on its leaves                             prematurely and, therefore, did not have any figs on it. 

                      2.  Some think that he meant that the time for the fig harvest had not yet                            arrived and that, therefore, it was to be expected that the tree should                      still have mature fruit on it ready to be eaten.  (This sounds more                   plausible.).  

                      3.  Either way, this fig tree, by its abundant leaves, gave the appearance of                             having fruit available for Jesus and His disciples, but there were no figs                              on it.  

 

II.  A curse pronounced on the fig tree, V. 14

 

          A.  Jesus spoke to the fig tree and pronounced a curse upon it. 

          B.  The curse was that from this time forth no man would eat fruit from this tree.     

                      1.  The tree would be barren. 

                      2.  It would stop bearing fruit. 

                      3.  It would never bear fruit again. 

          C.  Mark makes a point of informing us that the disciples heard Jesus when He                             placed the curse upon the fig tree. 

         

III.  Their journey on into Jerusalem and their entrance into the temple, V. 15-19

 

          A.  The events at the temple would soon cause the disciples to temporarily forget                   about the fig tree and the curse that Jesus had placed upon it.  .

                      1.  When they went into the courtyard of the temple pandemonium broke                               loose, V. 15a.  . 

                      2.  Jesus found a virtual stock yard full of animals which were for sale to                             those who would purchase them to make sacrifices to the Lord.  (Don’t                              you know that it smelled good in thiere?)

                      3.  He literally drove out the temple officials who were in charge of the sale                     of those animals. 

                      4.  Furthermore, He drove out the customers who were there to make                            purchases.  .

          B.  Also in the temple courtyard Jesus found tables with stacks and stacks of coins,               V. 15b.. 

                      1.  The coins were for sale to the those who came from foreign countries.  .

                      2.  The Jews were required to give a certain Jewish coin into the treasury                           of the temple.

                      3.  Those who came from foreign lands had no such coins with them, but                      temple officials sat at the tables ready to sell them the required temple                             coins --- for a good profit, of course. 

                      4.  Jesus overturned the tables, sent the coins scattering across the floor                    and drove out the temple officials who sat at the tables. 

          C.  There were cages full of doves in the temple for sale to the poor, who                                         could not afford to buy bulls, goats or sheep to make sacrifices, V. 15c.                        (Jesus also drove out those who were in charge of selling the doves.)

          D.  Jesus also stopped people from carrying or implements through the                                        temple courtyard other than the sacred vessels or implements and tools which           were prescribed for use in the temple by the Law of Moses. 

                      1.  Mark does not tell us what kind of vessels or tools they were carrying                           or what they were used for. 

                      2.  Some have speculated that they may have been vessels or instruments                      which may be llegiitimately used in other areas of the temple grounds, but                     which should not have been brought through the area which was                           designed for worship. 

                      3.  Some have speculated that they had no legitimate use anywhere in the                      temple grounds, but that they were brought there for the use of those                   who sold animals or coins. 

                      4.  We can be sure of one thing:  They had no business bringing those                            vessels into the temple courtyard and that is why Jesus stopped them. 

          E.  Jesus told the people that God, through the Prophet Isaiah, had said that His                      house was to be a house of prayer, but He said that they had made it a den of thieves, V. 17. 

                      1.  With all of the pens of animals and all of the cages of doves it did not                      look like a place of worship and prayer.

                      2.  With all of the smell of the animal dung and all of the sounds of the                            animals, it did not sound like a house of worship and prayer. 

                      3.  With all of the dickering about prices and sales, the atmosphere was not                           conducive to worship, prayer and praise; Jesus said that the Jewish                       leaders had made God’s house a den of thieves. 

          F.  The temple officials were so offended that they immediately set about to come                   up with a plan whereby they could carry out the goal which they had                                  already set, V. 18, 19. 

                      1.  According to verse 19 Jesus stayed in the temple all day not allowing                          the temple officials to resume their lucrative business of selling animals                          and temple coins. 

                      2.  The members of the Sanhedrin had already purposed to kill Him and                          immediately they counseled with one another to see if anybody could                            come up with a plan whereby they could do so and get away with it.   

                      3.  They would have immediately drug Him out of the temple and out of                       the city and killed Him, but they were afraid to do so;  they were afraid                          they would face the wrath of the common people with whom Jesus was                   still very popular.    . 

                      4.  Jesus then stayed in the temple until it was evening; then He left                                                    the temple and went out of the city to return to Bethany to spend the night.   

 

III.  The withering of the fig tree, V.. 20-21           

 

          A.  The next morning as Jesus and His disciples were returning back to Jerusalem             to the temple, they came to the fig tree upon which Jesus had placed a curse,                V. 20.  

                      1.  The tree was still standing, but it was all withered.  (It was dead.)

                      2.  The leaves were withered.

                      3.  The limbs and trunk of the tree had completely dried up. 

                      4.  Even the roots were dead.. 

          B.  The Apostle Peter, remembering the curse that Jesus had placed on the tree,                             called it to the attention of Jesus and, of course, to the attention of the other disciples, V. 21. 

                      1.  He was amazed that the tree had so quickly dried up after Jesus has                      placed a curse upon it. 

                      2.  I am sure that Jesus was not amazed, but all of the apostles must                            have been. 

 

IV.  The lesson from the fig tree

         

          A.  If Jesus explained to the disciples the lesson which they should learn from the              fig tree Mark says nothing about it.   

          B.  Even Mark, himself, does not point out the lesson involved. 

          C.  But the lesson is obvious. 

                      1.  The fig tree represented the nation of Israel along with the                          Jewish temple which was located at Jerusalem.   (As the fig                            tree was to bear fruit for the people, even so Israel, with its                       temple worship, was to bear spiritual fruit for God.)

                      2.  The fig tree being full of leaves, as Jesus and His disciples had seen it on                    the previous morning, portrayed Israel as having the appearance of                        being fruitful spiritually.           

                      3.  But it, being fruitless in spite of its appearance, portrayed Israel and its                             temple services as being spiritually barren. 

                      4.  It was supposed to represent the truths of God to the people of Israel                          and to all the nations of the world, but the Jewish leaders had turned it                    into a business enterprise whose chief purpose was to enrich the priests                          who operated the business. 

                      5.  The fact that the fig tree had withered so quickly portrayed the soon-                              coming fall of the nation and the destruction of the temple which was                       located there. 

                      6.  Its fall is now a matter of history.  (The nation was scattered in 70 A. D.                              and its glorious temple was utterly destroyed.) 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Israel has now been restored as a nation, but it is still not bearing the spiritual                           fruit for God that it should bear.

          2.  New Testament churches, which are made up chiefly of Gentiles, now have the          responsibility of bearing spiritual fruit representing God and His Son, Jesus                            Christ, to the world. 

          3.  The question for each church congregation is:  Is this church bearing the                            spiritual fruit for God that God wants it to bear?  (If not, then remember the               fig tree!)

          4.  The question for each Christian is:  Am I bearing the fruit that God would have        me to bear?  (If not, remember the fig tree!)

 

 

 

#72

 

Mark 11:22-26  A LESSON IN PRAYER

 

Introduction:

 

          In the previous message Jesus used a fig tree to teach His disciples a lesson about spiritual fruitage and about judgment on those who fail to produce good spiritual fruit.  In this text He uses the same fig tree to teach a lesson in prayer. 

 

I. He taught them to have faith in God, V. 22

 

          A.  Jesus said that they should have faith in God, V. 22. 

          B.  The idea is that they should learn to pray with faith in God. 

          C.  They had just seen a demonstration of what faith in God can do. 

                      1.  He had prayed to God the Father that the fig tree would wither. 

                      2.  Believing fully that His prayer would be answered, He had pronounced                     judgment on the fig tree. 

                      3.  The next morning they found the fig tree already withered. 

          D.  Now Jesus says to them, “Have faith in God.”

                      1.  The idea is:  “You learn to pray like that.”

                      2.  “You learn to have that kind of faith in God.”

                      3.  “You learn to pray with that kind of faith in God.”

 

II.  He taught them concerning the kind of miracles they would be able to do, V. 23

 

          A.  Jesus expands on the idea that they should learn to pray with faith in God,

               V. 23. 

          B.  He said that one with faith in God would be able to move mountains.

                      1.  Jesus had prayed for the fig tree to wither and the fig tree withered.  . 

                      2.  One of His disciples would be able to pray for a mountain to be moved                            and the mountain would be moved. 

                      3.  It would be the disciple’s task to pray in faith and it would be God’s                            task to move the mountain. 

          C.  The working of miracles was not new to the apostles. 

                      1.  At an earlier time they had been given the power to heal the sick and to                             cast out demon spirits.                       

                      2.  But the power to work such nature miracles was new. 

                      3.  Their ability to work miracles was not limited to moving mountains; that                             was just an example of the kind of miracles they would be able to do.  

 

III.  He taught them that the prayer of faith must be a genuine desire from the
        heart, V. 24     

 

          A.  Jesus said, “...what things soever ye desire, when ye pray believe...”

          B.  This means that Jesus did not promise that God would answer a prayer that is                  designed to test God.          

                      1.  One might decide to test God and pray for Mt. Magazine to be moved                            from Arkansas to Texas.

                      2.  One might test God by praying that God would move a book off the                      table.

                      3.  In the first place, this would not be a prayer of faith.  (It would be is a                             prayer that is not based on faith that God will do it, but, rather, upon                    doubt that God would do it.  It would merely be a test.)

                      4.  In the second place, it would not be a real desire of the heart. 

          C.  Yet even when one has a genuine desire, the desire must come from the                       born-again nature and not from the flesh nature, James 4:2-3. 

 

IV.  He taught them to forgive others, V. 25-26

 

          A.  Jesus said that when a disciple prays, he should forgive others, V. 25.

          B.  When we pray and ask God to forgive our sins, that should be a reminder for                       us to forgive others their sins. 

                      1.  In saving our souls, the Lord has already forgiven us of more things and                        bigger things than what others have done against us. 

                      2.  Since God has forgiven us so much, we should not find it difficult to                        forgive others.  (But we do.)

          C.  He warned that if we do not forgive that God will not forgive us, V. 26. 

                      1.  This does not mean that the Christian would lose his salvation. 

                      2.  It does mean that he will be chastened more severely for his wrong                            doing. 

                      3.  It also means hat his prayer would not be granted. 

 

V.  He later taught that the days of miracles would stop

 

          A.  In this text there is nothing said about miracles stopping, but neither does it say           that they would not stop. 

          B.  But through the writings of the Apostle Paul, the Lord taught that the spiritual                gift of miracles would stop. 

                      1.  He taught that a number of spiritual gifts would stop. 

                      2.  He taught that the gift of prophecy would be stop, I Cor. 13:8.   (There                              would be no more new revelations.)

                      3.  He taught that the gift of tongues would be stop, I Cor 13:8. 

                      4.  He taught that the gift of supernatural knowledge would be stopped,

                           I Cor. 13:8.   . 

                      5.  He taught them when these gifts would be stopped, ! Cor. 13:10. 

                      6.  He taught them that when these gifts would be stopped that only the                           spiritual gifts of faith, hope and charity (love) would be continued,

                           I Cor. 13:13. 

          C.  Some may say, “But I believe the miraculous gifts are still in effect today and          so I claim the power of God.”

                      1.  You may claim it, but you cannot have it unless God gives it and God                     will not go against His word..  (He said that the miraculous sign gifts                                  would cease when all parts of His revealed word were given and                         recorded..)

                      2.  It is dangerous business to claim supernatural powers;  you might get                      hold of a power that you cannot turn loose.  (Demon spirits)

 

VI.  The great privilege of prayer

 

          A.  There is no need for us to feel short-changed just because we cannot perform                miracles;  we can still pray. 

          B.  There is no problem that is too big to carry to God in prayer. 

          C.  There is no problem too small to carry to God in prayer.  

          D.  If we pray from a desire which is from the born-again heart,    --- if we pray                             from a forgiving heart and --- if we pray in faith, then God will answer our                       prayer. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you have never prayed and asked God to save your soul  then now is a good                time to do it.  (It can be dangerous to put it off.)

          2.  If you are saved and there are others whom you need to forgive, then now is                             a good time to do that.  (It can also be dangerous to put this off.)

          3.  If you are saved, then you should pray and ask God to show you His for your        life.  (He will do this through the teachings of the Bible and by the leadership of      the Holy Spirit.)

          4.  What you already know to be His will for your life ------ do it.  . 

 

 

 

#73

 

Mark 11:27-33  DEFYING THE AUTHORITY OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          Even before Jesus arrived at Jerusalem the Jewish leaders had plotted His death, John 11:55-57.  However, on the day of His arrival Jesus was proclaimed as Messiah by several thousand people.  As a result the Jewish leaders dared not touch Him.  On the second day Jesus made havoc in the temple and they still dared not touch Him.  By the third day they have a plan by which they hope to get rid of Him. 

 

I.  A trick question, V. 27-28

 

          A.  When Jesus arrived at the Temple He went into the court of Israel where the                          Jewish people were gathered.          

                      1.  Mark said that He walked about, V. 27.

                      2.  Matthew and Luke said that He taught the people. 

          B.  The Jewish leaders came to Him with a trick question, V. 27.

                      1.  The question asked first:  By what authority He does the things that He                      does, V. 27.   (By what authority does He drive out those who buy and                     sell in the temple, by what authority did He overturn the money tables                              and by authority does He teach on the temple grounds?)

                      2.  The question also asks who gave Him His authority?  (They meant:                             What temple official gave Him this authority?  So far as they were                        concerned, whatever He might want to do in the temple He must first                    come to one of the temple officials and get permission.)

          C.  They really thought they had Him trapped.

                      1.  If He should acknowledge that He had no authority He would be                         confessing before the people that He is worthy of arrest.

                      2.  If He should name some temple official as having given Him authority,                         they would call  that official and prove Him wrong before all.  (And,                        thus, worthy of arrest.)

 

II.  A trick question from Jesus to the Jewish leaders, V. 29-33

 

          A.  Jesus said that if they would answer a question for Him, He would answer their         question, V. 29

          B.  He asked whether John’s the authority of John’s baptism was from heaven or             from men, V. 30.

          C.  Right off, the Jews knew that they had fallen into a trap and that either way                     they would answer, He had them.

                      1.  There must have been a long silence for Jesus went on to say,                            “Answer me,”

                      2.  I can envision one of them saying to the others , “Let’s have a                                        conference.”

                      3.  They said, “If we say, ‘Of heaven’ He will say, ‘Why don’t you believe                            John?’” V. 31.  (John had publicly proclaimed Jesus to be the Lame of                     God that takes a way the sin of the world.  John had proclaimed Jesus                         to be the Son of God, the Messiah, the Christ.  If they believed John                       they know that He has authority to do whatever He wants to do in the                              temple.  They would know that His authority is from God the Father.) 

                      4.  If they say, “Of men” they feared the people, V. 32..  (Luke says that                          they feared that the people would stone them.)

          D.  So the Jewish leaders answered, “We cannot tell,” V. 33

                      1.  These leaders claimed to be the authority on all matters pertaining to the                      Jewish religion.

                      2.  It was extremely embarrassing to them to admit publicly that they did                           not know the answer to His question.  (They really did know, but they                           would not admit that John was from God.)

                      3.  It was especially embarrassing  because it was such a ridiculously easy                          question to answer.  (All of the people knew the answer.)

          E.  Jesus said, “Neither will I answer you, V. 33.

 

III.  The result

 

          A.  Jesus was the victor.

                      1.  He was able to avoid the trap which the Jews had set for Him. 

                      2.  He was more of a hero to the crowd than He had ever been. 

          B.  But the Jewish leaders were embarrassed before the crowd and, therefore, they                 hated Jesus all the more.

 

IV.  Some things that should be noted:

 

          A.  That the Jewish leaders did not want the truth. 

                      1.  If they had wanted to know the truth, He would have told them that He                            is the Christ, that He is the Creator and that God the Father has sent                           Him and has given Him all authority both in heaven and in earth.

                      2.  All they wanted was to arrest Jesus and kill Him. 

                      3.  They did not believe John the Baptist, they did not believe the evidence                         of His miracles and they would not have believed Him if He had                                        answered their question.

          B.  That if men want t know the truth they will have opportunity to hear the truth         and believe it. 

          C.  That even if men do not want the truth, many will hear it anyway.  (The Jews                 had heard it from John the Baptist, they had read it from the Scriptures, they                            had heard it from the testimonies of apostles and other Christians.  they had even heard it from the huge crowd which accompanied Jesus into the city proclaiming Him to be Messiah King..)

          D.  That if men do not want the truth, God will stop trying to persuade them of it.            (Jesus would not answer their question.  They had already heard the truth and             their minds were dead set against it..)

          E.  If men do not want the gospel message God will let them go on in their                                        unbelief.  (He will let them to hell.  He will not force anyone to go to heaven                            nor take them there against his will.)

          F.  If a man persists in defying Jesus then there is no way that man can win. 

                      1.  There is no way that his sins can be forgiven.

                      2.  There is no way that he can be saved. 

                      3.  There is no way that he can stay out of hell.

                      4.  There is no way that he can go to heaven.

         

Conclusion:

 

          One can defy God’s Holy Word and reject God’s gospel message in this life if that is what he wants to do.  God is not going to force one to believe that Jesus is the Christ  and that Jesus is his only hope of staying out of hell.  God did not force those Jewish leaders to trust Jesus as the Christ today. 

          But if any man, woman, boy or girl wants to go to heaven then let that person believe God’s Holy Word.  Let him believe the testimony of God’s holy people.  Let him yield to the wooing of God’s Holy Spirit as the Holy Spirit touches his heart and urges him to turn to Jesus and be saved. 

          If you want to be saved then you must trust Jesus to save you.  Ask Jesus to save you.  Acknowledge to Jesus that you are a sinner who stands in danger of hell fire and ask Jesus to forgive you of your sin.  Ask Jesus to cleanse you of every sin.  Ask Him to keep you out of hell.  Ask Him to take you to heaven when you die.  Ask Him to save your soul.  Trust Him to save your soul.  Do it now!  Come now and trust Jesus to save your soul. 

 

 

 

#74 

 

Mark 12:1-12  GOD’S KINGDOM WORK TAKEN  FROM THE JEWS AND GIVEN TO NET TESTAMENT CHURCHES

 

Introduction:

 

          From the time of Jacob Israel had a unique position in the world.  Israel was God’s representative in the world.  However, during His earthly ministry Jesus had founded a New Testament church.  He would soon give the Great Commission to that church which would result in churches of like faith and practice being organized throughout the world.  The authority to be God’s representative to the world would be taken from Israel and would be given to New Testament churches.  That is the point of this parable. 

 

I.  The parable, V. 1-9

 

          A.  A certain land owner planted a vineyard, V. 1.  (For grapes)

                      1.  He put a hedge about it.  (For protection)

                      2.  He dug  a place for a winefat.  (For collecting the juice)

                      3.  He built a tower.  (Also for protection)

                      4.  He let it out to husbandmen.  (For oversight of the vineyard)

                      5.  He then went into a far country. 

          B.  At the harvest season he expected his share of the harvest, V. 2-5. 

                      1.  This would customarily be one bottle of grape juice out of four. 

                      2.  Therefore, he sent a servant after his share. 

                      3.  However, the husbandmen mistreated his servant and sent him away                             wounded.

                      4.  He then sent other servants and they, too, were mistreated and some                        were killed.

          C.  In a last-ditch effort, the landowner sent his son to collect his share of the                               harvest, but the husbandmen killed his son also, V. 6-8. 

          D.  What would the landowner do?  He would destroy the husbandmen and give                      the vineyard into the hands of others, V. 9.

 

II.  The interpretation of the parable, V. 10-12

 

          A.  Jesus did not interpret all of the parable to the Jewish leaders, but He did point       out two things to them by quoting from Psalm 118:22-23.

                      1.  The One whom they had rejected is the Son of God. 

                      2.  The One whom they had rejected will be ruler of all. 

          B.  The landowner represents God.

                      1.  The vineyard represents the work of God, that is, the business of God in                            this world.

                      2.  The place for the winefat represents God’s desire for fruitage from

                           His vineyard.  (Honor, obedience and a  witness to the world.)

                      3.  The husbandmen represent the people of Israel, particularly the religious                     leadership of Israel.  (They were in charge of God’s affairs in the                     world.)

                      4.  The servants of the landowner represent God’s prophets whom God                      had sent to Israel to insure that Israel would bring forth spiritual                                       fruitage for God. 

                      5.  The beating, stoning and killing of the servants represent the way                            Israel had dealt with God’s prophets. 

          C.  The sending of the son of the landowner represents Jesus Christ, the Son of                              God, whom God sent to Israel. 

                      1.  The Jews had already issued orders for Jesus to be arrested and                                                     killed. 

                      2.  Questioning Him about His authority was an effort on their part to do                       just that.

                      3.  Jesus was letting them know that He knew their plans and that                                        eventually they would succeed. 

                      4.  But He also lets them know that in killing Him, they would be killing                              the very Son of God. 

          D.  The result of killing Jesus would be that God would destruction on Israel and          that God’s kingdom work in this world would be given into the hands of                             others. 

                      1.  The destruction or Israel, of which Jesus spoke, took place in 70 A. D.                       by the Roman army. 

                      2.  The others to whom the kingdom work was given were New Testament                       churches.

                      3.  At first those churches were made up of Jewish people, but with the                      coming of a new generation, they were filled with Gentiles.           

 

III.  The kingdom work of God in the hands of each New Testament church

 

          A.  With Israel, God had but one representative group, but with New Testament                        churches God has many representative groups in many nations of the world. 

          B.  Each new Testament church has authority from God to represent Him in the                             world. 

                      1.  As His representative, we do not make new laws, new plans of                                        salvation, new modes of baptism nor new moral standards., but we                       preach what God has already given in the Bible and we baptize in                        keeping with New Testament Scripture.  . 

                      2.  We preach with full authority from God. 

                      3.  We baptize with His full authority. 

          C.  God expects fruitage from New Testament churches just as He expected                             fruitage from Israel.  (Obedience, honor, faithful witnessing)                       

          D.  We can expect opposition in the world. 

                      1.  In Old Testament times the world stoned and killed God’s prophets.                   2.  When God sent His Son, they crucified His Son. 

                      3.  They killed the apostles and early disciples. 

                      4.  We can expect to be misunderstood and abused by the world.                                                     (Some of us may even be killed.)                      

          E.  But if we will be faithful to God, God will give us fruitage to His honor and                            glory.  (That is all we should ask for.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Do not make the same mistake that the Jews made and reject the Christ. 

          2.  Do not join in with those who oppose and persecute Christians.  (To do so is                    to bring God’s judgment on yourself.)

          3.  If like Paul, you have persecuted Christians, then, like Paul, repent of your sin,                      trust Jesus to save you and get in the work of God.

          4.  Christian friend, are you faithful to God in worshipping Him, serving Him and         witnessing for Him?

 

 

 

#75

 

Mark 12:13-17  THE TAX TRAP

 

Introduction:

 

          The Jewish leaders sought to put Jesus to death without getting themselves killed by the mob.  They had been unsuccessful up to this pint, but they have not given up.  This time they lay the tax trap.  That is, they try a trick question about taxes. 

 

I.  The men who set the trap, V. 13-14a

 

          A.  The word “they” in verse 13 refers to the Jewish leaders, members of the                       Jewish Sanhedrin Council.  The high priest, the other chief priests and the                              scribes) 

                      1.  These are the ones who had challenged the authority of Jesus. 

                      2.  They are the ones against whom The Parable of The Vineyard had been                   spoken.  (It accused them of trying to kill the very Son of God.)

                      3.  They are the ones who had plotted His death and they now set this trap                           for Him seeking to put Him to death. 

          B.  This time they do not go to Jesus themselves, but, rather, they send certain                             Pharisees and Herodians to seek to trap Jesus, V. 13.

                      1.  The Pharisees and Herodians hated one another, but they hate Jesus                       more and so they team up against Him. 

                      2.  Matthew says that these Pharisees were disciples of the older Jewish                             leaders.  (These were the top of the class, the brains.  If anybody could                            trap Him, they could.)

                      3.  The reason they did not go themselves is that by sending someone else,                     they hoped to catch Jesus off guard. 

          C.  The men who went to trap Jesus  felt that they had Jesus trapped either way He           could answer. 

          D.  They were very careful in their approach to Jesus, V. 14a.

                      1.  They flattered Him in an attempt to catch Him off guard. 

                      2.  They called Him “Master.”  (Thus, acknowledging Him to be a great                        teacher or prophet)

                      3.  They said that they knew He always spoke truth and would not be                             swayed from the truth by anybody. 

 

II.  The trap, V. 14b-15a

 

          A.  They asked if it is lawful to pay taxes to Caesar, V. 14b. 

                      1.  They were not asking if it were legal by civil law. 

                      2.  Rather, according to God’s law.

          B.  They expected Him to say that it is not lawful. 

                      1.  Tiberius Caesar was an ungodly man who claimed to be a god and was,                    thus, in competition to God. 

                      2.  They could not see how Jesus could do anything but say, “No.  It is not                       lawful for God’s people to pay taxes to a man who is a false god.”  that                      is the kind of answer that could be expected of any Israelite.  They all                            hated to pay taxes to Caesar.)

          C.  This is what they were hoping He would say. 

                      1.  They would then go straight to the Roman governor and accuse Jesus                   of treason, which would carry the death penalty.

                      2.  They were confident that they had Him trapped and that the Romans                            would kill Him. 

          D.  On the other hand, if He should say that it is lawful to pay taxes to Caesar,                             they would use that to turn the masses of people against Him. 

          E.  They tried to pin Him down to a “yes” or “no” answer, V. 15a.  (Yes or No                      questions can be very tricky.  For instance:  “Have you stopped beating your wife?”  If you answer either “yes” or “no” you acknowledge that you are guilty of beating your wife.)

 

III.  How easily Jesus avoided their trap, V. 15b-17

 

          A.  He first asked why they sought to trap Him, V. 15b.  (This question would                             alert the crowd to the trap and help to put the crowd on His side.)

          B.  He answered their question, but not with a “Yes” or “No.”

                      1.  He said, “Bring me a penny,”  V. 15b. 

                      2.  He asked, “Whose image and name is on it?” V. 16.

                      3.  He used their answer to Him in His answer to them, V. 17a.  (He said,                    “Give to Caesar what is his.”)

          C.  He then taught them a spiritual lesson:  “Render to God what is God’s,” V.                       17b.

                      1.  Caesar made the penny and put his image and his name are on it;  It is                     only reasonable that it should be used for him.

                      2.  God made man and His image on man;  It is only reasonable that man                    should live for God’s honor and glory.

 

IV.  The marvelous Jesus, V. 17b

 

          A.  They all marveled at Jesus. 

                      1.  Even the young Pharisees and Herodians marveled at Him. 

                      2.  They marveled that He had avoided their trap. 

                      3.  They still did not believe in Him, but they marveled at His skillful                            answers to their trick questions.  . 

                      4.  The crowd also marveled. 

          B.  The fact is that He is marvelous.

                      1.  He is the very Son of God.

                      2.  He is Creator God.  (All things were made by Him.)

                      2.  The angels of heaven marvel at Him;  How much more we human                             beings should marvel at Him! 

          C.  One of the reasons we should all marvel at Him is that even though He could                             so easily avoid all their traps, yet He would eventually allow them to kill Him. 

                      1.  But they could never trap Him nor outsmart Him nor overpower Him.  . 

                      2.  The only way they could kill Him is for Him to deliberately surrender

                           Himself into their hands. 

                      3.  Even at that, they could not do it at their will, but only when He gets                     ready for them to do it.

          D.  If He had not been willing for them to take Him we would be without a Savior.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Since He was willing to die for us and He did die for us, we have a choice to                            make.  We have a choice between trusting Him to save us or rejecting Him.                             We have a choice between heaven and hell. 

          2.  I am asking you to trust Him to be your Savior.  I am asking you to do it right        now. 

          3.  I am asking each of you to trust Him to the extent that you will commit your                            life to Him. 

 

 

 

#76

 

Mark 12:18-27  A TRICK QUESTION ABOUT THE RESURRECTION

 

Introduction:

 

          In the previous Scriptures the Pharisees and the Herodians asked Jesus a trick question about taxes.  In this text the Sadducees ask a trick question about the resurrection. 

 

I.  The Sadducees and their belief, V. 18

 

          A.  The Sadducees now come to Jesus to try their hand at tricking Jesus.  (The                     Pharisees had failed;  it would be a feather in the cap of the Sadducees if they             could succeed where the Pharisees had failed.)

          B.  The Sadducees did not believe in a resurrection, V. 18. 

                      1.  The prophets of old clearly predicted a resurrection, but the Sadducees                      reject the writings of the prophets as authoritative. 

                      2.  They accepted only the writings of Moses as authoritative. 

                      3.  They said that Moses said nothing about a resurrection. 

          C.  In Acts 23:8 Luke informs us that they did not believe in the existence of                             spirits except God. 

                      1.  Since they did not believe that man has a spirit, they believed that death                        ends it all.

                      2.  Since, according to them, man has no spirit, the spirit could not re-enter                           the body and cause the body to live again. 

 

II.  The question which the Sadducees asked Jesus, V. 19-23

 

          A.  The question which they asked was based on the law of Moses which                                   instructed that in the event a man dies without an heir, that his brother (or male who is nearest of kin) is to marry the widow and raise up heirs to the dead brother’s property, V. 19.   

          B.  In the question they pretended to believe in a resurrection. 

          C.  They cited a case in which a woman --- one at a time --- was married to seven               brothers and they eventually all died including the woman, v. 20-22.. 

          D.  The question was:  Whose wife will she be in the resurrection, V. 23. 

                      1.  It was obvious that she could not be the wife of all seven. 

                      2.  This was a question which was designed to make the whole idea of a                          resurrection look ridiculous. 

                      3.  It was also designed to make Jesus look ridiculous before the people if                          He expressed a belief in the resurrection.   

                      4.  No matter which wife he might name they were prepared to argue                            against it. 

          E.  They thought it likely that He would admit that there is no resurrection. 

                      1. They knew that this would displease the multitude.

                      2.  But if He insisted that there is  a resurrection they intended to make                              Him look ridiculous. 

                      3.  A bonus for themselves was that they would also make the Pharisees                        look ridiculous. 

 

III.  The error of the Sadducees, v. 24-25

 

          A.  They erred in thinking that the woman would be the wife of one of the seven in                the hereafter, V. 24a.   

                      1.  Just because she was their wife in this world does not mean that she                      would be in the next world.

                      2.  She would not.

          B.  They erred in rejecting the writings of the prophets as authoritative.  (Jesus did             not argue this point.)

          C.  They erred in rejecting that there would be no resurrection. 

          D.  The reason they erred was:

                      1.  Because they did not know the Scriptures, V.. 24b.  (They probably                         knew what the Scriptures said, but they did not understand their                                       meaning.)

                      2.  Because they did not know the power of God.  (Raising the dead is no                       problem for God.  In the creation of man God took dirt and made it to                             come alive.  Why would man think God does not have the power to                       raise the man back to life even after his flesh has become dirt once                       again?)

          E.  When the dead do arise they will not be married to anybody, V. 25.  (Like                            angels they will have no sexual desires nor sexual powers. 

 

IV.  Scripture evidence of the resurrection, V. 26-27

 

          A.  Since the Sadducees did not accept the writings of the prophets as                              authoritative He did not use them to prove the resurrection.

          B.   Rather, He cited the writings of Moses, which the Sadducees did accept as                        authoritative  to prove that there is a resurrection. 

                      1.  He spoke of the time when Moses saw the burning bush and God spoke                      to Moses out of the burning bush.                                 

                      2.  God told Moses that He is the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. 

                      3.  Jacob had been dead nearly 200 years and Abraham had been dead                   nearly 300 years.

                      4.  According to the doctrine of the Sadducees they were dead and gone                         forever. 

                      5.  Yet God told Moses that He was still the God of Abraham, Isaac and                     Jacob meaning that while Abraham, Isaac and Jacob were still physically                        alive they were still spiritually alive at the time God was speaking to                     Moses. 

                      6.  The clear teaching of this is that there is life beyond the grave.

                      7.  The clear implication is that they will someday be resurrected from the                      grave. 

                      8.  What the writings of Moses only implied, the writings of other                                        Scriptures very clearly teach to be a fact;  there will be a resurrection                     from the dead. 

 

V.  The greatness of the error of the Sadducees. V. 27b

 

          A.  The Sadducees had made a great error by misinterpreting the writings of                         Moses.  (The Scriptures must be rightly divided --- rightly interpreted.)

          B.  They made a great error by rejecting the inspired writings of the prophets.                        (The error in their belief might have been avoided if they had accepted the other                inspired writings.)

          C.  They made a great error by rejecting a belief in the resurrection of the dead. 

          D.  They made a great error by rejecting a belief in Jesus as the promised Christ                               and as the Savior of their soul.

 

Conclusion:

 

          Are you saved?  If not then trust Jesus now.  If you are saved then commit yourself to His service. 

 

 

 

#77

 

Mark 12:28-34  A QUESTION ABOUT THE GREATEST COMMANDMENT

 

Introduction:

 

          The Pharisees had repeatedly tried to trap Jesus with trick questions.  In our text last Sunday the Sadducees tried.  In our text today the Pharisees come again with another trick question.  They were pleased to see the Sadducees put to shame so they try once again.  They have just the right man (they think) who has just the right question. 

 

I.  The man who asks the question, V. 28a

 

          A.  The man with the question was a scribe. 

          B.  A scribe had three duties:

                      1.  He copied the Old Testament Scriptures.  (By hand)

                      2.  He studied the Scriptures which he copied. 

                      3.  In the synagogues he taught the Scriptures to others and sought to                        explain their meaning. . 

          C.  Matthew calls this man a lawyer. 

                      1.  This means that he confined his work to copying, studying and teaching                          to the Scriptures which Moses wrote, the Law Scriptures. 

                      2.  He was an expert in anything pertaining to the Law of Moses. 

                      3.  If there was any man capable of tricking Jesus with a question about                              the law, this was the man.        

 

II.  The question which the man asked, V. 28b

 

          A.  The question is:  Which of the commandments of God given in the Law of                         Moses is the first commandment?

          B.  The word, first, as used here means first in importance. 

          C.  He was not talking about the Ten Commandments, but all 613                                                  commandments pertaining to the Law of Moses.  (Commands contained in the         five books of the Bible written by Moses)

          D.  The Pharisees taught that some of the commandments of the law were not                             important at all.  (But every commandment of the law is from God and,                         therefore, is important.). 

 

III.  The answer which Jesus gave to the question, V. 29-30

 

          A.  The answer is that since there is but one God an man is to love the Lord, his                        God, with all of his heart, with all of his soul, with all of his mind, and with all             of his strength. 

                      1.  Surprisingly, Jesus did not give one of the Ten Commandments as the                      most important. 

                      2.  The one He gave did not even come from the Book of Exodus where                             the Ten Commandments are listed.  . 

                      3.  It was taken from Deuteronomy 6:4-5.  (Which is one of the law                     books.)

          B.  Yet the idea of it is found in the first of the Ten Commandments. 

                      1.  The first of the Ten Commandments forbids one to bow down to a false                         God. 

                      2.  The idea is that man is to worship the one true God and only Him. 

          C.  The command which Jesus quoted does not place emphasis on one’s actions,                            but rather upon his attitude. 

                      1.  He is to love God with all his heart, soul, mind and strength. 

                      2.  The attitude of his heart would then affect his actions. 

          D.  This means that one is to put God first before all things. 

                      1.  He is to put God before dad, mom, brothers, sisters, aunts, uncles,                            cousins and all others.

                      2.  He is to put God before making money. 

                      3.  He is to put God first before pleasure. 

                      4.  He is to put God before anything else in the whole world. 

                      5.  There is never to be any exception at any time. 

                      6.  All day every day God is to be first. 

                      7.  If one is to keep the law which God gave through Moses this is what                   must be done. 

         

IV.  What Jesus said in addition to answering the question, V. 31

 

          A.  Jesus could have stopped with what He had already said, because He had                             answered the man’s question, but He didn’t stop. 

          B.  He went on to point out the commandment which was next greatest. 

          C.  This commandment is that a man is to love his neighbor as much as he loves                             himself.

          D.  One is to be as much concerned about the well-being of others as he is of                             himself.  (Of their health, their wealth, their wishes, their pleasures, their                     feelings, etc..)

          E.  There are no commandments greater than those two. 

                      1.  According to Matthew, Jesus said that ll the law and the prophets are                      based on those two. 

                      2.  All true religious teachings are base on them. 

 

V.  The surprising response of the man to Jesus, V. 32-33

 

          A.  The man publicly agreed with Jesus and commended Him highly for His                             answer. 

                      1.  This answer is surprising to us because his purpose in questioning Jesus                   had been to trick Jesus and to criticize Him. 

                      2.  But instead of criticizing Jesus he praised Him. 

                      3.  This must have also surprised the other Pharisees and must have                    greatly angered them. 

          B.  But the man was at least honest. 

                      1.  He was an expert in the matters pertaining to the Law of Moses. 

                      2.  He knew the truth when he heard it and Jesus had spoken the truth;. 

                      3.  He was honest enough --- and brave enough to say so. 

VI.  The response of Jesus to the man, V. 34a

 

          A.  Jesus saw that the man answered discretely.  (Intelligently, knowledgeably,                            wisely and rightly)

          B.  Jesus said that this man was not far from being saved. 

                      1.  Paul said that the law was given to bring us to Christ. 

                      2.  It was designed to teach men that they are sinners. 

                      3.  This man was an expert in the law of Moses.  (He knew what it said,.                               He understood and believed the right interpretation of the law                                             when he heard it.)

                      4.  What he needed to do now was to repent of his sin and trust in the                      grace of God through the Messiah, the Christ.   

          C.  The law should also teach us that we need to repent and ask God for mercy. 

                      1.  The law of God has told us that we should put God first in all things                                        every day of our lives without exception and we know that we have not                    done that.  (We have failed miserably to keep the most important law                              which God has given to man.)

                      2.  It also tells us that we are to love others equally as much as we love                             ourselves and we know for a fact that we have not done this.

                      3.  We have broken the two most important laws which God had given. 

          D.  If salvation had to be gained by our own works then we would be in big                                  trouble. 

          E.  We can thank God that salvation is offered by the grace of God through faith in                  Jesus Christ. 

 

VII.  The outcome of the conversation, V. 34b

 

          A.  After that no man dared to come to Jesus with any more trick questions. 

          B.  Jesus had outwitted their best.

          C.  Any man that argues with the Lord is just showing his own ignorance. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  I am asking you to believe the Lord Jesus Christ.  (Believe what He has said)

          2.  I am asking you to believe in the Lord Jesus Christ.  (Trust the Lord Jesus                           Christ to save your soul.)

          3.  I am asking you to serve the Lord. 

 

                     

         

#78

 

Mark 12:35-37 BEING QUESTIONED BY JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          The scribes and Pharisees have repeatedly come to Jesus with trick questions.  In our text today it is Jesus who questions them. 

 

I.  His first question, V. 35

 

          A.  He asked them how it is that the scribes say that the Christ is to be a son                             (descendant) of David.

          B.  Jesus is not denying that the Christ is David’s son (or descendant.). 

          C.  Rather, He is laying the basis for a follow-up question. 

 

II.  Jesus calling attention to the fact that David called the Christ his Lord,

      V. 36-37a

 

 

          A.  David’s statement was made in Psalm 110:1.  (This Psalm is a part of the Old                      Testament Scripture)

          B.  David’s statement was made by inspiration of the Holy Spirit.  (To deny this                      would be to deny that the Scriptures were inspired by the Holy Spirit.)

          C.  David said, “The LORD said to my Lord...”

                      1.  “The LORD”  speaks of God the Heavenly Father, the first Person of                        the Trinity.  

                      2.  “My Lord” speaks of the Christ, the second Person of the Trinity.

          D.  Thus, David called the Christ his Lord. 

          E.  Jesus calls the attention of the crowd to two things:

                      1.  The scribes say that the Christ is to be a descendant of David. 

                      2.  David, by the Holy Spirit, called the Christ “my Lord.”

 

III.  The follow-up question, V. 37b

 

          A.  Let me paraphrase the question which Jesus asked:  “How could the Christ be           the son (descendant) of David and yet be the Lord of David?”

                      1.  David was the highest human authority in the land. 

                      2.  There was none higher in authority than he

                      3.  And yet David said that the Christ was higher than he. 

          B.  If David is to be believed, then the Christ is both man and God. 

                      1.  He is the descendant of David as the scribes said. 

                      2.  And yet He is David’s Lord as David said. 

                      3.  And since none was higher than David but God, then the Christ is God.                            (God in human flesh)

          C.  This was the point that the Pharisees were missing. 

                      1.  They were expecting the Christ to be a mere man.  (A great man, but                      never-the-less, a mere man)

                      2.  They knew that Jesus claimed to be the Son of God. 

                      3.  Therefore, they rejected Jesus and said that He cannot be the Christ. 

          D.  What Jesus has done is to prove by the inspired Scriptures that their basis for            rejecting Him is invalid. 

          E.  Therefore, they should stop rejecting Him as the Christ and receive Him as the            Christ. 

 

IV.  The continued rejection of Jesus by the Pharisees

 

          A.  But the Pharisees continued to reject Jesus as the “Christ. 

          B.  They refused to be persuaded by the inspired Scriptures. 

          C.  They refused to be persuaded by the words of King David.

          D.  They refused to be persuaded by the words of John the Baptist, John 1:34.

          E.  They refused to be persuaded by the apostles. 

          F.  They refused to be persuaded by any who believed that Jesus is the Son of                            God. 

         

V.  Those who did believe, V. 37b

 

          A.  The common people believed Him gladly.

          B.  Not many people who are rich and powerful believed nor the so-called                                        “intellectuals” will believe in Jesus as the Christ.

          C.  Most people who do believe even today are among the common people  ----                      and not a large percentage of them will believe. 

 

VI.  Others whom Jesus will question

 

          A.  The Pharisees are not the only ones whom Jesus will question. 

                      1.  He will not stop you as you walk along the street and question you as a                     news reporter might do.

                      2.  But when you stand before Him in judgment He will have some                                        questions for you.

          B.  He will also ask us saved people some questions.

                      1.  He will ask us about our conduct.  (We will give account for every                            deed, every word and every thought.)

                      2.  He will ask us about our beliefs regarding Bible teaching.  (He held                            the Pharisees responsible for understanding the Scriptures and He will                      hold us responsible.)

                      3.  He will ask us whether or not we joined a church and -- if so -- what                   kind of church we joined.

                                  a.  Joining a church does not save anybody, but after one is saved                                          he should join a church.. 

                                  b.  He should join a church that is true to New Testament                                        Scriptures. 

                                  c.  When one is newly saved, he probably does  not know enough                                        to know if a church is a Scriptural church, but the Lord holds                                  him responsible for finding out. 

                      4.  He will ask us whether of not we were faithful to support the church                            and the Lord’s cause in general.  (Did we support it with our money,                            our time, our energies and our influence?)

          C.  He will ask the unsaved some questions. 

                      1.  He will ask the unsaved if they ever heard what the Scriptures say about                              Him being the Son of God, the Savior of men. 

                      2.  He will ask them if they are not aware of their own guilt of sin. 

                      3.  He will ask them if they ever felt the convicting power of the Holy                            Spirit urging them to trust Jesus Christ for salvation. 

                      4.  He may even ask someone if he remembers this very service when                   he felt the need of salvation. 

 

 

 

#79

 

Mark 12:38-40  RELIGIOUS BUT LOST

 

Introduction: 

 

          God placed  within every man the inclination to worship.  If Satan had never interfered every human being would worship the true God and would worship Him in truth.  There would be no atheists, no heretics and no sinners.  But Satan did interfere and man was plunged into sin.  Without a Savior all would be lost. 

          Satan still interferes and seeks to keep man from being saved.  He does not mind them being religious as long as they are lost.                                                        

 

I.  Jesus teaching in the temple, V. 38

 

          A.  The word, doctrine, is associated with teaching.  (Doctrine is a precept or                        dogma which is taught.)                     

          B.  Mark says that Jesus taught “them,” but does not tell us who “them” were. 

          C.  His disciples were present and He taught them. 

          D.  A multitude was also present and He tried to teach them. 

                      1.  Most of them were unsaved and not capable of understanding much of                           His doctrine and so He did not try teach them the difficult doctrines.

                      2.  But He did try to teach them what they were capable of knowing and                     what they needed to know in order to be saved. 

          E.  Some of the scribes and Pharisees were present and He tried to teach even                       them.  (He tried to show them the error of their ways and their need of                               repentance and salvation.)

 

II.  The warning about the scribes and Pharisees, V. 38

 

          A.  Mark says that Jesus warned the people about the scribes.  (Matthew says that          Jesus warned about the Pharisees.  So He warned about both.)

          B.  The disciples were not surprised at what Jesus said about the scribes and                            Pharisees.  (He had earlier warned them in private about these men.)

          C.  The disciples probably were surprised to hear Jesus denounce them publicly. 

                      1.  He had spoken against them publicly before, but only in parables which                              the public did not understand to be directed against the Pharisees even                            though the Pharisees had understood that the parable was against them.)

                      2.  But now He speaks openly so that all can understand. 

          D.  The scribes and Pharisees were humiliated and angered. 

                      1.  They were accustomed to being honored by all. 

                      2.  They were not accustomed to having anyone differ with them. 

                      3.  They certainly were not accustomed to being denounced. 

          E.  The multitude must have been disturbed. 

                      1.  It was not that they liked or respected the Pharisees;  they didn’t. 

                      2.  But they were not accustomed to bucking the Pharisees in any way. 

                      3.  Now if they believed Jesus, they would have to turn from the Pharisees                        and if they continued to believe the Pharisees they would have to turn                       away from Jesus. 

 

III.  The description of the scribes and Pharisees. V. 38-39

 

          A.  They love to wear long clothing, V. 38.

                      1.  What is wrong with wearing long clothing?  (We are more apt to hear                             accustomed preaching against short clothing than long..)

                      2.  The scribes and Pharisees did not wear long robes for purposes of                      modesty;  they wore long robes to show their rank and their                                             piety.  (They thought:  The longer the robe the more pious the man.)

          B.  They love salutations in the market places, V. 38.

                      1.  They loved to be flattered.

                      2.  They especially loved it in public places. 

          C.  They loved to have the chief seats in the synagogue, V. 39.  (They thought they         had superior knowledge.)

          D.  They loved the uppermost rooms (places) at the banquets, V.. 39.  (They                               wanted to be seated at the head table.)

          E.  There is no mention of them loving God or their fellow man. 

                      1.  They did not love God; if they had, they would have loved God’s Son.

                      2.  They did not love their fellow man;  if they had they would not have                    abused their fellow men.           

                      3.  They loved only themselves. 

                      4.  They failed to obey the Second Great Commandment. 

          F.  They devoured widows’ houses, V.. 40. 

                      1.  They charged outrageous prices for their merchandise and outrageous                      fees for their counseling. 

                      2.  Thus, they devoured the houses of those who could ill afford such                            prices and fees. 

                      3.  They made a big show of religion, but their lives show no mercy for                            their fellow human beings --- not even for those most in need of their                            mercy.        

                      4.  Pure religion would have caused them to be merciful and generous, but                      their religion was in vain, James 2:26-27. 

          G.  For pretense they made long prayer, V. 40.

                      1.  They pray not to praise God for His goodness. 

                      2.  They pray not out of a sense of a need for Him.  . 

                      3.  They pray to impress their listeners of their own piety. 

                      4.  Their prayers and their fake piety was an effort to cover up their cruel                   treatment of the poor. 

 

IV.  The destiny of the scribes and Pharisees, V. 40b

 

          A.  They shall receive damnation.

                      1.  They would not make it to heaven. 

                      2.  They would go to hell

          B.  They would receive the greater damnation.

                      1.  Their suffering will be greater.

                      2.  The greater the sin --- the greater the suffering. 

                      3.  Jesus considers a hypocritical religion one of the greater sins. 

 

V.  Lessons for us to learn

 

          A.  It is not religion that displeases God;  God wants us to be religious.   

                      1.  It is God who placed within us that inclination to worship. 

                      2.  But God wants man to worship in spirit and in truth and not in                                        hypocrisy nor in heresy.

          B.  If Jesus were to stand before us today, no doubt He would warn us about the          danger of listening to many of the religious leaders of our day. 

                      1.  Many popular religious leaders are unsaved;  they teach and preach a                         false gospel and teach doctrines of devils. 

                      2.  Many of them get fabulously rich off of dollars that old folks and                     widows sacrifice to send to them. 

          C.  It is vital to repent of your sins and trust Jesus Christ to save your soul. 

                      1.  This is the Bible way of salvation, Luke 13:3, 5; Acts 16:31; Eph.                            2:8-9.

                      2.  The scribes and Pharisees were headed for hell. 

                      3.  So are a lot of preachers and religious leaders. 

                      4.  So are a lot of their followers. 

                      5.  It is important that you not follow them into the fires of hell.

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Do not turn against religion; do not turn against God; do not turn against God’s                 people. 

          2.  Repent of your sins, trust Jesus to cleanse you of your sin and save your soul. 

          3.  Then get in a good New Testament church and serve God. 

          4.  Live right and demonstrate what true religion is all about. 

 

 

 

#80

 

Mark 12:41-44  A  LESSON FROM THE LORD ON GIVING

 

Introduction:

 

          After many trick questions were put to Jesus by Jewish leaders Jesus has silenced His enemies.  They dare not ask Him any more questions.  In this test Jesus is teaching His disciples a valuable lesson on giving. 

 

I.  Jesus watching people give, V. 41-42

 

          A.  Jesus is no longer in the inner court of the temple where the controversies with            the Jewish leaders had arisen. 

                      1.  The Jewish leaders have lost every argument, but they have rejected                            Him never-the-less.

                      2.  Jesus is on His way out of the temple to return no more. 

          B.  But on His way out He stops in the outer court where the temple offering                             boxes were located. 

                      1.  There were 13 brass offering boxes located there. 

                      2.  Each box had a funnel-like opening into the box. 

                      3.  These boxes were located at the entrance and the people put money                             into the boxes as they entered. 

          C.  Jesus sat down so that He could watch the people put their money into the                             boxes as they entered. 

                      1.  He watched to see how much they put in. 

                      2.  This would be a “no-no” to some today. 

                      3.  They would say that it is nobody’s business what one puts in the box.

                      4.  It is not our business at church to watch each one to see how much he                          gives, but it is God’s business and Jesus is God. 

          D.  He watched the rich men put in their offerings, V. 41. 

                      1.  They dropped in their coins by the handful and the coins made a lot of                   racket as they moved down the funnel into the brass box. 

                      2.  Those rich men must have been pleased with what they gave and                     probably went away smiling. 

          E.  Then a poor widow came to the boxes, V. 42.

                      1.  She must have hung her head in shame as she stepped to a box. 

                      2.  The little coin which she dropped in could hardly be heard. 

                      3.  But then she dropped in another little coin. 

                      4.  She must have walked away with her head still hung low. 

 

II.  Jesus teaching His disciples a lesson on giving, V. 43-44

 

          A.  He called His disciples to Him and pointed out the woman. 

                      1.  He pointed out that she had given more than any of the others. 

                      2.  He did not criticize anyone who gave, but He did praise her for what                          she gave. 

                      3.  The others gave out of their abundance and had plenty left for                                        themselves, but this poor woman had nothing left. 

                      4.  She had nothing left for food or for anything. 

                      5.  She could have kept some of the coins and had a little for herself, but                      she didn’t.  (Nobody would have blamed her if she had. --- not even                         the Lord.)

          B.  Jesus taught His disciples why they were to give. 

                      1.  That woman gave --- not because she had to, --- not to receive praise of                           men, but because she loved the Lord.

                                  a.  She would give to the Lord even if it meant doing without.

                                  b.  Thus, in the eyes of the Lord she gave the most. 

                      2.  You should not give to the church because it is expected of you nor for                             the praises of men, but because you love the Lord and want to support                            His church. 

          C.  Jesus taught His disciples how to give; they were to give  generously. 

                      1.  Love does not try to give less;  love tries to give more. 

                      2.  When God ‘s people give out of a love for God the needs of the church                              will be met. 

          D.  Jesus taught His disciples the purpose for giving. 

                      1.  The purpose is to support the work of the Lord. 

                      2.  The widow gave to support the temple, but Jesus used her example                          to teach His disciples to support the church.

                      3.  Giving to the support of the church is the duty of all;  it is the duty of all                   of God’s people to give as they are able to give.

                      4.  Gifts to the poor and gifts to other phases of the work does not relieve                             a Christian of his responsibility to support the local church. 

          E.  Jesus taught His disciples to learn to depend on God. 

                      1.  The widow woman did.  (She gave all she had and depended on God to                            supply her need.

                      2.  I do not believe that God let her down.  Do you?

          F.  Jesus taught His disciples that God is interested in what people give and why                    they give and the channel through which they give.  (And because God is                             interested He watches to see what people give and how they give.)     

 

III.  A question about us

 

          A.  What does God expect out us and what does He have a right to expect?

                      1.  God expects us to love Him with all our hearts, with all our minds and                     with all our soul.  (He has a right to expect that.  That is the basic                            principle of the Law of Moses.)

                      2.  If we love God as we should, we will not need to worry about whether                           our giving is acceptable to God.  It will be. 

          B.  One thing I would like to clarify:  Nobody ever got into heaven by the size of             the offering which he gave. 

                      1.  Salvation is a free gift from God, Rom. 6:23.

                      2.  Our text today talks about what man gives to God, but most of the                      Bible talks about what God does for man. 

                      3.  You do not have to give one cent to the church in order to get saved. 

                      4.  It is not your money that God is after:  He is after your soul. 

                      5.  All that this church is asking of you is that you trust in Jesus and stay                     out of hell.  (We are willing to carry the financial load of the church.)

                      6.  You soul is worth more to us than all the money in the world. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you are unsaved, call on Jesus now and ask Him to save your soul. 

          2.  If you are saved and in need of a church home, I know of a good church to                            recommend to you.  When you are ready, we are. 

          3.  If there is any way that you need to respond publicly so as to draw nearer to                       God, then please come forward and do it  now.  .

          4.  If some of you Christians, out of a heart of love for God, want to resolve to                            give more to God, that is between you and God.  But I do say that God will see        it and God will bless you for doing so. 

 

 

 

#81

 

Mark 13:1-2  A DAY OF GREAT DESTRUCTION

 

Introduction:

 

          In our text last Sunday Jesus taught about giving.  In our test today He teaches about the destruction of the temple at Jerusalem. 

 

I.  Jesus leaving the temple, V. 1

 

          A.  Jesus was inside the inner court when He was in controversy with the Jewish                              leaders. 

          B.  He was on His way out of the temple when He stopped in the outer court of                         the temple treasury to teach His disciples a lesson about giving. 

          C.  Now He leaves the temple and He and His disciples are on the outside looking                 at the temple buildings. 

          D.  He was leaving this temple for the last time. 

         

II.  The admiration of His disciples for the temple, V. 1

 

          A.  Mark says that one of His disciples comments to Him about the beauty and size                of the stones and buildings. 

                      1.  Some have suggested that this might have been the Apostle Peter.  (He                      was always quick to speak out.)

                      2.  Matthew says that several of the apostles made comments. 

          B.  Well might they have been impressed. 

                      1.  It was made of white marble stones, some 36 feet long weighing about                             100 tons.

                      2.  From as distance, it appeared to be made of snow. 

                      3.  Its beauty was no less dazzling up close --- as they were. 

          C.  I can imagine the apostle saying something like this: “Lord, Have you ever seen         anything so beautiful?”  (Now get this:  He was talking to One who came                             down from heaven and had seen the very throne of God in all its splendor.)

          D.  The answer of Jesus must have been just as amazing to them. 

 

III.  The prophecy of Jesus about the temple, V. 2

 

          A.  Jesus said that not one stone of the temple building would be left upon another.         B.  This was shocking news to those disciples.      

                      1.  They had great respect for the temple as the house of God.  (To them it                             was unthinkable that it would be destroyed.)

                      2.  It was shocking because anything so drastic would also destroy the city                     of Jerusalem and the nation. 

 

IV.  The fulfillment of the prophecy

 

          A.  The fulfillment of that prophecy is history now.  (About  40 years from the                             time that the prophecy was made the Jews rebelled against the Romans and                    drove them out.) 

          B.  Titus raised a mighty army and marched against Jerusalem and the nation fell to                   him. 

          C.  It would seem unlikely that the temple would be destroyed because Titus had          given orders that the temple was not to be hurt. 

          D.  But some soldier lit a torch to the veil of the temple and it was gutted by fire. 

          E.  So Titus then forced the Jews to tear down the temple so that not one stone                            was left upon another in any temple building. 

          F.  Can you imagine what it was like for the Jews who were still in Jerusalem when      that temple and the whole city of Jerusalem was destroyed? 

 

V.  Another prophecy of the Lord

 

          A.  The prophecy that I am about to mention was not made by Jesus in His                                         lifetime on earth.  

                      1.  But it is just as much the word of the Lord.  (It was given by the                            inspiration of God.)

                      2.  It is just as certain to be fulfilled. 

          B.  The prophecy is found in II Peter 3:10-12. 

                      1.  The church buildings will be destroyed. 

                      2.  Our homes will be destroyed.

                      3.  The money, the banks and other financial institutions will be destroyed. 

                      4.  The world and all that is therein will be destroyed. 

          C.  Can you imagine what it will be like for whoever is in the world when that                             prophecy is fulfilled?

          D.   Where can one turn for safety when all of the world is being destroyed?

                      1.  If one waits until that time to seek safety it will be too late. 

                      2.  The only way to find safety is to seek it beforehand. 

                      3.  The only safety there is to be found is in Jesus, Acts 4:12. 

                      4.  If one trusts in Jesus then all the forces of Satan cannot drag him down                              to hell. 

                      5.  If one does not trust in Jesus while there is time then all the forces of                                    the world cannot keep him out of hell. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Have you ever asked Jesus to be your Savior and to keep you out of hell?

          2.  Have you ever trusted Jesus to save your soul and to see you safely into heaven                when you die?

          3.  If you have not done so, then what in the world are you waiting for?

          4.  If you have trusted Jesus to be your Savior then  let me repeat to you the                            question which the Apostle Peter asked in II Peter 3:11.  And I want this                       question to be a personal question to you:  “Seeing then that all these things                       shall be dissolved, what manner of  person ought you to be in all holy                                 conversation ( holy conduct) and godliness?”

                     

         

 

#82

 

Mark 13:3-13  QUESTIONS ABOUT THE END

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Jesus was outside the temple when He predicted the destruction of the temple.  In verses 3-4 of our text today He is on Mt. Olives when He is asked when the temple would be destroyed and what would be the sign of the end of the age.  In verse 5 He cautions His disciples not to be deceived about the matter in question. 

In verses 6-13 He answers both of those questions.  .   

 

I.  Question # 1:  What will be the signs concerning the destruction of the temple?

 

          A.  Sign #1:  The coming of false Christs, V. 6 

                      1.  The Jews were expecting the Christ to come, but they rejected Him                            when He did come 

                      2.  According to the Jewish historian, Josephus, the Devil gave them a long                    list of false Christs 

          B.  Sign #2:  Wars and rumors of wars, V. 7-8a 

          C.  Sign #3:  Earthquakes, V. 8 

          D.  Sign #4:  Famines, V. 8 

          E.  Sign #5.  Troubles, V. 9  (Pestilence’s, plagues.  These things mark the                                  beginning stages that would lead to the fall of the nation in 70 A. D. and the                         destruction of Jerusalem and the temple.  The following signs would show an                     increasing nearness to that fall in 70 A. D.  See Mt. 24:8.)

          F.  Sign #6   Persecutions, V. 9

          G.  Sign #7:  The preaching of the gospel in all the world, V. 10

          H.  Sign #8:  Christians being betrayed by family, V. 12.   (And friends.  If family                would betray them, then friends would also.)

          I.  Sign #9    False prophets, Mt. 24:11

          J. Sign #10:  Love of many waxing cold, Mt. 24:12

 

II.  What will be the signs of the end of the age?

 

          A.  Sign #1:  False Christ’s, V. 6

          B.  Sign #2:  Wars and rumors of wars< V. 7-8

          C.  Sign #3  Earthquakes, V. 8

          D.  Sign #4:  Famines, V. 8

          E.  Sign #5:  Troubles. v/ 8  (These first signs are long range signs of the second                            coming of Christ and the end of the age;  the next five show and increasing                             nearness of the return of Christ and the end of the age.) 

          F.  Sign #6:  Persecutions, V. 9

          G.  Sign #7: The preaching of the gospel in all the world, V. 19

          H.  Sign #8Christians betrayed by family and friends, V. 12

          I.  Sign #9, False prophets, Mt. 24:11

          J.  Sign #10:  The love of many waxing cold, Mt. 24:12

 

III.  What can we do about the coning of the end?

 

          A.  We can do nothing about the destruction of the temple;  It has already taken                               place.

          B.  We can do nothing about the second coming of Jesus and the end of this age.        (Not to prevent it nor to delay it.)     

          C.  We can do something about ourselves to get prepared by repenting of our sin                   and trusting Jesus to save us from our sin. 

          D.  We who are saved can dedicate ourselves to God. 

          E.  We can witness to those who are lost in sin. 

          F.  We can seek to encourage our fellow Christians to live for God. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          The disciples had asked Jesus for signs for two separate events.  Jesus gave them one set of 10 signs.  The set of 10 signs which for those early Christians marked the coming of the fall of the temple are the same set of signs which for all Christians would mark the approach of return of Jesus Christ to the world and the end of the age.  In each case, the first five were long range signs and the last five were signs showed the event to be drawing closer and closer at hand.

          The fall of the temple is now past history.  Jerusalem fell in 70 A. D.   Those early Christians were able to see the sings as they were fulfilled and know that the fall of the temple was drawing closer and closer.  So it is today.  All who believe the words of our Lord Jesus can see by the signs that we are drawing closer and closer to the second coming of Jesus and the end of this age. 

          We do not and cannot know just when Jesus will come back, but we can surely see by the signs that Jesus gave that we are well past the five short range signs.  We are living in the time when all 10 signs show that the coming of Jesus is close at hand.   . 

         

 

 

#83

 

Mark 13:14-20  A SPECIAL SIGN:  THE ABOMINATION OF DESOLATION

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus had predicted that the temple at Jerusalem would be destroyed.  Some of the disciples asked, “When?”  They also asked, “What is the sign of the end of the age?”  Jesus gave them 10 signs.  All ten of those signs would be helpful to the Lord’s disciples  as day drew near when the temple would be destroyed. 

          Those same 10 signs are helpful for the people of our day to help us to know that we are drawing closer to the end of the age. 

          In our text today Jesus gives a special sign that all would do well to study carefully.     . 

 

I.  A special sign given, V. 14

 

          A.  Back in V. 7 Jesus had said that war or rumor is a sign, but He said, “Be not                       troubled.”

                      1.  There would be many conflicts, many wars before the predicted fall                      would come. 

                      2,  He did not want them to get unduly alarmed every time a conflict                            would come thinking, “This is it!”

          B.  But there would be a war in which the destruction of the temple would take                     place.        

          C.  Jesus gave them a special sign to look for so that they could be able to identify                 that war.

                      1.  They were to watch for what He called, “...the abomination of                                        desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet...”

                      2.  Abomination means “that which is despised, unclean, wicked.”

                      3.  Desolation means “destruction.”

                      4.  Thus, Jesus spoke about an even that would be despised.  It would be                       unclean.  It would be wicked.  It would be destructive.  It would bring                   about the destruction of the temple. 

          D.  Daniel spoke of abomination of desolation in Daniel 9:27. 

                      1.  Daniel spoke of a Gentile army marching against Jerusalem bringing                            destruction.

                      2.  This was a threefold prophecy.  (That is, it would be fulfilled three                   different times.)

          E.  The first fulfillment of this prophecy took place about 168 B. C.  when                              Antiochus Epiphanes of Syria invaded Judea and took Jerusalem.

                      1.  It is said that he went into the temple at Jerusalem and offered a hog on                            the altar in sacrifice to a heathen god.

                      2.  It was an even which was most abominable to the Jews;  it was an event                          when much destruction was wrought in the city of Jerusalem and the                        city was left desolate.  . 

 

II.  The sign as it applied to the destruction of the temple of which Jesus spoke,

      V. 14-20

 

          A.  Jesus was not talking about Antiochus because that event was history and the                 event of which Jesus spoke was yet future, V. 2, 14.

          B.  Therefore, there was to be another invasion by Gentile armies which would be              similar to the invasion by Antiochus Ephiphanes. 

                      1.  In other words, those disciples could look for another invasion of                            Jerusalem by Gentile armies.          

                      2.  That would be the time when the temple would be destroyed and when                  not one stone of the temple would be left upon another. 

                      3.  Mark said, “Let him that readeth understand.”

          C.  Jesus warned that those who were in Jerusalem were to flee at the first news of                the approaching army, V. 14b.

                      1.  In verse 13 Jesus promised that those who would follow His                                        instructions would be spared.

                      2.  Their safety would depend on two things:  Watching for the Gentile                            invasion and fleeing. 

          D.  They were not to flee in all directions, but were to flee to the mountains                         where there would be places to hide, V. 14b.

          E.  They were to flee quickly, V. 15-16.

          F.  Flight would be extremely difficult for expectant mothers or mothers with                    young babies, V. 17.   

          G.  They were to pray that their flight not be in winter, V. 18. 

                      1.  Jesus indicated that such a prayer would be heard and answered.

                      2.  They could not avoid the coming of the army, but they could avoid                            having the army to come in the winter. 

          H.  The war would be very destructive, V.2, 19. 

                      1.  It was to be worst the world had ever seen. 

                      2.  As we look back upon it we read that the Romans killed 1,100,000                            people and drove another 90,000 out of the land. 

                      3.  Had it not been short all of the Jews in the land would have died. V/ 20.

          I.  Yet the part of the prophecy which speaks of the worst that would ever be                       applies not to the destruction that took place in 70 A. D., but rather to an event      yet in the future. 

 

III.  The sign as it applies to the end of the age

 

          A.  There will yet be another invasion of Jerusalem by Gentile armies, Rev.                                 16:12-16.

          B.  Therefore, of all the signs which the Bible gives pointing to the nearness of our           Lord’s return and of the end of the age, this special sign is the most important             one to watch for.  (Watch for the gathering of the Gentile armies of the world           to invade the Holy land and gather around the city of Jerusalem.)                

          C.  This will be Armageddon. 

                      1.  This will be the worst destruction which has ever taken place in the all                              the history of the world or ever will be in the future.      

                      2.  If this were not a  very short period of time war there would be nobody                           in all the world to survive.  (While the war itself will be around                                        Jerusalem, yet the conflict --- the terrorism --- will be worldwide.)

                      3.  This war will bring the end of the age. 

          D.  Those who are in Israel to flee to the mountains which are nearby.  . 

         

Conclusion:

 

          We cannot stop Armageddon from coming, but we can flee now to a find a place of safety for our souls.  Every man, woman, boy and girl in the world ought to flee to the cross and trust call upon the Lord Jesus Christ for the salvation of the soul.   

 

 

 

#84

 

Mark 13:21-23  ANOTHER SPECIAL SIGN:  MIRACLE WORKING DECEIVERS

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus gave His disciples 10 signs whereby they could know when the temple would be destroyed and whereby we could know that the end of the age is at hand.  He then gave a special sign:  The abomination of desolation. 

          In our text today He gave another special sign:  Miracle working deceivers. 

 

I.  The coming of false Christs, V. 21-22a

 

          A.  Jesus said that false Christs will come and that we should not be deceived by                        them, V. 21-22a.

          B.  The people of the world who do not believe that Jesus is the Christ are apt to             be deceived when a false Christ comes. 

                      1.  Most Jews have rejected Jesus as the Christ and are apt to be deceived. 

                      2.  The Moonies, the New Agers and a host of others have rejected Jesus                   as the Christ and are predicting the coming of their own Christ. 

          C.  There will be many such false Christs to precede the coming of that one who is                  the Anti-Christ.

 

II.  The coming of false prophets, V.  22a

 

          A.  Jesus also said that false prophets would come, V. 22a. 

          B.  The difference between a false Christ and a false prophet is that the false                            Christ claims to be the Christ and the false prophet does not. 

          C.  A false prophet will be a dynamic person and a dynamic speaker and be able to                  attract and sway large numbers of people. 

          D.  But in spite of his large following he will be a false prophet with a false                             message.  (He will have just enough truth in his message to deceive people.)

 

III.  Miracle working deceivers, V. 22b

 

          A.  The false Christs and false prophets will be miracle workers. 

                      1.  It is by their miracles that they will be able to deceive many. 

                      2.  Their miracles will be so convincing that they will almost convince the                      very elect of God.

                      3.  But they will not work their miracles by the power of God; they will                      work by the power of the Devil. 

          B.  The working of miracles by Satanic forces is not new.

                      1.  When Moses was sent to Egypt God gave him power to perform certain                              miracles.  (For instance:  His shepherd rod became a serpent, water                              became blood and various plagues came upon the land..)

                      2.  Pharaoh’s magicians were able to do many of those same miracles.

 

IV.  What the Bible teaches about miracles

 

          A.  In Old Testament times God gave a few people the power to perform                                         miracles.  (Moses, Elijah, Elisha and a few others)

          B.  In the days of Jesus, He and His disciples worked miracles.  (By their miracles              they confirmed the word which they preached to be from God.)

          C.  In the end-time the Two Witnesses will work miracles by the power of God.                           (But they will not miraculously heal; they will destroy, Rev. 11:5-6.)

          D.  Miracles were never given just to make people well;  they were given to                             confirm the word of God, Mark 16:20. 

          E..  After the word was completed and confirmed by miracles the miraculous gifts          were stopped, IL Cor. 12:1; 13:8-10, 13.

          F.  The false Christs and the false prophets who will come on the scene will                            work miracles, but they will not be of God. 

 

V.  The warning that Jesus gave,   V. 22-23

 

          A.  Jesus warned that miracle working deceivers would arise. 

                      1.  They deceive people into believing that they work their miracles by the                       power of God.  (They claim to be of God and to work their miracles by                      the power of God.)

                      2.  By the miracles they deceive people into believing that their message is                       from God.

          B.  The ultimate purpose of Satan is to use these false Christs and false prophets                          to get the people of the world ready for the coming of the Anti-Christ so that              they will eagerly accept Him to be the real Christ. 

                      1.  The Anti-Christ will be the greatest miracle worker of all the deceivers,                       II Thes. 2:7-10. 

                      2.  The False Prophet, who will serve the Anti-Christ, will also be a great                   miracle worker. 

          C.  But Jesus warns His people not to believe the deceivers. 

                      1.  Do not believe the Anti-Christ. 

                      2.  Do not believe the False Prophet.

                      3.  Do not believe the deceivers who precede the Anti-Christ and the False                   Prophet.  (They are not interested in healing people.  They are                                  interested in getting fabulously rich off of the miseries of the sick and                     afflicted.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          The best way to keep from being deceived by the false Christs and the false prophets is to believe in the real Christ and to believe the teachings of the Bible.  Then you should devote yourself to serving Jesus Christ in keeping with the word of God. 

 

 

 

#85

 

Mark 13:24-27  WONDERS IN HEAVEN AND THE SECOND COMING OF CHRIST

 

Introduction:

 

          The disciples had asked 2 questions:  (1) When would he temple be destroyed? and (2)  What would be the sign of the coming of the Lord and the end of the age?  Jesus gave them 10 signs which served the early Christians to show the approach of the destruction of the temple and also to show the approach of the end of the age.  He also gave two special signs:  (1)  The abomination of desolation and (2)  the coming of miracle working deceivers. 

          In our text today Jesus speaks not about the destruction of the temple, but only about His second coming.  He speaks about wonders that will appear in heaven.  He speaks also about the wonder of all wonders --- the second coming of the Christ. 

 

I.  The heavenly wonders, V. 24-25

 

          A.  Jesus speaks about the Great Tribulation. 

                      1.  This is that time of great distress that is far worse than anything the                            world has ever seen and far worse than anything it will ever see again. 

                      2.  This is that time that is so bad that,  if it were not so very short, no flesh                     would survive.

          B.  There are 2 great causes of bloodshed in the Tribulation:

                      1.  Men will be killing one another.  (The Armageddon will be in progress.)

                      2.  Great natural catastrophes will be taking place.   (Earthquakes,                                          volcanic eruptions and other catastrophic events.)

          C.  Immediately after the great earthquakes and volcanic eruptions, there will be                              great wonders that will take place in the heavens, V. 24.           

                      1.  The sun will be darkened.  (It will give a little light, but very little.)

                      2.  The moon will not give its light.  (It will not penetrate to be visible from                    earth.)

          D.  The volcanic eruptions will be the cause of the darkening of the sun and moon. 

                      1.  Hundreds of eruptions will take place along the great fault lines, Joel                     2:10. 

                      2.  Billions of tons of volcanic ash will go up and spread out over the earth. 

                      3.  At first both the sun and moon will shine through, Joel 2:31. 

                      4.  Then as the ash increases and spreads across the sky only the sun will                      shine through, V. 24.

          E.  Even from the natural catastrophes alone, if this were not a short period of                         time, no flesh would survive, V. 25.

 

II.  The greatest wonder in heaven:  the second coming of Jesus Christ,  V. 26-27

 

          A.  At a time when the stars cannot shine through, the moon cannot shine                              through and the sun can barely shine through, there will appear a great light                         that does shine through. 

                      1.  Matthew calls it the “the sign of the Son of Man in heaven, “  Mt.                            24:29-30.

                      2.  Mark just says, “they shall see the Son of Man,” V. 25.

          B.  Nobody but God knows all the details of His coming, but we can make certain                 observations about it.

                      1.  It is not likely that men will at first know that this Light is Jesus, the                            Christ.  (They will see His light shining through the volcanic ash, but                      not be able at first to tell that it is Jesus.)          

                      2.  They will be able to tell that it is not the light of the sun, because they                    will still be able to see the sun and this light comes from a different                          location in the sky.

                      3.  It will be a dim light at first, but will grow brighter and brighter as He                      gets closer and closer to earth.  (Even at an extremely great distance His                    light will penetrate the ash and be visible on earth.)

                      4.  The Light will appear to move from east to west as does the sun                            because of the rotation of the earth, Mt. 24:27.

                      5.  Scientists will, at first, say that it is a star or planet or asteroid on a                         collision course with the earth.

          C.  It is possibly while the bright light has still not been identified as the Christ by              the world that Jesus catches up those who are saved.

                      1.  Mark says that He sends forth His angels to gather the elect, V. 27. 

                      2.  Whenever He catches them up, He will gather them up to meet Him                    somewhere in outer space, I Thes. 4:13-17. 

          D.  Then when He breaks through the troposphere where the volcanic ash is, every                   eye will see clearly that it is not a star from outer space, but it is the Son of                        God from heaven,  V. 26;  Mt. 24:30. 

                      1.  The Jews will mourn because they crucified Him.  (That is they will                      mourn because their forefathers crucified Him.) 

                      2.  They will mourn also because they have let the Devil deceive them into                         rejecting Him as their own personal Savior.  . 

                      3.  They will mourn because they had closed their ears and minds to the                            preaching of  the gospel and have not trusted Him for the salvation of                        the soul.   

 

Conclusion:

 

          I.  Have you trusted Jesus Christ as your Savior?

          2.  If not, what in the world are you waiting for?

          3.  If you are saved, is your life committed to serving the Lord?

          4.  If not, what in the world are you waiting for?

                     

 

 

#86

 

Mark 13:28-37  WATCHING FOR THE LORD’S RETURN

 

Introduction:

 

          In our text last Sunday we witnessed great earthquakes and volcanoes.  We saw the sun and moon darkened.  We saw a great light appear in the sky and grow brighter and brighter.  We saw the angels of God go out and gather the saved to carry them up.  We saw the brilliant Light of Jesus as He came down to the earth and burst through the dark sky and touch down at Mt. Olive. 

          In our text today Jesus gives two parables.  They teach 3 things.  (1)  That we can know that the return of Jesus is at hand; (2) that we cannot know when He will return, and (3) that we are to watch for His return. 

 

I.  The Parable of The Fig Tree, V. 28-33

 

          A.  Jesus used a fig tree to teach about His return. 

                      1.  We are able to see the budding of the fig tree and to know that the                      coming of summer is not far away, V. 28.

                      2.  Even so we are able to see the signs that Jesus gave and know that the                            coming of Jesus is not far away, V. 29.

          B.  All 10 signs that Jesus gave indicate that His coming is not far away. 

          C.  The 2 special signs indicate that His coming is not far away. 

                      1.  The trouble in the middle-east indicates that the Gentile armies could                    march against Jerusalem at any time.

                      2.  Miracle working deceivers are increasing in number in the world today. 

          D.  When it all starts to take place it will be finished in one generation, V. 30. 

          E.  The signs are sure and certain, V. 31.

          F.  Yet no man can know when Jesus is coming, V. 32a. 

          G.  Not even the angels in heaven know nor even the Son of God, Himself, V. 32b. 

                      1.  In His Deity mind He knows is all knowing. 

                      2.  But in His human brain He does not know all things. 

                      3.  His Deity could choose to either reveal information to His                                               human mind or to withhold information from His human mind.  . 

                      4.  The time of His return to earth is one thing He chose to withhold. 

                      5.  He chose to rely on the Father to tell Him when the time arrives                                                    for him to return to earth. 

          H.  Jesus warned His disciples to watch for His return.  (Do not spend your time                     trying to figure out when He is going to return.  Just watch the signs to see the             time get nearer and nearer.  Just watch for His return.)

 

II.  The Parable of The Householder,  V. 34-37

 

          A.  Jesus gave also a parable about a householder to teach about His return, V.                       34-36.

                      1.  The man leaves home and takes a far journey. 

                      2.  Before leaving He assigned his servants work to do and gave them the                          necessary authority to do it. 

                      3.  Each servant would be responsible to him on his return. 

                      4.  He assigned the porter (the doorman) the special task of watching for                      his return. 

                      5.  He gave them no certain hour in which he would return.  (It might be in                    the evening or at midnight or at the cock crowing or even at the dawn.)

          B.  The interpretation of the parable is easy.

                      1.  The householder represents Jesus. 

                      2.  He went away into heaven. 

                      3.  Before He left He gave His churches work to be done and authority to                      do it.  (He gave the Great Commission.  The Great Commission outlines                    the work to be done and gives heaven’s authority to do it.)

                      4.  He has promised to return and we know that it will be soon. 

                      5.  We do not know when, we cannot know when, but we can know that it                              will be soon.

          C.  We are all to watch for his return, V. 37. 

                      1.  We are to watch every day as if we believe that this the day He will                      return. 

                      2.  We are to watch and do the work that He has assigned. 

                      3.  We are to watch and to live godly lives. 

                      4.  We are to watch and pray.  (For the church, for the pastor, for the                      deacons, the teachers, our sister churches, our nation, our world, the                      unsaved, atheists, communists, New Agers, good moral people, ungodly                           people, drunkards, prostitutes, thieves, criminals, murderers, family,                        friends, customers, strangers and for everybody. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          I would like to give a special warning to all who are unsaved:  Get ready today just as if you knew that Jesus would come today.  Look to Jesus right now in prayer and ask Him to save you.  .

          I would like to give a special appeal to all who are saved:  Get just as busy for the Lord today as you would if you knew that Jesus would come today.  Look to Jesus right now in prayer and ask Him to help you to live for Him.  Ask Him to use you in His service.      

         

                     

 

#87

 

Mark 14:1-11  THE APPROACHING DEATH OF JESUS

 

Introduction: 

 

          In chapter 13 Jesus gave us signs whereby we could know that His return draws near.  In our text we see signs that His death was drawing near. 

 

I.  A secret meeting of the Jewish leaders, V. 1-2

 

          A.  This meeting took place two days before the Passover, V. 1. 

          B.  Mark does not mention it, but Matthew tells us that on that same day Jesus                   revealed to His disciples that He would be killed on the Passover.                       

                      1.  He had informed them before they left Galilee that He would be killed                   at Jerusalem. 

                      2.  He had told them again as they travailed toward Jerusalem.

                      3.  He now tells them that it is two days away, Mt. 26:2. 

          C.  The Jewish leaders hold a secret meeting to put Him to death, V. 1.

                      1.  They were not trying to decide if Jesus must die; they had decided that a                              long time ago. 

                      2.  They are trying to decide how they would bring about His death. 

                      3.  They feared the multitude with whom Jesus was popular. 

                      4.  They wanted to avoid the feast day for fear of a riot, V. 2. 

                      5.  They sought to take Him by craft. 

                      6.  These were the highest religious leaders of the land plotting murder. 

                      7.  They certainly did not want the public to know what they were plotting. 

 

II.  Jesus anointed for His burial, V. 3-9

 

          A.  We leave the meeting of the Jews and go back to a banquet which took place            four days earlier according to John. 

          B.  The banquet was held in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, V. 3. 

                      1.  Jesus had healed Simon of leprosy and out of gratitude Simon gave a                         banquet with Jesus as the guest of honor.          

                      2.  If Simon were still a leper he would not go near people and they would                      not get near him.

          C.  At the banquet a woman brought in an alabaster box and poured ointment on                      Jesus, V. 3.

          D.  Some of the disciples openly criticized her for doing so, V. 4-5.

                      1.  According to John it was Judas who led the criticism. 

                      2.  Other disciples joined in with Judas. 

          E.  Jesus rebuked the disciples and explained that she was anointing His body                             beforehand for its burial, V. 6-9.         

                      1.  Usually the body was not anointed until after death had taken place.   

                      2.  Jesus said, however, that this woman had anointed His body for burial                              before He died. 

          F.  Jesus had not yet revealed when He would be killed.

                      1.  He would do that 4 days later on the day of the secret meeting of the                      Jews. 

                      2.  But the anointing for burial meant that He would die soon.   (Very                              soon)

 

III.  Judas going to the enemy, V. 10-11

 

          A.  Judas had first been attracted to Jesus by the preaching of John the Baptist. 

                      1.  John had announced to the people that the coming of Messiah King                   was near at hand. 

                      2.  Judas liked that message and was baptized by John in token of his                            support for the coming king.  (He did this without knowing who the                                  coming King would be.)

                      3.  He then learned that John identified Jesus as the new king. 

                      4.  He must have been shocked when Jesus asked him to be an officer in                          His kingdom work. 

          B.  But by the time of this text Judas had become disillusioned with Jesus.

                      1.  It must have bothered him that Jesus had alienated the Jewish leaders. 

                           (He may have thought Jesus would need these men to help Him                                                    drive out the Romans.)

                      2.  He must have become heartsick when Jesus first told them that after                    they would arrive at Jerusalem He would be killed.  (His hopes of                        becoming a high official in the coming kingdom were dashed. He had                     thought he would be in charge of the treasury of the new government.)   

                      3.  At the banquet he saw he still had a chance to gain at least something                        for himself when he saw the woman bring in the alabaster box of                             expensive ointment.  (He thought that it could be sold and that since                                          he was treasurer, the funds would be turned over to him..)

                      4.  But the woman spoiled his hopes even for that when she broke the top                     off the box and poured all that expensive perfume Jesus.

                      5.  The last four days after the banquet must have been miserable days for                          Judas.  All of his high hopes of power and wealth were gone. 

          C.  Finally the day of the secret meeting arrived and Jesus announced to His                      disciples that two days later He would be killed. 

          D.  Judas knew nothing of the meeting, but he knew that the Jews wanted to kill                              Jesus and so he crashed their secret meeting and offered to help them to                    capture Jesus ---- but for a price, V. 10. 

                      1.  They could not capture Jesus in a crowd because they feared the masses                           of common people with whom Jesus was so popular. 

                      2.  Every evening as Jesus would leave the temple grounds the Jewish                                        leaders could not follow Him off to some isolated spot where they                      could safely arrest Him without interference from the crowds.  (The                             multitudes which thronged around Jesus were so great that He would   quickly be lost in the crowd and they could not possibly follow Him to His resting place for the night.)

                      3.  Judas offered to lead them to Jesus late in the night away from all the                             crowds so that they could arrest Him without interference. 

          E.  The Jewish leaders could not have been more pleased and they readily agreed                to pay him, V. 11.

          F.  Judas then began to watch for an opportune moment.  (Two days later he                            would find it.)

 

Conclusion: 

 

          1.  His betrayal, His death, His resurrection and His ascension are now all history.

          2.  We are now watching for His return. 

          3.  While we watch and wait we are to worship Him and work for Him. 

          4.  We are praying for the unsaved that they might turn to Jesus be saved. 

          5.  If you are unsaved, we ask you right to right now call on Jesus.  Ask Him to           save your soul and keep you out of hell.  Ask Jesus now to take you to heaven                when you die.    

          6.  If you are saved we ask you to help us to serve Him.

          7.  If you are in need of a church home we ask you to consider this church. 

         

 

 

#88

 

Mark 14:12-16  THE ARRIVAL OF THE PASSOVER

 

Introduction:

 

          Six days prior to the Passover Jesus was anointed for His burial.  Two days before the Passover He told the disciples that on the Passover He would be killed.  Those two days must have seemed an eternity to His disciples.  Now that day has arrived. 

 

I.  Understanding what the Passover is about, V. 12

 

          A.  Before we can properly understand out text we need to understand something             about the origin of the Passover.      

          B.  It all started when God sent Moses to deliver the children of Israel out of                        bondage in Egypt. 

                      1.  When Jacob moved his family to Egypt, they were a free people. 

                      2.  But relatively soon they lost their freedom and came under bondage to                      the Egyptians. 

          C.  God instructed the Hebrews that each family was to kill a lamb and to eat that          lamb beginning about dusk dark  (The blood of  the lamb was to be sprinkled              on the door posts of the home.)

          D.  That night the death angel went through the land of Egypt and killed the first                       born of every man and beast in every home that did not have the blood on the         doorposts, but the death angel passed over the homes which had the blood the       lamb on the doorposts.  

          E.  Pharaoh then demanded that the Hebrews leave Egypt and when daylight came      they all left.             

          F.  Every year on that same day the Hebrews  were to kill a lamb, eat the Passover             Supper and celebrate their deliverance from Egyptian bondage.  (Plus 7 more                  days of eating unleavened bread.)

 

II.  The events that took place in our text, V. 12-16

 

          A.  A festive crowd gathered at Jerusalem to observe the Passover celebration.                      (They would joyously celebrate their deliverance from Egypt.)

          B.  But for this occasion there was one exception  --- the disciples of Jesus.

                      1.  On this Passover the of Jesus were not celebrating. 

                      2.  They were sad because this was the day that Jesus had said He would be                          killed.

          C.  They were, however, bravely trying to go about their business as though                             nothing was wrong. 

                      1,  Dusk was approaching and it would soon be time to eat the Passover                         Supper. 

                      2.  They asked Jesus where they should go and prepare to eat the                            Passover meal, V. 12.. 

          D.  Jesus replied that they should go into the city and prepare, V. 13. 

                      1.  Two disciples (Peter and John) would go and prepare for the meal.

                      2.  As they would enter into the city they would see a man carrying a                            pitcher of water.

                      3.  They were to follow the man to his destination, V. 13. 

                      4.  They were to ask the master of the house for the use of His                            guestchamber, V. 14.

                      5.  The master of the house would consent, V. 15. 

                      6.  The room would be ready, but they would then have to prepare the                     meal.  (Cook the lamb, and prepare the other items)

          E.  This the disciples did, V. 16. 

 

III.  What this has to do with us

 

          A.  Like the children of Israel we were all under bondage. 

                      1.  We were all under bondage to sin. 

                      2.  When man was created he was free.

                      3.  But it was not long until he was in bondage to sin.

                      4.  The whole human race came under this bondage. 

                      5.  All have sinned and all were doomed to hell.             

          B.  On this Passover day the Real Passover Lamb of God would be slain for the                      sins of man. 

                      1.  Jesus and His disciples would eat the Passover Supper and so would                             everybody else in the city. 

                      2.  They would eat shortly after dusk dark, which was, to the Hebrews, the                              beginning of a new day, the day of the Passover. 

                      3.  That same Passover Day would continue through the night and through                           the daylight period that followed.  (It would not end until it was dusk                           dark again when a new day would begin.)

                      4.  During that night that followed the eating of the Passover lamb, Jesus                   would be arrested and during the daylight that followed He would be                       crucified. 

                      5.  All the Passover lambs that had ever been slain pictured the death of                        Jesus Christ for He is the real Passover Lamb.

                      6.  John the Baptist had called Him “The Lamb of God that taketh away                   the sin of the world,”  John 1:2. 

          D.  Because of that Passover Lamb back in Egypt the Hebrews could celebrate                          their deliverance from bondage in Egypt;  because of the death of Jesus the                         believer is delivered from bondage to sin. 

                      1.  He is free from the clutches of sin;  he is no longer in bondage to sin. 

                      2.  He is free from the guilt of sin;  he is cleansed by the blood of Jesus                   Christ.  . 

                      3.  He is free from the penalty of sin;  he will not spend eternity suffering                          in everlasting fire. 

                     

Conclusion:

 

          Just because Jesus died for every man does not mean that we will all go to heaven.  In order to go to heaven each person must repent of his sin and trust Jesus Christ to be his Savior, Luke 13:3; Acts 16:31. 

          Have you trusted Jesus?  If not, I ask you to do so right now.  I have trusted Jesus to be my Savior   Others here have trusted Jesus to be their Savior.  Now we are asking that you trust Jesus to save your soul.   

          If you have trusted Jesus you are saved, and so I am asking you to commit yourself to Jesus to serve Him.  I have committed myself to serve Him.  Others here have committed themselves to serve Him.  Now we are asking you to commit yourself to Jesus to serve Him.   

 

 

                     

#89

 

Mark 14:17-21  THE ANNOUNCEMENT OF THE BETRAYAL OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          In our text last week two of the disciples made preparation for the eating of the Passover Supper.  In our text today they eat the Passover, but Mark pays little attention to the eating of the meal.  Instead he focused primarily on the announcement that one of the 12 apostles would betray the Lord. 

 

I.  The announcement by Jesus about the betrayal, V. 17-18

 

          A.  Jesus and the 12 came into the city to eat the Passover meal. 

                      1.  There are reasons to thing that more of the Lord’s disciples were                   present at the Supper than just the 12 apostles, but if so, Mark does not                          say so. 

                      2.  He mentions only the twelve being present.  (It could be that the reason                             others were not mentioned is that Jesus would state that the betrayer                          would be one of the 12 and, therefore, they were the only ones Mark                      focused on in his record.)

          B.  There are several things about the Passover Supper that Mark could have                             mentioned, but didn’t..          

                      1.  He could have mentioned that the lamb represented Jesus, but he                            didn’t.

                      2.  He could have mentioned that the unleavened bread represented the                           sinless life of Jesus. but he didn’t

                      3.  He could have mentioned that the bitter sauce represented the bitter                          afflictions of the Hebrews in Egyptian bondage, but he didn’t.

          C.  Instead, Mark gets immediately to that which was on his mind --- the                                announcement of the betrayal of Jesus, V. 18. 

                      1.  While they were eating the Passover meal Jesus announced that He                      would be betrayed into the hands of the enemy. 

                      2.  He would be betrayed by one of those who ate the Passover Supper                            with Him.  ( In V. 20 He would state that it would be one of the 12.)

 

II.  The feelings of Jesus as He made this announcement

 

          A.  Mark makes no reference to the feelings of Jesus about this matter. 

          B.  John, however, John tells us that He was “troubled in Spirit,” John 13:21.

          C.  Jesus was deeply disturbed that one who had walked with so closely for so                             long would betray Him. 

                      1.  For the last 3 years they had been together almost daily. 

                      2.  There had been a deep personal friendship between them. 

          D.  I think it grieved Him most because Judas was still unsaved. 

 

III.  The feelings of the disciples upon hearing the announcement, V. 19

 

          A.  Mark does tell us that the disciples were very sorrowful. 

                      1.  They were shocked;  it was like a bomb shell. 

                      2.  It was bad enough to know that within a few hours Jesus would be                      dead. 

                      3.  It was worse to think that one of them would betray Him. 

          B.  You might expect that immediately they would suspect Judas.

          C.  You would expect that they would begin to look with suspicion on                                         each other. 

          D.  But instead each began to ask, “Is it I?”

 

IV.  The identification of the betrayer, V. 20

 

          A.  At this point it becomes difficult for us to know exactly what did happen in                             the identification of the betrayer.   

                      1.  It is difficult, but not impossible. 

                      2.  A proper understanding is possible only by considering the records of                        the various writers and combining what they say like pieces of a jigsaw

                           puzzle. 

                      3.  What they must harmonize. 

          B.  Mark and Matthew say that the betrayer would dip in the sop with Jesus, (V.                      20);  John said that Jesus would hand the sop to the betrayer, John 13:23-26. 

          C.  The answer lies in accepting both views as being true and seeking to                                         harmonize them instead of concluding that one or both of them is in error. 

                      1.  It was the practice of the Jews for the person in charge of the feast to                        dip the bread into the sauce and give the bread to each participant. 

                      2.  Thus, Jesus did dip the bread into the sauce and hand it to Judas as John                           said He did. 

                      3.  Judas did nervously reach out his hand to get the bread and accidentally                     dipped His hand right into the dish along with Jesus as both Matthew                         and Mark say he did. 

          D.  Yet note that Judas was not identified to all as the betrayer, but only to a                           limited few who were very close. 

 

V.  The terrible fate of Judas, V. 21

 

          A.  Old Testament prophecies had foretold that Jesus would be betrayed and put to                   death. 

          B.  The prophecies would be fulfilled just as they have said. 

          C.  Yet the man who would betray Him would still be held responsible to God for           his actions.

                      1.  You see God knew what Judas would do and foretold what he would                             do, but God did not make him do it.  (Judas made his own choice to                         betray Jesus.)

                      2.  The Devil prompted him to betray Jesus, but even the Devil did not                            make him do it.  (Judas alone made his choice and Judas alone would                             give account to God.)

                      3.  Even when we do something wrong we may sometimes say, “The Devil                       made me do it,” but that is not true. 

          D.  Jesus said that it would have been better for Judas if he had never been born,                   V 21.

                      1.  It would have been better for him if he had been still-born. 

                      2.  He would soon die and he would die unsaved. 

                      3.  He would suffer forever in everlasting fire. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          It would better for anyone to have never been born than to die unsaved.  Judas had every opportunity to be saved,  It was his choice to refuse to trust in Jesus and be saved.  You, too, have every opportunity to be saved.  What will your choice be?

 

 

 

#90

 

Mark 14:22-25  A NEW SUPPER STARTED, THE LORD’S SUPPER

 

Introduction:

 

          At the Passover Supper Jesus announced that one of the 12 apostles would betray Him.  Judas then left the Passover table to do that very thing.  After Judas left Jesus then started a new supper, The Lord’s Supper.  The Passover was an Old Testament supper.  The Lord’s Supper is a New Testament supper.  The Passover was to be observed by each Hebrew family, or a family like group.  The Lord’s Supper is to be observed by a Christian group which is much like a family, a local New Testament church.  The Passover looked forward to the death of the Christ.  The Lord’s Supper looks back upon His death. 

 

I.  The bread which Jesus used to institute the Lord’s Supper, V. 22

 

          A.  The bread which Jesus used to institute the new supper was left over from the           Passover Supper and was, thus, unleavened bread.

          B.  Leavening, in Scripture, is symbolic of sin. 

                      1. It was a lump of sour-dough containing bacteria. 

                      2.  When put into fresh dough it would cause the dough to rise.  . 

          C.  The unleavened bread represented the sinless body and sinless life of Jesus. 

                      1.  If Jesus had sinned, He could not be our Savior. 

                      2.  Because He never sinned He could be our substitute and die in our                            stead.. 

          D.  Since Jesus used unleavened bread in instituting the Supper, a New Testament            church is to use unleavened bread when observing the Supper.

          E.  Jesus blessed the bread.  (That is, He asked God the Father to bless the bread                  and to use it to teach the disciples a spiritual lesson. 

          F.  Jesus broke the bread, thus, symbolizing His broken body. (It would be broken                in the cross.) 

          G.  The bread in their hands which they would put in their mouths and eat was still            bread. 

                      1.  Contrary to what some teach, it did not literally become His fleshly                            human body.  

                      2.  His body was still sitting visibly before them right there at the table. 

                      3.  The bread in their hands was just bread. 

                      4.  There is no saving power in the bread which is used in the observance                     of the Lord’s Supper; it is merely a symbol of the crucified body of                         Jesus Christ.

 

II.  The cup which Jesus used to institute the Lord’s  Supper, V. 23-24

 

          A..  Like the bread, it was left from the Passover Supper.

                      1.  Thus, it was grape juice. 

                      2.  In Scripture it is called “the cup” and “the fruit of the vine.”

                      3.  It is never called “wine” in Scripture. 

          B.  The juice of the grape symbolized the blood of Jesus. 

                      1.  Its red liquid looks like blood. 

                      2.  Therefore, Jesus called it His blood. 

                      3.  He meant that it pictured and symbolized His blood.  (His literal blood                              was still in His veins, His arteries and His heart.). 

                      4.  As grapes were crushed to bring forth the blood of the grapes, even so                       the body of Jesus was beaten, crucified and pierced with a spear to that                             the blood of Jesus would come forth.                                                     . 

          C.  It would be shed for many.  (Luke quotes Jesus as saying that it was shed for                           “all.”   (His blood would be shed for all that it would provide a way of                                      salvation for all.)

                      .

III.  Looking to the future, V. 25

 

          A.  Jesus implied that He wanted the disciples (His churches) to continue to                             observe the Supper after He was gone and returned back to heaven.  .                               1.  This would remind them of what the Lord had done for them.  (It would                         remind then that He died on the cross for them that they might be                                      saved.)       

                      2.  It would remind them that they were to sacrificially serve Jesus, who                    had suffered and died for them.  (This reminder would challenge each                    one of them to live for Him Jesus who had died for them.). 

          B.  Jesus said that He would drink of the cup with them again in the Millennial                             Kingdom.

                      1.  This means that even though He was about to die, yet He would live.                     (He would arise from the grave.)

                      2.  It means also that He is coming again to this world to establish His                            millennial kingdom. 

          C.  His second coming is the hope of every Christian. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Let those of us who are saved dedicate our lives to Him who died for us and saved us.  Let those who are unsaved stop wasting valuable time and call on the Lord for salvation, Rom. 10:13.  . 

         

 

 

#91

 

Mark 14:26-31  THE ANNOUNCEMENT THAT THE DISCIPLES WOULD FORSAKE THE LORD

 

Introduction:

 

          In our text today Jesus announces to His disciples that they are all about to forsake Him. 

 

I.  The setting for the announcement, V. 26

 

          A.  Before they had left Galilee Jesus told His disciples that He would be killed at                Jerusalem.

          B.  On their way to Jerusalem He reminded them that this is so. 

          C.  Six days before the Passover a woman had anointed Him with an ointment and          Jesus said that this was for His burial. 

          D.  Two days before the Passover He told them that He would be killed on the day                 of the Passover. 

          E.  At the Passover Supper He had announced that one of the 12 apostles would                              betray Him to be killed. 

          F.  After Judas left the Passover Supper Jesus had instituted the Lord’s Supper as           a memorial to His crucifixion and death.

                      1.  He said that the broken bread represented His body.  (It represented the                           death of His body; it represented His crucified body.)

                      2.  He said that the fruit of the vine represented His blood --- His shed                    blood.

          G.  They then sung a hymn, V. 26a. 

                      1.  They sang the Passover Hymn which the Jews always sang at the close                   of the Passover Supper.

                      2.  The Passover hymn of Psalm 113-118.  (It was a very lengthy hymn.)

                      3.  The Passover hymn was always led by the person who was in charge of                         the Passover Supper.  (In this group Jesus was in charge and so Jesus                                must have led the singing of the Passover Hymn.)

                      4.  This was a very joyous hymn expressing the highest kind of praise                            to God. 

                      5.  Although Jesus was going to His death He joyously led His disciples in                      singing this hymn.

                      6.  It must have been hard for the disciples to get in the joyful mood of the                              hymn and sing it joyfully, but, never-the-less, they did sing the hymn                         with Jesus.

                      7.  Yet in spite of their sorrowful hearts as they began to sing, the hymn                    must have lifted their spirits at a time when they really needed to be                        lifted.  (No matter how bad a situation may be, it always helps to look up to heaven and to remember that God is still on His throne.)

          H.  They then left Jerusalem and started out to Mt. Olives, V. 26b. 

 

II.  The announcement, V. 27-28

 

          A.  It was apparently on their way to Mt. Olives that Jesus announced that they                     would all be offended because of Him that very night, V. 27a. 

                      1.  By “offended” He did not mean that their feelings would be hurt or that                             they would be angry at Him. 

                      2.  He meant that they would all forsake Him. 

                      3.  They would all flee from Him and would not want to be identified with                    Him.           

          B.  He cited an Old Testament Scripture to show that this was in God’s plan, V.                            27b; Zech. 13:7.

                      1.  The Scripture said that the Shepherd would be smitten and that the                      sheep would be scattered.                              

                      2.  He was the Shepherd and they were the sheep of His flock.

                      3.  Jesus said that it would happen that very night. 

          C.  But He did not leave the announcement on the sad side; He reminded them that           He would arise from the dead and told them to meet Him in Galilee, V. 28.  (“I       will go before you; you come and meet me there.”)

                      1.  The announcement was never intended to rebuke them, but to help                            prepare them for the inevitable. 

                      2.  The reminder that He would be resurrected was to give them hope. 

                      3.  The command to meet Him in Galilee was to assure them that He was                     not angry because they would forsake Him and to let them know that                     He still wants them to be His disciples.  (He would welcome them with                    open arms.)

 

III.  The Apostle Peter’s reaction to the announcement, V. 29-33

 

          A.  The Apostle Peter denied that he would forsake the Lord, V. 29.

          B.  To this Jesus responded saying that before the cock would crow twice Peter                   would deny Him thrice, V. 30.

          C.  Yet Peter all the more emphatically denied that he would not forsake Jesus, V.              31a. 

                      1.  He said that he might die with Jesus, but that he would never deny Him.

                      2.  He fully meant it at the time that he said it.

                      3.  He was wrong to argue with Jesus, but he was right in his willingness to                   die for Jesus.

          D.  Peter was not alone in loving the Lord and in insisting that he would not                             forsake Him for so said all the others, V. 31b. 

         

IV.  The danger of forsaking the Lord in our day

 

          A.  We may stand in criticism of Peter and the other disciples for forsaking the                       Lord and never realize that we are in danger of doing so today.

          B.  How many people do you know who once were faithful Christians who seldom                ever darken the door of any church today?

          C.  How many who, upon seeing someone else fall by the wayside, have said,                     “That will never happen to me;  I love the Lord and I would never stop serving         Him?”

          D.  The truth is that we do not know what we will or will not do.  (The apostles all           forsook Him and we might.)

          E.  We need to commit ourselves to the Lord and pray to God that we will never                   forsake Him, but never let us boast that we won’t.)

          F.  If one of us should forsake Him, it should be an encouragement to know that                     He will still love us and would welcome us back with open arms if we will                            humble ourselves and return to His service.  (Like He welcomed those disciples back.)

          G.  If a brother should forsake Him and yet should return to the Lord let us give                     him the same kind of welcome that the Lord will give him.

 

Conclusion:

         

          1.  If we had not been sinners and in danger of hell- fire there would have been no           reason for the Shepherd to be smitten. 

          2.  He died on the cross so that lost sinners could be saved

          3.  Yet in order for a sinner to be saved, he must trust the Lord Jesus Christ to                        save his soul. 

          4.  Trust Jesus now and be saved. 

          5.  You who are saved (even if you have just been saved today), commit yourself                to Jesus with the full intention of never never never forsaking Him. ----                                     and pray that you never will.  

 

 

 

#92

 

Mark 32-42  THE PRAYERS OF JESUS AT GETHSEMENE

 

Introduction:

 

          In our text last Sunday Mark focused our attention on the struggle that the disciples went through as the time the Lord’s death drew near.  In this text he focuses our attention on the struggle that Jesus, Himself, was going through and the prayers that Jesus prayed during those struggles.  . 

 

I.  His arrest at Gethsemene, V. 32a

 

          A.  After the observance of  Passover Supper and the institution of the Lord’s                            Supper Jesus and the disciples left Jerusalem and started toward Mt.                                 Olives.

                      1.  Up on Mt. Olives was a village by the name of Bethany where Jesus and                        His disciples had been spending their nights during this trip to                                                Jerusalem. 

                      2.  Down at the foot of Mt. Olives was a place called Gethsemene. 

          B.  The place was a grove of olive trees. 

                      1.  The word, Gethsemene, means “olive press.”

                      2.  A press had been built there for pressing oil our of the olives which                              were grown in the grove.                  

          C.  It is known to us as “The Garden of Gethsemene.”

                      1.  It was enclosed by a rock wall.

                      2.  It had a spring of water from which they could drink. 

          D.  When they arrived at Gethsemene they stopped.

                      1.  It was an ideal place to stop and rest before making the climb up the                      mountain to Bethany.

                      2.  They had always stopped there each evening for rest and prayer as they                             left the temple in Jerusalem and returned to Bethany to spend the night. 

                      3.  This is how Judas knew where to bring those who wanted to arrest                            Jesus.  (Judas was in Jerusalem when he left the group of disciples and                   went to make contact with the Jewish leaders, but he knew that Jesus                           would stop at Gethsemene on His way back to Bethany.)

         

II.  The desire of Jesus for some time alone in prayer, V. 32b

 

          A.  Jesus told His disciples to sit there in the Garden near the entrance while He                       went deeper into the Garden for prayer. 

          B.  He had often engaged in prayer with His disciples present, but this was a                             time when He wanted to be alone in prayer to God the Father.

          C.  He had earlier taught the disciples to enter into a closed for privacy in prayer                          and this garden --- so to speak --- was His prayer closet. 

          D.  He was about to enter into the most trying time of His life and He needed some      time alone with God the Father.

                      1.  Although He is Almighty God, He would not use His God power to                            help Himself in this trying time. 

                      2.  He would, as a man, depend entirely on God the Father. 

 

III.  His desire for three special friends, V. 33-34

 

          A.  Jesus took with Him three special friends:  Peter, James and John.

                      1.  He had earlier carried these three with Him up a mountain to witness                            His transfiguration. 

                      2.  They were His most dependable and trusted friends.

                      3.  They were His closest friends and He was at a point when He needed                            someone to be His friends. 

                      4.  Furthermore, He was training them for special services which they                    would render later.

          B.  He began to be sore amazed, V. 33.

                      1.  He was overwhelmed by the awesomeness and awfulness of what was                    about to take place. 

                      2.  He had known about this event from before the foundation of the                            world, but now that it was a reality, it was overwhelming.   

          C.  He was deeply disturbed  (“very heavy”), V. 33.

          D.  He expressed His dread to Peter, James and John, V. 34. 

                      1.  He said that His soul was sorrowful unto death.

                      2.  He was in such distress that He was in danger of dying from a heart                   attack, stroke or shock. 

          E.  He instructed the three disciples to watch, V. 34b. 

                      1.  He will later tell them to watch lest they enter into temptation. 

                      2.  Here He tells them to watch for any threat of danger. 

                      3.  Specifically, He wants them to watch for the torch lights of the                                   arresting party as they draw near in the night.  (He would be in prayer                        to God the Father and did not wish to be suddenly interrupted by the                       arresting party.)

 

IV.  His first prayer, V. 35-37

 

          A.  Jesus went a little beyond the three disciples for His prayer, V. 35.

          B.  He fell on the ground.

                      1.  He did not stumble and fall. 

                      2.  He fell because He was in great distress.

                      3.  He fell because He wanted to pray. 

          C.  He asked the Father that if it were possible He would be spared from drinking                of the terrible cup of suffering.

                      1.  The idea was not:   “ if you are powerful enough to save me.”  (He                     knew that God the Father was powerful enough to save Him, as He                              expressed in verse 36.). 

                      2.  But the idea was: “if it is possible to save sinful man any way other than                    by my death on the cross.” then let  me be spared.

          D.  He addressed the Father in a most tender and appealing way, V. 36a. 

                      1.  He addressed Him, “Abba, Father...”

                      2.  “Abba” is an Aramaic word meaning, “Father” whereas the second                             word, Father, is a Greek word. 

                      3.  Therefore, He said, “Father!  Father!”

          E.  Knowing that God could spare Him from the suffering of the cross He                                         asked that He be spared ---------, but that request was conditional, V. 36.

                      1.  From the human point of view, He did not want to go to the cross. 

                      2.  But He was willing to go there if the Father wanted Him to go. 

                      3.  And He was also willing to go there if there was no other way whereby                          a man could be saved from the terrible punishment of his sins.   . 

          F.  His primary request was that the Father’s will be done, V. 36b. 

          G.  When He had finished praying, He returned to the three disciples and found                               them asleep, V. 37.  (He rebuked the Apostle Peter, who had boasted about                        His loyalty to Jesus.)

 

V.  His second prayer, V. 38-40

 

          A.  Before going apart for this prayer He instructed the three disciples to watch                               and pray, V. 38.

                      1.  This time He instructed them to pray for themselves.

                      2.  They were to pray that they enter not into temptation.  (That is, that                     they not yield to temptation.)

          B.  Jesus knew that they loved Him in their hearts, but He also knew that they                             were weak in the flesh.

                      1.  The same thing is true with us.

                      2.  We, too, need to pray lest we succumb to temptation. 

          C.  Then He again went aside and prayed again for Himself, V. 39.  

                      1.  That is, He again prayed that if there was any other way whereby man                    could be saved without Him going to the cross that He be spared.

                      2. And again He prayed that the Father’s will be done even though that                           would mean that He would go to the cross.  . 

          D.  Again He returned from His prayer to find the three disciples asleep, V. 40. 

 

VI.  His third prayer,  V. 41-42

 

          A.  Mark says that Jesus comes to them the third time, V. 41. 

                      1.  That is, this is the third time that He comes to them from prayer. 

                      2.  It would also mean that He had gone away for the third time to pray                    unto God the Father and it is to be presumed that on this third time He                      prayed essentially the same prayer as before.  (That if there was any                     other way for man to be saved that He be spared from the cross and                     that, never-the-less, He was willing to go to the cross and suffer that                     lost sinners might be saved.)

          B.  There are some things which Mark does not mention.

                      1.  Mark does not mention that He sweat as it were great drops of blood.                             (His blood pressure went so high that blood oozed from His skin.)

                      2.  Neither does Mark mention that angels minister to Him and strengthen                      Him lest He die in the Garden.

         

          C.  This time when Jesus returns to the three disciples He does not at first awaken                them.

          .           1.  Instead He watches alone for the lights of the arresting party.

                      2.  He  does not have long to wait. 

          D.  Then when He sees the lights coming, He awakes the disciples, V. 42. 

                      1.  First, He wakes Peter, James and John.

                      2.  It is to be presumed that they returned to the main group who were                            waiting at the entrance of the Garden that they, too, were asleep and                                        had to be awaken.  . 

 

Conclusion: 

 

          1.  Jesus loves you and wants to save you;  He did not want to suffer on the cross,                  but He was willing to suffer in order to save you and spare you from the                          penalty for your sins.  . 

          2.  He died on the cross for you so that if you trust Him to be your Savior you                            would not have to suffer in the fires of hell. 

          3.  But even though He died for you, if you do not trust Him to save you then you         will have to go into the fires of hell and you will have to suffer for all your sins         forever. 

          4.  You can trust Him now and He will save you now., Acts 16:31; Rom. 1013. 

 

 

                     

#93

 

Mark 14:43-52  THE BETRAYAL, ARREST AND DESERTION OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          The betrayal was by Judas.  The arrest was by men sent from the high priest.  The desertion was by His own disciples.  In our text last Sunday Jesus was asking to avoid the cross.  In our text today He is fully resigned to go to the cross. 

 

I.  The betrayal, V. 43-45

 

          A.  Jesus was still waking His disciples when the arresting party came, V. 43.                 1.  Judas led the group.

                      2.  He was the only one who knew where to find Jesus. 

                      3.  He was the only one who knew Jesus well enough to identify Him in the                       dim torchlight.                      

          B.  With Judas was a great multitude, V. 43. 

                      1.  The group was from the high priests, scribes and elders.

                      2.  The group was made up of temple guards and Levites, who worked at                        the temple.

                      3.  In all probability a few Roman soldiers were in the group. 

          C.  They were armed with swords and clubs, V. 43.

                      1.  The soldiers and temple guards had swords. 

                      2.  The Levites had clubs. 

          D.  Judas had told the crowd that they were to arrest the man whom he would                              kiss, V. 44.

                      1.  They were to take Him and lead Him away safely. 

                      2.  The word, safely, as used here means “securely.”  (In other words,                            “Keep Him secure.  Don’t let Him get away.”)

          E.  As soon as they arrived, Judas went straight to Jesus, V. 45.

                      1.  He greeted Jesus warmly saying, “Master, master.”  (Rabbi)

                      2.  He kissed Jesus on the cheek which was an act of friendship.

                      3.  With this act of hypocrisy he betrayed Jesus into the hands of men who                     sought His death.

 

II.  The arrest,, V. 46-49

 

          A.  Mark does not tell, but before they took Jesus, He asked them, “Whom seek                     ye?”

                      1.  They answered, “Jesus of Nazareth.”

                      2.  Jesus said, “I am He.”

                      3.  They fell backward to the ground. 

          B.  As soon as they recovered, they grabbed Jesus, V. 46. 

          C.  The disciples watched dumbfounded with one exception. 

                      1.  The apostle Peter drew his sword and cut off the ear of the servant of                        the high priest, V. 47.                     

                      2.  Peter had told the Lord, “I may die with you, but I’ll not forsake you.”

                           (I love that man.  Don’t you?)

                      3.  In that torch light Peter had not aimed to cut off the ear, but the man’s                              head.(The man must have ducked.)

                      4.  He intended to cut off heads until somebody cut his own head off. 

          D.  Mark does not mention it, but Jesus, Himself, stopped Peter, made him put up                  his sword and healed the man’s ear.  (In doing so, He saved Peter’s life.) 

          E.  Jesus asked the crowd why they came with swords and staves and why they                    had not taken Him in the temple, V. 48-49.  (They answered Him not a word.)

          F.  The real reason they came was to fulfill the Old Testament Scriptures, V. 49b.

 

III.  The desertion, V. 50-52

 

          A.  At this time the disciples panicked and ran, V. 50.

                      1.  Somebody must have made the first move; he broke and ran. 

                      2.  When he did they all ran for their lives.  (With one exception) 

          B.  There was but one who stayed longer, V. 51. 

                      1.  He was a young man.

                      2.  He was wrapped in a linen cloth.

                      3.  He was a disciple, but not one who had been with Jesus in the Garden.

                      4.  He apparently lived nearby and had been in bed asleep until he was                     awakened by the multitude.. 

                      5.  He had not bothered to dress, but had wrapped a sheet around him and                           came to investigate.

                      6.  He arrived about the time the disciples ran. 

          C.  When some in the crowd grabbed him, he, too, ran, V. 52.

          D.  Jesus was left alone in the hands of that mob who carried Him to Jerusalem to            stand trial. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          What do you suppose Jesus is doing right now?  Do you suppose He is watching to see who is here?  Do you suppose He cares that somebody here is lost?  Do you suppose that He is watching and listening to see if someone will call on Him for salvation? 

          Do you suppose He is watching you?  He cared enough about you to go to the cross for you.  He cares enough now to watch and see if you are going to call on Him and ask Him to save your soul

           So------ call on Him.  YOU call on Jesus now.  Call on Him NOW!  Call on Him now.  Ask Him to save your soul and keep you out of hell. 

          Christian friend, give your life to worship Jesus ---- and give your life to serve the Lord Jesus Christ who went to the cross to die for you. 

 

 

                     

#94

 

Mark 14:53-65  JESUS ON TRIAL BEFORE THE JEWS

 

Introduction:

 

          At Gethsemene Jesus was arrested and all of His disciples fled.  In our text today Jesus is tried before the Jews.

 

I.  Jesus brought before the high priest, V. 53a

 

          A.  Caiphas was the high priest at that time.  (As high priest, he would officiate in            any trial before the Sanhedrin Council.)

          B.  Mark says nothing about it, but Caiphas first sent Jesus to Annas for a pre-trial               hearing and evaluation. 

                      1.  Annas, his father-in-law, was a former high priest.

                      2.  There were no charges made and no witnesses called in this hearing. 

                      3.  There were only questions by Annas. 

          C.  The purpose of this hearing was to try to get Jesus to say something that could                   be used against Him in His trial         

                      1.  It was to give Caiphas time to call an emergency meeting of the                                   Sanhedrin.  (The Council members had to be summoned out of bed.)

                      2.  Further, it would give him time to summons witnesses to testify against                            Jesus. 

          D.  Jesus said nothing that could be used against Him.  (In fact, He just said                             nothing at all.)

         

II.  Jesus brought before the Sanhedrin Council, V. 53b

 

          A.  Mark starts his account of the trial with Jesus before the high priest and the                      Sanhedrin Council  (The Council was composed of 70 high ranking priests,                            scribes and elders (rabbis). 

          B.  Mark uses the word “all” in the sense of all who were summoned or, at least,                  all who answered the summons. 

                      1.  Other Scriptures reveal that Nicodemus and Joseph of Arimathaea were                   not present. 

                      2.  It was well know that they favored Jesus and Caiphas would not call                      anyone whom he knew to be in favor of Jesus.                                              C.  After the hearing before Annas, Jesus was brought before all those Council                          members who were present.

 

III.  The presence of the Apostle Peter, V. 54

 

          A.  Mark makes no mention of any apostle except Peter, but tells of Peter because             of the prediction that Jesus had made about Simon Peter.  (In the darkness he                          had followed the light of the torches into Jerusalem.)

          B.  He had then followed the arresting crowd also to the palace of the high priest.

          C.  He even gained entrance into the palace. 

                      1.  The Apostle John was an acquaintance of Caiphas and would be                            known by the guards.  (Thus he could get inside the palace gates.) 

                      2.  Apparently John had spoken to the guards and persuaded them to let                  Peter inside. 

                      3.  At any rate, Peter did note in. 

          D.  He warmed himself by the fire with the servants.

                      1.  The fire was built to help give light in the courtyard of the palace.

                      2.  It would also give warmth to onlookers in the chill of the night. 

 

IV.  The calling of witnesses, V. 55-59

 

          A.  They sought witnesses who would agree to testify against Jesus, V. 55.                              (Their purpose was not to give a fair trial, but to get a conviction.)
          B.  Apparently these witness were not sought from the general public, but from the              temple employees.  

                      1.  The general public was not out on the streets at that time of the night.

                      2.  As popular as Jesus was with the common people, they would not have                    wanted them for witnesses even if they had been available.

                      3.  They would much rather have some of their own employees who would                              speak that which they knew would please their employers.

          C.  They found plenty who would testify against Jesus, but none who gave a valid         testimony, V. 56. 

                      1.  The law of Moses required 2 or 3 witnesses who would agree in their                  testimony in order to find the accused to be guilty.

                      2.  These testified against Jesus, but their testimonies did not agree.

          D.  Mark gives one example of these witnesses, V. 57-59;. 

 

V.  Jesus questioned by the high priest, V. 60-62

 

          A.  At this point the court officials had failed in their effort. 

                      1.  As of yet, there were no official charges made against Jesus. 

                      2.  There were no valid witnesses. 

          B.  Caiaphas resorted to trickery;  he asked Jesus to respond to the things said                      about Him by the witnesses, V. 60. 

                      1.  If he could get Jesus to talk  Jesus, Himself,  might say something that                     could be used against Him.  .          

                      2.  Jesus did not fall for he trick, V. 61a. 

          C.  Then Caiaphas asked Jesus if He is the Christ, the Son of the Blessed (That is,                           the Son of God..  See Matthew), v. 61b

                      1.  To this question Jesus answered, “I am.,” V. 62a.

                      2.  To remain silent at this question would have the same effect as saying                             that He is not the Son of God.  (This He could not do.  He had to                             answer and say that He is the Son of God.)

                      3.  Yet some today say that He never claimed to be the Son of God. 

          D.   Then Jesus added that they, too, would some day know that He is the                                          Son of God, V. 62b.  (When they stand before Him in judgment, they will                         know.)

 

VI.  The verdict and the sentence, V. 63-65

 

          A.  Caiaphas immediately assumed that Jesus was lying, V. 63.

                      1.  He ignored the testimony of John The Baptist.

                      2.  He ignored the testimony of God the Father.

                      3.  He ignored the testimony of Old Testament prophets who clearly                                        identified the Christ as one who would cause the deaf to hear and                          the blind to see. 

                      4.  He ignored the resurrection of Lazarus, which he had to know about. 

                      5.  Without one shred of evidence that Jesus lied, he assumed Him to be                    guilty. 

          B.  He asked for the verdict and the sentence.  (They all pronounced Him guilty                             and worthy of death, V. 64.)

          C.  They knew that they could not pronounce the death penalty, but they felt                             confident that they could get one. 

                      1.  At night time they could not officially pronounce a verdict or a                                         sentence of any kind.

                      2.  When morning comes they would meet again and make their verdict                             official.

                      3.  They felt confident that they could get Pilate to give Jesus the death                              penalty.   

                      4.  So they began immediately to treat Him as though the sentence were                             already official, V. 65. 

 

VII.  The question put to you V. 64

 

          A.  You have heard the testimony against Jesus.

                      1.  Their testimony was false. 

                      2.  No two of them agreed in their testimony.

          B.  You have heard the claim of Jesus that He is the Son of God. 

                      1.  You have heard the testimony of John the Baptist and God the Father. 

                      2.  You have seen the mighty miracles. 

                      3.  You have heard the testimonies of family and friends. 

          C.  How do you cast your vote?

                      1.  Do you cast your ballot with the Sanhedrin Council?

                      2.  Or do you cast your ballot that Jesus is the Son of God?

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Have you ever trusted Him as your Savior?

          2.  Have you ever acknowledged Him as your Lord and Master?

 

 

 

#95

 

Mark 14:66-72  THE THREE DENIALS OF JESUS BY SIMON PETER

 

Introduction:

 

          Peter had boasted that he would never deny the Lord.  Jesus had said, “Before the cock crows twice thou shalt deny me thrice.” 

          The scene in this text is the palace of the high priest where the Sanhedrin Council meets.  The occasion is the trial of Jesus before the Sanhedrin.  At this point Mark ignores the trial and focuses his attention on Simon Peter. 

 

I.   Peter’s first denial, V. 66-68

 

          A.  Peter was “beneath” in the palace, V. 66. 

                      1.  The court area was built on two levels. 

                      2.  The higher level was where the Sanhedrin Council met. 

                      3.  The lower level was where the spectators were.  (They could both see                          and hear what was taking place on the higher level.)

          B.  One of the maids accused Peter of being a follower of Jesus, V. 66-67. 

                      1.  John says that she was the maid who stood at the door. 

                      2.  She would remember that John had vouched for Peter to get him inside.

                      3.  She knew that John was a disciple of Jesus and, thus, assumed that                            Peter was also.

          C.  Peter denied that he was a follower of Jesus and pretended that he did not                             know what she was talking about.   

                      1.  He went out onto the porch to get away from the accusation and was                     there when the cock crew. 

                      2.  He heard the cock crow, but it really did not register with him because                          his mind was on what was taking place on the higher level.  .

         

II.  Peter’s second denial of Jesus, V. 69-70a

 

          A.  There on the porch another maid recognized him as a follower of Jesus, V. 69.

          B.  John says that there was also a man there who recognized him. 

          C.  Peter again denied being a follower of Jesus and does so even more                                         emphatically, V. 70a.  (Matthew says that he took an oath that he was not a                          follower of Jesus.)

 

III.  The third denial, V. 70b-71

 

          A.  This third denial took place “a little while after.”  (John said about an hour                             later and by this time he was back inside the courtyard by the fire.) 

          B.  Several accused Peter of being a disciple of Jesus, V. 70b.  (They cited his                            speech as evidence.  His dialect was that of a Galilean.)

          C.  John says that a kinsman of the man whose ear Peter had cut off said, “Did not               I see you in the Garden?”  (This must have really scared Peter.)

          D.  Peter again denied being a follower of Jesus, V. 71. 

                      1.  He cursed.  (That is, he called down a curse upon himself if he were not                         telling the truth.)

                      2.  He swore.  (He swore to be telling the truth.) 

          E.  When a man is scared, he is apt to do or say almost anything to save his life. 

 

IV.  Peter’s repentance, V. 72

 

          A.  About that time the rooster crowed again, V. 72.

                      1.  This made twice. 

                      2.  This time that rooster came in loud and clear. 

                      3.  He really got Peter’s attention. 

          B.  Peter remembered that the rooster had already crowed once and he also                      remembered what Jesus had said to him.

          C. Luke says that he looked at Jesus and that Jesus looked at him.  (Their eyes                    met.  Can you imagine how his heart melted within him?)

          D. Peter wept in repentance.  (Matthew says that he went out and wept                                        bitterly.)

 

Conclusion:

 

          Peter repented of his sin.  Have you repented of your sin?  You know that you are a sinner.  Have you repented toward God --- seeking His forgiveness? 

          Both the saved and the unsaved need to repent of their sin.  The unsaved need to repent so that they can stay out of hell and go to heaven.  The saved need to repent so that they can straighten out their life. 

                     

         

                     

#96

 

Mark 151-15  THE TRIAL OF JESUS BEFORE THE ROMANS

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Jesus was tried by the Jews.  In this text He is tried before the Romans.  The following events had already transpired:  (1)  The eating of the Passover Supper and the institution of the Lord’s  Supper; (2)  The arrest at Gethsemene; (3) The trial before the Sanhedrin. 

 

I.  The morning session of the Sanhedrin Council, V. 1a

 

          A.  The Council had already met during the night and had already pronounced                      Jesus to be worthy of death.   (However, the verdict in that trial could not                         stand because it had taken place in the night.)

 

          B.  This second meeting (trial --- if you can call it that) was held very early the                             next morning.

          C.  The purpose of the meeting was to give a semblance of legality to the trial of                         Jesus and to devise a charge which might induce the Romans to give the death                   penalty.  

                      1.  No witnesses were called. 

                      2.  Jesus, Himself, was not questioned. 

                      3.  They simply “rubber-stamped” the verdict which had already been      

                           reached in the illegal trial.

                      4.  Then they came up with some new and different charges to present to                        the Roman governor.  (They knew that the Romans would not give the                           death penalty on the charge of blaspheme; so they came up with new                         charges which would draw a death penalty..)

 

II.  Jesus on trial before Pilate, V. 1b-15

 

          A.  Jesus was carried to Pilate by all of the Council members who were present at             that early morning meeting, V. 1b. 

                      1.  They could have more easily sent an armed escort and not have                                        personally gone to Pilate.  .

                      2.  But they wanted to impress Pilate by their presence and to influence his                    decision.

          B.  Mark does not mention them, but they made three charges against Jesus. 

                      1.  They charged Him with making trouble throughout all the land. 

                      2.  They charged Him with trying to stop the Jews from paying taxes to                        Caesar. 

                      3.  The accused Him of treason by claming to be the King of the Jews. 

          C.  Pilate ignored the first two charges because he would certainly have known it if           Jesus was making any kind of trouble or interfering with the collection of taxes.

          D.  He questioned Jesus about the third charge, asking Him if He claimed to be                        King of the Jews, V. 2.                     

                      1.  He could not afford to ignore this charge;  the Jews would surely make                              trouble for him with the Caesar if he ignored this charge.

                      2.  Mark did not record all the conversation, but Jesus replied that His                                    kingdom was not of this world.  (Hence, He was not in competition to                        the Roman government any way.  Pilate believed Him and, thus, He                      was innocent of all three charges.)

                      3.  Pilate went on to ask if He was a king of some kind of the Jews.

                      4.  It was to this that Jesus responded, “Thou sayest it,” V. 2. (He could                              not rightly deny that He is the King in a spiritual Kingdom.)

          E.  Seeing that Jesus was found innocent of all three charges, the Jews began to                          say all manner of things against Him, V. 3a.

                      1.  These charges must have bordered on the ridiculous and Pilate could                            surely see through their motives and consider them ridiculous.

                      2.  Jesus refused to even respond to these charges, V. 3b-5. 

          F.  Mark does not mention it, but about this time Pilate learned that Jesus is a                            Nazarene.

                      1.  He, therefore, sent Him to Herod for trial. 

                      2.  Herod tried Him, found Him innocent, but instead of setting Him free,                    he sent Jesus back to Pilate for Pilate to make a disposition of the case. 

          G.  Pilate came up with a plan that he thought would get Jesus set free in such a                         away that the Jews would not be able to make accusation of him to the Caesar,  V. 6-11. 

                      1.  He had a custom of releasing a prisoner each year about this time. 

                      2.  He offered the Jews a choice between releasing Jesus or Barabas.                    3.  He thought surely they would choose to release Jesus because Barabas                         was a noted villain.  (By this means he thought he could release Jesus                      with the approval of the Jewish leaders and they could not accuse him                   to Caesar because they had approved.)

                      4.  But his plan did not work; they said that he should release Barabas.

                      H.  Pilate then asked what He should do with Jesus, V. 12. 

                      1.  He thought they would say, “Release him/”

                      2.  Instead they shouted, “Crucify him, V. 13. 

                      3.  Pilate asked, “What evil hath he done,” V. 14a. 

                      4.  They shouted all the more, “Crucify him!  Crucify him! Crucify him!”                               V. 14b

          I.  Pilate then ordered the crucifixion, V. 15. 

                      1.  He knew he was executing an innocent man.

                      2.  He was not desirous of pleasing the Jews, but he was willing to please                             them because he feared them.  (He feared the trouble they could make                     for him with the Caesar.)        

                      3.  So he released Barsabas and ordered Jesus scourged and crucified.                              (He may have thought the scourging of Jesus might satisfy the Jews so                           that they would agree to His release, but if so, it did not work.)           . 

 

Conclusion:

 

          There is nothing I can say in Pilate’s defense.  He was wrong, wrong, wrong for giving in to the Jews and having a man crucified, whom he knew to be innocent of the charges against him!  But I do not know what in the world we would do if he hadn’t.  Because Jesus was crucified we have all been given opportunity to be saved.  Had He  never been crucified we would all go to hell.

 

 

                     

#97

 

Mark 15-15-20  JESUS SCOURGED AND MOCKED

 

Introduction:

 

          After Jesus was tried by the Romans He was scourged and mocked by them before the crucifixion. 

 

I.  The scourging (whipping), V. 15

 

          A.  Mark tells us that Pilate ordered Jesus to be scourged, but does not tell us why.

          B.  John informs us that Pilate was still trying to get the common people to request                 that Jesus be released. 

                      1.  After the scourging Pilate brought Jesus back out before the people and                     asked them to take a good look at Him.  (He was a bloody sight --- a                   pitiful sight.)

                      2.  He apparently hoped to arouse their pity for Jesus. 

          C.  Neither does Mark tell us how Jesus was scourged. 

                      1.  The Romans striped the victim to the waist, leaned him forward and tied                     him to a stake. 

                      2.  They would whip him with a rod or leather whip. 

                                  a.  Lead or bone was sown to the tip of the whip. 

                                  b.  It is commonly believed that a whip was the instrument used to                                        scourge Jesus. 

                      3.  Unlike the Jews who administered 40 stripes save one, the Romans had                    no limit. 

                      4.  It was so horrible that only the worst criminals were scourged.  (Usually                          only slaves.)          

                      5.  Many died in the process.  (Jesus lived through the scourging to  be                           nailed to the cross.)

                      6.  His back was cut to ribbons.

 

II.  The mocking, V. 16-20

 

          A.  Jesus was carried into the Praetorium where the Roman soldiers made sport of                  Him, V. 16. 

          B.  They pretended to believe that He is a king. 

                      1.  They improvised for a royal robe, V. 17.  (Probably an old discarded                        robe of a Roman officer was used.  It is here called purple and called                                   scarlet by Matthew.)

                      2.  They improvised for a royal crown, V. 17.  (They platted a crown from                     the limbs of a thorn bush.)

                      3.  They hailed Him as king of the Jews, V. 18.

                      4.  Matthew says that they also improvised for a royal staff or scepter.                            (They used a reed.)

                      5.  Mark says that they beat Him on the head with a reed, V. 19.  (Probably                       the same reed.  This would drive the thorns of the crown deeply into His                           brow.)

                      6.  They spit upon Him, V. 19; Isa 50:6. 

                      7.  They bowed before Him, V. 19. 

          C.  When they tired of mocking Him, they took off the royal robe, put His  

                 own robe back on Him and led Him off to the place of crucifixion, V. 20.

 

III.  The reason that Jesus endured such torture and shame

 

          A.  He endured it for us, because this is the kind of punishment we deserve for                      our sins.  (We deserve the very torments of hell.)

          B.  He endured the punishment that we might avoid punishment The Lake of Fire.     

          C.  If one will repent of his sin and trust in Jesus to save him, Jesus will save him,        Acts 16:31; John 3:16; John 5:24; Rom. 10:13. 

 

IV.  A contrast to a future event

 

          A.  Jesus is going to return to this world.  

          B.  He is going to return with great glory. 

          C.  Men will bow to Him, but not in mockery. 

                      1.  Every knee shall bow, but not one will bow in mockery!

                      2.  He will be hailed as King of Kings and Lord of Lords. 

                      3.  Millions of voices will shout praises to Him, but not one in mockery. 

                      4.  Everybody in the world will know that Jesus is Deity God. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Why would He suffer such agony for us?  Why would He suffer such humiliation for us?  (Because He loved us.  He loved us then and He loves us now.  Won’t you trust Him to be your Savior?  Won’t you give yourself in service to Him?

 

 

 

#98

 

Mark 15:20-38  JESUS CRUCIFIED

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus was tried first by the Jews and then by the Romans.  After the trials He was scourged and mocked by Roman soldiers.  In out text today He is crucified.                       

 

I.  Being led to Golgotha, V. 20-22

 

          A   After the soldiers scourged and mocked Jesus, they led Him out to the place                   where He would be crucified, V. 20.

          B.  John said that Jesus carried His own cross, but in His weakened condition, He          apparently was not able to carry it very far. 

          C.  Mark says that they forced Simon of Cyrene, who happened to be passing by                        to carry His cross for Him, V. 21. 

                      1.  Cyrene was a place in north Africa.  (What Simeon was doing at                            Jerusalem at the time is not said.)_

                      2.  Mark does say that he was the father of Alexander and Rufus.                                        (Alexander and Rufus apparently had become Christians by the time of                             Mark’s writing and were known by those Christians to whom Mark                       wrote.)

          D.  They led Jesus out to a place called Golgotha, V. 22.

                      1.  The word, Golgotha, means “skull.”

                      2.  :The Latin word for skull is “Calvary.”

 

II.  The offer of a pain killer, V. 23

 

          A.  Mark said they offered Him wine mingled with myrrh. 

                      1.  This offer was made by the soldiers. 

                      2.  The wine was a weak vinegar-wine commonly carried by Roman                             soldiers.  (It is called ‘vinegar” by Matthew.)

          B.  The myrrh was called “gall” by Matthew, meaning that it was a bitter tasting                              substance. 

                      1.  The myrrh (or gall) was not a common drink of Roman soldiers. 

                      2.  It was sometimes added to partially alleviate pain and was put in the                            drink which was offered to Jesus to somewhat alleviate the pain of His                      crucifixion.  

          C.  Jesus refused the drink because He was there to suffer the full penalty of man’s                  sins.  (He could not allow His pain to be alleviated and accomplish His purpose               in going to the cross.)

 

III.  The parting of His garments, V.24

 

          A.  They had put Jesus’ own garment back on Him to lead Him to the place of                            crucifixion. 

          B.  At Golgotha they stripped His garments from Him to crucify Him.  (With the           possible exception of a loin cloth.)

          C.  The four Roman soldiers responsible for carrying out the crucifixion then                     divided His garments among themselves.  (According to Matthew and John                       they divided  each garment into four parts with the exception of His robe, over                which they gambled to see who would get it0. 

          D.  This was done in fulfillment of Old Testament prophecy. 

 

IV.  The crucifixion, V. 25

 

          A.  Mark did not dwell on the horrors of the physical agony. 

                      1.  He did not mention nailing His hands nor His feet. 

                      2.  He did not mention the shoulders pulling out of joint.

                      3.  He did not mention the migraine type headache that developed.

                      4.  He did not mention the high fever. 

                      5.  He did not mention that the least movement would cause great pain. 

                      6.  Nor did he mention that trying to hold still would hurt equally as bad.  

          B.  Oddly enough what Mark did mention was the time of day that Jesus was                             crucified. 

                      1.  He was crucified at the third hour.

                      2.  It was as though Mark could not bear to think about the pain which                              Jesus endured and deliberately avoided the subject.  . 

          C.  The time that Mark did give has proven to be a huge problem for Bible                                         students. . 

                      1.  Mark said that Jesus was crucified at the 3rd hour.  (The 3rd from 6:00                   AM and, thus at 9:00 AM.

                      2.  John said that Pilate made the decision to crucify Jesus about the 6th                            hour, Jesus was crucified the 6th hour, which would be about 12:00                    noon, John 19:14-16..  

                      3,  Someone has suggested that the mocking and scourging started about                              9:00 AM and that He was nailed to the cross          

 

V.  The superscription on the cross, V. 26

 

          A.  The word, superscription, means writing over or writing above. 

          B.  It was the practice of the Romans to write a man’s crime and nail it to the cross         above his head.  (He wore it first around his neck as he went to the place of                     crucifixion.) 

          C.  Since Jesus was guilty of no crime, so Pilate ordered that one of the                                        accusations made against Him be written.

          D.  Mark says that he wrote, “THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWS.”

                      1.  Mark gave a condensed form of the writing.                

                      2.  Ironically the sign spoke the truth. 

 

VI.  The two thieves, V. 27-28

 

          A.  Jesus was crucified between two thieves, V. 27. 

          B.  This, too, was a fulfillment of Old Testament prophecy, V. 28.

          C.  It is important that every prophecy made about Him be fulfilled.

 

VII.  The mockers, V. 29-32

 

          A.  A great crowd gathered to watch and they, too, mocked Him.  (In the same                   spirit of mockery as the Roman soldiers)

          B.  They wagged their heads and falsely accused Him, V. 29. 

          C.  They challenged Him to use His mighty power to come down from the cross,                   V. 30

          D.  They said that He had saved others, but that He could not save Himself, V.                        31.

          E.  They pretended that they would believe Him if He would come down from the           cross, V. 32..

          F.  Even the two thieves reviled Him, V. 32.  (One later changed his attitude                            toward Jesus, but at first he joined in the mockery.)

 

VIII.  The darkness, V. 33

 

          A.  Darkness came over the land from the 6th to the 9th hour.

                      1.  The 6th hour was the time when He was nailed to the cross according                        to John.  (About 12 noon)

                      2.  The 9th hour was the time of His death.  (About 3:00 PM)

          B.  The darkness was not naturally caused, but was supernaturally caused.  (It was          not night;  it was not an eclipse; it was not smoke; it was not fog nor haze.)         

          C.  It was an act of God showing His great concern. 

 

IX.  His death, V. 34-37

 

          A.  At the 9th hour (about 3:00 PM) Jesus cried with a loud voice, V. 34.

                      1.  What He said was, “My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me?”

                      2.  God the Father had given Him no aid;  God the Father had given Him                        no comfort.

          B.  He was mocked again by a bystander, V. 35-36.  (By someone who thought                             He called on Elijah to help Him.)

          C.  Jesus then cried aloud again and gave up the ghost, V. 37. 

 

X.  The veil of the temple torn, V. 38

 

          A.  At the death of Jesus the veil of the temple was torn from top to bottom. 

          B.  The veil of the temple being opened showed that the death of Jesus opened up            the way for sinners to come in to God without coming by the Law of Moses. 

                      1.  Any man who will may come. 

                      2.  He must come by grace. 

                      3.  He must come by faith in Jesus. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          Jesus could have saved Himself, but if He had He could not save us.  His purpose was to save us.  He went to the cross to die for you.  Will you come to the cross to trust Him to save your soul?

  

                     

 

#99

 

Mark 15:39  THE TESTIMONY OF THE ROMAN CENTURIAN

 

Introduction:

 

          This text records a most unexpected and a most remarkable testimony.  It comes from the  Roman centurian who was in charge of crucifying Jesus.  It would hardly come as a surprise if it had come from one of the apostles or from the thief who got saved on the cross or from an angel or even from God the Father. 

 

I.  Consider the testimony which he gave

 

          A.  It was totally unsolicited.

                      1.  On the TV we hear testimonies about certain products which the                      company has paid somebody to give. 

                      2.  Jesus did not ask this man to speak on His behalf. 

                      3.  Neither did any of the disciples.

                      4.  Pilate nor the chief priests most certainly did not. 

          B.  It was totally unexpected.

                      1.  The Jewish leaders did not expect it.

                      2.  His own soldiers did not expect it.

                      3.  The disciples did not expect it. 

                      4.  He, himself, had not expected to give it. 

          C.  It was somewhat lacking in knowledge.

                      1.  Being from a background which believed in many gods, he probably did                           not at that time understand that there is only One God and that there is                   a Trinity in the Godhead. 

                      2.  He said that Jesus “was” the Son of God, whereas, he should have said                    that Jesus “is” the Son of God. 

                      3.  But I have an idea that he soon learned a great deal more about Jesus. 

          D.  It was a testimony of conviction.

                      1.  He had not been already prejudiced in favor of Jesus; if anything, he had                     been prejudiced against Him. 

                      2.  It was not a idle statement; he was thoroughly convinced. 

 

II.  Consider his involvement in the crucifixion

 

          A.  He was a Roman officer in charge of about 100 soldiers. 

                      1.  He was accustomed to seeing that his men obeyed his orders. 

                      2.  He was accustomed to obeying orders given to him. 

          B.  His superior officer had ordered him to crucify Jesus.

          C..  Without any personal malice toward Jesus and without any sympathy toward                  Jesus, he had carried out his orders.  (It was cruel, but he was accustomed to                   cruelty.)

 

III.  Consider his knowledge of Jesus

 

          A.  Even before coming to Jerusalem to keep the peace during the Passover he had               heard about Jesus. 

                      1,  The fame of Jesus had filled the land; he had heard at least                                      about the miracles which Jesus had performed.

                      2.  He must have also heard that some say that He is the Son of God.

          B.  He may have heard about Jesus healing the servant of a fellow Roman                             centurian.

          C.  He had almost certainly heard about Jesus raising Lazarus from the dead.  (This       had taken place just a few days prior to the crucifixion and only about two                             miles from Jerusalem.)

          D.  He had to know abut Jesus riding into Jerusalem with several thousand                            people proclaiming Him to be the Messiah.  (He and his soldiers were probably                  called out on alert at that time.)

          E.  Yet he had probably given no real consideration that Jesus might be the Son of                 God. 

 

IV.  Consider the things he saw and heard that caused him to change his mind

 

          A.  He must have been impressed with Jesus as Jesus stood trial before Pilate. 

                      1.  Jesus had bravely faced the Jewish leaders. 

                      2.  Jesus had bravely faced even Pilate.  (He had told Pilate that one day                     Pilate would see Him on the throne.)

          B.  He may have been present when Jesus was scourged. 

                      1.  If not he knew about it and he saw the beaten bloody body of Jesus. 

                      2.  Yet he saw no sign of weakness in this man.

          C.  He was present when Jesus was mocked.  (He and his whole band of soldiers                must have been present.)

          D.  He must have been impressed with Jesus at the crucifixion. 

                      1.  He was accustomed to seeing bravery, but none so brave as Jesus. 

                      2.  He had heard Jesus pray, “Father, forgive them....”  (Jesus was praying                            even for him!)

          E.  He must have been impressed when the light of the sun was suddenly shut out. 

                      1.  It was shut out right after they nailed Jesus to the cross. 

                      2.  It was shut out at the time of day that the sun shines its brightest. 

                      3.  They had to light torches to see how to carry on with the crucifixion. 

                      4.  And the sun did not shine again until Jesus died. 

          F.  He must have been impressed by the great earthquake. 

                      1.  Mark does not mention the earthquake, but he does tell about the veil                      of the temple being rent from the top to the bottom. 

                      2.  Matthew say that it was the earthquake which rent the veil of the                                        temple. 

          G. Get the picture:

                      1.  Jesus cried with a loud voice, His head fell forward and He gave up the                             ghost.  (He died.)

                      2.  About that time the sun suddenly started to shine again.

                      3.  The earth did tremble with a great earthquake in a most frightening                       way.           

                      4.  All of a sudden he shouted aloud:  “Truly this man was the Son of                            God.”

 

V. Consider the unseen force that sought to persuade him

 

          A.  There was an unseen force which had sought to persuade that man that Jesus is          the Son of God. 

                      1.  Jesus once said that no man can come to Him except God the Father                            draw him. 

                      2.  The way that God the Father draws men is by the Holy Spirit. 

                      3.  The Holy Spirit will not force a man to believe in Jesus, but He will                            seek to convince him to do so. 

          B.  Now get the picture again. 

                      1.  Right at the time the centurian was crucifying Jesus the Holy Spirit was                        trying to persuade him to believe in Jesus and get saved.           

                      2.  Oh, what manner of love this is!

          C.  Have we not seen such love today?

                      1.  Men who have cursed God, cursed His people ;and cursed His churches

                           have come under the convicting power of the Holy Spirit of God                            seeking to persuade them to believe in Jesus Christ and get saved. 

         

Conclusion:

 

          1.  He seeks right now to get every unsaved person to trust in Jesus and get saved. 

          2.  The Roman centurian offered his testimony over 2000 years ago that Jesus is                         the Son of God. 

          3.  I trusted Jesus at the age of 16 and have been testifying ever since that Jesus is               the Son of God and that He is the Savior of men.. 

          4.  There are others here today who could give you their testimony that Jesus is the          Christ.

          5.  We urge you to call on Jesus and ask Him to save you and trust Him to do so.          He is the Son of God. 

          6.  We also urge you to give your life in obedience to Him.  He is the Son of                            God. 

         

 

 

#100

 

Mark 15:40-41  GODLY CHRISTIAN WOMEN AT THE CROSS

 

Introduction:

 

          In our last text the Roman centurian gave testimony that Jesus is the Son of God.  In our text today we see some godly Christian women present at the crucifixion of Jesus.

 

I.  Different reasons for different people being present

 

          A.  The Roman soldiers were present because they were ordered to be there.                               (They were ordered to crucify Jesus.)

          B.  The chief priests and elders were there to try to make sure that nothing would                  interfere with the crucifixion. 

                      1.  They had worked long and hard to get Jesus crucified and they did not                            want anything to interfere. 

                      2.  They must have also enjoyed what appeared to be their victory over                    Jesus.  (They enjoyed it.  They enjoyed it to the fullest.)

          C.  The great majority were there for the sport of it. 

                      1.  At a crucifixion they, likewise, enjoyed seeing the victims suffer ---                      whoever the victim might be. 

                      2.  They enjoyed mocking helpless victims.

                      3.  They especially enjoyed seeing one so famous as Jesus appear to be so                              helpless before them.  (They challenged Him to work a miracle  and                    come down.)

          D.  There were some women on the outskirts of the crowd who were not at all                             enjoying the event.

                      1.  Their faces were wet with bitter tears and their hearts were deeply                             grieved. 

                      2.  They were followers of the Man on the center cross. 

                      3.  They believed Jesus to be the Son of God and it broke their hearts to                          see Him so cruelly treated. 

         

II.  The identity of these women, V. 40

 

          A.  Some of the women were not named by Mark, but he does name some of                         them.

          B.  Mark named Mary Magdalene. 

                      1.  “Magdalene” means “from Magdala,” a town on the west of the Sea of                            Galilee.

                      2.  Jesus had cast 7 demons out of her, Luke 8:2.

                      3.  She had been enslaved by Satan until Jesus set her free. 

                      4.  Jesus had turned her life around and made her life worth living. 

                      5.  Best of all He had saved her soul. 

          C.  Mark also named Mary, the mother of James the Less (meaning either shorter                 or younger) and Joses. 

                      1.  This Mary is said to be an aunt of Jesus. 

                      2.  Yet the sorrow she felt for Jesus was not because she was blood kin. 

                      3.  It was because she had looked to Jesus as the Christ. 

                      4.  She was also the mother of Joses.

          D.  The third woman whom Mark named was Salome.

                      1.  Salome was the wife of Zebedee. 

                      2.  She was the mother of James and John , sons of Zebedee, whom Jesus                   had called out to be apostles. 

          E.  Oddly enough, Mark does not mention Mary, the mother of Jesus although                          John tells us that she, too, was there. 

 

III.  The faithful services which these women had rendered to Jesus. V. 41

 

          A.  Back in Galilee these women had followed Jesus. 

                      1.  They had ministered unto Him. 

                      2.  They had cooked the meals (even providing the food) for Jesus and His                           apostles.

                      3.  When it was possible, they had traveled with Him and the apostles. 

          B.  They had trusted Him as Savior and Lord. 

                      1.  He had given them peace within. 

                      2.  He had changed their lives. 

                      3.  He had made them clean, godly women. 

          C.  But now they stood helplessly watching and they could do nothing. 

                      1.  They could not overcome the soldiers and the crowd and take Jesus                       down from the cross.

                      2.  They could not stop the crowd from abusing Him.

                      3.  They could not even wipe His brow nor hold His hand to comfort Him. 

          D.  But they would not leave; they stuck with Him to the end.  (They were there                   when He cried aloud and dropped Him head in death.)

 

IV.  Other such godly Christian women

 

          A.  I have never seen the women that Mark wrote about, but I have seen other                  such godly Christian women.

                      1.  Down through the years of my Christian life I have known women just                     as loyal and just as faithful to the Lord Jesus Christ.

                      2.  They, too, have been to the cross.  (By faith)

                      3.  They, too, have trusted Jesus as their Lord and Savior.

                      4.  They have given their lives to Jesus to serve Him.

                      5.  They have brought their offerings to Him. 

                      6.  They have willingly and joyfully labored for the Lord. 

          B.  One such woman was my Sunday School teacher when I was a teenager. 

                      1.  She truly loved the Lord Jesus Christ and she truly lived for Him. 

                      2.  I admired her for her godly Christian character and her love for Jesus.

          C.  In every church which I have pastored I have known such women. 

                      1.  They have trusted the Lord to be their Savior and they have loved the                         Lord. 

                      2.  They have dedicated their lives to serve Him. 

                      3.  They have lived clean, honorable godly lives.

                      4.  They have loved lost souls and sought to see them get saved. 

                      5.  They have loved their church and wanted to see it grow.

                      6.  They have loved missions and have helped to support the missionaries. 

          D.  Thank God for these women!  (What would the churches have done without                             them?)

 

V.  Seeing the women that Mark wrote about

 

          A.  I have never seen the women that Mark wrote about, but I look forward to                         seeing them some day.

                      1.  I will see Mary Magdalene, Mary the Mother of James-the-less, Mary                                                     the mother of Jesus and Salome.

                      2.  They trusted Jesus as their Savior and so have I.

                      3.  So some day I will see them in heaven. 

          B.  What about you?

                      1.  Have you trusted Jesus as your Savior?

                      2.  If you are going to stay out of hell you must trust Jesus to be your                           Savior. 

                      3.  He loves you and wants to save you; He wants to turn your life around                             and make life worthwhile for you.

 

Conclusion:

         

          1.  Won’t you trust Jesus today?

          2.  Won’t you be just as loyal and faithful to Jesus as those women were?

          3.  May God give each one of us the grace to live clean, godly lives dedicated to                            the service of Jesus Christ.  . 

 

 

 

#101

 

Mark 15:42-47  THE FUNERAL OF JESUS

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Mark told us about the godly Christian women who witnessed the crucifixion;  In our text today Mark tells about Joseph of Arimathaea, who set about to give the body of Jesus a decent burial. 

 

I.  The coming of evening time, V. 42

 

          A.  The Jews marked the closing of one day and the beginning of  a new day at                             evening time. 

                      1.  In the strictest sense “evening” referred to twilight after sunset. 

                      2.  In a looser sense it referred to that last bit of daylight before the sun set.                      (The early evening started in mid-afternoon.)

          B.  The death of Jesus is given in the Bible at about 3:00 PM. 

          C.  He was crucified on the day of the Passover which was always the day of the                       preparation for the special sabbath day that followed, Lev. 23:5-7.

                      1.  John calls this special sabbath “a high day,” John 19:21. 

                      2.  It was not the regular 7th day sabbath, but was a special sabbath day, a                             high sabbath day.  (A great feast was held on that day.)

          D.  But it was a sabbath day and no work was to be done on that sabbath.

                      1.  For that reason all the work which was necessary for the preparation of                             the great feast must be done on the Passover. 

                      2.  No cooking could be done on the sabbath.  (No fire could be kindled;                           no work of any kind could be done.)

                      3.  Therefore, at sunset on the day of the Passover all work must be                            stopped.

         

II.  A problem this posed for the Jews

 

          A.  The Law of Moses also forbid that a body should hang on a tree throughout                        the night, Duet. 21:22-23.  .

                      1.  They had three bodies hanging on trees --- that is, on crosses which                              were formed from trees.  . 

                      2.  Death by crucifixion usually took several days and that would require                            leaving them on the tree throughout several nights.  (But the law                     forbid them to leave those bodies for even one night.)  .

                      3.  Normally they would be allowed to remove the bodies from the tree                     after dark.  (The law only forbid them to leave it there throughout the                             night.)

                      4.  However, in this case, because the special sabbath started at sundown,                        all work had to stop at sundown.  . 

                      5.  Darkness marked the beginning of the special sabbath day on which they                       were forbidden to do any manual labor.  . 

          B.  It was for this reason that the Jewish leaders went to Pilate and asked him to                  

               order the legs of the victims be broken so that they would die quickly.           

                      1.  Pilate agreed to do so and the legs of the two thieves were broken.

                      2.  They did not break the legs of Jesus because when they came to Him He                           was already dead. 

 

III.  The problem this posed for Joseph of Arimathaea, V. 43

 

          A.  This Joseph was from Arimathaea and was a member of the Sanhedrin Council.

                      1.  John informs us that he never approved of the efforts of the Council                           to arrest Jesus and to seek His death.  (They probably knew his views                            and did not even summons him to attend the trials of Jesus.). 

                      2.  But he learned of the crucifixion and must have been present at the time                           Jesus died.  . 

          B.  Mark hints that he might be a believer in Jesus, V. 43.  (Mark says that he                        waited for the kingdom of God.  That is he had been looking for the coming of                   the Messiah, the Christ.)         

          C.  John says clearly that he was a disciple of Jesus, John 13:38. 

                      1.  He was a secret disciple of Jesus. 

                      2.  He feared to make his faith in Jesus known because of the powerful                         Jewish leaders whom he knew hated Jesus. 

                      3.  He feared what they would do against him and his family if they knew                             he believed in Jesus.

          D.  But he also knew that the body of Jesus would not get a decent burial if he did           not move and move quickly.

                      1.  The body of Jesus would be put in a common grave with thieves. 

                      2.  He was probably the only man in Jerusalem who could give Jesus a                            decent burial. 

 

IV.  Joseph’s race with time, V. 43-47

 

          A.  When Jesus died, Joseph did not waste time, he hurried to see Pilate and asked                    for the body of Jesus.                                   

                      1.  He went right in boldly to see Pilate.  (He marched right in.)

                      2.  This is something that not many men could have gotten by with.  (:But                   he was a member of the Sanhedrin Council ---  plus he was rich.                             Otherwise he could not  have gotten by with just walking right in to                                        Pilate’s presence.)                 

          B.  Pilate was surprised to hear that Jesus was dead so soon, V. 44.  (Pilate sent                     for the centurian to confirm the death of Jesus and then gave Joseph consent to            bury Jesus, V. 44-45.)

          C.  But it was still a race with time for Joseph. 

                      1.  He had  already consumed precious time in coming to Pilate and                                    waiting for the arrival of the centurian. 

                      2.  He had to go buy a linen cloth to wrap Jesus in , V. ;46. 

                      3.  John said he used 100 pounds of spices which Nicodemus furnished. 

                      4.  Joseph and Nicodemus had to serve as undertakers and prepared the                      body of with the spices and wrap it with the linen.      

                      5.  The sun must have been sinking when they carried the body of Jesus to                           the grave. 

                      6.  They quickly carried the body in and rolled the stone in place without a                         funeral message. 

          D.  In addition to Joseph, Nicodemus and possibly their servants, there were only                two other people to attend the funeral, V. 47.

                      1.  The two Mary’s that Mark had earlier mentioned as being present at                         the crucifixion were present at His funeral..

                      2.  They had followed Joseph and witnessed the burial.  

 

V. Joseph a great example

 

          A.  We cannot altogether excuse Joseph for keeping his faith in Jesus secret up to       this time, but by doing what he did to give Jesus a decent burial he set a great       example for people of our day to follow.  . 

          B.  He became and example of one who truly believed in Jesus.

          C.  He is an example of one who overcame his  natural fear of coming out openly                              and professing Jesus. 

                      1.  He feared what they would think and say and do. 

                      2.  He feared to put his family through criticism and humiliation that they                    would face because of his faith in Jesus. 

                      3.  He feared the danger that they would face and the possible harm that                     might come to them because of his belief.   

          C.  He is an example of one who overcame his fear and bravely took a public stand          for Jesus in spite of his fears.  .

          D.  He is an example of one who saw the urgency of moving quickly without delay       in doing what he could for Jesus.. 

         

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you have trusted Jesus. but have not made it public --- then do so now.

          2.  If you have not yet trusted Jesus to be your Savior and keep you out of hell ---         do it now!

          3.  Time is passing quickly; do not delay;  --- do so now!

         

         

         

#102

 

Mark 16:1-8  GOING TO THE GRAVE TO ANOINT THE BODY

 

Introduction:

 

          Certain Christian women witnessed the crucifixion and burial of Jesus.  Now, in this text, they go to the grave for the purpose of anointing the body of Jesus with spices.  They had bought spices for that purpose. 

 

I.  The intention of the women, V. 1

 

          A.  These women had served the Lord during His ministry.  (They had cooked                            meals for Him.  They probably had bought the food which they cooked.                                In addition, they may have washed His clothes.  They must have also                                  served Him by doing similar things for His apostles.)

          B.  They had stuck with Jesus through the crucifixion. 

          C.  They had gone with His corpse to the grave. 

          D.  Even at this point, although they thought He was still dead, they wanted to do            something for Him yet. 

                      1.  They wanted to anoint his dead body with spices. 

                      2.  They willingly bought and paid for the spices themselves although they                     were very expensive. 

                      3.  They must have known that Joseph and Nicodemus had wrapped Him                     in spices, but that did not satisfy their desire to so something                                         themselves for Jesus. 

                      4.  Mark said that they bought sweet spices;  they must have sought to get                   the kind that would smell especially sweet. 

 

II.  The problem which the women faced

 

          A.  Where would they get the spices?

          B.  They did not already have them:  (If they already had them they would not                             have needed to go buy them. 

          C.  They did not have time to buy them the evening of the crucifixion.  (It was                             almost dark when Jesus was buried and at sundown the high sabbath started.                            So all commerce stopped at that time.) 

          D.  The high sabbath continued throughout the next daylight period and there                   would be no market open for business. 

 

III.  A problem for us, V. 1-2

 

          A.  How did they get the spices?

          B.  When they came to he grave on the first day of the week they had the spices                             with them, V. 1.         

                      1.  We know that they bought them because verse 1 says that they did.

                      2.  But where did they buy them and, more important, when did they buy                     them?

                      3.  They did not have time before the special sabbath day started and they                     could not have bought them on the day that they came to the tomb                    because the markets were not open at the early hour that they arrived                            at the grave. 

 

IV.  The answer to the problem

 

          A.  There were two sabbath days that week. 

                      1.  One was the special sabbath that always followed the day of the                                  Passover. 

                      2.  The other was the regular weekly sabbath which always came on the                    seventh day of the week.

          B.  Jesus was not crucified on Friday as many believe, but He was crucified on                                 Wednesday.              

                      1.  He was crucified and buried on Wednesday.  (The women could not                      have bought the spices then.)

                      2.  The women could not have bought the spices on Thursday because that                    was the special sabbath day which followed the Passover.

                      3.  They could have bought them on Friday.  (This is the only                                               day on which they could have bought them.)

                      4.  They could not have bought them on Saturday because that was the                      regular seventh-day sabbath. 

                      5.  They could not have bought them on the first day of the week, the                       morning on which they went to the grave, because, according to John,                    they arrived there before daylight and the markets would not have been                    open at that time of the day.

                      6.  So the answer is:  They bought the spices on Friday, they could not                      carry them to the grave on Saturday because it was the regular sabbath,                          but they carried them with them to the grave very early Sunday morning                          which was the first day of the week.  (Friday was the only time they                        could have purchased the spices because it came between the two                          Sabbaths..)

 

V.  Another problem for the women:  the stone, V. 3-4

 

          A.  This is not a problem for us, but it was a problem for the women. 

                      1.  They knew they could not move the stone. 

                      2.  As they approached the tomb they were discussing the problem.  

                      3.  They may have thought that they might get the gardener to roll the                            stone away for them..

                      4.  They came to the grave believing that God would provide someone to                        move the stone for them. 

          B.  God did provide, but not in the way they had expected. . 

                      1.  He provided for the stone to be rolled away before they arrived. 

                      2.  Matthew says that an angel moved the stone away. 

 

VI.  The angel, himself,  a problem, V. 5-7

 

          A.  The angel did not move the stone and then leave; 

                      1.  When they arrived he was inside the tomb and he startled the women.                      2.  He frightened them.

          B.  They were not frightened thinking he was a man.                        . 

                      1.  They were frightened because he was an angel. 

                      2.  We, too, would be frightened if an angel were to appear. 

                      3.  We know that angels are here and that does not frighten us because we                      cannot see them, but if we saw them that would frighten us.. 

          C.  Yet the angel had not come to frighten them, but to comfort them.  (He had                      good news for them.)

 

VII.  The good news, V. 6-8

 

          A.  The good news which the angel wanted them to hear: 

                      1.  Jesus was not there; He was risen. 

                      2.  They could see for themselves that He was not there. 

          B.  Those to whom they were to tell the  good news::

                      1.  He wanted them to tell the apostles, V. 7.

                      2.  He especially wanted them to tell Peter, V. 7.  (Jesus wanted Peter to                           know that He was not angry about the denial.)

          C.  Stunned but joyous, the women hastened to carry out their assignment, V. 8. 

 

VIII.  The point

 

          A.  The point of this whole passage is that Jesus is not dead; He is alive;  He is                             risen.

          B.  Jesus did die. 

                      1.  He died because we are sinners.

                      2.  He died to pay our sin-debt so that we would not have to go to hell;                     so that we could be saved. 

          C.  But if Jesus were still dead, He could not save us --- or anybody. 

                      1.  A dead Savior cannot save. 

                      2.  Only a living Savior can save. 

                      3.  Jesus lives and Jesus saves. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  If you are unsaved, hear the good news, believe the good news and act upon                  the good news by trusting Jesus to save your soul. 

          2.  If you are saved then tell the good news to others so that they may be saved. 

 

 

         

 

#103  RESPONSIBILITY CONCERNING THE GOSPEL

 

Mark 16:9-14

 

Introduction:

          In our previous text certain women were told by an angel that Jesus had risen from the grave.  In this text certain disciples actually see Jesus alive.  They all report these things to the main group of disciples and those disciples were hard to convince. 

 

I.  The appearance of Jesus to Mary Magdalene, V. 9

 

          A.  Mark says that Jesus appeared first to Mary Magdalene. 

          B.  This comes somewhat as a surprise.  

                      1.  Jesus had worked for three years training the apostles.

                      2.  These were officers in the church.

                      3.  It would be expected that He would appear first to one or more of the                              officers of the church.

          C.  Mary was a woman out of whom Jesus had cast seven demons. 

                      1.  She was most grateful and most devoted to Jesus.

                      2.  Not one of the apostles was more devoted to Jesus. 

          D. Her devotion was richly rewarded. 

                      1.  She had the honor of being the first to see the risen Lord. 

                      2.  The Lord rewards all who are devoted to Him.  (That ought to be a                    challenge to us.)

          E.  A question:  How is it that the other women did not see Jesus at the same time         that Mary did?

                      1.  The answer is that they would have if they had been with her at the time                    that she saw Him, but they weren’t.             

                      2.  Some explain that as the women all drew near the grave that Mary                            Magdalene, being younger, must have left the others behind and hurried                      on ahead.

                      3.  John said that Mary Magdalene saw that the stone was rolled away,                              looked in the grave and saw that the body was gone, but did not enter,                   John 20::1-10

                      4.  She then ran and got Peter and John who ran to the tomb.  (They saw                       the empty grave, but saw no angel.  (Likewise,  Mary Magdalene had                           seen no angel at this point.)

                      5.  When Mary Magdalene returned to the grave Peter and John were                            gone.  (It was then that Mary Magdalene looked again into the grave                              and this time saw two angels and was told that Jesus had risen. )

                      6..  Mary starts to leave the garden where the tomb was located and she                       sees a man.  (In the dusk dark she at first thought the man was the                       gardener, but when she heard His voice she knew it was Jesus.).

 

II.  Reports as they came to the main group of disciples

 

          A.  The other women who had been behind Mary Magdalene arrived at the                                         grave, saw one angel and  arrived back to the main group of disciples before                        Mary Magdalene did.  (They reported that the grave was empty, they had seen                an angel and the angel had said that Jesus has risen.)

          B.  The next report would come from Peter and John, who also saw that the                       grave was empty, but saw no angel.

          C.  The third report would be from Mary Magdalene who saw two angels and                             actually saw Jesus Himself. 

 

III.  Something wrong, V. 10-13

 

          A.  When Mary Magdalene arrived to give her report, the disciples were mourning              and weeping, V. 10. 

          B.  Why?  They should have been shouting for joy.  (They had already been told      that the grave was empty and that an angel had said that He had risen from the           grave.).

          C.  Mark tells us why, V. 11. 

                      1.  When the women had reported that the tomb as empty and that an                       angel said that Jesus had risen , the disciples to whom they reported did not believe their report. 

                      2.  When Peter and John reported and confirmed that the tomb was empty                             they still did not believe that Jesus had risen from the grave.

                      3.  Even after Mary Magdalene reported and told them that she had seen                   Jesus alive, they still did not believe.

          D.  Later that day two men came in and reported that they had seen Jesus as they         walked on the road to Emmaus yet the main group of disciples did not believe                 them either, V. 12-13. 

          E.  If they happened to remember that before He was crucified, Jesus, Himself, had        told them that after three days He would arise, they did not believe Him either. 

 

IV.  Finally convinced, V. 14

 

          A.  Finally Jesus appeared in their midst..

                      1.  They still at first were not convinced; they said that this was a spirit (an                      apparition) which they had seen

                      2.  Boy!  You talk about Thomas being hard to convince!  (Thomas was                     not present at this time, but they were all like Doubting Thomas.)

          B.  Only after Jesus called for some food and ate the food in their presence did                             they become convinced. 

          C.   Jesus rebuked them for being so hard to convince.

 

V.  People today still hard to convince

 

          A.  Many are hard to convince that Jesus arose from the grave and that Jesus can          save the soul of a lost sinner.   

          B.  Many who do believe that He arose from the grave still do not believe that He                 can and will save the soul of those who call on Him for saved. 

          C.  Many who do believe that He arose and who also believe that He can save the               soul of a lost sinner still do not believe in Him for the salvation of their own                          soul.  ( I did not believe in Him when I first heard.  I did not believe until l I                              was 16 years old.)

          D.  Yet the very fact that the early disciples were so hard to convince ought to be       convincing evidence to us. 

                      1.  If those men had been easy to convince, we might have grounds for also                           doubting that Jesus arose from the grave and even for doubting that He                          is the Christ, the Son of God, the Savior of men..

                      2.  But those men were not gullible men who would believe anything they                    heard.

                      3.  They were not superstitious men who were willing to believe just                      because this was what they wanted to believe.              

                      4.  They were hard to convince; they were extremely hard to convince. 

                      5.  They were convinced only after the most concrete proof.  (Only after                     they could see with their own eyes, hear with their own hears and                             touch with their own hands.)   

                      6.  This ought to convince us beyond any reasonable doubt that Jesus did                      arise from the grave, that He is the Christ, the Son of God and that He                      is the Savior of men.

          E.  But if that is not enough we have God’s own word. 

                      1.  Jesus did arise from the grave. 

                      2.  And Jesus can and will save any sinner who will acknowledge his sin                       and call upon Him for salvation. 

          F.  Yet if men will not believe in this lifetime, there will be no doubt when they                             stand before Him in judgment, but it will be too late. 

         

Conclusion:

 

          1.  Place your faith in Jesus today!  (Believe in Him as the Son of God, as the                            Savior of men, as the risen Savior of men and trust in Him to save your own                             soul and keep you out of hell.) 

          2.  The Devil will try to keep you from believing in Jesus, but he cannot stop you         from doing so if you are just willing to trust Him to save you.

          3.  If you will trust Him now He will save you now!

          4.  Please do not wait until it is too late. 

 

         

 

#104 

 

Mark 16:15-16  RESP0NSIBILITY CONCERNING THE GOSPEL

 

Introduction:

 

          In the previous text the disciples of Jesus were hard to convince that Jesus had arisen from the grave.  Finally Jesus, Himself, convinced them.  In this text we see the responsibility of various people concerning the gospel.

 

I.  The responsibility of the church to preach the gospel

 

          A.  It is not the responsibility of the church to devise a gospel. 

                      1.  It is not our responsibility to come up with a plan whereby lost sinners                            can be saved. 

                      2.  God, Himself, came up with the gospel plan. 

                      3.  It is ours to preach the plan that God has given. 

          B.  God has given the church the responsibility to preach the gospel.

                      1.  All men everywhere are sinners and all men stood in danger of hell fire. 

                      2.  God sent His Son, Jesus, to the cross that all men might be saved. 

                      3.  Jesus sent His church to preach the gospel so that men will have                                        opportunity hear the gospel and be saved.

          C.  Each New Testament church today has that responsibility.

                      1.  It is our responsibility to preach the gospel to every nation.  (All 140                     plus nations.)

                      2.  It is our responsibility to preach the gospel to every person.  (All 6                            billion, equal to about 3,000 cities the size of Houston, Texas)

          D.  The Jerusalem church could not accomplish this task overnight, but they will                       give account to God for their effort to carry out the task.  (So it is with our                           churches.)

          E.  Each church will give account to God for her effort to carry out this mission. 

 

II.  The responsibilities of the unsaved to believe the gospel

 

          A.  It is the unsaved person’s responsibility to believe the gospel message. 

                      1.  The gospel points out his guilt of sin. 

                      2.  The gospel message points to Jesus Christ as the Savior.

                      3.  The gospel message warns of hell if one does not get saved. 

          B.  But the responsibility for believing the gospel belongs to the individual. 

                      1.  It is the lost sinner’s responsibility to repent of his sin.

                      2.  It is the lost sinner’s responsibility to trust in Jesus Christ to be His                      Savior. 

          C.  He will give account to God for his response to the gospel message. 

 

III.  The responsibility of Jesus Christ to save the believer

 

          A.  The church cannot save the lost sinner who repents and trusts Jesus.

          B.  The lost sinner cannot save himself nor even help to save himself. 

          C.  Once the sinner has repented and trusted in Jesus for salvation, it is the                                         responsibility of Jesus Christ to save him and keep him out of hell..  (We can                          be sure that He will do that very thing.)                    

IV.  The responsibility of the believer to be baptized

 

          A.  Jesus made it clear that the believer should be baptized. 

          B.  Not that baptism saves;  it does not. 

                      1.  The baptismal waters do not cleanse the sinner from all his sin.   

                      2.  It is the blood of Jesus Christ which cleanses from all sin.  I John 1:7b.

          C.  But God wants the believer to be baptized. 

                      1.  To believe and then not be baptized is like joining the army and then                    refusing to wear the uniform. 

                      2.  It is like getting married and then refusing to wear the wedding ring. 

          D.  The believer who refuses baptism or neglects to be baptized will give account                to God.

 

V.  A perplexing question about the gospel

 

          A.  We know that if one does not believe in Jesus he is lost.  (The latter part of                         verse 16 clearly says so.

          B.  But what about the person who does believe and yet does not get baptized?  Is       he still lost?

          C.  The latter part of verse 16 does not answer that question. 

                      1.  If it said, “He that is baptized not shall be damned” that would answer                            the question

          D.  But the verse does not say that and neither does any other Scripture. 

 

VI.  A Biblical answer to the question

 

          A.  A Biblical answer is found in Luke 23:39-43.  (The Thief On The Cross was                      saved and he was not baptized.)

          B.  A Biblical answer is also found in John 3:18.

                      1.  The believer is not condemned. 

                      2.  If he is not condemned he is saved. 

                      3.  Thus, the believer is saved whether he has been baptized or not. 

 

VII.  A summary

 

          A.  It was God’s responsibility to devise the gospel. 

          B.  It is the church’s responsibility to carry the gospel to the unsaved.

          C.  It is the unsaved person’s responsibility to believe the gospel.

          D.  It is the Lord’s responsibility to save those who believe.

          E.  It is the believer’s responsibility to be baptized. 

          F.  We will all give account to God for how we have met our responsibility. 

 

         

 

#105  Mark 16:17-18  THE SIGN MIRACLES

 

Introduction:

 

          Jesus was soon to leave His disciples behind and return to heaven.  Before He left He informed them of the special sign miracles which they would be able to do. 

 

I.  The miracles that Jesus, Himself, performed

 

          A.  You are familiar with the miracles that Jesus performed. 

          B.  He healed the sick, restored sight to the blind, made the lame to walk, the                       dumb to speak, calmed the storm, walked on water, fed a multitude with 5                            loaves and 2 fishes, raised the dead and arose from the grave, Himself. 

          C.  Critics do not hesitate to say that they do not believe He did those miracles.

          D.  There is no reason for any Bible believing person to doubt that He did.  .

          E.  If one believes Genesis 1:1 he should have no trouble believing that Jesus                            did the miracles recorded in the New Testament.

 

II.  The miracles that the apostles would do

 

          A.  In our text Jesus set forth certain miracles that the apostles and early disciples               would do. 

          B.  Anyone who believes that Jesus performed the miracles attributed to Him by                        the New Testament should have no trouble believing that He gave His disciples             power to also perform miracles. 

                      1.  They had no power of their own to do such miracles. 

                      2.  The same power was at work in those miracles which was at work in                        the miracles done by Jesus Himself. 

                      3.  It was the power of God working through His disciples.

         

III.  The sign miracles

 

          A.  The purpose of the miracles was that they should serve as signs, V. 17. 

                      1.  Signs of what?

                      2.  They were to serve as signs that what the disciples preached about                              Jesus was true.

                      3.  People would see the miracles and know that God was with these men. 

                      4.  The Old Testament spoke about the coming of the Christ, but there                    were no Old Testament Scriptures which specifically said that Jesus                    is the Christ. 

                      5.  However, the disciples said that Jesus is the Christ and the miracles                          which they did served as signs that what they said is true --- that Jesus                    really is the Christ. 

          B.  Jesus even told what kind of miracles they would do. 

                      1.  They would cast out demons, V. 17. 

                      2.  This they did, Acts 5:12; 16; 8:7.

          C.  They would miraculously speak with new tongues or languages, V. 17.                             (Tongues or languages which were previously unknown to them.)

                      1.  This they did on Pentecost, Acts 2:4. 

                      2.  But they did not speak unknown tongues or languages (Those who                    heard them understood clearly what they said.)

                      3.  What happened on that day of Pentecost is not the same as that which is

                           done by charismatics of today.                          

 

IV.  The sign miracles to be discontinued

 

          A.  Mark says nothing about it, but the sign miracles were not to continue down                               through the years of Christianity.  . 

          B.  In I Corinthians 13:8 the Apostle Paul says that sign gifts would come to an                            end.  

                      1.  Paul says that the gift of prophecy would fail.  (That is, it would stop.                               Paul could not have meant that a prophecy given by the Holy Spirit                      would fail to come to pass.  Rather, he meant that this spiritual gift                      which enables men to prophecy would stop..) 

                      2.  He says that the gift of tongues would cease.  (This spiritual gift would                             stop and not exist any more.)

                      3.  Paul says that the gift of knowledge would stop.  (He speaks not about                              knowledge learned the natural way, but of supernatural knowledge                           given in a miraculously way as a direct revelation from God.)

          C.  Paul even tells when the miraculous sign gifts would end, I Cor. 13:9-12. 

                      1.  They would end when the written revelation from God would be                                        completed.  . 

                      2.  When the parts had all been given and confirmed by the sign miracles                          there would be no need of new parts to be added and no further need of                             the sign miracles for confirmation of the completed revelation.  .

                      3. Therefore, at the completion of the Bible the miraculous sign miracles                         would no longer be given.  (They would fail.  They would cease.  They                   would stop.)

          D.  Yet Paul said that not all spiritual gifts would stop, I Cor. 13:13. 

                      1.  The gifts of faith, hope and charity (love) would continue after the sign                      gifts would stop.

                      2.  But only these three spiritual gifts would remain or continue after the                          completion of the Bible.  (Not  four --- nor five --- nor six nor more, but                              only these particular three)

                      3.  Therefore, all of the sign miracles would stop with the completion of the                     Bible.  

          E.  To fail to believe that miracles were real is to fail to believe the Bible; to fail to                   believe that they have stopped is also to fail to believe the Bible.  (Or at least it       is a failure to understand the Bible, particularly I Cor. 13:8-13.)

 

V.  Serpents, poisons and sick folk

 

          A.  Jesus said that His disciples would take up serpents and would not be hurt by                 them, V. 18.

                      1.  The Apostle Paul is an example in Acts 28.

                      2.  A serpent came out of the firewood and bit Paul and Paul was not hurt.                    (The miracle confirmed the gospel which he preached and many were                   saved as a result.) 

          B.  Jesus was not talking about the modern day carnival type show that some                            perform with snakes.                     

                      1.  They take rattle snakes, milk them of their poison and deceive the                            people into thinking that a miracle was worked by their faith. 

                      2.  But their faith is not strong enough to handle the water moccasin.                                                (The moccasin is deadly even after being milked.)

                      3.  Nor is it strong enough to handle the rattlesnakes without milking them                  first.  (Some who tried died.)

          C.  Jesus said that His disciples would drink poison without it hurting them. 

                      1.  The Bible gives no specific record of this happening, but we can be sure                     that it did because Jesus said it would. 

                      2.  Secular historians have said that it happened.

                      3.  But even this was not done in a carnival type atmosphere; it was when                   someone tried to kill them. 

          D..  Some people today insist that they have the miracle gifts today.

                      1.  They speak in some kind of unknown tongue that is definitely not like                     what happened on Pentecost. 

                      2.  They claim to work miracles, but nobody can tell for sure just by                       watching that a miracle has taken place.  (They claim to cast out                            demons and heal the sick.)

                      3.  Oddly enough they never give sight to the blind not raise the dead.  (Let                    them do that and people could know for sure that a miracle had taken                              place.)

                      4.  Neither do they drink cyanide.

          E.  Some may be honestly deceived, but some deliberately lie to deceive the                            people..

                      1.  It is a shame and disgrace that they seek to get rich off sick people                            whom they know that they cannot help.

                      2.  People who will deliberately deceive the sick and afflicted just to make                    money off of them mean, cruel, wicked people and they will answer to                             God for  their deceit.

 

VI.  The point of the whole matter

 

          A.  The point of this Biblical record is not that the disciples were able to do                             something which other people were unable to do. (Although they could and                         did.)

          B.  The point was not that sick people could come to them and be healed of their                 sickness.  (Although they could and did.)

          C.  The point was that men see the miracles and know that the gospel which they         preached is true.  (Therefore, lost people could turn to Jesus and trust in Him         and be saved.  The objective was not to get sick people healed, but getting lost            people saved.),  V. 20. 

         

Conclusion: 

         

          What is important for you and me today is to know that Jesus is the Christ and that Jesus saves.  It is also important for us to know the New Testament writings have already been confirmed by the miracles that those men performed and that we can accept these as writings as truth from God. 

 

 

#106

 

Mark 16:19  THE ASCENSION OF JESUS CHRIST

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Jesus spoke of the sign miracles that the early disciples would be able to work.  The sign miracles were but temporary and were not intended to last.  In our present text Mark makes a brief statement about the ascension of Jesus.

 

I.  A brief look at Mark’s brief statement

 

          A.  Mark told us more about the ascension of Jesus than Matthew did.   (Matthew             said nothing at all about it.)

          B.  Mark said three things:

                      1.  He said that Jesus had spoken to the disciples. 

                      2.  He said that Jesus was received up into heaven. 

                      3.  He said that Jesus sat on the right hand of God the Father. 

          D.  We must look to other Scriptures for further information. 

 

II.  A look at the Book of Acts,   Acts 1:1-12

 

          A.  Luke spoke of the day in which Jesus was taken up, Acts 1:1-2.

          B.  Before He  was taken up He taught His apostles, Acts 1:2. 

                      1.  He spent 40 days in which He repeatedly showed Himself to them and                         taught them many things pertaining to God’s kingdom work, Acts 1:3.

                      2.  He instructed them to tarry at Jerusalem until they were endued with                    power by the Holy Spirit of God, Acts 1:4-5.

          C.  The apostles asked if He was about to restore the kingdom of Israel and were       told that it was none of their business when He would establish His throne,                            Acts 1:6-7.

                      1.  The apostles were still expecting Jesus to establish Himself on the                            throne of Israel in Jerusalem and drive the Romans out of the land. 

                      2.  He would, in due time, sit upon a throne in Jerusalem, but first He                            would depart from them in a most spectacular way.   

          D.  He reminded them that they were to carry the gospel into all the world., Acts        1:8.  (They must do this work for Him before He would establish His throne in            Jerusalem.)

          E.  When He had spoken those things, He arose and went up into the clouds and                      out of sight, Acts 1:9.

                      1.  This took place at the Mt. of Olives, Acts 1:12; Luke 24:50.

                      2.  He raised His hands speaking blessings upon them and then went up                           into a cloud out of their sight, Acts 1:9.

          F. Two angels appeared and promised that in like manner He would return, Acts                    1:10-11.

          G.  The disciples then returned to Jerusalem to await the power from heaven which                   Jesus had promised, Acts 1:12. 

 

III.  A look back at the text in Mark, V. 19

 

          A.  In Acts Luke tells us about Jesus rising up and disappearing into a cloud;                             Mark takes it from that point and tell us what happened from that point. 

                      1.  Mark says that Jesus ascended all the way into heaven. 

                      2,  He entered into the very throne-room of God. 

                      3.  He took His rightful place sitting beside the Father at the right hand of                          God the Father. 

          B.  This was the place that He had occupied before He ever came down to earth. 

          C.  But there was a difference as He took His place this time. 

                      1.  He had been born into a fleshly human body. 

                      2.  He had lived as a man on earth for 33 years. 

                      3.  As a man He had died and as a man He had risen from the grave. 

                      4.  This time it was as a man that He entered the throne-room and                            presented Himself to God the Father. 

          D.  It was as a man that God the Father welcomed Him to sit in that exalted                             position at  His right hand in the throne-room of the universe. 

          E.  Yet if we could look into heaven as Steven did and as Saul of Tarsus did,                             we would see Him as no ordinary human being. 

                      1.  We would not see Him as just a carpenter’s son. 

                      2.  We would see Him as the glorified Son of God like Peter, James and                     John saw Him on the Mount of Transfiguration.

                      3.  We would see Him also as John did Revelation chapter one.

                      4.  We would see Him as a man, but He would be a man who has all the                      glory of Deity God.

         

V.  A look at the present situation

 

          A.  Jesus sits there as a King at the right hand of God the Father.  . 

                      1.  He is the King in a spiritual kingdom.  . 

                      2.  He is Lord and King of all the redeemed. 

                      3.  He is our King. 

          B.  Jesus sits there as High Priest at the right hand of God the Father.

                      1.  He has given His own blood as the redemption price for lost sinners.                           (Therefore, He is able to save all who trust Him to be their Savior.)

                      2.  He intercedes for all of the saved when they continue to commit sin in                   their fleshly bodies.  (Otherwise all of the saved would lose their                    salvation and be condemned to suffer in hell.)

                      3.  He also --- through the Holy Spirit --- intercedes for the saved as  they                    pray so that their prayers may be answered.

 

VI.  A look at the future

 

          A.  At some point of time Jesus will arise from His seat in heaven and return to this           earth. 

          B.  He will defeat the Anti-Christ and will imprison Satan in The Bottomless Pit                        and establish His throne in Jerusalem from which He will rule the world. 

          C.  He will rule the world in righteousness for 1000 years. 

          D.  After the millennium Satan will be released from the Bottomless Pit for a little          season and Jesus will once again do battle with Satan.  (At that time Jesus will           defeat Satan forever and cast him into The Lake of Fire and Brimstone.)

          E.  The heaven and earth will melt with fervent heat and from those melted                                         elements Jesus will bring forth a new heaven and a new earth. 

          F.  The Holy City New Jerusalem will come down to the new earth and Jesus will           sit forever upon His throne in that city. 

          G.  All who are saved will have the privilege of coming to His throne and seeing                              Him personally.

          H.  All who are unsaved will be cast into the Lake of Fire and Brimstone. 

 

Conclusion:

 

          1.  For now Jesus is in the business of saving lost souls. 

          2.  If you are unsaved trust Jesus now. 

          3.  If you are saved then give yourself to live for Him and serve Him faithfully. 

          4.  Jesus is your King and deserves your most loyal service. 

 

 

#107 

 

Mark 16:20  PREACHING THE BLESSED WORD OF GOD

 

Introduction:

 

          In our previous text Jesus ascended from Mt. Olives to heaven.  In this text even from Heaven He confirms the word of God which His disciples preach. 

 

I.  The early preaching of God’s word

 

          A.  Mark said that they went everywhere preaching the word. 

                      1.  He makes no mention of them tarrying at Jerusalem as the Lord had                            instructed.  (But they did.)

                      2.  He makes no mention of them being endued with power from on high                     on the day of Pentecost.  {But they were.)

                      3.  He makes no mention of about 3,000 being saved and added to the                            church on Pentecost.  (But there were.)

                      4.  He makes no mention that at Jerusalem they went from house to house                              preaching and that many were saved and baptized.  (But that is what                      happened.)

          B.  Mark makes no mention of the persecution of the Christians at Jerusalem                             which scattered the Jerusalem church.

                      1.  By the hundreds they fled into Samaria and Judea. 

                      2.  Wherever they went they preached the word of God. 

          C.  At least two churches were organized in a foreign land.  (Both in the nation of               Syria, one at Damascus and one at Antioch.)

                      1.  Saul of Tarsus, the chief persecutor, started to Damascus to arrest and                     imprison Christians.

                      2.  But on the way to Damascus he got saved and he, too, became a                        preacher of the gospel of Jesus. 

          D.  He became a missionary to the Gentiles.  (Mark, himself went with him at least         for a little while.)

          E.  A few disciples were left at Jerusalem, but the majority went everywhere                     preaching the gospel as Mark said in this text. 

 

II.  The confirmation of the word

 

          A.  The Old Testament Scriptures spoke of the Christ, but not one specifically                       named Jesus as the Christ.  .

          B.  The disciples preached that Jesus is the Christ. 

                      1.  They preached that Jesus is the Son of God.

                      2.  They preached that Jesus died for the sins of men. 

                      3.  They preached that Jesus arose from the grave. 

                      4.  They preached that Jesus will save anyone who will trust Him to be his                       Savior.

          C.  The Lord then confirmed what they preached by the miracles which He enabled                them to do. 

                      1.  They preached and the Lord worked miracles through them. 

                      2.  They preached the things which the Lord had taught them during His                            earthly ministry.

                      3.  Jesus even caught Paul up to heaven and taught him.

                      4.  They had no New Testament Scriptures to show that what they                                preached about Jesus is the truth, but the Lord confirmed what they                        preached by the miracles which He enabled them to do.   

          D.  They not only preached the word, as Mark said, but they put the word of God                 in writing.  

                      1.  That is, at least some of them did.  (Matthew did, Mark did, Luke did,                     John did, Peter did, Jude did and Paul did.)

                      2.  They wrote the truths that they had been taught by Jesus and the things                              that they had witnessed.

                      3.  They wrote by inspiration of the Holy Spirit of God. 

          E.  The word of God which they wrote was also confirmed by the miracles which                   they did. 

                      1.  Just as the miracles confirmed the word of God which they preached,                        they confirmed the word of God which they wrote. 

                      2.  In addition

 

III.  The preaching of the word of God that has been confirmed

 

          A.  How is it that today we preach with confidence the word which they have                             written and how is it that you hear it and believe it with confidence?

                      1.  We were not there to hear Jesus teach. 

                      2.  We were not there as eye-witnesses to the things that He did nor to the                               things that were done to Him.

          B.  We do not need new miracles today to know that the word which those men                     preached is the word of God, because it has already been confirmed by                               the miracles which the Lord did through those early Christians. 

                      1.  Thus, what they have written is right, not just because it was written by                        honest God fearing men, but because it has been confirmed to be the                     very inspired word of God.   

                      2.  Thus, everything that we preach and teach should be from the Bible, the                      Holy word of God. Holy Bible, II Tim, 3:16-17.  (Both the Old and the                      New Testaments)

          C.  The saved are to live according to the teachings of this Book.

          D.  The unsaved who will really believe the gospel message written in this Book                               will, therefore, trust in Jesus Christ for salvation will be saved, Rom, 10:13;

                Acts 16:31; John 3:16. 

                      1.  One who will call upon Jesus trusting for salvation will be saved.

                      2.  He will not go into the fires of hell; he will go to heaven.

          E.  But one who will not trust Jesus will not be saved, John 3:18; 36.

          F.  One who is saved but who will not live by this Holy Book will go to heaven,            but in this life he is in for big trouble.  (The Lord chastens those who are His.)

         

Conclusion:

         

          1.  If you are unsaved, I am asking you to trust Jesus now to save your soul. 

          2.  If you are already saved I am asking you to commit your life to the Lord today. 

          3.  If you are saved then God wants you to help spread the word of God               everywhere.  (To all nations, to all races, to people of all languages and               cultures, to every city and village, to every neighborhood, to every street and to                every home)